Canon Ir2200 Ir2800 Ir3300 Service Manual

iR2200/iR2800/ iR3300
REVISION 0
MAR. 2001
COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.
FY8-13H8-000
CANON iR2200/iR2800/iR3300 REV.0 MAR. 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Application This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality. Corrections This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law. Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies. Copyright This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC. Printed in Japan Imprim au Japon
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
INTRODUCTION
1 Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information: Symbol Description Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet. Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question. Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.
Refers to the Copier Basics Series for a better understanding of the contents.
COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR2200/iR2800/iR3300 REV.0 MAR. 2001
INTRODUCTION
2 Outline of the Manual

This Service Manual contains basic information needed to service the iR2200/iR2800/ iR3300 and its accessories (i.e., side paper deck, shift tray) in the field, conducted for the purpose of maintaining its product quality and a specific level of performance. A separate Service Manual is made available for each of its accessories (except for the side paper deck and shift tray); for details, refer to the appropriate manual. This Service Manual consists of the following chapters: 1. System Unit Chapter 1 General Description:
Chapter 2
Main Controller:
Chapter 3
Installation:
features, specifications, names of parts, functions, operation, system configuration, routine maintenance by the user functional construction, outline of electrical circuitry, principles of operation of the image processing system, power supply site conditions and installation procedure, relocation of the machine, installation of accessories
2. Reader Unit Chapter 1 Basic Operation: Chapter 2 Original Exposure System:
Chapter 3
Image Processing System:
functional construction, outline of electrical circuitry, basic sequence of operations principles of operation of the exposure system, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly and adjustment principles of operation of the image processing system, timing of operation, disassembly/ assembly and adjustment
3. Printer Unit Chapter 1 Introduction: Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Sequence of Operations: Laser Exposure System:
Chapter 4
Image Formation System:
Chapter 5
Pickup/Feeding System:
safety of the laser, image formation, auxiliary processes basic operations, outline of electrical circuitry, basic sequence of operations principles of operation of the laser exposure system, timing of operation, disassembly/ assembly and adjustment principles of operation of the image formation system, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly and adjustment principles of operation of the pickup/feeding system, timing of operation, disassembly/ assembly and adjustment
ii
INTRODUCTION
principles of operation of the fixing system, timing of operation, and disassembly/assembly and adjustment Chapter 7 Externals and Controls: principles of operation of the externals/controls, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly and adjustment Chapter 8 Paper Deck-L1: principles of operation, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly and adjustment Chapter 9 Casstte Feeding Unit-W1: principles of operation, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly adjustment Chapter 10 Inner 2Way Tray-A1: principles of operation, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly adjustment Chapter 11 Envelope Feeder Attachment-B1: principles of operation, timing of operation,disassembly/assembly adjustment 4. Troubleshooting Chapter 1 Maintenance and Inspection: table of periodically replaced parts, table of consumables/durables, scheduled servicing chart Chapter 2 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure: basic procedure for image adjustment Chapter 3 Standards and Adjustments: standards and adjustments Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Image Faults/Malfunctions: troubleshooting image faults/malfunctions Chapter 5 Service Mode: how to use service mode, list of service modes Chapter 6 Self Diagnosis: codes, causes of errors Chapter 7 Appendix: Upgrading: how to upgrade general timing chart, general circuit diagrams
Chapter 6
Fixing System:
The descriptions are updated from time to time to reflect product improvements, and major changes are communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins. All service persons are expected to familiarize themselves with the contents of this Service Manual and Service Information bulletins and acquire a level of knowledge and skill required to promptly respond to the needs of the field.
iii
INTRODUCTION
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name In the diagrams, accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal. The expression turn on the power means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power. 2. In the digital circuits, 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High, while 0 is used to indicate Low. (The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in DRMD* indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0. In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads. The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins. All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.
iv
SYSTEM UNIT
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 Specifications ................................. 1-1S 1.1 Main Body ............................... 1-1S 1.1.1 Type ................................... 1-1S 1.1.2 Systems .............................. 1-1S 1.1.3 Functions ........................... 1-2S 1.1.4 Others ................................ 1-5S 1.2 Side Paper Deck-L1 ................. 1-8S 2 Names of Parts ............................... 1-9S 2.1 External View ........................... 1-9S 2.2 Cross Section ......................... 1-11S 3 System Configuration .................. 1-13S 3.1 Functional Construction ........ 1-13S 3.2 Outline of the Electrical Circuitry ................................. 1-14S 3.2.1 Construction of the Electrical Circuit ............... 1-14S 3.3 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs ...................... 1-15S 3.3.1 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs ..................... 1-15S 3.4 Configuration with Accessories ............................ 1-16S 3.4.1 Accessories for Original/ Paper Feeding .................. 1-16S 3.4.2 Accessory Boards ............ 1-17S
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER

1 Basic Construction ......................... 2-1S 1.1 Functional Construction .......... 2-1S 1.2 Outline of the Electrical Circuitry ................................... 2-2S 1.2.1 Outline ............................... 2-2S 1.2.2 Main Controller PCB ......... 2-2S 1.2.3 HDD .................................. 2-2S 1.3 Start-Up Sequence .................... 2-4S 1.3.1 Outline ............................... 2-4S 1.3.2 Start-Up Sequence ............. 2-5S 2 Digital Image Processing ................ 2-7S 2.1 Outline ...................................... 2-7S 2.2 Input Image Processing ............ 2-8S 2.2.1 Image Data from the Reader Unit ........................ 2-8S 2.2.2 Enlargement/Reduction (main scanning direction) ... 2-8S 2.2.3 Edge Emphasis ................... 2-8S 2.2.4 Editing ................................ 2-8S 2.2.5 Density Conversion (LUT) ................................. 2-8S Binary Processing (error diffusion method T-BIC) .... 2-9S 2.2.7 Binary (dither screen method) .............................. 2-9S 2.3 Image Memory Control ............ 2-9S 2.3.1 Compression/De-Compression, Rotation, and Enlargement/ Reduction ........................... 2-9S 2.3.2 SDRAM ............................ 2-9S 2.3.3 HDD .................................. 2-9S 2.4 Output Image Processing ....... 2-10S 2.4.1 Smoothing ........................ 2-10S 2.4.2 Binary-Binary Density Conversion (read image output only) ...................... 2-10S 3 Soft Counters ................................ 2-11S 4 Controlling the Power Supply ...... 2-15S 4.1 Outline .................................... 2-15S 4.2 Power Supply Modes ............. 2-15S 4.3 Standby Mode (normal operation) .................. 2-15S 4.4 Sleep Mode 1 ......................... 2-15S S1 2.2.6
CONTENTS
Shift from Standby Mode to Sleep Mode 1 ............... 2-16S 4.4.2 Shift from Sleep Mode 1 to Standby Mode .............. 2-16S 4.5 Sleep Mode 2 ......................... 2-17S 4.5.1 Shift from Standby Mode to Sleep Mode 2 ............... 2-17S 4.5.2 Shift from Sleep Mode 2 to Standby Mode .............. 2-17S
4.4.1
Shift from Sleep Mode 2 to Sleep Mode 1 ............... 2-17S 4.6 Turning Off the Power ........... 2-17S 5 New Functions ............................. 2-18S 5.1 Hard Disk Spool .................... 2-18S 5.2 SMB Printing ......................... 2-19S 5.3 LPD Banner ........................... 2-20S
4.5.3
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
1 2 Selecting the Site of Installation .... 3-1S Unpacking and Installation ............ 3-3S 2.1 Before Starting the Work ......... 3-3S 2.2 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials ....................... 3-4S 2.3 Mounting the Scanner .............. 3-6S 2.4 Removing the Dummy Drum .... 3-6S 2.5 Supplying the Toner ................. 3-7S 2.6 Mounting the Drum Unit ........ 3-10S 2.7 Stirring the Toner .................... 3-12S 2.8 Setting the Cassette ................. 3-13S 2.9 Checking the Images/ Operations .............................. 3-16S 2.10 Connecting to the Network ..... 3-18S 2.11 Checking the Network Connection ............................. 3-18S 2.11.1 Using the PING Function ........................... 3-18S 2.11.2 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address ...... 3-19S 2.12 Troubleshooting the Network ............................................... 3-19S 2.12.1 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable ....... 3-19S 2.12.2 Making a Check Using a Loop-Back Address ......... 3-20S 2.12.3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address .......... 3-20S Relocating the Machine ................. 3-21S 3.1 Preparing for Relocation ......... 3-21S 3.2 Lifting the Machine Off the Pedestal .................................. 3-22S Installing the Card Reader-C1 ....... 3-23S Installing the Document Tray-D2 ........................................ 3-26S Replacing the Drum Unit .............. 3-27S
4 5 6
S2
1 Specifications
1.1 Main Body
1.1.1 Type
Item Body Copyboard Light source Lens Photosensitive medium Description Desktop Fixed Xenon lamp Lens array OPC drum (30-mm dia.)
T01-101-01
1.1.2 Systems
Item Reproduction Charging Exposure Copy density adjustment Development Pickup Auto Description Indirect electrostatic AC roller Laser Auto or manual Single-component toner projection Front cassette (2 cassettes) Retard method (about 500 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper, about 550 sheets of 64 g/m2 paper) Multifeeder Dual process method (about 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper) Roller Static eliminator (static separation) + curvature Blade SURF method (plane heater and fixing film)
Manual Transfer Separation Cleaning Fixing
T01-101-02
1-1 S
1.1.3 Functions
Item Resolution Description 600dpi600dpi 1200dpi600dpi 2400dpi600dpi Sheet, book 3-D object (2 kg max.) A3/279.4431.8mm (11"17") Direct (1:1), Reduce I (1:0.250), Reduce II (1:0.500), Reduce III (1:0.611), Reduce IV (1:0.707), Reduce III (1:1.414), Enlarge IV (1:2.000), Enlarge V (1:4.000), Enlarge VI (1:8.000), Zoom (1:0.250 to 8.000 ; 25% to 800% in 1% increments) 10 sec or less (at 20C/168F) 5.8 sec (book mode, cassette 1, Direct, A4/LTR, text mode) 999 copies max. A3 max., A5 (vertical feed) min. 279.4431.8 mm (11"17") max., STMT (vertical feed) min. A3 max., postcard (vertical feed) min. 279.4431.8 mm (11"17") max., STMT (vertical feed) min. Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2):A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, 279.4431.8mm (11"17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR Tracing paper (SM-1):A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R Colored paper (Canon-recommended):B4, A4, A4R Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m 2):A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, 279.4431.8mm (11"17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR Tracing paper (SM-1, GSN-75):A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R Transparency (Canon-recommended):A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR Colored paper (Canon-recommended):B4, A4, A4R Postcard: Jpn (vertical feed), double-card, 4-sheet card Label sheet (Canon-recommended):B4, A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR Thick paper (90 to 128 g/m2):A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, LTR, LTRR Envelope
Reading Copying Printer output
Original type Maximum original size Reproduction ratio
Wait time First copy time Continuous copying Copy size Cassette
A/B Inch AB Inch
Manual feed
Cassette 1/2
Multifeeder
T01-101-03
1-2 S

Item Single-sided copying mode Description Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2):A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, A5, 279.4431.5mm (11"17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR Tracing paper (SM-1, GSN-75):A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R Transparency (Canon-recommended)A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR Colored paper (Canon-recommended):B4, A4, A4R Postcard: Jpn postcard (vertical feed), double-card, 4-sheet card Label sheet (Canon-recommended):B4, A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR Thick paper (90 to 128 g/m2):A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, LTR, LTRR Envelope
Double-sided copying mode (automatic) Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2):A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, 279.4431.8mm (11"17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR Colored paper (Canon-recommended):B4, A4, A4R Double-sided copying mode (multifeeder) Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2):A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, 279.4431.8mm (11"17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR Colored paper (Canon-recommended):B4, A4, A4R Postcard: Jpn (vertical feed), double-card, 4-sheet card Thick paper (90 to 128 g/m2):A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, LTR, LTRR
T01-101-04
1-3 S

Item Cassette Hard disk Non-image width Description Capacity 55 mm deep (approx.; about 500 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper) 6GB Leading edge Direct, Enlarge/Reduce:4.01.5/-1.0mm <4.51.8mm>*1 Trailing edge Direct, Enlarge/Reduce:2.01.5mm <2.01.8mm>*1 Left/right (1st side) Direct, Enlarge/Reduce:2.51.5mm <2.52.0mm>*1 Auto clear Yes (2 min standard; may be changed in 1-min increments between 0 and 9 min) Sleep mode Yes (2 min standard; may be changed in user mode to 10sec, 1, 2, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90 min, 2, 3, or 4 hr) Accessory DADF-H1 Platen Cover TypeE Document Tray-D2 Copy Tray-F1 Saddle Finisher-G1 Puncher Unit-K1 (2/3holes), G1/H1 (4holes) Finisher-J1 Inner 2Way Tray-A1 Paper Deck-L1 Cassette Feeding Unit-W1 Card Reader-C1 Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit-C1 Token Ring Network Interface Adapter iN-TR2 *1:The values within parentheses indicate when the DADF is used.
T01-101-05 The above specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
1-4 S
1.1.4 Others
Item Operating environment Temperature range Humidity range Atmospheric pressure Power consumption Maximum Standby Continuous Noise Copying Standby Ozone Dimensions Description 15 to 30C/59 to 86F 5 to 80% 810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 atm) 1350W or less 48 W (approx.; reference only) 720 W (approx.; reference only) Sound power level (Impulse mode) iR2200: 66 dB or less, iR3300: 71 dB or less iR2200: 40 dB or less, iR3300: 50 dB or less 0.01 ppm or less avg., 0.02 ppm or less max. 565 (W) 678 (D) 1020 (H) mm 22.2 (W) 26.7 (D) 40.2 (H) in (With Cassette Feeding Unit-W1) 80 kg (approx.)/176.3 lb (approx.) Keep wrapped to protect against humidity. Keep away from direct sunshine, and keep at 40C/85% or less.
Weight Consumables Toner
Copy paper
T01-101-06
1-5 S

Reproduction mode Direct Side A3 (297420mm) A4 (210297mm) A5 (149210mm) B4 (257364mm) B5 (182257mm) A4R (297210mm) B5R (257182mm) A5R (210149mm) A3 A5R A3 B5R B4 B5R A3 A4R B4 A4R B5R A5R A4 B5 A3 B4 A5R A3 A4R A3 B5R B4 A4R B4 A5 B5 B4 A3 B5 A4 Paper size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 A4R B5R A5R A5R B5R B5R A4R A4R A5R B5 B4 A3 A3 B4 B4 B5 A3 A4 copies /min (1-to-N) iR2200 iR2800 16 16 22 28 18 18 14 14 28 28 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 28 14 16 16 14 14 28 16 22 18 18 18 18 18 18 28 14 16 16 14 14 28 16 28
iR3300 16 33 18 14 28 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 28 14 16 16 14 14 28 16 33
Reduce II (50.0%) III (61.1%) IV (70.7%) V (81.6%) VI (86.5%)
Enlarge IV (200.0%) III (141.4%) II (122.4%) I (115.4%)
Delivery by copier, Auto paper select ON, Auto density, Non-sort, Cassette T01-101-07
1-6 S

Reproduction mode Direct Size 279.4431.8mm (11"17") LTR LGL LTRR STMTR 279.4431.8mm (11"17") STMTR 279.4431.8mm (11"17") LTRR 279.4431.8mm (11"17") LGL LGL LTRR 279.4431.8mm (11"17") LTR LGL LTRR STMTR STMTR LTRR LGL LTRR (1toN) iR2200 iR2800 iR3300 16 16 16 22 14 18 18 18 18 14 18 28 14 18 18 18 18 14 18 33 14 18 18 18 18 14 18
Reduce II (50.0%) III (64.7%) IV (73.3%) V (78.6%) Enlarge IV (200.0%) III (129.4%) II (121.4%)
STMTR* 279.4431.8mm (11"17") LTRR 279.4431.8mm (11"17") LGL 279.4431.8mm (11"17") Paper size
279.4431.8mm (11"17") 279.4431.8mm (11"17") 279.4431.8mm (11"17") copies/min
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
*STMTR cannot be used as an original. Delivery by copier, Auto paper select ON, Auto density, Non-sort, Cassette T01-101-08 The above specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
1-7 S
1.2 Side Paper Deck-L1

Item Pickup method Paper accommodation Paper type (horizontal feed only) Capacity Paper size switch Dimensions Weight Power supply Operating conditions Description Retard Front loading Plain paper (65 to 80 g/m2): A4, B5, LTR Colored paper (Canon-recommended): A4 2,500 sheets (approx.; 80 g/m2 paper) By size guide plate/in service mode 324 (W) 591 (D) 432 (H) mm 12.8 (W) 23.3 (D) 17.0 (H) in 30 kg (approx.)/66.1 lb (approx.) None (DC power supplied by accessories power supply of host machine) Same as host machine
T01-102-01 The above specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
1-8 S
2 Names of Parts
2.1 External View
[1] [2]
[3]
[7]
[12]
[11]
[4]
[13] [10] [15]
[5] [14] [8] [6] [9]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
ADF Original tray Control panel Front cover Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Delivery tray Multifeeder F01-201-01
[9] Right lower cover [10] DIMM ROM replacement cover [11] Network card slot [12] Parallel connector [13] Extension board slot [14] Main power switch [15] Cassette heater switch
1-9 S

[1] [2]
[3]
[5]
[4] [6]
[7]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Copyboard glass DADF reading glass Left cover Left lower rear cover (waste toner case cover) F01-201-02
[5] Developing assembly releasing lever [6] Feeding assembly releasing lever [7] Duplex feeding assembly releasing lever
1-10 S
2.2 Cross Section

[1] [5] [7] [8] [9] [12] [11] [10]
[3] [4] [2] [6]
[13] [15] [35] [32]
[19] [34] [30] [37] [33] [31] [14] [21] [20] [36] [16] [23] [22] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [18] [17]
F01-202-01
1-11 S
[1] DADF reading glass [2] No. 1 mirror [3] No. 2 mirror [4] No. 3 mirror [5] Scanning lamp [6] CCD unit [7] Copyboard glass [8] Fixing assembly [9] Pre-exporsure lump [10] Laser unit [11] Laser mirror [12] Drum cleaner assembly [13] Primary charging assembly [14] Photosensitive drum [15] Developing cylinder [16] Transfer guide [17] Multifeeder pickup roller [18] Multifeeder separation pad [19] Registration roller T01-202-01
[20] Transfer roller [21] Static eliminator [22] Cassette 1 [23] Cassette 2 [24] Cassette 1 pickup roller [25] Cassette 1 feeding roller [26] Cassette 1 separation roller [27] Cassette 2 pickup roller [28] Cassette 2 feeding roller [29] Cassette 2 separation roller [30] Fixing film [31] Lower fixing roller [32] Pre-transfer roller [33] Fixing delivery roller [34] Outside delivery roller [35] Delivery roller [36] Duplexing roller [37] Reversing frapper
1-12 S
3 System Configuration
3.1 Functional Construction
The machine may be broadly divided into the following six functional blocks:
Original Optical path CCD PCB Original illumination Control panel
Various networks or public telephone network
Various accessory boards
Reader controller PCB Original Exposure Block DC controller PCB Main power supply PCB Conposit power supply PCB Control Block Laser driver PCB Laser scanner Laser Exposure Block Main controller PCB System control/ Image Processing Block HDD
Charging Cleaning Photosensitive drum Development Image Formation Block Pickup control Multifeeder Side paper deck (accessory) Pickup/Feeding Block
Delivery tray
Feeding
Duplexing assembly Cassette 1 Cassette 2
F01-301-01
Transfer
Separation
Fixing
1-13 S
3.2 Outline of the Electrical Circuitry

3.2.1 Construction of the Electrical Circuit
The major electrical mechanisms of the machine are controlled by the following PCBs: [1] Man controller PCB; controls the system as a whole, processes images [2] DC controller PCB; controls the printer unit, controls the finisher communication [3] Reader controller PCB; controls the reader unit, controls the DADF communication
Control CPU (IC6501) panel PCB HDD Accessory boards
DIMM ROM RAM
CPU (IC1010)
Main controller PCB CPU (IC400)

ROM (IC401) RAM (IC402) EEPROM (IC403)
BD PCB Laser drive PCB Drum sensor PCB Pickup PCB DC loads Clutch Solenoid Motor Sensor Fan Etc. Finisher (accessory)
CPU (IC300) SRAM (IC302)
M400
Scanner motor
ROM (IC301) GATE ARRAY (IC334)
CCD PCB
IPC (IC404) Reader controller PCB LAMP1 Inverter PCB
ADF
PIO (IC303)
IPC (IC309)
DC controller PCB Accessories power supply PCB Main power supply PCB Composite power supply PCB
F01-302-01 1-14 S
3.3 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs

3.3.1 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs
Laser scanner J312 motor M10 J3128
J307/310 Laser driver PCB J500/501
J3
LCD panel (LCD)
Control panel CPU PCB

J24
J25
BD PCB Feed PCB
J312 J803 J3129 J302 J1601 DC J801 J1012
Inverter PCB
Drum sensor PCB J3114
controller PCB J311

J316 J1015
Main controller PCB

J1025
J301 Conposit power supply PCB J136 J111 J201 J308
HDD
J2005 J1014 J409 J403/407/408
Main J205 power J300 supply PCB

J204 J6
Reader controller PCB

J401
CCD PCB
J600/601/602
Scanner motor M400
Switch PCB
J402
J4021
Inverter PCB
Note: The
in the diagram indicates connection between PCBs, NOT the flow of signals.
F01-303-01
1-15 S
3.4 Configuration with Accessories

3.4.1 Accessories for Original/Paper Feeding
[1] [3]
[4]
[2]
[7]
[5]
[6] [8]
[9]
[10]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
DADF-H1 Platen Cover TypeE Document Tray-D2 Copy Tray-F1 Saddle Finisher-G1 F01-304-01
[6] Puncher Unit-K1/G1/H1 [7] Finisher-J1 [8] Inner 2way Tray-A1 [9] Paper Deck-L1 [10] Cassette Feeding Unit-W1
1-16 S
3.4.2 Accessory Boards

Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit-C1
Boot ROM
Network PCB
Ethernet network Ethernet Interface Adapter iN-E3 Network PCB Token Ring Network Interface Adapter iN-TR2 TokenRing PCB TokenRing network
Riser Board-A1 Riser PCB
Super G3 FAX Board-J1

FAX UNIT PSEUDO CI UNIT SPEAKER UNIT
Public telephone network
MODEM PCB
NCU PCB
Super G3 FAX Expansion Kit-B1
F01-304-02
1-17 S
1 Basic Construction
The machine may broadly be divided in to the following functional blocks, with the controller block covering the shaded area:
Reader unit
Control panel Controller unit
Main controller PCB
Accessory boards
HDD
Printer unit
F02-101-01
2-1 S
1.2 Outline of the Electrical Circuitry

1.2.1 Outline
The major electrical mechanisms of the controller block are controlled by the CPU on the main controller PCB. The CPU, RAM, DIMM, and the ICs and HDD around the CPU have the following functions:
1.2.2 Main Controller PCB

Name CPU Description Controls the processing of image data from the reader unit. Controls the processing of image data to the printer unit. Controls the HDD. Controls the interface of the following: network, DMA controller, PCI, and ROM/RAM. Stores program data and image data temporarily. Stores the system control program. Stores the boot program.
RAM DIMM-ROM
T02-102-01
1.2.3 HDD
Item HDD Description Sores the system software. Stores image data for the Box function.
T02-102-02
2-2 S
Reader unit
Control panel
DIMM-ROM
CPU RAM Main controller PCB
Accessory boards
CPU
HDD
Printer unit
F02-102-01
2-3 S
1.3 Start-Up Sequence

1.3.1 Outline
The system software used to control the machine is stored on the machines HDD. The CPU on the main controller PCB reads the system software from the HDD into the SDRAM fitted to the DIMM socket of the main controller PCB.The control panel displays the following screen while the CPU reads the system software from the HDD to the SDRAM, and the progressive bar on the screen indicates the progress of the start-up sequence. Start-Up Screen
Wait
Progressive bar
F02-103-01
2-4 S
1.3.2 Start-Up Sequence

When the main power switch is tuned on, the CPU on the main controller CPU executes the self-diagnostic program stored in the boot ROM. The self-diagnostic program checks the condition of the SDRAM and the HDD; upon detection of a fault, it will indicate the fact in the control panel in the form of an error code.
SDRAM Image data System area area
CPU HDD
Self-diagnostic program
Boot program
Boot ROM Main controller PCB access to the program during execution
F02-103-02 E601-0000, 0001 Indicates the presence of an error in image transfer information. E602-0001, 0002 Indicates the presence of an error in write/read operation.
2-5 S
When the self-diagnostic program ends normally, the boot program also stored in the boot ROM will start up. The boot program reads the system software from the HDD into the system area of the SDRAM. When the write operation ends, the system software in the SDRAM starts up to initialize the various parts of the machine, at the end of which the control panel will indicate the normal operation screen and, at the same time, the Start key LED changes from red to green to indicate that the machine is ready to accept a job. The machines system software consists of multiple modules, and those modules that are needed for a specific task in question will be called into the system area of the SDRAM for use.
SDRAM System area Image data area
CPU HDD
Self-diagnostic program
Boot program
Boot ROM Main controller PCB : access to the program during execution. : flow of the system program.
F02-103-03
2-6 S
2 Digital Image Processing

2.1 Outline
The machines digital image processing and image memory are controlled by the main controller PCB. The following is a block diagram of digital image processing:
Reader unit 8 Main controller unit Enlargement/reduction (main scanning direction) 8 Edge emphasis 8 Editing 8 Intensity/density conversion (LOG conversion) 8 Density conversion Density adjustment (F value conversion) (LUT) 8 Density correction ( conversion) 8 Binary processing (error diffusion method) (text, text/photo, print photo) 1 Binary processing (dither screen method) (film photo) 1 Compression/de-compression, rotation, enlargement/reduction Image memory control Printer PG 1 SDRAM I/O control Binary-binary processing density conversion 1 Smoothing 4 or 2 HDD Image server Image data after shading
Reader PG
Printer unit
F02-201-01
2-7 S
2.2 Input Image Processing

The image data from the reader unit is processed for the following:
2.2.1 Image Data from the Reader Unit

The image signals from the reader unit are 8-bit, 256-gradation intensity image signals which have been subjected to shading correction. The signals arrive from two signal lines (for even- and odd-numbered pixels).
2.2.2 Enlargement/Reduction (main scanning direction)

An image is enlarged or reduced by processing image data when writing it into or reading it from image memory.
2.2.3 Edge Emphasis

For each mode (text, text/photo, print photo, film photo), edge emphasis is executed so as to increase sharpness while suppressing moire.
2.2.4 Editing
The machine provides various editing functions: negative/positive reversal, mirror, fold.
2.2.5 Density Conversion (LUT)

In this block, the intensity image signals are converted into density image signals, and processing is executed so as to enable the best output density curve for a specific mode in question. a. LOG Conversion Using a LOG conversion table, intensity image signals based on reflected light are converted into density image signals based on density data. b. Density Adjustment (F-value conversion) The F-value table most suited to the setting of the Density key in the control panel is used to adjust the density; it, however, will not be executed in memory copy mode. c. Density Correction ( conversion) The conversion table best suited to each specific mode (test, text/photo, print photo, film photo) is used to correct density.
2-8 S
2.2.6 Binary Processing (error diffusion method T-BIC)

In the error diffusion method (T-BIC), the texture is controlled to process the data for optimum printing effects; 8-bit image density signals of each mode (text, text/photo, print photo) are converted into 1-bit image density signals (binary).
2.2.7 Binary (dither screen method)

In the dither screen method, the texture is controlled to process the data for optimum printing effects; 8-bit image density signals for film photo mode are converted into 1-bit image density signals (binary). Although expressed in binary, the resulting signals enable reproduction in 256 gradations (dither screening of 4040 pixels).
2.3 Image Memory Control

The image data after binary processing is controlled for the following:
2.3.1 Compression/De-Compression, Rotation, and Enlargement/Reduction

The binary data generated as the result of the foregoing processes is subjected to the following: compression/de-compression (for electronic sorting), rotation, resolution conversion.
2.3.2 SDRAM
The image data subjected to image memory control is temporarily stored in SDRAM.
2.3.3 HDD
The HDD functioning as an image server is used to store image data for the Box function.
2-9 S
2.4 Output Image Processing

The output image data to the printer unit is subjected to the following processing:
2.4.1 Smoothing
a. When Generating Read Images In the case of text or test/photo mode, the input image of 600600 dpi is converted into 1200*600 dpi by means of smoothing. *Equivalent. In smoothing, image data is compared against a template consisting of several combinations of pattern matrixes for replacement of selected pixels. In addition, notch processing is also executed at the same time as a pattern unique to read image. b. When Generating Printer (PDL) Images The image data is subjected to the type of smoothing best suited to PDL, in which 600600 dpi is converted into 2400*600 dpi. *Equivalent.
2.4.2 Binary-Binary Density Conversion (read image output only)

This processing is used as an auxiliary means for adjusting the density of images.
2-10 S
3 Soft Counters
The machine is equipped with soft counters that count the number of prints it has handled; the counter readings may be checked by pressing the Check key in the control panel. The counters are controlled by the main controller PCB, and each count is incremented when any of the following sensors detects paper during copy/print operation:
When No Delivery Option Is Installed Copy/print operation Sensor Single-sided PS15 Double-sided 1st side PS18 2nd side PS15 When the Inner 2-Way Tray Is Used Copy/print operation Sensor Single-sided PS19S PS21S PS18 Double-sided 1st side PS19S 2nd side PS21S 2nd side PS21S When a Finisher Is Installed Copy/print operation Single-sided Double-sided 1st side 2nd side
used No. 1 delivery sensor Duplexing unit outlet sensor No. 1 delivery sensor
Delivery slot Below the inside tray Below the inside tray
used No. 2 delivery sensor No. 3 delivery sensor Duplexing unit outlet sensor No. 2 delivery sensor No. 3 delivery sensor No. 3 delivery sensor
Delivery slot Above the inside tray Outside tray Above the inside tray Above the inside tray Outside tray
Sensor S2 PS18 S2
used Inlet sensor Double-sided outlet sensor Inlet sensor
Delivery slot Finisher delivery tray Finisher delivery tray
When Delivery Is to the Saddle finisher Copy/print operation Sensor Single-sided PI1 Double-sided 1st side PS18 2nd side PI1
used Inlet sensor Double-sided outlet sensor Inlet sensor
Delivery slot Finisher delivery tray Finisher delivery tray
T02-301-01
2-11 S
The following diagrams show the locations of the sensor in the finisher and the saddle finisher:
Inlet sensor(S2)
F02-301-01
Inlet sensor (PI1)
F02-301-02
2-12 S
The counters possess a total of 16 modes, consisting of eight modes for large-size papers and eight modes for small-size papers; the following shows the basic counter modes:
Copy/print mode Local copy PDL print Box print Remote copy print Fax receive print Report print Double-sided print Scan Large-size A C E G I K M O Small-size* B D F H J L N P
*At time of shipment, B4 or smaller; may be changed in service mode to count B4 as large-size.
T02-301-02 The following shows the counter configurations according to mode at time of shipment:
Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description*1 Default display 100V model 120/230V model Total (A through L) ON ON Total large (ACEGIK) OFF ON Copy 1 (ABGH) OFF ON Copy 1 large (AG) OFF ON Print 1 total (CDEF) OFF OFF Fax total (IJ) OFF OFF Default switch *2 Fixed May be May be May be May be May be
changed. changed. changed. changed. changed.
*1:The notations in the parentheses indicate the corresponding basic counter modes (T02-300-20). *2:The counter description may be changed or enabled/disabled for display in service mode (except counter 1, whose setting cannot be cannot be changed).
T02-301-03
2-13 S
OPTION>USER>COUNTER1 Use it to enable/disable the display of soft counter 1 in the control panel. OPTION>USER>COUNTER2 Use it to enable/disable the display of soft counter 2 in the control panel, or to change the counter type. OPTION>USER>COUNTER3 Use it to enable/disable the display of soft counter 3 in the control panel, or to change the counter type. OPTION>USER>COUNTER4 Use it to enable/disable the display of soft counter 4 in the control panel, or to change the counter type. OPTION>USER>COUNTER5 Use it to enable/disable the display of soft counter 5 in the control panel, or to change the counter type. OPTION>USER>COUNTER6 Use it to enable or disable the display of soft counter 6 in the control panel, or to change the counter type.
2-14 S
4 Controlling the Power Supply

4.1 Outline
In addition to its control in response to the operation of the main power switch, the main controller PCB possesses the following control mechanisms in relation to the power supply: Standby mode (normal operation) Sleep mode 1 Sleep mode 2
4.2 Power Supply Modes

The machine has the following modes for each of its power supply mechanisms; +3.3V all-night (3.3 VB), +3.3V non-all night (3.3 VA), +5V, and 24V: Mode Standby Sleep mode 1 Sleep mode 2 +3.3V all night Yes Yes Yes +3.3V non-all night Yes Yes No T02-402-01 +5V Yes Yes No +24V Yes Yes No LCD Yes No No
4.3 Standby Mode (normal operation)

In standby mode, the machine is in operation or is ready operate, and nearly all components are supplied with power; not only the main controller PCB, but also the reader unit, printer unit, and control panel are all ready for communication and control.
4.4 Sleep Mode 1

In sleep mode 1, only the LCD image desplay remains OFF.
2-15 S
4.4.1 Shift from Standby Mode to Sleep Mode 1

A shift from standby mode to sleep mode 1 is executed for the following: The power switch (soft switch) in the control panel is OFF. The machine remains in standby mode and a specific period of time (may be changed in user mode) has passed. In addition, the following must be true: The setting of 'Function key wakeup ON/OFF' under 'Common settings' in user mode is set to 'ON'. The setting of 'Energy consumption in Sleep Mode' under 'Common settings' in user mode is set to 'high'. The setting of 'NetWare settings' under 'Network settings' in user mode is set to 'ON'. The setting of 'AppleTalk settings' under 'Network settings' in user mode is set to ON'. The setting of 'DHCP' under 'IP Address / TCP/IP settings' in user mode is set to use. A TokenRing board is installed. In the fax, timer transmission is selected. In the fax, an auto start job is selected. An extension of the fax is in use (engaged).
4.4.2 Shift from Sleep Mode 1 to Standby Mode

A shift from sleep mode 1 to standby mode is expected for the following: The power switch (soft switch) in the control panel is turned on.
2-16 S
4.5 Sleep Mode 2

In sleep mode 2, only the +3.3V all-night (3.3 VB) power supply is ON. The CPU on the main control paper remains in wait for an interrupt (keeping the program at rest) to limit the consumption of power.
4.5.1 Shift from Standby Mode to Sleep Mode 2

A shift from standby mode to sleep mode 2 is executed under the following: The power switch (soft switch) in the control panel is OFF. The machine has remained in standby mode for a specific period of time (may be changed in user mode).
4.5.2 Shift from Sleep Mode 2 to Standby Mode

A shift from sleep mode 2 to standby mode is executed for the following: The power switch (soft switch ) in the control panel is ON.
4.5.3 Shift from Sleep Mode 2 to Sleep Mode 1

A shift from sleep mode 2 to sleep mode 1 is executed for the following: PDL data is received from the network or from the parallel port.
4.6 Turning Off the Power

The power is turned off when the main power switch is turned off. A shift from this state may be made only by turning on the main power switch; the shift will be automatic and to standby mode.
2-17 S
5 New Functions
5.1 Hard Disk Spool
In hard disk spool, print data is not directly sent to memory for printing, but spooled on the HDD before printing, thus releasing the application program running on the host PC sooner than otherwise. When this function is used, a print job from the PC is stored in the spool area of the HDD. (The spool area is as large as about 300 MB.) Once spooled, the jobs are then sent to the RIP processing block in the order they have been received. The jobs are removed from the spool as they are printed, and as many as 100 jobs may be spooled at a time. The following diagram shows the flow of data, from spooling on the HDD to execution: HDD Main controller PCB
(3)PDL data RIP processing block (4)Image data Memory for development (5)Image data
Spool area job 1 job 2 Print buffer area

(7)Binary data
(6)Compression data Compression circuit (9)Binary data Page memory for printing (8)Binary data (10)Binary data De-compression circuit
job n
(2)PDL data
Print image processing block (11)Binary data
Network PCB
(12)Image date
(1)PDL data
Printer unit
F02-501-01
2-18 S
5.2 SMB Printing

SMB has been developed so as to use NetBIOS, which specifies an address by means of a computer name, for use solely with a specific protocol. SMB over TCP/IP is designed for use in combination with the TCP/IP protocol, enabling the machine to print data directly from Windows 95/98/ME without going through a Windows NT/2000 sever as is in the case of LPR printing and without the need for an LPR utility. (A Windows work group may be made use of, but Windows NT/2000 cannot be called into the domain.) On a TCP/IP network an address must be specified by means of an IP address, not the name of the computer in question, requiring conversion of a computer name into an IP address. If a WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) server exits on the network, the function may also be made use of. If it does not exist or is not used, the PC will contact all devices on the network to find out the IP address of the machine before it sends a print job to the machine.
WINS server
Ethernet Protocol:TCP/IP Service:SMB
iR2200 iR2800 iR3300
Windows 95/98
Windows 95/98
F02-502-01
2-19 S
5.3 LPD Banner

When OPD printing is selected, the following job information will be printed: LPD Banner (sample)
iR2200-3300 (iN-E2)
USER NAME : ts HOST NAME : canon JOB NAME : golfer.ps
F02-503-01
2-20 S
1 Selecting the Site of Installation

Select the site of installation against the following conditions; if possible, visit the users in advance of the delivery of the machine: 1. There must be a power outlet that may be used exclusively for the machine and rated as indicated (10%). 2. The temperature of the room must be between 7.5 and 30C (59 and 86F) and humidity, between 5% and 80%. Avoid areas near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator. 3. The site must not be near a source of fire or must not be subject to dust or ammonium gas. If the site is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains. 4. The level of ozone generated by the machine in operation will not affect the health of the individuals around it. Nevertheless, some may find the odor unpleasant, requiring good ventilation of the work place. 5. The floor of the site must be level so that the feet of the machine will remain in contact and the machine itself will remain level.
3-1 S
6. The site must be such that the machine will be at least 10 cm away from any wall, allowing adequate space for work.
10 cm min. 50 cm min. 50 cm min.
F03-100-01
10 cm min.
110 cm min.
50 cm min.
100 cm min.
F03-100-02 7. The site must be well ventilated. Do not install the machine near the air inlet of the room.
3-2 S
50 cm min.
2 Unpacking and Installation

2.1 Before Starting the Work
Keep the following in mind for the work: 1. If the machine is brought in from a cold to warm place, its pickup/feeding assembly can develop condensation, leading to image faults. Leave the machine alone for at least one hour, and start the work after the machine has become used to the room temperature. The term condensation refers to the symptom that occurs when a piece of metal is brought in from a cold to warm place, cooling the vapor in the air rapidly and turning it into droplets of water on the metal surface. 2. The machine weighs about 80 kg. Be sure to work in a group of four.
3-3 S
2.2 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials

Work 1) Open the shipping box, and remove the plastic sheets. If you are installing the pedestal at the same time, unpack it. 2) While working in a group of four, hold the grips [1], and place it on the pedestal. (weight of body: about 80kg) Take care so that the main power switch will not be turned on when the machine is lifted. Checks/remarks
[1]
[1]
3-4 S
Work 3) Remove the packing tape of the machine. 4) Press the cassette release button, and take out each cassette to the front. 5) Connect the machine and the pedestal using a screw [1]. Other types of pedestal may also be connected using a screw. 6) Slide the cassettes into the machine. 7) Open the cardboard box that comes with the machine, and take out the components and attachments;
Checks/remarks
[1]
check to make sure that none of the following is missing: Users Manual Drum unit Right lower cover Cassette size label (inside cassettes) Cassette size plate (inside cassette) Guidebook (model w/ printer function only) CD-ROM (model w/ printer function only)
3-5 S
2.3 Mounting the Scanner

Work 1) Remove the screw [1] and the tag [2] used to hold the scanner in place on the left cover of the reader unit. Keep the screw stored away for possible relocation of the machine. Checks/remarks
[2]
[1]
2.4 Removing the Dummy Drum

Work 1) Open the front cover. 2) Shift down the feeder releasing lever [1] to release the feeding assembly. 3) Turn the developing assembly locking lever [2] counterclockwise to free the developing assembly. Checks/remarks
[2]
[1]
3-6 S
Work 4) Remove the fixing screw [1] from the dummy drum. The removed fixing screw will be used when mounting the drum unit. 5) Pull the dummy drum [2] straight out to the font. The removed dummy drum will no longer be used.
Checks/remarks
[2] [1]
2.5 Supplying the Toner

Work 1) Holding the grip [1] of the developing assembly, pull the developing assembly [2] to the front until it stops. Checks/remarks
[2]
[1]
3-7 S
Work 2) Shake the toner cartridge [1] several items. 3) Set the toner cartridge to the developing assembly, and push it down until the opening tab [2] springs to view. The toner cartridge is locked to the developing assembly.
Checks/remarks
[1]
[2]
4) While lightly holding down the toner cartridge with one hand, pull the open tab to the front until it stops (where the marking STOP is found). 5) Tap lightly on the top of the toner cartridge so that all toner will drop.
3-8 S
Work 6) Push in the black cover of the developing assembly back to its initial position. The toner cartridge will become disengaged. 7) Remove the toner cartridge. 8) Push in the developing assembly until it butts against the rear.
Checks/remarks
3-9 S
2.6 Mounting the Drum Unit

Work 1) Unpack the drum unit, and remove the two releasing members [1] of the primary charging roller. Remove all other packing tape and the like. 1. Do not touch the dump area of the photosensitive drum to avoid damage. 2. Take care not to expose the photosensitive drum to strong light. 3. Take care not to damage the stirrups found at the bottom of the drum unit. 2) Check to make sure that the developing assembly is released; then, holding the drum unit [1] by its long hole, slide inside the machine along the rails [2]. At this time, take full care not to bring the developing assembly in contact with the developing cylinder, which is situated nearby. Checks/remarks
[1]
[2]
[1]
3-10 S
Work 3) Using the fixing screw [1] removed from the dummy drum previously, secure the dump unit [2] in place.
Checks/remarks
[2]
[1]
4) Fill out the date label, and attach it to the front cover of the drum unit. 5) Turn the developing assembly locking lever clockwise to lock the developing assembly in place. 6) Shift up the feeding releasing lever to lock the feeding assembly in place. Do not turn on the main power switch while the feeding assembly remains released; otherwise, the fixing assembly will be damaged. 7) Close the front cover.
3-11 S
2.7 Stirring the Toner

Work 1) Connect the power plug to the power outlet. 2) Turn on the main power switch. Wait until the control panel indicates that the machine is ready for operation. 3) Start service mode. 4) Make the following selections: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>TONERS. 5) Press the OK key. The stirring operation will last for 240 sec (4 min), after which the operation stops automatically. 6) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode. 7) Execute 'roller clean' in user mode ('adjust/clean'), and execute transfer charging roller resistance detection control (ATVC). Checks/remarks The power supply must be as rated. (The voltage may be 10% of the rating, but it must have the rated amperage.) Press the key, 2 and 8 at the same time, and the key once again. The following message will appear: CHECK THE DEVELOPER. In response, check to see if the developing assembly is properly locked in place. If you inadvertently stopped stirring of the toner in the middle, be sure to execute TONER-S once again.
Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter
<INSTALL >
< 1/ 1 > <NO-PAPER>
TONER-S Check the Developer STRD-POS CARD 0 ( 0) { 1 - 2700}
+/-
OK
3-12 S
2.8 Setting the Cassette

Work 1) Press the cassette releasing button, and slide out the cassette to the front. 2) Check with the user to find out the size of paper to use, and check the size setting (A/B or Inch) using the selection switch [1] of each cassette. Checks/remarks
[1]
3-13 S
Work 3) Pick the lever of the side guide plate and the rear guide plate, and adjust it to the appropriate paper size index. The middle cassette cannot hold A3 or 1117 paper.
Checks/remarks
4) Set the paper size dial to suit the selected paper size.
Set the dial as indicated.
3-14 S
Work 5) Attach the size label [2] to the cassete size plate [1], and fit the cassette size plate to each cassette. 6) Put paper into the cassettes [3], and slide them into the machine.
[1]
Checks/remarks
[3]
LT R
A4
[2]
3-15 S
2.9 Checking the Images/Operations

Work 1) To install the machine not using the 2cassette pedestal, mount the right lower cover [1]. 1. Skip this step if the machine is installed on a 2-cassette pedestal. 2. After removing the right lower cover, check to make sure that the cover is securely in place. 2) Clean the surface of the reading glass of the copyboard. 3) Using the NA-3 Chart as the original, make a print to check the images and the operation. 4) Make user mode settings (e.g., date, time) and service mode settings (COPIER>OPTION>USER) to suit the needs of the user. Checks/remarks
[1]
Optimum Image In text mode, the white background must not be foggy. In text/photo mode, step edge No. 10 must be barely visible. The white background must be free of fogging. In photo mode, the white background must be free of fogging. (The moire, if any, along the step edges and the halftone area does not indicate a fault.) The non-image width must be as indicated: 2.51.5 mm. Checking the Operations During copying operation, check to make sure the operations are normal. During double-sided copying operation, check to make sure that paper is moved normally in the duplex unit. For pickup operation, check to make sure that pickup from each source of paper is normal. There must not be abnormal operating noise. Make copies at each default reproduction ratio, and check to make sure that the images are normal. Make copies in multiple sets, and check to make sure that copies are made specified numbers.
3-16 S
Work 5) If necessary in view of the site environment, turn on the cassette heater switch [1]. 6) Move the machine to the site of installation; if it is placed on a pedestal, secure it in place using the four adjusters. 7) Clean the area around the machine, and fill out the Service Book.
Checks/remarks
[1]
3-17 S
2.10
Connecting to the Network

Perform the following steps if the machine is equipped with printer functions:
1) Turn off the main power. 2) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on the main power. 3) Inform the users system administrator that the machine has been installed, and ask him/ her to make the network settings for the machine.
2.11
Checking the Network Connection

If the users network environment is TCP/IP, use the PING function to make sure that the network PCB has properly been installed and the network settings have properly been made. If the users network environment is IPX/SPX or AppleTalk, on the other hand, these checks are not needed.
2.11.1 Using the PING Function

1) Make the following selections to select PING: COPIER>TEST>PING>NETWORK. 2) Enter the IP address using the keypad on the control panel, and press the OK key. 3) Press the Start key. If PING is successful, OK will be indicated: otherwise, NG will be indicated.
<NETWORK> PING 0. < 1/1 > 0. 0. <READY > 0
IP address input Results (OK/NG)
+/-
OK
3-18 S
2.11.2 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address

The connection to the network may be checked by executing PING using a remote host address (i.e., the IP address of a PC terminal connected to and operating on the TCP/IP network to which the machine is connected). 1) Inform the users system adminisrator that the network connection will be checked using PING. 2) Check with the users system administrator to find out the remote host address. 3) Enter the remote host address in the PING field. If OK is indicated, the connection to the network is correct. If NG is indicated, the connection to the network is not correct; investigate the cause as follows:
2.12
Troubleshooting the Network

If the connection to the network is not made, the following can be suspected; perform the steps under 2.12.1 to correct the faults: a. The connection between the network and the network PCB is faulty. b. The TCP/IP settings on the machine are faulty. c. The network PCB is faulty, or the PCB is mounted wrongly. d. The user network is faulty.
2.12.1 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable

1) Check to find out if the network cable is correctly connected to the network PCB. If the connection is correct, go to 2.12.2. If the connection is wrong, correct it, and make a check once again using the remote host address.
3-19 S
2.12.2 Making a Check Using a Loop-Back Address

A loop-back address is returned before it reaches the network PCB; therefore, executing PING using it will enable a check on the TCP/IP settings made on the machine. 1) Enter the loop-back address (127.0.0.1) in the PING field. If NG is indicated, check the TCP/IP settings of the machine once again, and execute PING once again. If OK is indicated, go to 2.12.3.
2.12.3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address

The local host address is the IP address of the machine, and executing PING using it will enable a check on the network PCB (it is retuned after it reaches the network PCB). 1) Enter the IP address of the machine in the PING field. If NG is indicated, perform the following check/correction, and execute PING once again: a. If the IP address of the machine is wrong, check the IP address settings made on the machine once again, or find out if the IP address assigned to the machine is correct or not by consulting the users system administrator. b. If the network has faulty connection, check the connector of the network PC for connection. c. If the network PCB is faulty, replace the network PCB. If OK is indicated, suspect a problem in the users network environment; report to the users system administrator, and ask for corrective measures.
3-20 S
3 Relocating the Machine

3.1 Preparing for Relocation
If the machine must be relocated by truck or other means of transportation after it has been installed, perform the following: Do not lift the machine by holding its grips as when moving it over a step; otherwise, the machine will become separated from the pedestal. Be sure to lift the pedestal if the machine is connected to it. Work 1) Remove the fixing screw, and detach the drum unit. 2) Fix the scanner in place. 3) Tape the front cover, delivery assembly, and cassette in place. 4) Place a single sheet of A3/1117 paper on the copyboard glass, and tape the copyboard cover (ADF) in place. Checks/remarks
3-21 S
3.2 Lifting the Machine Off the Pedestal

Work 1) Disconnect the lattice connector of the pedestal from the machine. 2) Slide out the two cassettes from the machine, and remove the screw [1] used to connect the machine to the pedestal. Remove the screw likewise if the machine is installed to a different type of cassette pedestal. Checks/remarks
[1]
3) Open the right cover [1] of the pedestal, and release the guide assembly [2] connected to the machine (i.e., shift it down to the right). 4) While working in a group of two or more, hold the grips of the machine, and lift it straight up (pay attention to the pins of the pedestal). 5) Place the machine on the floor or on a desk.
[2]
[B]
[A]
[1]
3-22 S
4 Installing the Card Reader-C1

Work 1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD; then, enter the card number (1 through 2701). Enter the number of the card (of all the cards used by the user) that have the lowest number. As many as 300 cards may be used having a number higher than the one entered. 2) Turn off the main power switch. 3) To facilitate the removal of the right rear cover, remove the screws [1] from the rear cover.
[1]
Checks/remarks
4) Open the manual feed tray and the right lower cover. 5) Remove the five screws [1] ; and, while opening the right rear cover [2] slightly, detach the right rear cover.
[2] [1]
[1]
3-23 S
Work 6) Cut off the face plate [1] at the top of the right rear cover with a nipper or the like.
Checks/remarks
[1]
7) Lead out the connector [1] of the card reader on the machine side, and mount the right rear cover.
[1]
8) Connect the connector [2] on the card reader [1] side and the connector [2] on the machine side.
[1]
[2]
3-24 S
Work 9) While pushing in the connector [1] and the harness [2] inside the machine, fit the boss of the right rear cover into the opening in the card reader support plate; then, secure the card reader to the machine using a screw [3] and a washer [4]. Take care not to trap the connector or the harness.
[3]
Checks/remarks
[4]
[1]
[2]
3-25 S
5 Installing the Document Tray-D2

Work 1) Remove the two stickers from the right top of the machine. Using the two stepped screws [1] (RS tightening; M410) that come with the machine, mount the document tray [2] to the machine. If the work proves to be difficult, loosen the two stepped screws, and try again. 1. Be sure to use the stepped screws designed for the machine; ones for other types come together with the machine. 2. The document tray may be mounted to the left side of the machine. Checks/remarks
[1] [2]
3-26 S
6 Replacing the Drum Unit

Work 1) Turn off the main power switch; then, open the front cover. 2) Shift the feeding assembly releasing lever to free the feeding assembly. 3) Turn the developing assembly locking lever counterclockwise to free the developing assembly. 4) Remove the fixing screw from the drum unit. (The removed fixing screw will be used when mounting the new drum unit.) 5) Pull the drum unit straight out to the front. 6) Unpack the new drum unit, and detach the two releasing members of the primary charging roller. 1. Do not touch the drum area to avoid scratching the photosensitive drum. 2. Do not expose the photosensitive drum to strong light. 3. Take care not to damage the stirs found on the bottom of the drum unit. 4. When removing the tape from the rear end of the drum unit, keep the rear end higher than the front cover to prevent spilling waste toner.
Tape
Checks/remarks
Primary charging roller releasing members
3-27 S
Work 7) Check to see the developing assembly is freed; then, slide in the new drum unit along the rails in the machine slowly. At this time, take full care not to bring the developing assembly into contact with the developing cylinder, which is located very close.
Checks/remarks
Rails
Drum unit
To avoid damaging the stirs found on the bottom of the drum unit, hold the front cover of the drum unit with your right hand while keeping your left hand in the long hole of the left side plate of the drum unit.
8) Secure the new drum unit in place using the fixing screw you removed in a previous step.
Drum unit
Screw
3-28 S
Work 9) Fill out the date label, and attach it to the front cover of the drum unit. 10) Turn the developing assembly locking lever clockwise to lock it in place. 11) Shift up the feeding assembly releasing lever to set the feeding assembly in place. 12) Remove the paper lint cleaning cover using a flat-blade screwdriver.
Checks/remarks
13) Slide out the paper lint cleaning lever, and move it back and forth. 14) Mount the paper lint cleaning cover. 15) Close the front cover. 16) Turn on the main power switch.
3-29 S
Work 17) Start service move. 18) Make the following selections: COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DGAMMA. 19) Press the OK key. The machine will pick up paper from cassette 2. (The paper may be of any size.) The machine ends APVC correction by delivering a blank sheet. 20) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode. 21) Turn off the main power switch.
Checks/remarks Press ; '2' and '8' at the same time, once again. and then
3-30 S
READER UNIT
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION
1 Outline of Electrical Circuitry ....... 1-1R 1.1 Outline .................................... 1-1R 1.2 Reader Controller PCB ........... 1-1R 2 Basic Sequence of Operations ....... 1-2R 2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ............................ 1-2R 2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Book Mode ......................... 1-2R 3 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs ................................... 1-3R 3.1 Wiring of Major PCBs ............ 1-3R
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

1 Outline of Operations .................... 2-1R 1.1 Outline .................................... 2-1R 1.2 Sequence of Operations (original exposure) .................. 2-3R 1.2.1 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Closed ............ 2-3R 1.2.2 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Open .... 2-4R 1.3 Enlargement/Reduction (zoom) ..................................... 2-5R 1.3.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction ........................... 2-5R 1.3.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction ........................... 2-5R 2 Scanner Drive System ................... 2-6R 2.1 Outline ..................................... 2-6R 2.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor ................................................ 2-7R 2.2.1 Controlling the Motor When Scanning an Image .. 2-7R 2.2.2 Reversing the Scanner After Scanning in Main Reading Direction ........................... 2-8R 3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp (LA2) ................................... 2-9R 3.1 Outline ..................................... 2-9R 3.2 Scanning Lamp ........................ 2-9R 3.3 Turning On/Off the Lamp ........ 2-9R 3.4 Detecting an Error ................. 2-10R 4 Detecting the Size of Originals .... 2-11R 4.1 Outline ................................... 2-11R 4.2 Points of Detection ................ 2-11R 4.3 Outline of Detection .............. 2-11R 4.4 Outline of Detection Operation ............................... 2-12R 4.4.1 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Open ... 2-12R 4.4.2 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Close ... 2-13R 5 Disassembly and Assembly ......... 2-15R 5.1 Exposure Lamp ..................... 2-16R 5.1.1 Removing the Exposure Lamp ............................... 2-16R 5.1.2 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp ............... 2-17R 5.2 Scanner Drive Assembly ....... 2-18R 5.2.1 Removing the Scanner Motor .............................. 2-18R 5.2.2 Mounting the Motor Unit ................................. 2-19R 5.2.3 Removing the Scanner Drive Cable ..................... 2-20R 5.2.4 Routing the Scanner Drive Cable ..................... 2-21R 5.2.5 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base .. 2-22R R1
CONTENTS
5.3 Sensors .................................. 2-24R 5.3.1 Removing the Original Detection Unit ................. 2-24R 5.3.2 Removing the HP Sensor ............................. 2-24R
Removing the Original Cover Sensor .................. 2-25R 5.4 PCBs ..................................... 2-26R 5.4.1 Removing the Inverter PCB ................................ 2-26R
5.3.3
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

1 2 Outline ........................................... 3-1R Analog Image Processing .............. 3-2R 2.1 Outline .................................... 3-2R 2.2 Driving the CCD ..................... 3-2R 2.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output 3-3R 2.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output ............................ 3-3R 3 Digital Image Processing ............... 3-4R 3.1 Outline ..................................... 3-5R 3.2 Shading Correction .................. 3-5R 3.2.1 Outline .............................. 3-5R 3.2.2 Shading Adjustment .......... 3-6R 3.2.3 Shading Correction ........... 3-6R 3.2.4 Edge Gain Correction (ADF in use) ..................... 3-6R 3.3 Auto Density Adjustment (AE) ..................... 3-7R 3.3.1 Outline .............................. 3-7R 3.3.2 ABC Circuit ...................... 3-7R 3.4 Related Service Mode .............. 3-8R 4 Disassembly and Assembly ........... 3-9R 4.1 External Covers ..................... 3-10R External Covers ............... 3-10R Removing the Reader Right Cover ..................... 3-10R 4.1.3 Removing the Copyboard Glass ............ 3-11R 4.1.4 After Mounting the Copyboard Glass ............ 3-11R 4.2 CCDs .................................... 3-12R 4.2.1 Removing the CCD Unit . 3-12R 4.2.2 Points to Note When Replacing the CCD Unit . 3-13R 4.3 Frames ................................... 3-14R 4.3.1 Removing the Left ADF Base Unit ........................ 3-14R 4.3.2 Removing the Reader Upper Frame ................... 3-14R 4.3.3 Mounting the Reader Upper Frame ................... 3-15R 4.4 PCBs ..................................... 3-16R 4.4.1 Removing the Reader Controller PCB ............... 3-16R 4.4.2 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ... 3-16R 4.1.1 4.1.2
R2
1 Outline of Electrical Circuitry

1.1 Outline
The major mechanisms of the reader unit are controlled by the CPU on the reader controller PCB. The functions of the major ICs are as indicated in the following table.
1.2 Reader Controller PCB

Name CPU Description Controls the scanning lamp. Controls the sequence of scanner Controls shading correction. operations. Controls the original size detection Controls service mode. Controls the communications with mechanism. the main controller. Controls the CCD. Controls the communications with the ADF. RAM Stores service mode data. Stores user mode data. Stores control data. EEP-ROM Backs up RAM data. ROM Stores control programs. T01-102-01 List of Control Items
CPU (IC400) ROM (IC401) RAM (IC402) Printer unit EEPROM (IC403)
Inverter PCB
LAMP1
Controller unit
M400 Scanner motor
CCD PCB
IPC (IC404) Reader controller PCB
ADF
F01-102-01 Major PCBs

1-1 R
2 Basic Sequence of Operations

2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On
Power switch ON SREADY Scanner HP sensor (PS39) Scanning lamp (LA2) Scanner motor (M3)
*1 Forward Reverse *2
STBY
*1: Shading adjustment (gain adjustment) is executed 1 sec after the scanning lamp turns on. *2: Shading adjustment (CCD original size detection slash level adjustment) is executed 1 sec after the scanning lamp turns on. F01-201-01
2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Book Mode

Start key ON SREADY Scanner HP sensor (PS39) Scanning lamp (LA2) Scanner motor (M3)
*1 Forward Reverse *2
SCFW
SCRV
STBY
Start position
Start position
*1: Shading correction (gain adjustment and CCD original size detection slash level adjustment) is executed for every job. *2: Executed only at the end of a scan job. F01-202-02 Name of period Description SREADY(scanner ready) From when the power switch is turned on to when shading adjustment ends. Or, from when the Start key is turned on to when the scanner reaches scanner start position. SCFW(scanner forward) While the scanner is moving forward to scan the original. While the scanner is moving in reverse. SCRV(scanner reverse) From when shading correction ends to when the Start key is STBY(standby) turned on or when the power switch is turned off. T01-202-01 1-2 R
3 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs

3.1 Wiring of Major PCBs
J409 DC controller PCB Controller unit Reader controller PCB
CCD PCB
J408/J407/J403
J601/J600/J602 Inverter PCB J4021 J402
F01-301-01
1-3 R
1 Outline of Operations
1.1 Outline
The major functions of the original exposure system are as follows: Item Scanning lamp Original Scanning Description Xenon lamp In book mode: by moving the scanner. With ADF in use: by stream reading while holding the No. 1 mirror base fixed in position. By scanner HP sensor (PS400) [1] Using the Copyboard: 25% to 800% In main scanning direction, image processing is performed by the controller unit. In sub scanning direction, the speed of the No. 1 mirror base is changed (50% or higher and lower than 400%), in addition, the image data is processed by the controller unit (lower than 50% and 400% or higher). [2] Using the ADF: 25% to 200% In main scanning direction, the image data is processed by the controller unit. In sub scanning direction, the speed at which the originals are moved is changed (50% or higher and lower than 200%), in addition, the image data is processed by the controller unit (lower than 50%and 200% or higher). The No.1/No.2 mirror base is controlled by means of a stepping motor (M400). Lens array (fixed in position) [1] Turned on by an inverter circuit. [2] Monitored for errors. [1] In book mode, by a reflection type sensor in sub scanning direction; by a CCD in main scanning direction. [2] With the ADF in use, by the ADF.
Scanner position detection Reproduction ratio (zoom)
Scanner drive control Lens Scanning lamp activation Original size detection
2-1 R
The major components of the original exposure system are as follows:
Image leading Stream reading position HP edge (start position) Original No. 2 mirror No. 1 mirror base No. 1 mirror Scanning lamp No. 2 mirror No. 3 mirror base Lens CCD Copyboard glass
F02-101-01
[3] [4] [1] [5] [2]
[6]
F02-101-02 Component [1] Scanning lamp [2] Scanner motor [3] Scanner HP sensor [4] Copyboard cover sensor [5] No.1 mirror base [6] No.2 mirror base Notation LAMP1 M400 PS400 PS401 Description Xenon lamp (intensity of 40,000 lx) 2-phase stepping motor (under pulse control) Photointerrupter (detects scanner home position) Photointerrupter (detects the state (open/closed) of copyboard cover) No. 1 mirror No. 2/No. 3 mirror
2-2 R
1.2 Sequence of Operations (original exposure)

1.2.1 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Closed
Copyboard cover opens Copyboard cover closes Start key ON
STBY SREADY SCFW SCRV STBY
Copyboard cover sensor (PS401) Scanner HP sensor (PS400) Scanning lamp (LAMP1) Scanner motor (M400)
Forward Reverse *1 *2 HP
Point of original size detection
Start position
Start position
*1: original size detection.*2: shading correction. F02-102-01
Stream reading Image leading Point of original Image Stop position (start position) HP edge size detection end position 1. The copyboard cover is opened. The scanner moves to the point of original size detection. 2. The copyboard cover is closed. When the original size has been detected, the scanner moves to home position. 3. The Start key is pressed. After shading correction, the scanner moves to start position. 4. The scanner scans the original. 5. The scanner returns to start position (at the speed used for 50% reduction). 6. The scanner moves to home position and remains in wait. : No. 1 mirror position.
F02-102-02
2-3 R
1.2.2 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Open

Copyboard cover open Start key ON
STBY SREADY SCFW SCRV STBY
Copyboard cover sensor (PS401) Scanner HP sensor (PS400) Scanning lamp (LAMP1) Scanner motor (M400)
Forward *1 Reverse *2
Point of original size detection
Start position
Point of original size detection Start position
*1: original size detection.*2: shading correction. F02-102-03
Image Stream reading leading Point of original Image Stop position position size detection end (start position) HP edge 1. The copyboard cover is opened. The scanner moves to the point of original detection. 2. The Start key is pressed. After the original size has been detected, the scanner moves to home position. 3. After shading correction in home position, the scanner moves to start position. 4. The scanner scans the original. 5. The scanner returns to start position (at the speed used for 50% reduction). 6. The scanner moves to the point of original size detection.
: No. 1 mirror base
F02-102-04
2-4 R
1.3 Enlargement/Reduction (zoom)

[1] When the copyboard cover is used, the ratio may be between 25% and 800% and the speed of the scanner is controlled. [2] When the ADF is used, the ratio may be between 25% and 400% and the speed of moving the originals is controlled.
1.3.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction

For main scanning direction, the original is read at 100% (for both copyboard and ADF); the size is changed by processing data in the main controller unit. [1] To reduce, data units are skipped when writing image data to the line memory. [2] To enlarge, data units are read multiple times when reading image data from the line memory.
1.3.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction

For sub scanning direction, the speed of the scanner/movement of the original is changed. However, for a reduction between 25% and 49% and enlargement between 401% and 800%, data processing in the main controller assembly is also used in combination. [1] For enlargement, the speed of the mirror/original is reduced from that used in Direct: e.g., at 200%, the speed is 1/2 of the speed used in Direct. [2] For reduction between 50% and 99%, the speed of the mirror/original is increased; e.g., at 50%, the speed is twice as high as that used in Direct.
(speed ratio) 2
1 1/2 1/4 (image ratio) 50% 100% 200% 400%
F02-103-01 [3] To reduce to between 25% and 49%, the image data read at 50% and 98% is subjected to skipping (1/2) in the main controller unit. [4] For an enlargement between 401% and 800%, image data read at 200% to 400% is sub-jected to repeating (doubling) in the main controller assembly.
2-5 R
2 Scanner Drive System

2.1 Outline
The following parts are associated with the scanner drive system.
[1]
[9] [4] [2] [3] [8] [7] [5] [6]
[10]
F02-201-01 [1] Scanner Motor (M3) Control Signal Used to turn on/off the motor and to control its direction and speed of rotation. [2] Scanner HP Sensor (PS39) Detection Signal Used to make sure that the No. 1 mirror base is at home position. [3] Copyboard Cover Sensor (PS40) Detection Signal Used to detect the state (open or close) of the copyboard cover. [4] Reader controller PCB [5] No.1 mirror base [6] Scanner motor [7] Scanner HP sensor [8] Copyboard cover sensor [9] Light-blocking plate [10] No.2 mirror base
2-6 R
2.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor

The system used to control the scanner motor is constructed as follows: The motor driver turns on/off the scanner motor and controls its direction and speed of rotation in keeping with the signals from the CPU and motor driver controller.

A
+24V
J401 1 5
Scanner motor M400
CPU Motor driver Motor driver contoroller

A* B
2 3 6
B*
F02-202-01
2.2.1 Controlling the Motor When Scanning an Image

When scanning an image, the motor is controlled as follows, thereby controlling the movement of the No. 1 mirror base unit:
Stream reading position (start position) HP Accelerate
Image leading edge Maintain
Image end Stop Decelerate
Travel speed
[1]
[2]
[3] Travel distance
[4]
[1] Acceleration. Used to accelerate until the speed most appropriate to the read ratio is attained. [2] Approach run. Used to ensure that speed stabilizes. [3] Image read. Used to read the image at a specific speed suited to the read ratio. [4] Deceleration. Used to enable the scanner to speed down and stop promptly, starting at the end of the image. F02-202-02
2-7 R
2.2.2 Reversing the Scanner After Scanning in Main Reading Direction

When the image has been scanned, the No. 1 mirror base is moved in reverse to home position at the speed used for 50% reduction, regardless of the ratio being used. E202 (HP detection error) [1] The No. 1 mirror base does not reach the HP sensor within a specific period of time. [2] The HP sensor identifies the presence of the No. 1 mirror base when the No. 1 mirror base should have been moved away. E204 (image leading edge detection error) [1] The ADF does not generate the image leading edge signal in stream reading mode. COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X (scanner image leading edge adjustment) Enter an appropriate value to adjust the image leading edge position. Range: 250 through 290 (a change of 1 causes a shift of 0.1 mm) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>SHDG-POS (shading position adjustment) Execute this mode if a white line still appears after executing COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>SH-PS-ST or after cleaning the scanner mechanisms. After entering a setting and executing COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>SH-PS-ST, check to make sure that OK is indicted. Thereafter, make a test print to be user that no white line is found in its halftone area. Range: 240 to 320 (a multiple of 8 causes a shift of about 0.17 mm)
Vertical size plate Copyboard glass Standard white plate Decrease Increase
Shading position Vertical size plate Copyboard glass
Standard white plate Increase Decrease
F02-202-03
F02-202-04
2-8 R
3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp (LA2)

3.1 Outline
The system used to control the scanning lamp is constructed as follows and the items of control include the following: [1] Turning on and off the scanning lamp. [2] Monitoring the scanning lamp for errors.
Inverter PCB Xenon lamp LAMP1 Activation control circuit J4021 J402 Reader controller +24V PCB 1 LAMP_ON 5 3 3 CPU 4 INV_ERR 2 2 4
F02-301-01
3.2 Scanning Lamp

The machines scanning lamp is a xenon lamp of a non-electrode discharge type, in which xenon gas is sealed in a tube. On the outside of the glass tube, two electrodes are arranged parallel to the tube axis, and the inner side of the glass tube is coated with fluorescent material. The internal gas discharges and, as a result, the fluorescent material glows when a highfrequency voltage is applied across the electrodes.
Electrode Electrode
Fluorescent material
Opening Glass tube
Electrode
Electrode
F02-302-01
3.3 Turning On/Off the Lamp

The scanning lamp is turned on/off in response to the drive signal (LAMP_ON) from the CPU on the reader controller PCB. When the signal is generated, the inverter generates a high-frequency voltage using the drive voltage (+24 V) supplied by the reader controller PCB to turn on the xenon tube.
2-9 R
3.4 Detecting an Error

The reader controller circuit generates the error signal (INV_ERR) in response to an error (e.g., output open, short circuit, leak) in the inverter circuit. A fault in the lamp (low intensity, activation failure) will be identified as an activation error caused by lack of intensity during initial activation (e.g., at time of shading correction). E220 It is used to indicate a fault in the inverter PCB. E225 It is used to indicate a fault in the scanning lamp (xenon tube).
2-10 R
4 Detecting the Size of Originals

4.1 Outline
The machine automatically identifies the size of originals based on the combination of intensities measured by reflection type sensors and CCD at specific points. For main scanning direction, the CCD is used to take measurements (if AB, 4 points; if Inch, 2 points). For sub scanning direction, a reflection type photosensor is used (1 point).
4.2 Points of Detection

For main scanning direction, the No. 1 mirror base is moved to the following points in relation to the position of the original to measure the intensity at each point. For sub scanning direction, on the other hand, measurements are taken while holding the sensor in place at a specific point. AB-Configuration
Original sensor
Inch-Configuration
Original sensor
Point of original detection 1 B5R Point of original A4R detection 2 Point of original B5 B4 detection 3 Point of original A4 detection 4 Point of CCD original detection
Point of original detection 1 A3 Point of original LTR detection 2
LTRR
LGL
279.4431.8mm (11"17")
Point of CCD original detection
F02-402-01
4.3 Outline of Detection

The machine identifies the size of originals in the following two steps: [1] Detecting External Light (main scanning direction only) While keeping the scanning lamp off, the CCD level at each point of detection in main scanning direction is measured. A point at which external light is detected will be identified as indicating the absence of an original, enabling the identification of the width of an original. [2] Detecting the Sensor Output Level The scanning lamp is turned on, and the CCD level at each point of detection in main scanning direction is measured. In addition, the reflection type photosensor in sub scanning direction is turned on to measure the sensor output. The combination of these output measurements is used to identify the size of the original. For specific movements, see the pages that follow.
2-11 R
4.4 Outline of Detection Operation

4.4.1 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Open
Xenon lamp Original sensor
Copyboard cover Reader unit
Point of original detection 1 Point of original detection 2 Point of original detection 3 Point of original detection 4 Copyboard glass Point of original detection
[1] The scanner remains in wait. No. 1 mirror base: at HP Xenon lamp: off Original sensor: disabled
(external light)
[2] The copyboard is opened. Detection starts of external light in main scanning direction. No. 1 mirror base: to point of original detection Xenon lamp: off Original sensor: disabled [3] An original is placed. The width of the original is identified in relation to the presence/absence of external light; here, the absence of an original is identified at points in question, eliminating B5, B4, A4, and A3.
Original (A4R) (external light)
F02-404-01
[4] The Start key is pressed. In response, original detection is started. For main scanning direction, the xenon lamp is turned on to check for reflected light by the CCD (4 points). For sub scanning direction, the original sensor starts detection. The absence of external light is identified as indicating the absence of an original. The machine will identify the size of an original based on the combination of the results (T02-404-01)
2-12 R

AB-Configuration
Originals size Point of CCD detection Original sensor
Inch-Configuration
Originals Point of CCD detection size Originals sensor
A3 B4 A4R A4 B5 B5R None
11"17" LGL LTRR LTR None : reflection present : reflection absent
T02-404-01
4.4.2 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Close

Xenon lamp Original sensor
Copyboard cover Reader unit
Point of original detection 1 Point of original detection 2 Point of original detection 3 Point of original detection 4 Copyboard glass Point of original detection
[1] The scanner remains in wait. No. 1 mirror base: HP Xenon lamp: off Original sensor: disabled
(external light)
[2] The copyboard cover is opened. Detection starts of external light in main scanning direction. No. 1 mirror base: to point of original detection Xenon lamp: off Original sensor: disabled
Original (A4R) (external light)
[3] An original is set. The width of an original is identified in terms of the presence or absence of external light; here, the external light is blocked and the absence of an original is identified, excluding B5, B4, A4, and A3.
2-13 R
25
[4] The copyboard cover is closed. When the copyboard cover is brought down to 25, the Copyboard cover sensor detects the closed state, and original size detection starts. For main scanning direction, the xenon lamp is turned on, and the CCD checks for reflected light (4 points). For sub scanning direction, the original sensor starts detection. [5] The copyboard cover is fully closed. The changes in the output level of each sensor are monitored until the copyboard cover is fully closed. The absence of a change is identified as indicating the absence of paper, and the size of the original is identified based on the combination of changes in level at five points (T02-40402). [6] The scanner remains in wait (for a press on the Start key). The No. 1 mirror base moves to home position, and the scanner waits for a press on the Start key (wait state). F02-404-02
AB-Configuration
Originals size
Inch-Configuration
Original sensor Originals Point of CCD detection size Original sensor
Point of CCD detection 1 2 3 4
A3 B4 A4R A4 B5 B5R None
11"* 17" LGL LTRR LTR None

: Changes : Does not changes
T02-404-02
2-14 R
5 Disassembly and Assembly

The discussions that follow cover the machines mechanical characteristics and how to disassemble/assemble the machine. Keep the following in mind whenever you work with the machine: 1. The power plug must remain disconnected for safety when disassembling/assembling the machine.
2. Unless otherwise noted, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4. The mounting screws used for the grounding wire and the varistors come with a washer, which must not be left out when assembling the machine. 5. As a rule, the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed.
2-15 R
5.1 Exposure Lamp

5.1.1 Removing the Exposure Lamp
Do not start to work if the lamp is hot. Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of the lamp. Do not subject the lamp to impact. Do not touch the light window of the lamp without a means of protection. Do not impose force on the lamp. If the surface of the lamp is soiled, dry wipe it. 1) Remove the copyboard glass. (p. 3-11R) 2) Remove the reader front cover (2 screws) and the reader rear cover (5 screws). 3) While taking care not to hold the scanning lamp [1] and the reflecting shade [2], move the No. 1 mirror base [3] as far as the cut-off in the frame. 4) Remove the three screws [4] from the No. 1 mirror base, and detach the scanning lamp [1] together with the cable fixing plate [5].
[5]
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
[1] [4]
F02-501-01 5) Remove the screw [1], and detach the connector cover [2] found at the rear.
[1] [2]
F02-501-02 2-16 R
6) Disconnect the connector [1]. 7) Remove the screw [2], and detach the cable fixing plate [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
F02-501-03 8) Push the No. 1 mirror base, and move the No. 2 mirror base [1] as far as the cut-off in the frame; then, free the cable [3] from the pulley [2]. When mounting the lamp, take care not to twist the cable [3].
[2] [3]
[1]
F02-501-04
5.1.2 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp

Execute CCD auto adjust in service mode, and record the updated CCD adjustment data on the service label. 1.COPIER>FUNCTION> CCD>CCD-ADJ CCD Auto Adjust 2. All items under COPIER>ADJUST>CCD. CCD Adjustment Data
2-17 R
5.2 Scanner Drive Assembly

5.2.1 Removing the Scanner Motor
1) Remove the copyboard glass. (p. 3-11R) 2) Disconnect the connector [1]. 3) Remove the spring [2].
[2]
[1]
F02-502-01 4) Remove the two screws [1]. 5) Detach the belt, and remove the motor unit [2].
[2]
[1]
F02-502-02 6) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the scanner motor [3] from the motor mounting plate [2].
[1] [3]
[2]
[1]
F02-502-03 2-18 R
5.2.2 Mounting the Motor Unit

1) Engage the pulley [2] of the motor unit [1] with the belt [3]. 2) Using two screws [4], mount the motor unit [1] temporarily. 3) Fit the spring [5] to apply tension to the belt [3]. 4) Check to make sure that the belt [3] is vertical.
[4] [6] [1]
[3]
[2] [5]
F02-502-04 5) While taking care not to hold the scanning lamp [1] or the reflecting shade [2], move the No. 1 mirror base [3] back and forth two to three times to make a check once again.
[3] [2]
[1]
F02-502-05 6) Tighten the two screws to secure the motor unit in place.
2-19 R
5.2.3 Removing the Scanner Drive Cable

When replacing the cable, be sure to obtain the following: Mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009)
1) Remove the reader upper frame. (p. 3-14R) 2) Remove the two cable fixing screws [2] of the No. 1 mirror base [1]. 3) Remove the spring [3] used to secure the cable in place. 4) Remove the cable fixing plate [4], and free the cable [5] from the pulleys.
[2] [1]
[4]
[2]
[3] [5]
F02-502-06
2-20 R
5.2.4 Routing the Scanner Drive Cable

Route the scanner cable as follows to the pulleys and the hook mirror base: 1) Loosen the screw on the cable fixing plate. 2) Put the ball of the cable into the hole in the drive pulley, and wind the cable firmly so that it will not turn idly (4 runs inside, 5 runs outside); then, tape it in place. At this time, check to make sure that the cable fixing is on the inside. 3) Engage the cable with each pulley, and temporarily fix one of its ends to the cable fixing plate and the other to the hook on the reader frame. 4) Temporarily secure the cable fixing in place to the No. 1 mirror base. (Do not tighten the screw fully.) 5) Fit the reader upper frame. 6) Adjust the position of the No. 1 and No. 2 mirror bases.
F02-502-07
2-21 R
5.2.5 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base

1) Set the pins of the mirror positioning tool as indicated: For the Front (F marking)
[C] [B] [A] [B] [C] [A]
(initial; FY9-3009) F02-502-08 For the Rear (R marking)

[C] [B] [A]
(set for the machine)
[A] [C] [B]
(initial; FY9-3009) F02-502-09
2-22 R
2) Fit the pins of the mirror positioning tool (front [2], rear [3]) into the holes [1] of the rail and the No. 1/No. 2 mirror base. The No. 2 mirror base is adjusted in keeping with the back-andfroth movement of the cable fixing plate. Front Side (F marking)
[2]
[1]
F02-502-10 Rear Side (R marking)

[3]
[1]
F02-502-11 3) Fix the end of the cable (which is temporarily secured on the hook of the reader frame) in place using the spring. 4) Fully tighten the screw on the cable fixing plate. 5) Fully tighten the screw on the cable fixing so that it is secured on the No. 1 mirror base. 6) Detach the mirror positioning tool (2 pc.).
2-23 R
5.3 Sensors
5.3.1 Removing the Original Detection Unit
1) Remove the copyboard glass. (p. 3-11R) 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the motor shield plate [2]. 3) Disconnect the connector [3]. 4) Remove the six screws [4], and detach the CCD shield plate [5].
[5] [1]
[4]
[3] [4] [2]
[4]
F02-503-01 5) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the connector [2]. 6) Shift the original detection unit [3] to the rear to detach. When removing it, be sure to take full care not to damage the cable [5].
[4] [1] [3]
[2]
F02-503-02
5.3.2 Removing the HP Sensor

1) Remove the reader rear cover (5 screws). 2) Remove the left support cover. 3) Remove the two harness bands [1]. 4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the sensor mounting plate [2].
[1] [3]
[2]
F02-503-03 2-24 R
4) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the HP sensor [2] from the sensor mounting plate.
[1]
[2]
F02-503-04
5.3.3 Removing the Original Cover Sensor

1) Remove the reader rear cover (5 screws). 2) Disconnect the connector [1]. 3) Remove the screw [2], and detach the copyboard sensor cover [3]. 4) Remove the copyboard cover sensor [4].
[4] [1] [3] [2]
F02-503-05
2-25 R
5.4 PCBs
5.4.1 Removing the Inverter PCB
1) Remove the reader rear cover (5 screws). 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the connector cover [2] found at the rear.
[1]
[2]
F02-504-01 3) Disconnect the two connectors [3].

[3]
[3]
F02-504-02 4) Remove the two screws [1], and slide out the inverter unit [2].
[2]
[1]
F02-504-03 5) Disconnect the connector [1]. 6) Remove the two screws [2], and slide out the inverter PCB [3].
[2] [3]
[1]
F02-504-04 2-26 R
1 Outline
The major functions of the image processing system are as follows: [1] CCD (image sensor) Number of lines: 1 Number of pixels: 7450 Size of pixel: 4.7 4.7 m [2] Shading Correction Shading adjustment: executed in service mode Shading correction: executed for each copy [3] Auto Density Adjustment (AE) Executed for each line in main scanning direction. The image processing system consists of the following functional blocks:
Analog image processing block CCD Analog image processing CCD PCB A/D conve -rsion Digital image processing block Shading processing Auto density correction (AE) Reader controller PCB Controller unit
F03-100-01 Each of the PCBs used in the image processing system has the following functions: [1] CCD/AP PCB. Drives the CCD, performs analog image processing, performs A/D conversion. [2] Reader controller PCB. Performs shading correction, performs auto density adjustment (AE).
3-1 R
2 Analog Image Processing

2.1 Outline
Analog image processing is performed by the CCD PCB and the reader controller PCB, which has the following major functions: [1] [2] [3] [4] Drives the CCD. Corrects the gain in the CCD output, corrects offset. Performs parallel/serial conversion of CCD output. Performs A/D conversion of CCD output.
12V 5V
J403
CCD PCB CCD driver CCD

J407
CCD drive signal

J408
Gain correction Offset correction Parallel/serial conversion
Analog image signal
A/D conver -sion
Digital image signal

8
Digital image processing block
Odd-number Even-number pixels pixels Analog image signal
F03-201-01
2.2 Driving the CCD

The machines CCD sensor is a single-line linear image sensor, and is composed of 7450 pixel photo cells. The signals subjected to phtoconversion in the light-receiving segment are sent out in two types of analog signals: even-number (EVEN) pixels and odd-number (ODD) pixels.
Output buffer Shift register Gate Light receiving segment (photodiode) Shift register 6 5 4 3 Gate Even-number pixel data Output buffer 2 1 Odd-number pixel data
F03-202-01 CCD Block Diagram
3-2 R
2.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output

To correct discrepancies in the efficiency of photoconversion among pixels, the analog video signals from the CCD are corrected: in gain correction, the rates of amplification are standardized; in offset correction, on the other hand, the output voltage in the absence of incoming light is set to a specific level.
2.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output

The analog video signals of odd-number and even-number pixels after correction are converted into 8-bit digital signals that correspond to specific pixel voltage levels by the A/D converter. COPIER/ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y (CCD read start position adjustment) It is used to adjust the parameter used determining the read start position in main scanning direction. Range: 0 to 400 (A change by 1 results in a shift of 0.1 mm.)
Decrease Increase Original Read start position
Vertical size plate
F03-205-01
3-3 R
3 Digital Image Processing

3.1 Outline
Digital image processing is performed by the reader controller PCB, which has the following major functions: [1] Shading correction [2] Auto density adjustment (AE)
Reader controller PCB EEP-ROM CPU

Gain/offset correction data
Target value SRAM

J409
Analog image processing block
digital image signal

8
Shading correction Auto density correction (AE) Serial/parallel conversion
Even-number pixel digital image 8 signal Odd-number 8 pixel
F03-301-01
3.2 Shading Correction

3.2.1 Outline
The output of the CCD will not necessarily be uniform because of the following factors even if the density of the original in question is perfectly uniform: 1) The level of sensitivity of a CCD pixel differs from that of another. 2) The level of penetration of light differs between the center and the periphery of a lens. 3) The intensity of the scanning lamp differs between the middle and the ends of the lamp. 4) The scanning lamp is subject to deterioration. Shading correction is executed to correct discrepancies in the output of the CCD, and it may be of either of the following two: shading adjustment used to determine a target level in service mode and shading correction executed when scanning each original. To make up for the fluctuations in the intensity of light occurring at short intervals, edge area gain correction is also executed.
3-4 R
3.2.2 Shading Adjustment

In this adjustment, the density of white paper and that of the standard white plate are measured, and the results are stored in memory. The data is computed for use as the target level during shading correction. The adjustment is designed for service mode and is used upon installation of the machine, after replacement of the scanning lamp, or when correcting changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp occurring over time.
3.2.3 Shading Correction

This correction is executed each time an original is scanned. The density of the standard white plate is measured and the result is compared against the target value stored in the shading correction circuit. The difference is used as the shading correction value, which will be used to correct the variation in CCD pixels, thereby ensuring a specific level of image density.
CCD output
Characteristics after correction Characteristics before correction
Target value Results of measurement
White Original density Standard white plate
F03-302-01
3-5 R
3.2.4 Edge Gain Correction (ADF in use)

In stream reading with the ADF in use, the No. 1 mirror base is fixed in position. To check for changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp, the edge gain correction plate (gray; mounted at the edge of read position) is read, and a gain that enables the attainment of a specific intensity is computed. The result is used to correct the data which otherwise would be affected by changes in the intensity of light.
Edge gain correction plate 1 pixel Copyboard glass Main scanning direction Reading glass 7450 pixels Standard white plate (for shading)
F03-302-02
3-6 R
3.3 Auto Density Adjustment (AE)

3.3.1 Outline
As in the case of a newspaper, some originals have a dark background. Auto density correction is executed to reproduce the information (text, graphics) of such originals by removing the background. This adjustment is enabled in density auto mode or when text mode is selected and data is processed by the ABC circuit.
3.3.2 ABC Circuit

A colored background is identified as being white by changing the height of the dynamic range according to the chromatic level of the background as shown in the following figure for the CCD output level (8-it) of digital image signals (A/D converted).
White Background Original Surface of original
Colored Original
FFh (white)
Output level
00h (black)
A B
FFh (white) 00h (black)
A : dynamic range of white-background original. B : dynamic range of colored-background original.
F03-303-01
3-7 R
3.4 Related Service Mode

COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ (shading auto adjustment) Execute the mode after replacing the CCD unit, scanning lamp, reader controller PCB, or standard white plate. COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>PPR (density data of standard white paper) COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>PLT (density data of standard white plate) COPIER>AJDUST>CCD>GAIN-E/O (gain adjustment input of CCD output) COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>OFST-E/O (offset adjustment input of CCD output) COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>SH_RATIO (white level ratio data of standard white plate and standard white paper during shading correction) If a faulty image is generated after executing shading auto adjustment, enter the parameter values indicated on the service label. COPIER>ADJUST>AE>AE-TBL (text density adjustment for realtime AE mode) Use it to change the parameter for adjustment of the density correction curve (for real-time AE mode; 10 steps). Range: 0 to 9 (default: 4)
Copy density White
Lower setting decreases text density
Higher setting increases text density
White Original density
F03-304-01
3-8 R

3-9 R
4.1 External Covers

4.1.1 External Covers
Remove the covers as follows when cleaning, checking, or repairing the inside of the machine: Those covers that can be detached by merely removing the mounting screws are left out of the discussions.
[4] [3] [2] [1] [5] [6] [7]
REF.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
Reader front cover (2 screws) Reader left cover (2 screws) Reading glass Guide base (3 screws) Left support cover Reader rear cover (5 screws) Right support cover Reader right cover (2 screws) Copyboard glass
[9]
[8]
F03-401-01
4.1.2 Removing the Reader Right Cover

1) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the reader right cover [2]. When mounting the reader right cover [2], loosen the top screw [4] of the right rear cover [3] first.
[1] [1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
F03-401-02
3-10 R
4.1.3 Removing the Copyboard Glass

1) Remove the reader right cover. (See item 4.1.2.) 2) Remove the copyboard glass [1]. When mounting, butt the copyboard glass [1] against the vertical/horizontal size plate [2]. If not done properly, the shadow of the size plate will appear on images made in enlargement mode. (After mounting, make an 800% enlargement copy to check.) F03-401-03
[2]
[1]
4.1.4 After Mounting the Copyboard Glass

Execute 'optimum position auto adjustment on standard white plate' in service mode. COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD> SH-PS-ST Use it to execute optimum position auto adjustment for the standard white plate.
3-11 R
4.2 CCDs
4.2.1 Removing the CCD Unit
1) Remove the original detection unit. (p. 2-24R) 2) Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]. 3) Disconnect the connector [3] of the scanner motor, and detach the harness. 4) Shift the CCD unit [4] to the left.
[1]
[4] [3]
[1]
[2]
F03-402-01 5) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and detach the CCD unit [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
F03-402-02
3-12 R
4.2.2 Points to Note When Replacing the CCD Unit

Execute CCD auto adjustment and edge gain correction position auto adjustment in service mode; then, record the updated CCD adjustment data on the service label. 1) COPIER>FUNCTION> CCD>CCD-ADJ CCD Auto Adjustment 2) COPIER>FUNCTION> CCD>EGGN-POS Edge Gain Correction Auto Adjustment 3) all items under COPIER>ADJUST>CCD CCD Adjustment Data
3-13 R
4.3 Frames
4.3.1 Removing the Left ADF Base Unit
1) Remove the reader rear cover (5 screws) and the left support cover. 2) Remove the rear cover (7 screws) of the printer unit. (See the descriptions for the printer unit.) 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the harness [2]. 4) Remove the four screws [3], and detach the left ADF base unit [4].
[3]
[4]
[1] [2] [3]
F03-403-01
4.3.2 Removing the Reader Upper Frame

1) Remove the left ADF base unit. (See item 4.3.1.) 2) Remove the two screws [1] from the top face. 3) Remove the 15 screws [2] from the side face. 4) Remove the reader upper frame [3].
[2] [2]
[1] [3] [2]
[2] [1] [2] [2]
[2]
F03-403-02
3-14 R
4.3.3 Mounting the Reader Upper Frame

1) Fit the eight claws [2] of the reader frame [1] (circled) into the cut-offs [4] in the reader upper frame [3]; take care so that the engagement is secure. 2) Fit the eight screws [5] of the claw assembly first. 3) Fit the seven screws [6] of the side. 4) Lastly, fit the two screws [7] on the top face.
[2] [4] [5] [6] [7] [3]
[5] [6] [5] [6]
[5]
[6] [5]
[5] [7] [6] [1] [5] [5]
[6]
F03-403-03
3-15 R
4.4 PCBs
4.4.1 Removing the Reader Controller PCB
See the descriptions for the printer unit.
4.4.2 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB

See Troubleshooting>Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Image Faults/Malfunctions >6.7 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB
3-16 R
PRINTER UNIT
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1 Safety .............................................. 1-1P 1.1 Safety of Laser Light ............... 1-1P 1.2 CDRH Ordinances ................... 1-1P 1.3 Handling the Laser System ...... 1-3P 1.4 Safety of Toner ......................... 1-4P 2 Image Formation System ............... 1-5P 2.1 Outline ..................................... 1-5P
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

1 Basic Operations ............................ 2-1P 1.1 Functional Construction .......... 2-1P 1.2 Outline for the Electrical Circuitry ................................... 2-2P 1.2.1 Outline ............................... 2-2P 1.2.2 DC Controller PCB ............ 2-2P 1.3 Basic Sequence of Operations ................................ 2-3P Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ... 2-3P 1.4 Controlling the Main Motor (M2) ......................................... 2-5P 1.4.1 Outline ............................... 2-5P 1.5 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs ........................ 2-6P 1.5.1 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs ....................... 2-6P 1.3.1
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

1 Outline of Operations ..................... 3-1P 1.1 Outline ..................................... 3-1P 1.2 Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system) ............ 3-3P 2 Generating Sync Signals ................. 3-3P 2.1 Outline ...................................... 3-3P 2.2 Flow of Sync signals ................ 3-4P 3 Laser Driver Circuit ........................ 3-5P 3.1 Controlling the Laser Unit ........ 3-5P 4 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor .............................................. 3-7P 4.1 Outline ...................................... 3-7P 5 Disassembly and Assembly ............ 3-8P 5.1 Laser Scanner Assembly .......... 3-9P 5.1.1 Removing the Laser Unit .......... 3-9P
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

1 Outline of Processes ....................... 4-1P 1.1 Outline ..................................... 4-1P 1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations (image formation system) ......... 4-3P 2 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias ...................................... 4-4P 2.1 Outline ...................................... 4-4P 2.2 Turning On/Off the Bias ........... 4-5P 2.2.1 DC Bias ............................. 4-5P P1
CONTENTS
2.2.2 AC Bias ............................. 4-5P 2.3 Controlling the Current Voltage/ Current to a Specific Level ....... 4-5P 2.3.1 Controlling the DC Bias to a Specific Level .............. 4-5P 2.3.2 Controlling the AC Bias to a Specific Current Level ..... 4-5P 2.4 Temperature Correction of the DC Bias .............................. 4-6P 2.5 Humidity Correction of the AC Bias .................................... 4-6P 2.6 Controlling the Detection of the Photosensitive Drum Resistance (APVC control) ...... 4-7P Controlling the Transfer Charging Roller Bias ...................................... 4-9P 3.1 Outline ...................................... 4-9P 3.2 Turning On/Off the Bias ......... 4-10P 3.3 Controlling the Detection of the Transfer Charging Roller Resistance (ATVC control) .... 4-10P 3.4 Controlling the Output by Operating Mode ..................... 4-11P 3.4.1 Types of Modes ............... 4-11P 3.4.2 Turning On/Off the Cleaning Bias ................... 4-12P 3.5 Controlling the Output ............ 4-13P Controlling the Separation Static Eliminator Bias .................... 4-14P 4.1 Outline .................................... 4-14P 4.2 Turning On/Off the Bias ......... 4-15P 4.3 Controlling the Bias to a Specific Voltage Level ............. 4-15P 4.4 Controlling the Output by Paper Type and Environment Sensor (humidity) ................... 4-15P Controlling the Transfer Guide Bias .................................... 4-16P 5.1 Transfer Guide Bias ............... 4-16P Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism .................... 4-17P 6.1 Outline .................................... 4-17P Developing Assembly ................... 4-18P 7.1 Outline .................................... 4-18P
7.2 Controlling the Developing Bias ........................................ 4-19P 7.2.1 Outline ............................. 4-19P 7.2.2 Controlling the DC Developing Bias ............... 4-20P 7.2.3 Controlling the AC Developing Bias ............... 4-20P 7.2.4 Controlling the Level of the DC Developing Bias .. 4-20P 7.3 Detecting the Level of Toner .................................. 4-21P 8 Drum Cleaner ............................... 4-22P 8.1 Outline .................................... 4-22P 8.2 Monitoring the Waste Toner Case .............................. 4-24P 8.3 Locking of the Waste Toner Feedscrew .............................. 4-25P 9 Disassembly and Assembly .......... 4-26P 9.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit ....... 4-27P 9.1.1 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit ........................ 4-27P 9.2 Photosensitive Drum .............. 4-28P 9.2.1 Removing the Drum Unit 4-28P 9.2.2 Cleaning the Photosensitive Drum ................................ 4-29P 9.3 Transfer Charging Roller ....... 4-30P 9.3.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller ................ 4-30P 9.4 Charging Roller Solenoid ....... 4-31P 9.4.1 Removing the Charging Roller Solenoid (SL6) ...... 4-31P 9.5 Developing Assembly ............ 4-33P 9.5.1 Removing the Developing Assembly ......................... 4-33P 9.5.2 Removing the Grip Assembly ......................... 4-34P 9.5.3 Removing the Toner Sensor .............................. 4-34P 9.5.4 Removing the Developing Assembly Upper Cover ... 4-34P 9.5.5 Removing the Blade Base Unit ......................... 4-35P 9.5.6 Removing the Developing Cylinder ........ 4-35P
P2
CONTENTS
Positioning the Developing Assembly Magnetic Seal .. 4-38P 9.5.8 Mounting the Developing Assembly Blade ............... 4-38P 9.6 Removing the Paper Lint ........ 4-39P 9.6.1 Removing the Paper Lint ......................................... 4-39P
9.5.7
When Removing the Paper Lint ......................... 4-39P 9.7 Waste Toner Case ................... 4-40P 9.7.1 Replacing the Waste Toner Case ....................... 4-40P 9.7.2 Cleaning the Waste Toner Case ....................... 4-41P
9.6.2
CHAPTER 5 PICKUP/FEEDING SYSTEM

1 Outline ............................................ 5-1P 1.1 Specifications and Construction ............................. 5-1P 1.2 Arrangement of Rollers ............ 5-2P 1.3 Arrangement of Motors, Clutches, and Solenoids ........... 5-3P 1.4 Arrangement of Sensors ........... 5-4P 2 Detecting Jams ................................ 5-5P 2.1 Sequence of Operations (jam detection) .......................... 5-5P 2.1.1 Delay Jam .......................... 5-5P 2.1.2 Stationary Jam .................... 5-7P 2.1.3 Jam History ........................ 5-7P 3 Pickup Assembly ............................ 5-8P 3.1 Pickup Control System ............. 5-8P 3.2 Outline ...................................... 5-9P 3.3 Sequence of Operations (pickup) .................................. 5-10P 3.4 Operation of the Cassette Lifter ....................................... 5-11P 3.4.1 Operation of the Lifter During Printing ................ 5-11P 3.4.2 Releasing the Lifter .......... 5-12P 3.5 Cassette Pickup Operation ...... 5-13P 3.5.1 Rotating the Pickup Roller ............................... 5-13P 3.5.2 Switching the Pickup Roller Drive ..................... 5-13P 3.5.3 Pickup Roller Shaft Reference ......................... 5-13P 3.6 Moving Up/Down the Pickup Roller .......................... 5-15P 3.7 Pickup Retry Operation .......... 5-16P Conditions for Detecting a Delay ............................. 5-16P 3.7.2 Paper Retraction ............... 5-17P 3.8 Operation Other Than Cassette Pickup (standby) .................... 5-18P 3.8.1 Moving Up the Lifter/Moving Down the Pickup Roller Shaft (cassette slid in) ............... 5-18P 3.8.2 Moving Up the Pickup Roller Shaft and Releasing the Separation Roller Pressure (cassette slid out) .............. 5-20P 3.9 Detecting the Level of Paper .... 5-22P 3.10 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper Inside the Cassette .... 5-23P 4 Identifying the Size of Paper ......... 5-24P 4.1 Identifying the Size ................. 5-24P 4.2 AB-/Inch-Setting Switch ........ 5-24P 4.3 Paper Size ............................... 5-25P 4.4 Paper Size List ........................ 5-26P 5 Multifeeder ................................... 5-27P 5.1 Outline .................................... 5-27P 5.2 Identifying the Size of Paper in the Multifeeder ................... 5-28P 5.2.1 Detecting the Width of Paper ................................ 5-28P 5.2.2 Rear/Front Registration .... 5-28P 5.2.3 Identifying the Length of Paper ............................ 5-28P 6 Controlling the Registration Roller ............................................ 5-29P 6.1 Outline .................................... 5-29P 6.2 Control System ....................... 5-29P P3 3.7.1
CONTENTS
Double-Sided Printing .................. 5-30P 7.1 Through-Path Operation ......... 5-30P 7.2 Outline of Operations ............. 5-31P 7.3 Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position .............. 5-33P 7.3.1 Outline ............................. 5-33P 7.3.2 Operation ......................... 5-34P 8 Controlling the Pickup Assembly Motor ........................... 5-35P 8.1 Pickup Assembly Motor ......... 5-35P 9 Disassembly and Assembly .......... 5-36P 9.1 Pickup Assembly .......................... 5-37P 9.1.1 Removing the Pickup Assembly ......................... 5-37P 9.1.2 Removing the Pickup/Feeding/ Separation Rollers ........... 5-38P 9.1.3 Removing the Pickup Solenoid ........................... 5-38P 9.1.4 Removing the Frame Lid .................................... 5-39P 9.1.5 Removing the Pickup Motor ............................... 5-40P 9.1.6 Remove the Vertical Path Cultch ....................... 5-40P 9.1.7 Removing the Horizontal Registration Sensor Shift Motor ...................... 5-41P
Checking the Image Rear Front Position .......... 5-42P 9.1.9 Adjusting the Cassette Rear Front Registration ............ 5-42P 9.2 Multifeeder Tray Assembly ... 5-44P 9.2.1 Removing the Multifeeder Tray Assembly ................. 5-44P 9.2.2 Removing the Pickup Cover ............................... 5-45P 9.2.3 Removing the Multifeeder Tray Pickup Roller ........... 5-45P 9.2.4 Removing the Separation Pad ................. 5-46P 9.2.5 Attaching the Timing Belt of the Multifeeder Tray .... 5-47P 9.2.6 Checking the Image Rear Front Position .................. 5-47P 9.2.7 Adjusting the Registration for the Multifeeder Rear Front ................................ 5-47P 9.3 Feeding Assembly .................. 5-49P 9.3.1 Removing the Feeding Assembly ......................... 5-49P 9.3.2 Mounting the Feeding Assembly ......................... 5-50P 9.4 Registration Roller Assembly . 5-51P 9.4.1 Removing the Registration Roller ............................... 5-51P
9.1.8
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

1 Outline of Operations ..................... 6-1P 1.1 Outline ..................................... 6-1P 2 Fixing Drive System ...................... 6-4P 2.1 Outline ..................................... 6-4P 2.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Drive .............................. 6-4P 2.3 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed ............................... 6-5P 3 Controlling the Fixing Temperature 6-6P 3.1 Outline ...................................... 6-6P 3.2 Temperature Control ................. 6-7P Fixing Temperature Control ............................... 6-8P 3.3 Detecting Errors ....................... 6-9P 4 Disassembly and Assembly .......... 6-11P 4.1 Fixing Assembly .................... 6-12P 4.1.1 Removing the Delivery Cover ............................... 6-12P 4.1.2 Removing the Riser Guide ............................... 6-12P 4.1.3 Removing the Fixing Assembly ......................... 6-13P 3.2.1
P4
CONTENTS
4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6
Removing the Fixing Stepped Gear .................... 6-13P Removing the Fixing Film Unit .......................... 6-13P Removing the Roller Bushing, Conducting Rubber, and Fixing Roller .................... 6-14P
Removing the Cleaning Roller Unit ....................... 6-16P 4.1.8 Removing the Lower Guide Ribs ....................... 6-16P 4.1.9 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit ........................ 6-17P 4.1.10 Mounting the Locking Cam Unit .......................... 6-17P
4.1.7
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS

1 2 Control Panel .................................. 7-1P 1.1 Outline ..................................... 7-1P Fans ................................................ 7-2P 2.1 Arrangement, Functions, and Error Codes ....................... 7-2P 2.2 Operation .................................. 7-4P 2.2.1 2-Speed Control ................. 7-4P 2.2.2 Sequence of Operations ..... 7-4P Power Supply ................................. 7-5P 3.1 Power Supply ........................... 7-5P 3.1.1 Outline ............................... 7-5P 3.1.2 Power Outputs ................... 7-7P 3.2 Rated Outputs of the Main Power Supply PCB .................. 7-8P 3.3 Rated Output of the Composite Power Supply PCB .................. 7-8P 3.4 Rated Outputs of the Accessories Power Supply PCB .................. 7-9P 3.5 Protective Functions ............... 7-10P Others ........................................... 7-11P 4.1 Silent Mode ............................ 7-11P Disassembly and Assembly .......... 7-12P 5.1 External Covers ...................... 7-13P 5.1.1 Removing the Front Cover ............................... 7-14P 5.1.2 Removing the Inside Cover ............................... 7-14P 5.1.3 Removing the Support Cover ............................... 7-15P 5.2 Control Panel .......................... 7-16P 5.2.1 Removing the Control Panel ................................ 7-16P 5.3 PCBs ...................................... 7-17P 5.3.1 Removing the DC Controller PCB ................ 7-17P 5.3.2 Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB .... 7-17P 5.3.3 Removing the Controller Cover ............................... 7-17P 5.3.4 Removing the HDD ......... 7-18P 5.3.5 Removing the HDD Unit .................................. 7-19P 5.3.6 Removing the Controller Box Unit .......................... 7-19P 5.3.7 Removing the Reader Controller PCB ................ 7-20P 5.3.8 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ................ 7-20P 5.3.9 Removing the Main Controller PCB ................ 7-20P 5.3.10 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB ................ 7-21P 5.3.11 Removing the Composite Power Supply .................. 7-21P 5.3.12 Removing the Accessories Power Supply ................... 7-21P 5.3.13 Removing the Main Power Supply .................. 7-22P
4 5
P5
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-L1

1.1 Pickup ...................................... 8-1P 1.1.1 Outline ............................... 8-1P 1.1.2 Pickup Operation ............... 8-1P 1.1.3 Sequence of Pickup Operations (deck) ............... 8-3P 1.2 Detecting Paper in the Deck ..... 8-4P 1.2.1 Detecting the Presence/ Absence of Paper ............... 8-4P 1.2.2 Switching the Deck Paper Size .......................... 8-4P 1.2.3 Detecting the Level of Paper in the Deck ............... 8-5P 1.3 Deck Lifter ............................... 8-6P 1.3.1 Detecting the Presence/ Absence of Paper ............... 8-6P 1.3.2 Indicating the Level of Paper (deck front cover) ..... 8-8P 1.4 Opening/Closing of the Compartment ........................... 8-9P 1.4.1 Opening/Closing of the Compartment .....................8-9P 1.4.2 Sequence of Operations (opening/closing of the compartment) ................... 8-10P 1.5 Controlling the Deck Motor ..... 8-11P 1.5.1 Controlling the Deck Main Motor (M1D) ......... 8-11P 1.5.2 Controlling the Deck Lifter Motor (M2D) ......... 8-12P 2 Detecting Jams .............................. 8-14P 2.1 Outline .................................... 8-14P 3 Disassembly and Assembly .......... 8-16P 3.1 External Covers ...................... 8-17P 3.1.1 Sliding Out the Compartment .................... 8-17P 3.1.2 Removing the Front Cover ............................... 8-18P 3.1.3 Removing the Rear Cover ............................... 8-20P 3.1.4 Removing the Right Cover ............................... 8-21P 3.1.5 Removing the Front Upper Cover .................... 8-21P P6 Removing the Upper Cover ............................... 8-22P 3.2 Paper Deck Body ................... 8-23P 3.2.1 Removing the Deck from the Host Machine ............. 8-23P 3.2.2 Removing the Compartment .................... 8-25P 3.2.3 Changing the Deck Paper Size .................................. 8-27P 3.2.4 After Changing the Deck Paper Size ........................ 8-27P 3.2.5 Checking the Image Rear Front Position .................. 8-28P 3.2.6 Adjusting the Cassette Rear Front Registration ............ 8-28P 3.2.7 Adjusting the Registration for the Deck ..................... 8-29P 3.2.8 Adjusting the Position of the Support Member ........ 8-29P 3.3 Drive System .......................... 8-30P 3.3.1 Removing the Deck Pickup Clutch (CL2D) ..... 8-30P 3.3.2 Removing the Deck Feeding Clutch (CL1D) ... 8-30P 3.3.3 Removing the Deck Main Motor (M1D) ......... 8-31P 3.3.4 Removing the Deck Lifter Motor (M2D) ......... 8-31P 3.3.5 Removing the Lifter Cable (deck front) ............ 8-32P 3.3.6 Removing the Lifter Cable (deck rear) .............. 8-34P 3.3.7 Routing the Lifter Cable ... 8-36P 3.4 Feeding Mechanism ............... 8-37P 3.4.1 Removing the Deck Pickup Unit ...................... 8-37P 3.4.2 Removing the Deck Pickup Roller ................... 8-37P 3.4.3 Mounting the Deck Pickup Roller ................... 8-38P 3.4.4 Removing the Deck Pickup/Feeding Roller ...... 8-38P 3.1.6
CONTENTS
3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7
Orientation of the Deck Pickup/Feeding Roller ...... 8-39P Removing the Deck Separation Roller .............. 8-39P Adjusting the Deck Separation Roller Pressure ................. 8-40P
Position of the Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL1D) ............................. 8-41P 3.5 Electrical Mechanisms ........... 8-42P 3.5.1 Removing the Deck Drive PCB ....................... 8-42P 3.5.2 Removing the Open Switch PCB ..................... 8-42P
3.4.8
CHAPTER 9 CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-W1

1 Outline ............................................ 9-1P 1.1 Specifications and Construction ............................. 9-1P 1.2 Arrangement of Rollers ............ 9-2P 1.3 Arrangement of Motors, Clutches, and Solenoids ........... 9-3P 1.4 Arrangement of Sensors ........... 9-4P 2 Detecting Jams ................................ 9-5P 2.1 Sequence of Jam Detection ....... 9-5P 2.1.1 Delay Jams ......................... 9-5P 2.1.2 Stationary Jams .................. 9-5P 2.1.3 Jam History ........................ 9-5P 3 Pickup Assembly ............................ 9-6P 3.1 Pickup Control System ............. 9-6P 3.2 Outline ...................................... 9-7P 3.3 Sequence of Operations (pickup) .................................... 9-7P 3.4 Operation of the Cassette Lifter ......................................... 9-7P 3.5 Cassette Pickup Operation ........ 9-7P 3.6 Moving Up/Down the Pickup Roller ............................ 9-7P 3.7 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper Inside the Cassette ...... 9-7P 3.8 Pickup ReTry Operation ........... 9-7P 3.9 Operation Other Than Cassette Pickup (standby) ...................... 9-7P 3.10 Detecting the Level of Paper .... 9-7P 4 Identifying the Size of Paper .......... 9-8P 4.1 Identifying the Size .................. 9-8P 4.2 AB/Inch-Setting Switch ........... 9-8P 4.3 Paper Size ................................. 9-8P 5 Disassembly and Assembly ............ 9-9P 5.1 External Covers ...................... 9-10P 5.1.1 Removing the Pickup Cover ............................... 9-11P 5.2 Pickup Assembly .................... 9-12P 5.2.1 Removing the Pickup Assembly ......................... 9-12P 5.2.2 Removing the Pickup/Feeding/ Separation Roller .............. 9-13P 5.2.3 Removing the Pickup Soleroid ............................ 9-13P 5.2.4 Removing the Frame Lid .................................... 9-13P 5.2.5 Removing the Pickup Motor ............................... 9-13P 5.2.6 Removing the Vertical Path Clutch ....................... 9-13P 5.2.7 Adjusting the Registration for the Cassette Rear Front .... 9-13P 5.3 PCBs ...................................... 9-14P 5.3.1 Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit .......... 9-14P 5.3.2 Removing the Pedestal Controller PCB ................ 9-15P 5.4 Drive Mechanisms ................. 9-16P 5.4.1 Removing the Main Motor Drive Unit ............. 9-16P 5.4.2 Removing the Pedestal Main Motor ...................... 9-16P 5.4.3 Mounting the Pedestal Main Motor ...................... 9-17P
P7
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 10 INNER 2WAY TRAY-A1

1 Specifications ............................... 10-1P 1.1 Type ........................................ 10-1P 1.2 Cross Section ......................... 10-2P 2 Outline .......................................... 10-3P 2.1 Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors ............................ 10-3P 2.2 Delivery to the No. 2 Delivery Slot .......................... 10-4P 2.3 Delivery to the No. 3 Delivery Slot .......................... 10-5P 2.4 Detecting Jams ....................... 10-7P Arrangement of Sensors ... 10-7P Delay Jam ........................ 10-8P Stationary Jam .................. 10-9P Stationary Jam at Power-On ........................ 10-9P 2.4.5 Door Open Jam ................ 10-9P 3 Disassembly and Assembly ........ 10-10P 3.1 External Covers .................... 10-11P 3.1.1 Removing the Inner 2-Way Delivery Unit ...... 10-11P 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4
CHAPTER 11 ENVELOPE FEEDER ATTACHMENT-B1

Envelope Feeder Attachment-B1 ... 11-1P 1.1 Outline ................................... 11-1P 1.1.1 Host Machine ................... 11-1P 1.1.2 Names of Parts ................. 11-1P 1.2 Specifications ......................... 11-2P 1.2.1 Envelope Cassette ............ 11-2P 1.2.2 Envelopes ......................... 11-3P 1.2.3 Guaranteed Image Area ... 11-4P 1.3 Pickup .................................... 11-5P 1.3.1 Pickup Operations ........... 11-5P 2 Detecting Jams ............................. 11-6P 2.1 Outline ................................... 11-6P 1 3 Error Codes .................................. 11-6P 3.1 Outline ................................... 11-6P 4 Service Mode ............................... 11-6P 4.1 Making Selections ................. 11-6P 5 Making Adjustments .................... 11-7P 5.1 Outline ................................... 11-7P 5.1.1 Envelopes and Type of Spring .......................... 11-7P 5.2 Replacing the Spring .............. 11-7P 5.2.1 Replacing the Spring ........ 11-7P 5.3 Changing the Size ................... 11-8P 5.3.1 Changing the Size ............ 11-8P
P8
1 Safety
1.1 Safety of Laser Light
Laser light can prove to be harmful to the human body. The machines laser system, however, is sealed inside a protective housing and external covers to prevent leakage of laser light to its outside, ensuring the safety of the user as long as the machine is used for its intended functions.
1.2 CDRH Ordinances

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the US Food and Drug Administration put into force ordinances related to laser products on August 2, 1976. These ordinances apply to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and sale of laser products is prohibited within the US unless they bear a certificate of compliance. The following is the label that indicates compliance with the CDRH ordinances, and it must be found on all laser products sold in the US.
1-1 P
F01-102-01 CDRH Label The description may vary from model to model.
1-2 P
1.3 Handling the Laser System

You must take extra care when servicing the area around the machines laser system, as by not bringing a high-reflectance screwdriver into the laser path. Take such precautions as removing the watch and rings before starting the work (to prevent reflection of laser light to the eye). The machines laser light is red, and covers that can reflect laser light are identified by the following label. Take full care whenever servicing areas of the machine behind these covers. This label is attached to all covers inside the machine where hazards from laser light exist.
F01-103-01 Laser Warning Label
1-3 P
1.4 Safety of Toner

The machines toner is a non-toxic product consisting of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dyes. If your skin or clothes have come into contact with toner, try removing as much of it as possible with dry paper tissues, and wash off with water. (Do not use warm water, as it would turn the toner jelly-like and become fused with the fibers of the fabric.) In addition, avoid bringing toner into contact with plastic material, as it tends to dissolve easily. Do not throw toner into fire to avoid explosion.
1-4 P
2 Image Formation System

2.1 Outline
The machine uses an indirect-electro photographic method, and has the following construction:
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[13] [12] [11] [10]
[9]
F01-201-01 Construction of the Machine [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Scanning lamp Pre-exposure lamp Laser scanner unit Primary charging roller Developing cylinder Pre-transfer roller [7] Registration roller [8] Pickup (manual feed tray) [9] Pickup (deck/cassette) [10]Transfer roller [11]Static eliminator [12]Cleaner assembly (drum unit) [13]Fixing assembly
1-5 P
The machines image formation process consists of the following eight steps: Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Pre-exposure Primary charging (positive DC) Laser exposure* Development (AC + positive DC) Transfer (negative DC) Separation (AC + positive DC) Fixing Drum cleaning
*Deposits toner on the VD; the laser is also used for blank exposure.
Latent Static Image Formation Block
2. Primary charging 1. Pre-exposure
3. Laser exposure
4. Development 8. Drum cleaning 5. Transfer Delivery 7. Fixing 6. Separation Manual feed tray Registration
Deck/cassette flow of paper. direction of drum rotation.
F01-201-02
1-6 P
1 Basic Operations
The printer unit can broadly be divided into the following four functional blocks (shaded): Control system Laser exposure system Image formation system Pickup/feed system
Control panel
Main controller PCB DC controller PCB Main power supply PCB Conposit power supply PCB Control Block Laser driver PCB Laser scanner Laser Exposure Block
Charging Cleaning
Fixing
Photosensitive drum
Transfer Separation
Development Image Formation Block Pickup control Multifeeder Side paper deck (accessory) Pickup/Feeding Block
Delivery tray
Feeding
Duplexing assembly Cassette 1 Cassette 2
F02-101-01
2-1 P
1.2 Outline for the Electrical Circuitry

1.2.1 Outline
The major electrical mechanisms of the printer unit are controlled by the CPU on the DC controller PCB. The functions of the major elements are as follows:
1.2.2 DC Controller PCB

Name CPU Description Controls jobs, Controls operational state, Controls fixing temperature, Controls high voltage. Controls toner supply, Controls paper feed, Controls print sequence, Controls output Controls motors, Controls accessories Controls communication with the controller block, Controls service mode Stores service mode data Stores user mode data Stores control data Flash memory for storage of the control programs Mask ROM for control programs (for figure support)
RAM
DIMM ROM ROM
T02-102-01 Control Functions

BD PCB Laser drive PCB Drum sensor PCB Pickup PCB DC loads Clutch Solenoid Motor Sensor Fan Etc. Finisher (accessory)
CPU (IC300) SRAM (IC302)
Main controller PCB
ROM (IC301) GATE ARRAY (IC334)
Control panel
Reader controller PCB Main power supply PCB Accessories power supply PCB Composite power supply PCB
PIO (IC303)
IPC (IC309)
DC controller PCB
F02-102-01 2-2 P
1.3 Basic Sequence of Operations

1.3.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On
If the reading of the main thermistor (TH1) is less than 100C
Power switch ON 200C WUP1 WUP2 Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater (H2) Fixing motor (M4) Main motor (M1) Scanning lamp (LAMP1) : controlled to 200C. WUP3
200C STBY
*1 : low-speed drive (1/4 of constant speed).
If the reading of the main thermistor (TH1) is 100C or more.

Power switch ON
INTR
STBY
Fixing moter (M4) Main motor (M1) Scanning lamp (LAMP1)
*1
*1: The scanning lamp goes OFF at the end of shading. T02-103-01
2-3 P

Interval WUP1 (warm-up 1) WUP2 (warm-up 2) Description Supplies power to the heater at 65% for a specific period of time (400 msec). Controls by switching with in the range between 65% and 100% every 300 msec until the reading is 200C. (The rate is determined in relation to the increase in temperature for each specific period of time.) Executes temperature adjustment to 200C for a specific period of time (10 sec). Makes a power-on jam check when the power is turned on. Keeps the machine at rest from when WUP3 ends to the Start key is pressed or until the power switch is turned off.
WUP3 (warm-up 3) INTR (jam check) STBY (standby)
T02-103-01
2-4 P
1.4 Controlling the Main Motor (M2)

1.4.1 Outline
The functions of the main motor control circuit are as shown in T02-104-01; for a block diagram of the circuit, see F02-104-01.
Item Power supply Drive signal Operation/drive assembly Description 24 V from the DC power supply PCB. Signal (MM_ON) from the DC controller PCB. Waste toner feed screw Cleaner assembly Registration roller Manual pickup assembly Left deck feeding roller 2 Developing unit ON/OFF control Constant speed control E010 (error code)
Control Error detection
T02-104-01 [1] When the main motor drive signal (MM_ON) goes 1, the main motor starts to rotate. [2] When the main motor starts to rotate, the clock pulse signal (MM_LOCK=1) is generated. If the DC controller PCB detects a fault in the clock pulse signal, the machine will indicate E010 in its control panel.
J202 J3088 24VU1-SW 1 1 0VU1 2 2
Main power supply PCB
Drive circuit
Main motor (M1) Clock pulse generation circuit Reference signal generation circuit
J308 J3086 MM_LOCK A10 1 MM_ON A9 2 DC controller GND A8 3 PCB +5V A7 4
Control circuit
F02-104-01 Control Circuit Block Diagram
2-5 P
1.5 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs

1.5.1 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs
Laser scanner motor M10 J3128
J312
J307/310 Laser driver PCB J500/501
Control panel CPU PCB
BD PCB Feed PCB
J312 J3129 J302 J1601 DC J801 J1012
Drum sensor PCB J3114
controller PCB J311

J316
Main controller PCB J1015
Conposit power supply PCB J136

J111 J201
J301 J1014 J409 J308
Main J205 power supply PCB

J204 J6
J300
Switch PCB
F02-105-01
2-6 P
1.1 Outline
Part 2>Chapter 4>1.1 Outline of Laser Exposure System The reader controller PCB serves to read image signals from the CCD and send image signals to the main controller assembly. The video signals from the main controller assembly are converted by the DC controller PCB into laser drive signals, and are turned into laser intensity signals to suit signal levels by the laser driver PCB. The laser intensity signals are used to cause the laser unit to generate a laser beam, which is directed to the photosensitive drum for the formation of latent static images. Item
Laser intensity control Laser scanning Synchronization control Laser scanner motor control
Description
Laser power auto control (APC control) By semiconductor laser Main scanning direction: control by BD signal Sub scanning direction: control by image leading edge signal Constant speed rotation control
T03-101-01
3-1 P
F03-101-01 shows the major components for the laser exposure system; the machines laser scanning is performed by means of a 6-facet polygon mirror and a single-beam laser unit:
Laser unit Cylindrical lens Polygon mirror (6-faceted)
Laser scanner motor BD mirror
Collimating lens
BD PCB
Laser mirror Photosensitive drum
F03-101-01 Component
Laser semiconductor Laser scanner motor (M10) Polygon mirror BD mirror/BD PCB Laser driver PCB DC controller PCB
Description
Infrared laser light (785 nm), single-beam DC brush-less motor, constant speed control 6-faceted Laser beam detection Laser activation control Laser scanner motor rotation control
T03-101-02
3-2 P
1.2 Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system)

Main power switch ON/sleep mode OFF Original set/ADF opened/key operated Start key ON 180C AINTR STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY
8 sec Laser scanner motor Image leading edge signal Laser BD signal *: If silent mode (in user mode) is selected, the motor stops after a specific period of time.
F03-102-01
2 Generating Sync Signals

2.1 Outline
Part 2>Chapter 4>2 Generating the BD Signal The BD signal used to synchronize the video signals in laser scanning direction is generated by the BD PCB with reference to the laser beam reflected by the BD mirror mounted in the path of the laser beam. The edge of paper re-picked in double-sided mode is detected by the horizontal registration sensor to measure the displacement to the rear/front. Based on the measurement, the timing of laser activation is changed with reference to the BD signal so that the image will be placed at a specific position on the paper without fail.
3-3 P
2.2 Flow of Sync signals

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] The BD signal goes 0 when laser light is detected. The phase is matched with the phase of the printer, and a sync signal is generated. Based on the printer sync signal, image data is read from the image memory. Video signal The 2-pixel parallel signal is converted into a single-pixel serial signal. The laser drive signal is used to drive the laser unit to suit the video signal.
BD PCB
J3129 J312 GND 4 B11 GND 3 B12 [1] 2 B13 5V 1 B14
Sync signal generation [2]
J316 A18 [3]
J1015 A18 Memory control
J500 Laser driver PCB [6]
J307
Parallel/ serial conversion [5] DC controller PCB
J316 [4]
J1015
Controller assembly
F03-202-01 E100 Indicates that the BD signal cannot be detected within a specific period of time after the laser has been turned on.
3-4 P
3 Laser Driver Circuit

3.1 Controlling the Laser Unit
The laser driver circuit is used to drive the semiconductor laser according to the laser drive signal from the DC controller PCB. The laser driver circuit performs the following: 1. Turning on/off the laser. 2. Controlling the light intensity of the laser (APC control). The signals have the following meanings and functions: [1] Laser drive signal; used to drive the semiconductor laser. [2] Sample laser activation signal; used to turn on the laser for intensity sampling (the result is used for activation for imaging). [3] Laser enable signal; goes 0 when the laser is ready after the Start key is pressed. [4] Image leading edge signal; used to start laser writing when paper reaches the image leading edge sensor (PS12) mounted in front of the photosensitive drum. [5] Used to monitor the laser intensity when the laser is turned on for sampling, and feeds back the level appropriate to the intensity to the laser driver circuit. [6] Used to control the output so that the feedback level and the reference level from the DC controller will be identical. [7] Laser intensity reference signal; used as the laser activation reference level determined by the DC controller. [8] Horizontal registration paper detection signal; used to adjust the image position by changing the timing of laser activation with reference to the result of detection of the edge of paper re-picked in double-sided mode by the horizontal registration sensor (PS11).
3-5 P
J307
1 2 3 4 GND DATA(+) [1] DATA(-) [1] GND
J500
4 3 3 2 2 1
Laser assembly
[6]
Laser drive circuit
Laser Intensity monitor [5]
J310
1 2 3 4 5 GND +5V DAOUT [7] S/H [2] LDE* [3] 5 4 3 2 1
J501
Laser driver PCB Laser unit J312 INT_TOPO_PD [4] Image leading edge sensor (PS12)
A8
A14
J304 Y_REG_PD [8] Horizontal registration paper sensor (PS11)
DC controller PCB
F03-301-01 The laser power of the laser unit is adjusted at the factory, and it must not be adjusted in the field. ADJUST>LASER>PVE-OFST Use it to adjust the position of laser illumination. ADJUST>LASER>LA-OFF Use it to adjust the timing of laser trailing edge de-activation for non-default size papers.
REF.
3-6 P
4 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor

4.1 Outline
Part 2> Chapter 4> 4.1 Outline The following items are related to laser scanner motor control: [1] Laser scanner motor drive signal; when 1, the laser scanner motor goes ON (turning on/off the motor). [2] Laser scanner motor ready signal; when 0, the laser scanner motor rotates at a specific speed.
Laser scanner motor unit J312 DC controller PCB
B9 B10
[2] [1] GND +24V
J3128 4 3 2 1
Speed control circuit
Motor driver
2 1 J204
Reference pulse generation circuit
M10 Laser scanner motor
F03-401-01 E110 Indicates the presence of an error in the laser scanner motor.
3-7 P

2. Unless otherwise noted, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4. The mounting screws used for the grounding wire and the varistors come with a washer, which must not be left out when assembling the machine. 5. As a rule, the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed. 6. Leakage of laser light must be avoided, as it can adversely affect the human body. Do not disassemble parts not discussed herein or remove any paint-locked screws.
3-8 P
5.1 Laser Scanner Assembly

5.1.1 Removing the Laser Unit
1) Remove the delivery tray. (p. 7-13P) 2) Open the harness guide [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]. 3) Disconnect the connector [3] of the BD PCB and the two connectors [4] of the laser PCB.
[2] [4]
[3]
[1]
F03-501-01 4) Remove the two springs [1] and two stepped screws [2] from the left, and remove the two screws equipped with a washer from the right; then, detach the laser unit.
[2] [1]
[1]
[3]
F03-501-02 When mounting the Finisher-J1, attach the protective sheet [2] by aligning it against the press line [1] of the laser unit.
[1] [2]
F03-501-03
3-9 P
1 Outline of Processes
1.1 Outline
T04-101-01 shows the functions of and the methods used in the image formation system:
Item Photosensitive drum drum cleaning Developing assembly Description OPC (30-mm dia.) cleaning blade Developing cylinder (20-mm dia.) Development method:dry, 1-component, toner projection Toner:magnetic, negative Fuse lamp (8 pc.) ON/OFF control (activated in sync with main motor) Primary charging roller DC bias corrected to temperature around photosensitive drum Primary charging roller AC bias corrected to suit humidity reading Pad push-on type DC constant voltage control (-500 to -850 V) AC constant current control (2000 to 2300 A; about 1800 Hz) DC constant voltage control (0 to -650 V) AC constant voltage control (810 Vp-p; about 1800 Hz) Transfer bias:DC constant current control (switching among +15 A, +10 A, +7 A) + DC constant voltage control (up to 7 kVmax) Cleaning bias: DC constant voltage control (-2.6 kV) DC constant voltage (-600 v) DC constant voltage (switching between -2.3 KV and -3.0 KV)
Pre-exposure (LAMP2) Drum sensor (U701) Environment sensor (S3) Primary charging roller auto cleaning Primary charging roller bias control Developing bias control Transfer charging roller bias control
Transfer guide bias control Separation static eliminating bias control
T04-101-01
4-1 P
F04-101-01 shows the major components of the image formation system:

Primary charging roller Pre-exposure lamp Cleaner unit Developing assembly
Photosensitive drum Separation static eliminator Transfer guide Transfer charging roller
F04-101-01
4-2 P
1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations (image formation system)

1 Original, 2 Prints
Control panel power switch Main power ON Start key ON supply switch ON AINRT SLEEP STBY INRT PRINT LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1) Pre-exposure lamp (LAMP2) Laser activation Primary charging bias (AC) Primary charging bias (DC) Transfer charging bias Image leading edge sensor (S12) Developing bias (AC) Developing bias (DC) Transfer guide bias Separation static eliminating bias
[1] [2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1] transfer charging cleaning bias [2] transfer sheet-to-sheet interval bias [3] transfer charging reference bias(each 1000sheets, cumulative)
F04-102-01
4-3 P
2 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias

2.1 Outline
Part 2>Chapter 5>4.4 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias The machines primary charging is a direct charging method that uses a charging roller. In addition to a DC bias, the charging roller is subjected to an AC bias to ensure stable charging. The following items relate to the control of primary charging: [1] Turning on/off the bias. [2] Controlling the DC bias to a specific level of voltage. [3] Controlling the AC bias to a specific level of current. [4] Controlling the photosensitive drum resistance detection mechanism (APVC control). [5] Controlling the AC bias based on the readings of the environment sensor (humidity) and the soft counters. [6] Controlling the DC bias based on the reading of the drum sensor (temperature).
Composite power supply PCB
24 VDC input from main power supply J135 Primary charging J301 output enable J136 signal -B4 -B9 +24V
Transformer drive signal
DC controller PCB
Print/standby mode signal AC bias level signal DC bias level signal APVC measurement data
PW-CPU
Serial communication
DC bias output ON signal DC bias output Output control signal control Current level (APVC measureCurrent ment) control Voltage level
Primary DC charging highvoltage transformer (T502) Voltage DC bias output detection
Primary charging roller J130-4
Photosensitive drum
J301 -A3 -A1
J136 -A10 -A12
Transformer drive signal AC bias output control signal
AC bias Primary AC output charging highvoltage trans former Current Drive detection control
Drum sensor (temperature)
J311-A2 J302-B14
Measurement result Measurement result
Environment sensor (humidity)
F04-201-01 The primary charging output enable signal is used as the AC pulse ON signal when the developing bias is being controlled.
Memo
4-4 P
2.2 Turning On/Off the Bias

The primary charging roller bias is turned on/off as follows:
2.2.1 DC Bias
[1] When the primary charging output enable signal from the DC controller PCB goes 0, the DC bias output control signal (pulse signal) is generated. [2] The DC bias is sent to the primary charging roller.
2.2.2 AC Bias
[1] When the primary charging output enable signal from the DC controller PCB goes 0, the AC bias output control signal is generated. [2] The AC bias is generated to the primary charging roller.
2.3 Controlling the Current Voltage/Current to a Specific Level

The output level of the DC/AC bias applied to the primary charging roller is controlled by the DC/AC bias output control signal from the PW-CPU.
2.3.1 Controlling the DC Bias to a Specific Level

[1] The output voltage level of the DC bias is fed back to the PW-CPU, and the DC bias output control signal is varied as needed to suit the level when driving the transformer. [2] The DC bias is made to assume a specific voltage level.
2.3.2 Controlling the AC Bias to a Specific Current Level

[1] The output current level of the AC bias is communicated to the drive control circuit and is compared against the reference current level; the result is used to vary the AC bias output control signal as needed to drive the transformer. [2] The AC bias is made to assume a specific current level.
4-5 P
2.4 Temperature Correction of the DC Bias

When the temperature inside the machine increases, the resistance of the photosensitive drum will decrease, thereby lowering the charging characteristics. To ensure a stable potential level, the drum sensor (U701) mounted to the rear side plate is used to check the temperature inside the machine; when the temperature increases, the absolute value of the DC bias level is increased.
Primary DC bias
-800V
-750V (reference value)
23C 40C Low High Machine inside temperature
F04-204-01
2.5 Humidity Correction of the AC Bias

The current level of the AC bias needs to be kept on the higher side to prevent uneven charging because of a lower changing efficiency occurring in a low-humidity environment. The AC bias, therefore, is varied as shown in F04-205-01 to suit the readings of the environment sensor (humidity). When the resistance of the drum surface decreases because of advancing wear, the current level is decreased to facilitate the flow of current.
Counter reading: 0 to 10,000 sheets Counter reading: 10,001 or higher
2300A Primary AC bias
2150A 2000A
Low
35% Humidity
High
Low
35% Humidity
High
F04-205-01 4-6 P
2.6 Controlling the Detection of the Photosensitive Drum Resistance (APVC control)
The primary charging efficiency changes because of changes in the site environment (temperature, humidity), deterioration of the charging roller, and wear of the photosensitive drum. A reference voltage is applied to the charging roller at time of last rotation every 500 prints (cumulative) or when the following service mode is executed: COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>D-GAMMA, and the level of output current at the time is measured and corrected. [1] When the main power switch is turned on, the reference voltage is applied to the charging roller, and the output is measured as the current level for use as feedback to the PWCPU. [2] The photosensitive drum is charged (primary charging) using the voltage level determined by the PW-CPU. If you have replaced the drum unit with a new one, be sure to execute the following service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>D-GAMMA.
4-7 P
E064 Indicates the presence of a high-voltage (primary charging, transfer charging, developing) output fault. COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>PRIMARY Use it to indicate the current level of primary charging. COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>P-DC Use it to enter the adjustment value of the primary charging DC component for the image area. COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>P-AC Use it to enter the adjustment value of the primary charging AC component for the image area. COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>AGS-GAIN Use it to enter the gain adjustment value of the application voltage level correction for the primary charging bias. COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>AGS-OFST Use it to enter the offset adjustment value of the application voltage level correction for the primary charging bias. COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>OFST1-DC Use it to enter the adjustment value of offset 1 for the primary charging DC component. COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>OFST1-AC Use it to enter the adjustment value of offset 1 for the primary charging AC component. COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>P-AC2 Use it to enter the adjustment value of primary charging AC component 2 of the image area. COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>P-AC3 Use it to enter the adjustment value of primary charging AC component for the image area. COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>D-GAMMA Use it to force photosensitive drum resistance measurement control (APVC).
4-8 P
3 Controlling the Transfer Charging Roller Bias

3.1 Outline
Part 2>Chapter 5>7.8.3 Controlling the Transfer Roller Charging The machines transfer charging is a direct charging method that uses a transfer charging roller. A DC bias is applied to the transfer charging roller. The following relate to the transfer charging system: [1] Turning on/off the bias. [2] Controlling the DC bias to a specific voltage/current level. [3] Controlling the detection of transfer charging roller resistance (ATVC control) [4] Controlling the output by operation mode [5] Controlling the output by the environment sensor (humidity)
+24V 24 VDC input from main power supply J135 Transfer charging J301 output enable J136 signal -B9 -B4 Transfer output -B8 mode signal 4 -B5 Serial communication
Transfer cleaning bias high-voltage Cleaning bias output transformer ON signal (T506)
Cleaning bias out
Photosensitive drum T133 Transfer charging roller
Voltage level (ATVC measurement result)
DC controller PCB
Print/standby mode signal Transfer bias output data ATVC measurement data
PW-CPU
Voltage detection Transformer drive signal Transfer bias output ON signal Transfer bias output control signal Transfer bias high-voltage transformer (T133) Transfer bias output
J301 J136 -A3 -A10 -A1 -A12 Transfer output -B5 mode signal 1 -B8 Transfer output -B6 mode signal 2 -B7
Drive control
Current level
Current detection
Environment sensor (humidity)
Transfer output -B7 mode signal 3 -B6
Transfer bias output current switching signal
J302-B14
Measurement result
F04-301-01
4-9 P

The transfer charging roller bias is turned on/off as follows: [1] When the transfer charging output enable signal from the DC controller PCB goes 0, the transfer bias output signal (serial communication) is generated. [2] The transfer bias output control signal (pulse) is generated, and the DC bias is sent to the transfer charging roller.
3.3 Controlling the Detection of the Transfer Charging Roller Resistance (ATVC control)
The transfer charging efficiency changes because of changes in humidity and deterioration in the transfer charging roller. The reference current is applied to the transfer charging roller during initial multiple rotation after the main power switch is turned on, and the resulting output voltage is measured for correction. [1] The reference current is applied to the transfer charging roller, and the output is checked as a voltage level for use as feedback to the PW-CPU. [2] The transfer charging mechanism operate using the voltage level determined by the PWCPU. If you have replaced the transfer charging roller with a new one, be sure to execute 'clean roller' in user mode ('adjust/clean').
4-10 P
3.4 Controlling the Output by Operating Mode

3.4.1 Types of Modes
The transfer charging output may be any of the following output modes, and the output is varied to suit each mode. The switch-over among these is based on the combination of transfer output mode signals from the DC controller PCB. a. Image Transfer Bias This bias is used to transfer toner from the photosensitive drum to paper, and is a positive voltage. b. Cleaning Bias This bias is used to return toner sticking to the transfer charging roller to the photosensitive drum, and applies a negative voltage. During initial rotation after the Start key is pressed During last rotation During initial rotation after jam removal or error resetting During execution of roller cleaning in user mode (adjust/clean; in this case, the primary charging roller is also cleaned) c. Reference Bias It is an application voltage used for the transfer charging roller resistance detection control (ATVC control) mechanism. For every 1,000 prints (cumulative) or when 'roller clean' is executed in user mode ('adjust/clean'), the voltage is applied at time of last rotation. d. Sheet-to-Sheet Interval Bias This bias is used in a non-image area (between sheets) in continuous print mode; the bias level is reduced to prevent adhesion of toner to the transfer charging roller. E064 Indicates the presence of a high-voltage (primary charging, transfer charging, development) output fault.
4-11 P

Control panel Main power power switch ON Start key ON switch ON AINTR SLEEP STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1) Cleaning bias Reference bias Sheet-to-sheet bias Image transfer bias *1: Applied every 1,000 prints (cumulative) at time of last rotation. *1
F04-304-01
3.4.2 Turning On/Off the Cleaning Bias

When the cleaning bias output ON signal (composite power supply PCB) goes 1, the output of the transfer cleaning bias transformer is applied to the transfer charging roller.
4-12 P
3.5 Controlling the Output

The output of the DC bias applied to the transfer charging roller is controlled as follows: The optimum transfer charging roller bias differs depending on paper size and site environment; as such, the DC controller is designed to automatically control the output level to suit the paper size and the site environment in question. COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>TR Use it to display the level of current for transfer charging. COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>TR-V Use it to indicate the voltage level of the transfer charging roller resistance detection. COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-N1 Use it to enter the output adjustment value for transfer charging (plain paper; single-sided print or 1st side of double-sided print). COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-N2 Use it to enter the output adjustment value for transfer charging (plain paper; 2nd side of double-sided print) COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-OFST Use it to enter the offset output adjustment value for transfer charging roller resistance detection. COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-SPP Use it to enter the output adjustment value for transfer charging (special paper; single-sided print and double-sided print) COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TRANS-SW Use it to set the transfer charging roller bias output control method for large-size paper.
4-13 P
4 Controlling the Separation Static Eliminator Bias

4.1 Outline
Part 2>Chapter 5>8.3 Static Eliminator Separation Method The machine uses a static eliminator for separation. A DC bias is applied to the static eliminator; the following are items of control: [1] Turning on/off the bias [2] Controlling the bias to a specific voltage level [3] Controlling the output to suit paper type and reading by the environment sensor (humidity)
+24V 24 VDC input from main power supply J135 Static J301 eliminator bias J136 -B3 enable signal -B10 High-voltage main transformer (T504) Output control Photosensitive Static drum eliminator J132 bias output Separation static eliminator
DC controller PCB
Voltage detection Voltage level
Serial communication Print/standby mode signal Static eliminator bias mode signal
PW-CPU
Static eliminator bias output ON signal
Static eliminator bias mode signal
J301 -A3 -A1
J136 -A10 -A12
F04-401-01
4-14 P

The separation static eliminator bias is turned on/off as follows: [1] When the static eliminator bias enable signal from the DC controller PCB goes 0, the static eliminator bias output ON signal is generated. [2] A DC bias is sent to the separation static eliminator.
4.3 Controlling the Bias to a Specific Voltage Level

The bias output is fed back to the output control circuit, thereby ensuring a specific level of voltage.
4.4 Controlling the Output by Paper Type and Environment Sensor (humidity)
In a low-humidity environment, separation can fail when thin paper is used or when the second side of a double-sided sheet is hadled. To ensure good separation, the voltage applied is increased between -2.3 and -3.0 KV with reference to the type of paper and the reading of the environment sensor (humidity). The selection of an application voltage is done in response to the static eliminator bias mode signal (serial communication) from the DC controller PCB.
4-15 P
5 Controlling the Transfer Guide Bias

5.1 Transfer Guide Bias
Part 2>Chapter 5>7.2 Transfer Guide Type The transfer guide bias is used to prevent adhesion of toner to the transfer guide, and is a negative component (-600 VDC), which is of the same polarity as the toner. The transfer guide bias is continuously applied as long as printing is under way.
Composite power supply PCB 24 VDC input from main power supply J135 DC controller PCB Serial communication PW-CPU Print/standby mode signal J301 -A3 -A1 J136 -A10 -A12 Transformer drive signal High-voltage main transformer (T504) +24V
Transfer guide output
Photosensitive drum J131-3 Transfer guide
F04-501-01
4-16 P
6 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism

6.1 Outline
Part 2>Chapter 5>10.1.5 Cleaning the Primary Charging Roller The machines primary charging roller is cleaned by turning on the primary charging roller cleaning solenoid (SL6) while the primary charging roller is rotating, thereby butting the cleaning pad against the primary charging roller. At the same time, the cleaning pad is moved back and forth in the axial direction of the primary charging roller. Cleaning is executed under the following conditions: During last rotation after the cumulative count reaches 500 sheets During execution of roller cleaning in user mode (adjust/clean; in this case, the cleaning bias is applied to the transfer charging roller pad for cleaning)
SL6 (ON)
Back-and-forth movement
Cleaning pad
Primary charging roller
Photosensitive drum
F04-601-01
4-17 P
7 Developing Assembly
7.1 Outline
The developing assembly consists of the developing cylinder, toner sensor (S1), and toner stirring rod; its is locked manually together with the developing rail using the locking lever. The developing cylinder and the toner stirring rod are rotated by the drive of the main motor (M1) transmitted by way of the developing clutch (CL3).
Developing cylinder Developing bias control signal J301 J136 Toner stirring rods
Developing bias
PW-CPU
J130-1 Photosensitive drum
DC controller PCB
Toner sensor(S1)
Main motor drive signal J308
Main motor M1
Developing clutch CL3 Toner detention signal
J302-5
F04-701-01
4-18 P
7.2 Controlling the Developing Bias

7.2.1 Outline
Both DC bias and AC bias are applied to the developing cylinder. The output is controlled by the composite power supply PCB based on the control signal from the DC controller PCB. The following relate to the developing bias control system: [1] Controlling the DC developing bias to a specific voltage level [2] Controlling the AC developing bias to a specific voltage level
+24V 24 VDC input from main power supply J135 J301 DC bias J136 -B1 ON signal -B12 AC pulse ON signal High-voltage main transformer Transformer (for DC) drive signal Output control Voltage detection Developing cylinder
Photosensitive drum J130-1
-B4
-B9
DC controller PCB
PW-CPU
DC bias control signal Voltage level
Serial communication DC bias level signal J301 -A3 -A1 J136 -A10 -A12
Transformer Developing drive signal high-voltage AC bias transformer (for AC)
J301 AC bias J136 -B2 ON signal -B11
F04-702-01 The AC pulse ON signal is used as the primary charging output enable signal when controlling primary charging.
Memo
4-19 P
7.2.2 Controlling the DC Developing Bias

[1] When the DC bias ON signal from the DC controller PCB goes 0, the bias control signals (pulse signals) are generated by the PW-CPU of the high-vole power supply PCB. [2] The DC bias from the high-voltage main transformer is applied to the developing cylinder. [3] The output voltage level of the DC bias is fed back to the PW-CPU. [4] The pulse width of the DC control signal is varied to suit the return voltage, thereby maintaining the DC bias to a specific level.
7.2.3 Controlling the AC Developing Bias

[1] When the AC bias ON signal and the AC pulse ON signal from the DC controller PCB goes 0, the AC transformer is driven. [2] An AC bias is added to the DC bias and applied to the developing cylinder.
7.2.4 Controlling the Level of the DC Developing Bias

the level of the DC developing bias is varied between image area and non-image area to prevent stray toner inside the machine. In memory copy mode, the laser is driven based on binary image data which lacks density information, not enabling adjustment using a density correction curve for the density of the image being generated. To make up for the lack, the DC developing bias is varied for density adjustment. E064 Indicates the presence of a high-voltage (primary charging, transfer charging, development) output fault. COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>DE-DC Use it to enter the adjustment value of the developing bias DC component for the image area. COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>DE-OFST Use it to enter the offset value for the developing bias DC component.
4-20 P
7.3 Detecting the Level of Toner

A toner sensor (S1) of a piezoelectric oscillation type is mounted inside the developing assembly for detection of the level of toner. The DC-CPU on the DC controller PCB reads the output of the toner sensor as long as the developing clutch (CL3) remains on; it keeps track of the 0 state of the toner sensor (most recent two readings), and indicates the Add Toner message as needed.
toner absent level 2 Toner absent level 1 The cumulative period of absence of toner fro the most recent two readings is 7 sec or more, Copying FAX reception Printer output enabled enabled enabled OK NG OK (6 sec in total) (8 sec in total) (5 sec in total) The cumulative period of absence of toner for the most recent two readings is 20 sec or more, Copying FAX reception FAX output Printer output disabled enabled disabled disabled
FAX transmission enabled
NG
(23 sec)
Check point
Developing clutch (CL3) Toner sensor(S1) 2 sec 4 sec 4 sec 1 sec 22 sec
When the main power switch is turned off and then on, stirring operation is undertaken for 6 sec and is monitored; if toner is present, stirring takes place. If no toner is detected, stirring operator is undertaken for another 30 sec; then, stirring operation is undertaken once again for 6 sec to check the presence of toner; if toner is found, recovery is made. If toner is not found, the Add Toner message will be indicated.
F04-703-01
4-21 P
8 Drum Cleaner
8.1 Outline
The drum cleaner assembly is rotated by the drive of the main motor (M1) transmitted through drive gears; the waste toner is colleted by the cleaning blade, and is sent to the waste toner case using the waste toner feedscrew. The amount of waste toner inside the waste toner case is monitored by the waste toner case full sensor (S2); when the amount exceeds a specific level, the Waste Toner Full message will be indicated on the control panel.
Waste toner feedscrew
Waste toner case full sensor (S2)
S2
Waste toner case full signal
M1
Main motor
Waste toner case
J311-B9 J308 DC controller PCB
F04-801-01
4-22 P

Main motor M1
Waste toner case full sensor (S2; light-receiving)
Cleaning blade
Photosensitive drum
Waste toner case full sensor (S2; light-emitting) Waste toner feedscrew Waste toner case
F04-801-02
4-23 P
8.2 Monitoring the Waste Toner Case

The machine checks the waste toner case in reference to two levels. The amount of waste toner inside the waste toner case is monitored by the waste toner case full sensor (S2); the sensor is a pair of photosensors (light-emitting unit piece and light-receiving piece). The machine will assume that the waste toner case has become full when waste toner blocks the light between the two photosensors. The DC controller PCB checks the waste toner case full sensor when the power is tuned on and at time of delivery; it will assume a waste toner full warning after making a total of 100 prints after the waste toner case has become full, thereby indicating the Waste Toner Case Full message on the control panel. After the message Waste Toner Case Full is displayed in the control panel, the machine will indicate 'E019' in its control panel if the case remains full upon generating about 2000 prints (cumulative). If the waste toner case is not set, the light-blocking plate will block the light between the photosensors, causing the Waste Toner Case Full message to appear. The light between the photosensors is not visible to the eye.
Memo
DC controller PCB
+5V
Waste toner case full sensor (light-receiving)
J311-B7 Waste toner case full signal -B9 -B8
Waste toner case full sensor (light-emitting) Waste toner case
F04-802-01
4-24 P
E019 Indicates that the waste toner case is full.
The waste toner case can hold waste toner equivalent of about 200,000 prints.
Memo
8.3 Locking of the Waste Toner Feedscrew

The waste toner feedscrew is rotated by the drive of the main motor transmitted by the coupling built into the main motor drive assembly. The coupling is butted against the gear used to rotate the screw by the work of a spring. If the drum cleaning assembly is clogged with waste toner, the coupling will start to move back and forth in the axial direction, causing a clicking sound. The machine is not equipped with a sensor to detect the locking of the waste toner feedscrew.
Memo
Photosensitive drum Main motor M1 Spring
Coupling
Waste toner feedscrew
F04-803-01
4-25 P

2. Unless otherwise noted, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4. The mounting screws used for the grounding wire and the varistors come with a washer, which must not be left out when assembling the machine. 5. As a rule, the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed. 6. The door switch or the main power switch must be turned off whenever the duplex unit or the fixing/feeding unit must be slid out. 7. The toner must not be disposed of into fire to avid explosion.
4-26 P
9.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit

9.1.1 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit
1) Remove the drum unit. (p. 4-28P) -2) Remove the inside cover. (p. 7-14P) 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]. 4) Remove the pre-exposure lamp unit [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
F04-901-01
4-27 P
9.2 Photosensitive Drum

9.2.1 Removing the Drum Unit
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Open the front cover. Release the feeding assembly. Release the developing assembly. Remove the fixing screw [1]. Slide the drum unit [2] slowly out to the front.
[2]
[1]
F04-902-01 When removing the photosensitive drum, hold it by its long hole [1], and take care not to soil it. The photosensitive drum is highly susceptible to light. Once outside the machine, be sure to protect it against light.
[1]
F04-902-02 As many as 19 spurs [1] (4 type) are attached to the bottom of the drum unit. Take care when deciding where and how to place the drum unit after taking it out of the machine.
[1]
F04-902-03
4-28 P
9.2.2 Cleaning the Photosensitive Drum

If the surface of the photosensitive drum is soiled, wipe it with a flannel cloth coated with toner. (Do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.) Do not dry wipe it nor use solvent. Further, never use drum cleaning powder.
4-29 P
9.3 Transfer Charging Roller

9.3.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller
Do not touch the surface of the transfer charging roller; otherwise, faulty images can occur. 1) Remove the feeding assembly. (p. 5-49P) 2) Pull out the static eliminator [1]. 3) Remove the screw [2], and detach the hinge pin [3].
[3] [2] [1]
F04-903-01 4) Shift the pre-transfer arm [2] (equipped with a spring) together with the transfer charging roller [1] to the left, and detach it to the front. 5) While holding down the post-transfer arm [3] from above, remove the transfer charging roller [1] to the front.
[3]
When mounting it, be sure to fit the bottom of the spring of the pre-transfer arm into the seat (dent) in the feeder frame [4].
(1) [1] (2) [2] [4]
F04-903-02
4-30 P
9.4 Charging Roller Solenoid

9.4.1 Removing the Charging Roller Solenoid (SL6)
1) Remove the photosensitive drum unit. (p. 4-28P) 2) Open the rear cover. (7 screws) 3) Remove the DC controller PCB. (p. 7-17P) 4) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the DC controller base [2].
[1] [1]
[2]
[1]
F04-904-01 5) Disconnect the two connectors [1] of the harness. 6) Remove the three screws [2], and shift the duct unit [3] to the side, and slide it out to the front.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F04-904-02
4-31 P
7) Free the claw, and detach the two relay PCBs [1].
[1]
F04-904-03 8) Remove the faston [1] of the harness, and detach the duct unit [2].
[1]
[2]
F04-904-04 9) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the charging roller solenoid [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
F04-904-05
4-32 P
9.5 Developing Assembly

When disassembling/assembling the developing assembly, keep the following in mind: 1. When holding the developing assembly, do not touch or push the developing cylinder. 2. After mounting the developing assembly, be sure to fit the developing assembly stopper. 3. The blade and the blade base of the blade base unit are adjusted to a high accuracy at the factory. Do not disassemble the unit.
9.5.1 Removing the Developing Assembly

1) Open the front cover. 2) Shift down the developing assembly releasing lever [1] to free the developing assembly [2]. 3) Remove the screw [3], and lift the bottom of the developing assembly stopper [4] to the front, and detach it to the bottom. 4) Holding the grip on the developing assembly, place your other hand on the bottom of the developing assembly; then, slide it out to the front.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[4]
(1) (2)
F04-905-01
4-33 P
9.5.2 Removing the Grip Assembly

1) Remove the developing assembly. (p. 4-33P) 2) Remove the screw [1] and free the three claws [2]; then, detach the grip assembly [3].
[3]
[2] [1]
F04-905-02
9.5.3 Removing the Toner Sensor

1) Remove the grip assembly. (item 9.5.2) 2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]. 3) Remove the toner sensor [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
F04-905-03
9.5.4 Removing the Developing Assembly Upper Cover

1) Remove the grip assembly. (item 9.5.2) 2) Remove the two screws [1], and free the three claws [2]. 3) Remove the developing assembly upper cover [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
F04-905-04 4-34 P
9.5.5 Removing the Blade Base Unit

1) Remove the developing assembly upper cover. (p. 4-34P) 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the blade base unit [2].
[2]
[1]
F04-905-05 The blade [1] and the blade base [2] of the blade base unit are adjusted to a high accuracy at the factory. Do not disassemble the unit.
[2]
[1]
F04-905-06
9.5.6 Removing the Developing Cylinder

1) Remove the developing assembly upper cover. (p. 4-34P) 2) Remove the E-ring [1], bearing [2], and gear [3].
[2] [1] [3]
F04-905-07
4-35 P
3) Remove the two screws [1] and the gear cover [2]. 4) Remove the two gears [3].
[2]
[1]
[3] [1]
F04-905-08 5) Put copy paper [3] between the developing cylinder [1] and the blade [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
F04-905-09 6) Remove the screw [1], and remove the grounding plate [2]. 7) Remove the grip ring [3].
[1] [3] [2]
F04-905-10
4-36 P
8) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the support roller [2] and the front sleeve holder [3].
[3] [1] [1] [2]
F04-905-11 9) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the support roller [2] and the sleeve holder [3].
[3] [1] [2] [1]
F04-905-12 10) Remove the developing cylinder [2] together with the two bearings [1].
[1] [2] [1]
F04-905-13
4-37 P
9.5.7 Positioning the Developing Assembly Magnetic Seal

1) The front magnetic seal [1] and the rear magnetic seal [2] must be butted against the opening [3] (stop reference) when they are mounted. Check to make sure that the magnetic seal is in firm contact with the casing.
[1] ([2]) [3] [2] [1]
A
F04-905-14
9.5.8 Mounting the Developing Assembly Blade

The blade [1] and the blade base [2] of the blade base unit are adjusted to a high accuracy at the factory. Do not disassemble the unit. If you happen to have removed the blade, adjust its position so that the gap between the blade and the developing cylinder [3] is 0.21 0.03 mm using a gap gauge (CK0057-000).
[2]
[1] 0.210.03mm
[3]
F04-905-15 The surface of the developing cylinder is highly susceptible to scratches. Be sure to fit the gap gauge on ends of the developing cylinder. 4-38 P
9.6 Removing the Paper Lint

9.6.1 Removing the Paper Lint
1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the paper lint cleaning cover [1] by inserting a flat-blade screwdriver.
[1]
F04-906-01 3) Slide out the paper lint cleaning lever [1], and move it back and forth.
[1]
F04-906-02
9.6.2 When Removing the Paper Lint

Execute APVC correction in service mode. (p. 5-67T) APVC correction COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC> D-GAMMA
4-39 P
9.7 Waste Toner Case

9.7.1 Replacing the Waste Toner Case
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the waste toner case cover [2]. 2) Take out the waste toner case [3].
[1]
[2] [3]
F04-907-01 3) Remove the case cap [1] taped to the waste toner case; then, put the cap to the case.
[1]
[1]
F04-907-02 4) Fit the new waste toner case [1], and mount the waste toner case cover [2] with a screw [3].
[3]
[2] [1]
F04-907-03 4-40 P
9.7.2 Cleaning the Waste Toner Case

[1]
[2] [3]
F04-907-04 3) Dispose of the waste toner collecting inside the waste toner case. 4) Clean both inside and the outside of the waste toner case [1] (area A, indicated by shading) with alcohol. In particular, take care not to leave any dirt on the inside and the outside of the area around the round recess.
[1]
F04-907-05 5) Fit the waste toner case [1] back in the machine, and mount the waste toner case cover [2] with a screw [3].
[3]
[2] [1]
F04-907-06
4-41 P
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
1 Outline
1.1 Specifications and Construction
T05-101-01 shows the major functions and the construction of the pickup/feeding system:
Item Paper feed reference Paper stack Paper size switching Duplex copying Related user mode Related mechanical adjustments Description Center Cassette (1, 2): 500 sheets each (80 g/m2) Multifeeder: 50 sheets (80 g/m2) Cassette (1, 2): by user Multifeeder:by user Through path Cassette auto selection (enabled/disabled) Paper icon Cassette horizontal registration adjustment Multifeeder horizontal adjustment
T05-101-01
5-1 P
1.2 Arrangement of Rollers
[12] [11] [8]
[14] [10] [9] [7] [6] [5] [2] [4]
[13]
[13]
[1]
[3]
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
F05-101-01 The following rollers are mainly used to move paper:

Ref. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] Name Pickup roller Feeding roller Separation roller pull-out roller Pre-registration roller Registration roller Pre-transfer roller Photosensitive drum Transfer charging roller Fixing delivery roller Delivery vertical path roller Delivery roller Duplex roller Multifeeder pickup roller
5-2 P
1.3 Arrangement of Motors, Clutches, and Solenoids

M5 M1
CL2
M9
SL5 CL1
M6
M2
SL1
F05-102-01 The following motors, clutches, and solenoids are used to move paper:
Notation M1 M2 M5 M6 M9 CL1 CL2 SL1 SL5 Name Main motor Pickup motor Delivery motor Duplex motor Registration motor Vertical path clutch Multifeeder clutch Pickup DOWN solenoid Multifeeder rely releasing solenoid
5-3 P
1.4 Arrangement of Sensors

PS16 PS15
PS22 PS11 PS13 PS17 PS12 PS10 PS18 PS9 PS7 PS1 PS8 PS2
F05-103-01 The following sensors are used to monitor the movement of paper:
Notation PS1 PS2 PS7 PS8 PS9 PS10 PS11 PS12 PS13 PS15 PS16 PS17 PS18 PS22 Name Cassette 1 paper sensor Cassette 2 paper sensor Cassette 1 retry paper sensor Cassette 2 retry paper sensor Pre-registration paper sensor Registration paper sensor Horizontal registration paper sensor Image leading edge paper sensor fixing feeding sensor No. 1 delivery paper sensor No. 1 delivery full sensor Duplex inlet paper sensor Duplex outlet paper sensor Multifeeder paper sensor Delay jam No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Stationary jam No No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No Power-on stationary jam No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
T05-102-01 5-4 P
2 Detecting Jams
2.1 Sequence of Operations (jam detection)
2.1.1 Delay Jam
a. Cassette Pickup Assembly (cassette 1, 2) The leading edge of paper does not reach the sensor within a specific period of time after the motor has gone ON.
Start key ON or PRINT setting ON INTR / PRINT
Motor N-1 Jam check Sensor N
[1]
[1]
Normal [1]:specific feed period.
Error
F05-201-01
Pickup assembly Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Motor Pickup motor (M2) Pickup motor (M2) Sensor Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS7) Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS8)
T05-201-01
5-5 P
b. Other Delay Jams Other than pickup sensor delay jams, jams are found by other sensors at the following timing of detection. The period of time for travel between sensor N-1 and delay jam sensor N are monitored with reference to the clock pulses from the main motor; a delay jam will be identified if the leading edge of paper does not reach the delay jam sensor N in question within a specific period of time after the sensor N-1 goes ON.
Start key ON or PRINT settings ON INTR / PRINT
Sensor N-1 Jam check Sensor N
[1]
[1]
Normal [1]:specific feed period.
Error
F05-201-02
Notation PS9 PS10 PS12 PS13 PS15 PS17 PS18 PS22 Name Pre-registration paper sensor Registration paper sensor Image leading edge sensor Fixing feeding sensor No. 1 delivery paper sensor Duplex inlet paper sensor Duplex outlet paper sensor Multifeeder paper Delay jam Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
T05-201-02
5-6 P
2.1.2 Stationary Jam

a. Common Stationary Jam Registration paper sensor (PS10), Fixing feeding sensor (PS13), No. 1 delivery paper sensor (PS15)
Start key ON or PRINT setting ON INTR / PRINT
Jam check Sensor N
L+A Normal
L+A Error
(L: paper length; A: specific feed distance)
F05-201-03 b. Power-On Stationary Jam A stationary jam at power on is identified based on the presence/absence of paper over a specific sensor about 1 sec after the control panel power switch is turned on.
2.1.3 Jam History

The host machine maintains a history of jams that occur inside it, and the history may be checked in service mode. COPIER>DIPLAY>JAM Use it to indicate jam data. COPIER>FUNCTION>JAM-HIST Use it to clear the jam history. The following are retained in response to a jam, and brought back to use after the jam has been removed. Remaining number of copies to make Selected copying mode
5-7 P
3 Pickup Assembly
3.1 Pickup Control System
[10]
M9 [11] [8] [9] [11] M1
[2] [1]
[3] CL1
M2
[4] [5] [2] [3]
[6]
SL1 [7]
[4] [5]
F05-301-01
Notation [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Name Gear Pickup roller Feeding roller Separation roller Lifter Vertical path roller Cam Registration roller Notation [9] [10] [11] M1 M2 M5 CL1 SL1 Name Pre-registration roller DC controller PCB Cassette pickup PCB Main motor Pickup motor Registration motor Vertical path clutch Pickup DOWN solenoid
5-8 P
3.2 Outline
The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter, and remains in contact with the pickup roller when pickup takes place: (1) The pickup motor (M2) is used to drive the pickup roller. The pickup roller is moved down in relation to the feeding roller, and is brought into contact with paper only when pickup takes place. (2) The pickup roller is moved down when the cam released by the DOWN solenoid (SL1) rotates by the drive of the main motor (M1). The feeding roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that only one sheet of paper from the pickup roller is sent to the feeding path; the No. 2 registration roller and the vertical path roller then forwards the paper as far as the registration roller. The drive for the vertical path roller and the No. 2 registration roller is provided by the pickup motor (M2) through the vertical path clutch (CL1). The registration roller is driven by the registration motor (M9).
5-9 P
3.3 Sequence of Operations (pickup)

a. Cassette 1 A4, 2 Copies, Continuous
Print start PRINT Pickup down solenoid(SL1) Pickup motor(M2) Retry sensor(PS7) Vertical path roller clutch(CL1) Pre-registration paper sensor(PS9) Registration paper sensor(PS10) Regist motor(M9) LSTR
F05-303-01
5-10 P
3.4 Operation of the Cassette Lifter

The lifter is operated as necessary in the course of printing to maintain the stack of sheets to a specific height.
3.4.1 Operation of the Lifter During Printing

The lifter is controlled by the movement of the pickup roller shaft. When the pickup roller shaft pushes the lifter trigger lever, the cam is released, and the lifter starts to move up until the lifter trigger lever stops the cam. 1) Each time the pickup roller DOWN soSL1 lenoid (SL1) goes ON, the pickup roller shaft [2] moves down to initiate pickup [1] [2] operation. 2) When the sheets [6] decrease and, as a [3] result, the descent distance [3] of the pickup roller increases, the pickup roller shift pushes down the lifter trigger lever [4]. [4]
[7] [6] [5]
3) When the lever is pushed down, the cam [5] is released, causing it to rotate.
4) The rotation of the cam turns the eccentric cam [3] mounted to the same shaft. The eccentric cam operates the lifter UP lever [2] to move up the lifter gear [1]. 5) The lifter moves up and, as a result, the paper stack moves up; when the pickup roller shaft reaches a specific height, the lifter trigger lever is drawn back by the work of a spring, thereby stopping the cam.
[1] [2] [3]
F05-304-01 The foregoing series of operation is repeated to maintain the height of the paper stack to a specific level. The cassette pickup operation ends when paper runs out and the cassette paper sensor detects the absence of paper.
5-11 P
3.4.2 Releasing the Lifter

The lifter is released mechanically when the cassette is slid out. When the machine is in standby state, the lifter gear is held in place by the lifter gear retaining lever. When the cassette is slid out, the lifter gear retaining lever is freed, thereby allowing the lifter to move down. If the main power is cut while the lifter is moving up, the lifter is held up with the claw used to move up the lifter remaining in contact with the lifter gear; the lifter will not be fully released in this condition, and damage can occur if the cassette is forced out. Be sure to turn off and then on the main power so that the machine will be in standby state whenever the cassette must be slid out.
5-12 P
3.5 Cassette Pickup Operation

3.5.1 Rotating the Pickup Roller
The drive used to rotate the pickup roller is transmitted through gears. The cassette motor rotates clockwise and counterclockwise to initiate pickup operation of the cassette 1/2.
3.5.2 Switching the Pickup Roller Drive

When the pickup roller rotates clockwise, the gear 1 moves up to drive the pickup roller of the upper cassette holder; when the motor rotates counterclockwise, on the other hand, the gear 1 moves down to drive the pickup roller of the lower cassette holder. The figure below shows how the drive of the pickup roller is controlled.
3.5.3 Pickup Roller Shaft Reference

The up and down movement of the pickup roller when the cassette is set in the machine is driven with reference to the position of the pickup roller shaft.
[1]
[2]
[1] Pickup motor (M2) [2] Gear 1 F05-305-01
5-13 P
Pickup Drive for the Upper Cassette Holder (pickup motor in CW rotation)
Feeding roller
Cassette pickup motor (M2) Gear 1
Pickup roller Separation roller
F05-305-02 Pickup Drive for the Lower Cassette Holder (pickup motor CCW rotation)
Feeding roller Cassette pickup motor (M2)
Pickup roller
Separation roller Gear 1
F05-305-03
5-14 P
3.6 Moving Up/Down the Pickup Roller

The pickup roller and the feeding roller are supported by a roller holder, and the pickup roller is moved up and down in relation to the feeding roller. In standby state, the pickup roller is at the uppermost position; during pickup operation, on the other hand, it moves down to reach the paper surface. It operates as follows to pick up a single sheet of paper: 1) When the pickup solenoid (SL1) goes ON, the drive of the main motor (M1) causes the cam 1 to rotate. 2) The rotation of the cam 1 causes the pickup lever to swing. 3) The swing of the lever causes the pickup roller to move down to come into contact with the paper, and the pickup motor (M2) starts pickup operation. 4) The rotation of the cam 1 moves up the pickup roller shaft. Arrangement of the Pickup Roller
Roller holder
Pickup roller shaft
F05-306-01 Up/Down Movement of the Pickup Roller Shaft

Feeding roller Feeding roller shaft
ON
Pickup roller shaft
Pickup roller Roller holder
Pickup lever Cam 1 (rotates when SL1 goes ON)
Pickup solenoid (SL1)
ON
F05-306-02
5-15 P
3.7 Pickup Retry Operation

When a delay is detected by a pickup sensor because of wear on the pick roller, pickup retry operation is executed. If a delay is still detected after a retry, the control panel indicates the Jam message.
3.7.1 Conditions for Detecting a Delay

Paper does not reach the retry sensor when it has been moved over a specific distance after the pickup DOWN solenoid (SL1) has gone ON.
Start key ON Retry operation started
Pick DOWN solenoid Pickup motor *1 Retry paper sensor Pre-registration paper sensor Hereafter, the same sequence as common pickup sequence.
*1:retry operation is executed if paper does not arrive after moving it over distance to the retry sensor + 100 mm.
F05-307-01 Retry Operation
5-16 P
3.7.2 Paper Retraction

If a delay is detected once again after a retry and the jam must be removed, the paper can become torn if an attempt is made form the cassette side. To enable removal from the right cover side, the following operation takes plate: 1) After detecting the jam, the retracting roller is driven for a period equivalent to a distance over which paper may be moved 10 cm. The paper will be moved to a point where it is in view when the right cover is opened. 2) The control panel indicates an instruction to the effect that the jam may be removed from the right cover side. 3) The right cover may be opened to remove the jam. If the jam is not in view when the right cover is opened, it may be removed from the cassette side.
Start key ON Retry started Jam indicator (removal from right cover side)
Pickup roller DOWN solenoid Pickup motor Retry sensor *1
*1:paper moved by the retracting roller for a equivalent of a distance over which paper may be moved 10 cm.
F05-307-02
5-17 P
3.8 Operation Other Than Cassette Pickup (standby)

When the cassette is slid into or out of the machine, the following takes place:
3.8.1 Moving Up the Lifter/Moving Down the Pickup Roller Shaft (cassette slid in)
1) Moving Down the Pickup Roller Shaft With the power on, when the cassette is slid into the machine, the pickup roller moves down until it comes into contact with the paper surface as follows: The cassette rear end pushes in the lever 1 of the pickup unit. When the cassette size detection mechanism goes ON, the main motor (M1) and the pickup solenoid (SL1) go ON to swing the pickup lever.
[5] [4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Cassette Lever 1 Pickup roller Feeding roller Pickup roller shaft
[2] [1] [3]
F05-308-01
5-18 P
2) Moving Up the Lifter When the main power is turned on with the cassette set in the machine or the cassette is slid in while the machine is in standby state, the pickup roller shaft moves down to push down the lifter trigger lever. The cam is released when the pickup roller shaft pushes one side of the lifter trigger lever, and the drive from the main motor (M1) move sup the lifter. When the pickup roller remaining in contact with the paper surface moves up to a specific height, the movement of the levers cause the pickup roller shaft to return to the uppermost position to end the upward movement of the lifter.
Pickup roller shaft
Lifter trigger lever Cam

M1
F05-308-02
5-19 P
3.8.2 Moving Up the Pickup Roller Shaft and Releasing the Separation Roller Pressure (cassette slid out)
When the cassette is slid out of the machine, the pickup roller shaft is mechanically moved up and the separation roller pressure is also released. 1) Moving Up the Pickup Roller Shaft and Releasing the Separation Roller Pressure When the cassette is slid out, the lever 1 rotates by the work of a spring. When the lever 1 rotates, the pickup roller shaft moves so that the pickup roller and the cassette will not interfere with each other.
[5] [4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Cassette Lever 1 Pickup roller Feeding roller Pickup roller shaft
[2] [3] [1]
F05-308-03
5-20 P
2) Releasing the Separation Roller Pressure The lever 1 is provided with a protrusion used to push down the separation roller assembly. When the cassette is slid out, the lever 1 rotates causing the separation roller to move down, thereby removing the pressure between the separation roller and the feeding roller.
[2]
[1] Cassette [2] Protrusion of lever 1 [3] Separation roller

[3]
[1]
F05-308-04 b. Releasing the Lifter The lifter is released when the cassette is slid out while the machine is in standby state.
5-21 P
3.9 Detecting the Level of Paper

The level of paper inside the cassette is detected by the light-blocking plate of the lifter gear and a sensor in relation to the distance over which the lifter moves up. When paper starts to run out, the lifter gradually moves up; when paper fully runs out, the cassette paper sensor (Q1604 for cassette 1) identifies the condition as indicating the absence of paper.
Lifter
Light-blocking plate
F05-309-01
If the cassette is full of paper If the cassette is empty of paper
Pickup roller Paper
Sensor 2 Sensor 1 Light-blocking plate Lifter

Note: The diagram is a view from the rear of the copying machine.
F05-309-02 Detecting the Level of Paper in the Cassette (upper cassette holder) The amount of paper inside the cassette is indicated on the control panel in terms of four levels (including the absence of paper).
Indication 3 bars 2 bars 1 bar no bar 0: 1: Level 100% to about 50% of capacity 50% to about 10% of capacity about 10% or less of capacity No paper Sensor 1 0 1 1 Sensor 2 0 0 1 -
light-blocking plate over the sensor. light-blocking plate not over the sensor.
T05-309-01 5-22 P
3.10 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper Inside the Cassette

When the cassette runs out of paper, the paper detecting lever falls through the detecting hole of the cassette, causing the light-blocking plate linked to the lever to block the light of the photointerrupter (Q1604 for cassette 1; Q1605 for cassette 2).
Q1604: cassette 1. Q1605: cassette 2.
Paper detecting lever
F05-310-01
5-23 P
4 Identifying the Size of Paper

The size of paper inside the cassette may be set using the dial on the cassette. The ABsetting and the Inch-setting are switched over using the switch found next to the dial.
4.1 Identifying the Size

The dial on the cassette may be set to any of 16 stops. When the dial is set to an appropriate paper size and the cassette is slid into the machine, the four cassette size detecting switches recognize the size of the paper based on the resulting combination of indentations and protrusions of the size detecting cam.
4.2 AB-/Inch-Setting Switch

The AB-setting and the Inch-setting is switched over using the switch found next to the dial. When the cassette is slid into the machine, the cassette side detecting switch recognizes the paper configuration (AB or Inch)
[1]
[1] Dial [2] AB-/Inch-setting switch [3] Size detecting cam
[3] [2]
F05-402-01
5-24 P
4.3 Paper Size

The width and the length of paper are identified by the dial mounted to the cassette is set. The following diagram shows the rotary label attached to the dial, and the following table shows the paper sizes that are recognized by the machine:
STM T STMT-R
A5R
A5
LT
A4
A4
A3
LT
R-
LGL
R B4 U1 U2 U3
B5
B5
U4
A/B-setting rotary label
Inch-setting rotary label
F05-403-01 Rotary Label Note 1:U Cassette The following are special types of paper: U1: FOOLSCAP/OFFICIO/A-OFFICIO/E-OFFICIO/B-OFFICIO/A-LGL U2: FOLIO U3: A-FLS U4: G-LTR U5: G-LTR(R) U6: G-LGL U7: X-LGL U8: K-LGL(R)
U6 U7
U5
U8
11
17
5-25 P
4.4 Paper Size List

(AB-setting) Cassette name No cassette A5 A5R A4 A4R A3 B5 B5R B4 U1 (FLSO) U1 (OFICIO) U1 (A-OFI) U1 (E-OFI) U1 (B-OFI) U1 (A-LGL) U2 (FOLIO) U3 (A-FLS) Combination of states of cassette size detection switches SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON Main scanning direction (mm) 210 148 297 210 297 257 182 257 216 216 220 220 216 220 210 206 Sub scanning direction(mm) 148 210 210 297 420 182 257 364 330 317 340 320 355 340 330 337
(Inch-setting) Cassette name No cassette STMT STMTR LTR (A-LTR) LTRR (A-LTRR) LGL 1117 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8
Combination of states of cassette size detection switches SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON
Main scanning direction (mm) 216 140 279 280 216 220 216 279 267 203 203 268 190
Sub scanning direction(mm) 140 216 216 220 279 280 356 432 203 267 330 190 206
T05-403-01 List of Paper Sizes
5-26 P
5 Multifeeder
5.1 Outline
When the paper guide plate moves up, the paper on the multifeeder tray is butted against the pickup roller, and the pickup roller and the separation pad make sure that only one sheet of paper is picked up and fed into the machine. 1) The paper guide plate is operated by the drive of the main motor (M1) transmitted by the paper guide solenoid (SL5). 2) The pickup roller is operated by the drive of the main motor (M1) transmitted by the multifeeder clutch (CL2).
J302-B8 MLT_CL
CL2 [7]
[1]
J308-A9 [8] MM_ON*
PS3 M1 PS4 [3] [4]
J308-A2 MLT_SL
SL5
[6]
[2] [5]
F05-501-01
Ref. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Name Multifeeder pickup roller Separation pad Paper guide plate Multifeeder tray Drive cam Spring cutch Ref. [7] [8] M1 CL2 SL5 Name Registration roller DC controller PCB Main motor Multifeeder clutch Multifeeder holding plate releasing solenoid
5-27 P
5.2 Identifying the Size of Paper in the Multifeeder

5.2.1 Detecting the Width of Paper
The width of paper is detected by a variable resistor operating in conjunction with the movement of the slide guide. The slide guide is set when the user adjusts the multifeeder tray to suit the paper placed on it.
5.2.2 Rear/Front Registration

The rear/front registration of the multifeeder may be adjusted by turning the screw on the slide guide.
5.2.3 Identifying the Length of Paper

The length of paper is detected with reference to the period of time during which the preregistration paper sensor (PS10) remains ON while copies are being made. The maximum size of paper is 432 279 mm (1117).
Slide guide (rear)
Variable resistor
Multifeeder tray Slide guide (front)
F05-602-01 COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4R Use it to adjust the paper width basic value of A4R paper for the manual feed tray. COPIER>ADJUST>CSRT-ADJ>MF-A6R Use it to adjust the paper width basic value of A6R for the manual feed tray. COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4 Use it to adjust the paper width basic value of A4 paper for the manual feed tray.
5-28 P
6 Controlling the Registration Roller

6.1 Outline
The registration roller is driven by the registration motor (M9) so that the paper and the image on the photosensitive drum will match at a specific point. The timing at which the registration roller rotates may be adjusted in service mode (ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST).
6.2 Control System

Registration rollers
M9
Registration drive signal J309
DC controller PCB
F05-602-01 COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration roller is started.
5-29 P
7 Double-Sided Printing
7.1 Through-Path Operation
In this sequence of operations, paper after fixing is fed to the delivery assembly and then to the duplex feeding assembly using the reversing flapper. the machine re-arranges the order of images in its memory for printing. As many as two sheets may exist at a time between the registration sensor and the duplex paper sensor. COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE Use it to adjust the image write start position in main scanning direction for re-pickup. (-100 to 100 mm)
5-30 P
7.2 Outline of Operations

For instance, through-path operations take place as follows when one set of double-sided prints are made of six originals:
1) The 1st sheet is picked up from the cassette. 2) The 2nd side is printed on the 1st sheet.
3) The 1st sheet is switched back in the delivery assembly, and is then sent to the duplex feeding assembly.
4) The 2nd sheet is picked up, and the 4th side is printed.
F05-703-01
5-31 P
5) The 2nd sheet is switched back in the delivery assembly, and is then sent to the duplex feeding assembly.
6) The 1st side is printed on the back of the 1st sheet.
7) The 1st sheet is delivered.The 2nd sheet is in the duplex feeding assembly.
8) The 3rd sheet is picked up, and the 6th side is printed. After this operation, a series of processes are repeated.
F05-703-02
5-32 P
7.3 Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position

7.3.1 Outline
In duplex printing, paper coming from the duplex feeding assembly is checked for horizontal registration, and the detected displacement in rear/front direction is made up for by adjusting the point of laser exposure. Paper position: Timing of detection: Drive: Position: Related service mode: Related error code: by duplex horizontal registration sensor (PS11) after duplex paper sensor (PS10) goes ON by duplex horizontal registration motor (M3) by pulse from duplex horizontal registration motor (1 pulse = about 0.16 mm) COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE E051 (home position not detected within specific time) T05-703-01
M3
PS11
Copy paper 10mm(approx.)
Detecting start position Home position
F05-703-01
5-33 P
7.3.2 Operation
1) Timing of Detecting Home Position When the main power switch is turned on, During jam recovery, When the front cover is closed 2) Start Position The detection start position is set at a point about 10 mm from the edge of paper whose movement is ideal with reference to the data on the paper width collected from the slide guide on the manual feed tray and the cassette size when the registration sensor goes ON. 3) Detectiong operation When paper fed to the duplex feeding assembly reaches the registration roller, the horizontal registration motor (M3) goes ON, and the duplex horizontal registration sensor (PS11) starts paper edge detection. The detection takes place for each time a double-sided print is made. The detection of paper position is done with reference to the start position, and the displacement from the actual paper position is identified with reference to the drive pulses from the motor (1 pulse = about 0.16 mm).
Main power switch ON INTR/STBY Registration motor (M9) Registration sensor (PS10) Duplex horizontal registration motor(M3) Duplex horizontal registration sensor(PS11) H.P Duplex horizontal registration sensor (PS11) position S.P *1 10 mm(approx.) Paper edge Forward Reverse Reverse Forward PRINT
*1: HP: SP:
the position of the edge of paper differs depending on the size of paper, hence different SP. start position of the duplex horizontal sensor. detection start position of the duplex horizontal registration sensor.
F05-703-02
5-34 P
8 Controlling the Pickup Assembly Motor

8.1 Pickup Assembly Motor
The pickup assembly motor system consists of six stepping motors of 2-phase magnetic excitation type. Each motor is supplied with power by the motor driver PCB, and is turned on/off and rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by pulse signals from the DC controller PCB. T05-801-01 shows the motors used in the pickup assembly and F05-801-01 shows a block diagram of the control circuit for the cassette 1/2 pickup motor:
Location Pickup system Vertical path system Duplex system Others Motor name Cassette 1/2 pickup motor Duplex motor Duplex registration motor Registration moter Delivery moter Notation (M2) (M6) (M3) (M9) (M5) Error detection Jam occurred Jam occurred E051 Jam occurred Jam occurred
T05-801-01
DC controller PCB +24V J302 A1 A6 PIO (IC303)
Feeder driver PCB J1601 18 13 12 11 10 J1602 3 B* M2 B A* A
A7 A8 A9
4 1 2
F05-801-01
5-35 P

2. Unless otherwise noted, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4. The mounting screws used for the grounding wire and the varistors come with a washer, which must not be left out when assembling the machine. 5. As a rule, the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed. 6. The door switch or the main power switch must be turned off whenever the duplex unit or the fixing/feeding unit must be slid out. 7. The toner must not be disposed of into fire to avid explosion.
8. Do not operate the machine without locking the feeding assembly in place to avoid damage.
5-36 P
9.1 Pickup Assembly

9.1.1 Removing the Pickup Assembly
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Remove the cassette 1/2. Remove the multifeeder tray. (p. 5-42P) Remove the pickup cover. (p. 5-43P) Remove the right lower cover. Fit a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove the paper lint cleaning cover [1].
[1]
F05-901-01 6) Remove the screw [2], and detach the positioning pin [3].
[1] [2] [3]
F05-901-02 7) Disconnect the two connectors [1]. 8) Remove the seven screws [2], and remove the screw [3] from the right rear; then, detach the pickup assembly [4].
[1] [3]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1]
F05-901-03
5-37 P
9.1.2 Removing the Pickup/Feeding/Separation Rollers

1) Remove the cassette 1/2. 2) Pick the tab [4] of each, and detach the pickup roller [1], feeding roller [2], and separation roller [3] in the axial direction. When removing the roller, take care not to soil it with the grease used on the rail assembly. When mounting the roller, be sure to fit it until a click is heard.
[4]
[4]
[1] [2] [3]
F05-901-04
9.1.3 Removing the Pickup Solenoid

1) Remove the pickup assembly. (p. 5-37P) 2) Disconnect the connector [1]. 3) Remove the screw [2], and detach pickup solenoid [3].
[2] [1] [1]
[2] [3] [3] [1] [1]
F05-901-05
5-38 P
9.1.4 Removing the Frame Lid

1) Remove the pickup solenoid. (p. 5-38P) 2) Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the four connectors [2]. 3) While spreading the two claws [3], detach the pickup PCB [4].
[2]
[4]
[1] [1]
[2] [3] [3] [1] [1]
F05-901-06 4) Remove the coil spring [1]. 5) Remove the screw [2], and detach the leaf spring [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
F05-901-07 6) Remove the five screws [1]; then, while freeing the two claws [2], detach the frame lid [3]. When mounting, detach the two bushings [4] from the frame lid [3]; fix the frame lid using the claw [2]; mount back the bushings; then, check to see if the harness is routed correctly by looking through the opening in area A.
[2] [4] [3]
A
[4] [1] [2] [1] [1]
F05-901-08 5-39 P
9.1.5 Removing the Pickup Motor

1) Remove the frame lid. (p.5-39P) 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the pickup unit [2].
[2]
[1]
F05-901-09 3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the pickup motor [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F05-901-10
9.1.6 Remove the Vertical Path Cultch

1) Remove the frame lid. (p. 5-39P) 2) Remove the flange [1], belt [2], and gear [3].
[3] [2]
[1]
F05-901-11
5-40 P
3) Remove the grip ring [1], and detach the vertical path clutch [2].
[2] [1]
F05-901-12
9.1.7 Removing the Horizontal Registration Sensor Shift Motor

1) Remove the pickup assembly. (p. 5-37P) 2) Disconnect the two connectors [1]. 3) Remove the two screws [2], and detach the horizontal registration unit. [3].
[3] [2]
[1]
F05-901-13 4) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the horizontal registration sensor shift motor [2].
[2]
[1]
F05-901-14
5-41 P
9.1.8 Checking the Image Rear Front Position

Make copies in Direct, and check to make sure that the margin along the image front is 2.5 1.5 mm for all sheets from all sources of paper. Otherwise, adjust the registration. (See item 9.1.9.)
(-) (+) 2.51.5mm
0 2 4 6 8 10
F05-901-15
9.1.9 Adjusting the Cassette Rear Front Registration

Execute 'image read start position adjustment' in service mode. COPIER>FUNCTION>C1ADJ-Y/C2-ADJ-Y/C3-ADJ-Y/ C4-ADJ-Y Use it to adjust the image read start position.
If correction in service mode fails, make the following adjustments.
5-42 P
1) Remove the cassette. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the horizontal registration base assembly [2].
[2]
[1]
F05-901-16 3) Loosen the screw [1], and adjust the horizontal registration plate [2]. When making adjustments, try to match the arrow [3] against the index (each graduation being about 1 mm).
[2]
[1]
[3]
F05-901-17
5-43 P
9.2 Multifeeder Tray Assembly

9.2.1 Removing the Multifeeder Tray Assembly
1) Open the multifeeder tray [1], and remove the following: delivery tray (2 screws), right front cover (2 screws), right rear cover (5 screws), right inside cover (2 screws). 2) Disconnect the connector [2].
[2]
[1]
F05-902-01 3) Close the multifeeder tray [1], and open the pickup cover [2]; then, detach the member [3] on the left and the right. (At this time, the multifeeder tray is not locked in place; work while supporting it with your hand.)
[1]
[3]
[3] [3]
[2]
F05-902-02 4) Open the multifeeder tray once again, and detach it to the right.
5-44 P
9.2.2 Removing the Pickup Cover

1) 2) 3) 4) Open the pickup cover [1]. Remove the member [2] from the rear. Free the cable [4] from the hook [3]. Remove the pickup cover [1].
[2] [4] [3]
[2] [4]
[1]
F05-902-03
9.2.3 Removing the Multifeeder Tray Pickup Roller

1) Remove the pickup cover. (See item 9.2.2.) 2) Remove the snap-on bushing [1]. 3) While taking care not to deform the grounding plate at the rear of the roller shaft [2], shift the roller shaft [2] in the direction of the arrow. 4) Remove the stop ring [3], and detach the multifeeder tray pickup roller [5] while taking care not to drop the parallel pin [4] at the rear. When mounting, be sure that the pin notch (cross-shaped) in the collar [6] of the multifeeder tray pickup roller [5] is toward the rear.
[1] [2] [3] [5] [4]
[5] [6]
F05-902-04
5-45 P
9.2.4 Removing the Separation Pad

1) Remove the multifeeder tray pickup roller. (p. 5-45P) 2) While butting the end [1] of the pickup cover in the direction of A, pull the rear of the separation pad over [2] in the direction of B to detach.
[2]
A B [1]
F05-902-05 3) While holding down the multifeeder intermediate retaining plate [1] so that it will not open, remove the lever claw assembly [2] and detach the lever [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
F05-902-06 4) Open the multifeeder intermediate retaining plate [2] so that the two springs [1] will not spring out. 5) Remove the two springs [1]. 6) While pushing the end [3] of the pickup cover in the direction of A, pull the multifeeder intermediate retaining plate [2] in the direction of B to detach. 7) Remove the separation pad [4].
[1] [4] [1] [2] [3] B A
F05-902-07
5-46 P
9.2.5 Attaching the Timing Belt of the Multifeeder Tray

1) Butt the two rack plates [1] of the multifeeder tray against both ends (area A). 2) Move the slide volume [2] in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt [3] to the pulley [4].
A [4] [3] [1]
B [1] [2] A
F05-902-08

Make copies (from the Multifeeder Tray) in Direct, and check to make sure that the margin along the image front is 2.5 1.5 mm. Otherwise, adjust the registration. (See item 9.2.7)
(-) (+) 2.51.5mm
0 2 4 6 8 10
F05-902-09
9.2.7 Adjusting the Registration for the Multifeeder Rear Front

Execute image read start position adjustment in service mode. COPIER>FUNCTION>MFADJ-Y Use it to adjust the image read start position.
5-47 P
1) Open the multifeeder tray. 2) Loosen the two screws [1], and move the side guide plate unit [2] back and forth to adjust.
[1]
[2]
[1]
F05-902-10
5-48 P
9.3 Feeding Assembly

9.3.1 Removing the Feeding Assembly
1) Remove the cassette 1/2. 2) Remove the pickup assembly. (p. 5-37P) 3) Remove the delivery cover. (p. 6-12P) 4) Disconnect the concoctor [1] of the lower feeding assembly from the left.
[1]
F05-903-01 5) Remove the inside cover. (p. 7-14P) 6) Mount the feeding locking lever [1] temporarily, and lock the feeding assembly [2] in place. 7) Remove the pin [3], and detach the duplex grip [4]. 8) Remove the two screws [5], and detach the lower feeding assembly [6] from below.
[1] [5] [4] [5] [3] [2] [6]
F05-903-02 9) Turn the feeding locking lever [1] to release the feeding assembly [2]. 10) Disconnect the connector [3], and detach the sensor cable [4] from the three wire saddles [5] and the hinge [6]. 11) Remove the screw [7], and detach the hinge pin [6]. 12) While taking care not to trip them on the flapper [8] and the like, detach the feeding assembly [2] to the front.
[8] [3]
[5] [4] [5] [5] [1] [2] [7] [6]
F05-903-03
5-49 P
9.3.2 Mounting the Feeding Assembly

1) Fit the hinge [2] of the feeding assembly in the hinge hole [3] in the frame (rear) of the host machine.
[3] [2]
[1]
F05-903-04
5-50 P
9.4 Registration Roller Assembly

9.4.1 Removing the Registration Roller
1) Remove the front inside cover (6 screws). 2) Remove the controller box unit. (p. 7-19P) 3) Remove the two screws [1] each (front, rear), and detach the front cover switch [2] and the harness guide [3]. Take care not to damage the belt [4].
[4] [1] [1]
[3] [2] [1]
F05-904-01 4) Disconnect the connector [1]. 5) Remove the screws [2], and detach the terminal [3]. 6) Remove the spring [4].
[2]
[3] [1]
[4]
F05-904-02 7) Remove the spring [1] from the front. 8) Remove the stepped screw [2], and detach the developing assembly base [3].
[3]
[1] [2]
F05-904-03
5-51 P
9) Remove the E-ring [1] at the rear, and detach the gear [2] 10) Remove the spring [3]. 11) Remove the E-ring [4], and detach the bushing.
[1]
[5] [4] [2]
[3]
F05-904-04 12) Remove the spring [1] at the front. 13) Remove the E-ring [2], and detach the bushing [3]. 14) Remove the upper registration roller [4].
[4] [3]
[2]
[1]
F05-904-05 15) Remove the E-ring [1] at the rear, and detach the busing [2].
[1] [2]
F05-904-06
5-52 P
16) Remove the E-ring [1] at the front, and detach the bushing [2]. 17) Remove the lower registration roller [3].
[1] [2] [3]
F05-904-07
5-53 P
1.1 Outline
The fixing system has the following major functions:
Item Method of fixing Fixing heater Control temperature Temperature detection Description SURF method Main heater: flat Sub heater: flat (integrated to main heater) Varies according to selected mode [1] Main thermistor (temperature control, error detection) [2] Sub thermistor (error detection) [3] Thermal switch (error detection) [1] Power-on sequence [2] Country-specific sequence [3] Site temperature-specific sequence Cleaning roller [1] Temperature error detection by thermistor [2] Overheating detection by thermal switch Equipped with rotation detection mechanism
Fixing temperature control
Method of cleaning Error detection Fixing film
T06-101-01
6-1 P
The following diagram shows the major components of the fixing system:
DC controller PCB
Main thermistor signal (M_TH2)
Fixing film signal (FILM_ROT_D)
Fixing film sensor(PS26)
Fixing film Main thermistor (TH1) Sub thermistor (TH2) Thermal switch (TP1)
Fixing sub heater (H2)
Fixing main heater (H1) M4 Fixing motor
Fixing delivery roller Fixing lower roller Cleaning roller Main power supply PCB
F06-101-01
6-2 P
Sub thermistor signal (S_TH2)
Fixing film sensor (PS26)
Thermal switch (TP1) Fixing film
Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater (H2) Fixing lower roller Main thermistor (TH1)
Sub thermistor (TH2) Cleaning roller
F06-101-02
Item Fixing lower roller Fixing motor Main/sub heater Notation M4 H1, H2 Description Pressure roller 24VDC 230V model: 637 W 120V model: 607 W 100V model: 621 W Temperature control, error detection Error detection Operating temperature: 250 7C Rotation detection; reflection type sensor
Main thermistor Sub thermistor Thermal switch Fixing film sensor
TH1 TH2 TP1 PS26
T06-101-02
6-3 P
2 Fixing Drive System

2.1 Outline
The fixing drive system involves the following control mechanisms: 1. Fixing roller drive control 2. Fixing film rotation speed detection/control
2.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Drive

F06-202-01 shows the construction of the control system used for the fixing roller drive:
DC controller PCB
Fixing motor FSAR_ON*

FSAR_LOCK*
N.C FSRM_CLK
FSRM_SPEED*
M4
The following signals are used: [1] Fixing motor drive signal (FSAR_ON): when 1, the motor goes ON. [2] Fixing motor drive lock signal (FSAR_CLK): when the rotation of the fixing motor reaches a specific speed, 0. [3] Fixing motor low-speed drive signal (FSAR_SPEED): when the rotation of the fixing motor is controlled to 1/4, 1. F06-202-01 E014 (fixing motor speed error) Indicates that the drive lock signal cannot be detected with 1.3 sec after the fixing motor drive signal (M4) is generated.
6-4 P
24V GND
Fixing lower roller
2.3 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed

F06-202-02 shows the construction of the control system used for the fixing film speed; the speed of rotation is controlled according to the changes in the output of the fixing film sensor (PS26).
DC controller PCB
Fixing film sensor (PS26)
Fixing film
Fixing lower roller
The following signal is used: [1] Film rotation detection signal (FSAR_ROT_D): when the fixing film is rotating, alternately 1 and 0. F06-202-02 E007 (fixing film rotation error) Indicates that the film rotation detection signal cannot be detected for 6 sec or more when the reading of the main thermistor is 100C or higher and, in addition, the fixing motor is rotating. COPIER>ADJUST>FIXING>FX-FL-SP COPIER>ADJUST>FIXING>FX-FL-TH Use it to adjust the rotation speed of the fixing film. Blurry images caused by a fault in the fixing assembly can at times be corrected. (Blurry images can occur 400-some millimeters of the trailing edge.) This mode may also be used to adjust the reproduction ratio in feed direction.
FILM_ROT_D
6-5 P
3 Controlling the Fixing Temperature

3.1 Outline
The fixing temperature is controlled for the following: [1] Fixing heater temperature [2] Thermistor error detection
Switch PCB
DC controller PCB
RelayRL1
+5V
Heater relay circuit
Fixing main heater (H1)
Fixing sub heater (H2)
Thermal switch (TP1) Fixing main thermistor TH1 TH2 Fixing sub thermistor +5V
Hightemperature detection circuit
IC300 A/D converter (200V)
IC334
+5V
F06-301-01
6-6 P
3.2 Temperature Control

The machines fixing temperature is controlled using the following means:
State Normal Item [1] Power-on sequence Description Used with pre-heating control if the reading of the main thermistor (TH1) is 100C or lower during recovery from sleep mode/power-on/controll panel input/document detection. [2] Start-up sequence Used at time of starting copying operation. [3] Normal temperature control Used to set a temperature to suit the selected sequence paper type/size according to the thermal condition of the fixing assembly. [4] Sheet-to-sheet control Used to lower the fixing temperature between sequence sheets fed continuously. [5] Edge overheating sequence Used to prevent overheating on the ends of the heater otherwise caused by continuously fed small-size sheets. (The operation will slow down.) [7] Fixing temperature switch-over The target temperature for fixing control is COPIER>OPTION>BODY> switched. FIX-TEMP 1: -10C 2: -6C 3: -3C 4: +3C 5: +6C 6: +10C 7: +15C
Service mode Upon selection
T06-302-01
6-7 P
3.2.1 Fixing Temperature Control

The machine is equipped with the following modes to suit the type of paper used: plain paper, thick paper, bond paper, and envelope/postcard (each with a specific control table). A start point of temperature control on the control table is determined based on the temperature of the fixing lower roller considered against the following factors: a. Reading of main thermistor (TH1) b. History of jobs (intervals, quantity) F06-302-01 shows a sample control table:
Main power Print switch ON start Wait indication Fixing heater(M4) Main heater(H1) Sub heater(H2) 220C 215C 210C 205C 200C 195C 190C 185C 180C 175C 170C 165C STBY Green Red
End STBY Green
Bond paper mode
Thick paper mode Plain paper mode
LowerFixing lower temperature estimateHigher
F06-302-01
6-8 P
3.3 Detecting Errors

The machine checks for the following in relation to its fixing temperature control mechanism: 1. Temperature control error by main thermistor (TH1) 2. Temperature control error by sub thermistor (TH2) The following signals are used in association with errors: [1] Fixing temperature detection signal 1 (M_TH2): voltage output according to the reading of the main thermistor. [2] Fixing temperature detection signal 2 (S_TH2): voltage according to the reading of the sub thermistor. [3] Main heater drive signal: when 1, the main heater goes ON. [4] Sub heater drive signal: when 2, the sub heater goes ON. [5] Relay drive signal (RLY_1): when 1, the relay (RL1) on the main power supply PCB goes ON.
Switch PCB
RelayRL1
DC control PCB
Main power supply PCB +5V [5] Heater relay circuit
Fixing main heater (H1)
Thermal switch (TP1) Fixing sub heater (H2) Fixing main thermistor TH1 [2] TH2 Fixing sub thermistor +5V [1]
Hightemperature detection circuit A/D converter (200V)
IC300
IC334 [4]
+5V
[3]
F06-303-01
6-9 P
E000 The main thermistor (TH1) has poor contact or an open circuit. The thermal switch (TP1) has an open circuit. The main /sub heater has an open circuit. The main power supply PCB is faulty. The DC control PCB is faulty. The door switch is faulty. E001 The main thermistor (TH1) has a short circuit. The sub thermistor (TH2) has a short circuit. The main power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty? E002 The main thermistor (TH1) has poor contact or an open circuit. The thermal switch has an open circuit (TP1). The fixing heater has an open circuit. The AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The door switch is faulty. E003 The main thermistor (TH1) has poor contact or an open circuit. The thermal switch has an open circuit (TP1). The fixing heater has an open circuit. The main power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The door switch is faulty. E007 The fixing motor (M4) is faulty. The fixing film sensor (P26) is faulty. If a code from E000 through E003 is indicated, the indication will not be reset even when the main power switch is turned off and then on, requiring clearing of the error in service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR). If E001 or E003 is detected within 3sec after the front cover switch is identified as being open/closed, however, the error indication will be reset when the main power switch is turned off and then on. This is to prevent the user from placing a service call in response to an error detected while the switch operation is not stable (as occurring immediately after the switch is turned on/off).
6-10 P

2. Unless otherwise noted, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4. The mounting screws used for the grounding wire and the varistors come with a washer, which must not be left out when assembling the machine. 5. As a rule, the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed. 6. The door switch or the main power switch must be turned off whenever the duplex unit or the fixing/feeding unit must be slid out.
6-11 P
4.1 Fixing Assembly

4.1.1 Removing the Delivery Cover
1) Open the delivery cover [1]. 2) Remove the cable [2]. 3) Shift farther down the delivery cover [1], and disconnect the connector [3]; then, detach the delivery cover.
[2] [3] [1]
F06-401-01
4.1.2 Removing the Riser Guide

1) Remove the delivery cover. (See item 4.1.1.) 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the connector cover [2].
[2] [1]
F06-401-02 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the riser guide [2].
[2]
[1]
F06-401-03 6-12 P
4.1.3 Removing the Fixing Assembly

1) Remove the riser guide. (p. 6-12P) 2) Check to see if the feeding assembly is locked in position. 3) Disconnect the three connectors [1]. 4) Remove the two screws [2], and detach the fixing assembly [3].
[1]
[2] [3] [2]
F06-401-04
4.1.4 Removing the Fixing Stepped Gear

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (See item 4.1.3.) 2) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the gear [2]. 3) Free the claw, and detach the fixing stepped gear [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
F06-401-05
4.1.5 Removing the Fixing Film Unit

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (See item 4.1.3.) 2) Remove the screw [1], and slide the inlet upper guide [2] to the rear to remove. 3) Remove the screw [3], and detach the sensor unit [4] and the sensor unit guide [5].
[2]
[3]
[5] [4]
[1]
F06-401-06 6-13 P
4) Remove the two springs [1], and open the front of the fixing assembly top [2] to detach.
[2]
[1] [1]
F06-401-07 5) Disconnect that front connector [1] (brown) and the rear connector [2] (black). 6) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the fixing film unit [4].
[4]
[2]
[3] [1]
F06-401-08
4.1.6 Removing the Roller Bushing, Conducting Rubber, and Fixing Roller
1) Remove the fixing assembly. (p. 6-13P) 2) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the gear [2].
[2]
[1]
F06-401-09 3) Remove the fixing film unit. (p. 6-13P)
6-14 P
4) Free the claw [2] of the inlet lower guide [1], and slide it to the rear to remove. Take care not to damage the fixing roller. When mounting, avoid pushing it against the fixing roller.
[1]
[2]
F06-401-10 5) Lift the rear of the fixing roller assembly [1], and slide it to the rear to remove.
[1]
F06-401-11 6) Detach the two roller bushings [2] from the fixing roller [1]. 7) Remove the conducting rubber [3].
[3] [2]
[1] [2]
F06-401-12
6-15 P
4.1.7 Removing the Cleaning Roller Unit

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the outlet guide support plate [2]. 2) Remove the cleaning roller unit [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
F06-401-13
4.1.8 Removing the Lower Guide Ribs

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (p. 6-13P) 2) Remove the cleaning roller unit. (See item 4.1.7.) 3) Push the claw [3] of the five lower guide ribs [1] from the bottom of the lower guide [2] to free and detach. After mounting it, look from below to make sure that the claw [3] is positioned correctly.
[1]
[2] [3]
F06-401-14
6-16 P
4.1.9 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (p. 6-13P) 2) Check to see that the feeding assembly is locked in place. 3) Free the claw of the bushing [1], and slide it to the front. 4) Remove the locking cam unit [2].
[1] [2]
F06-401-15 5) Remove the inside cover. (p. 7-14P) 6) Check to see if the feeding assembly is released. 7) Disconnect the two connectors [1]. 8) Remove the four screws [2], and detach the fixing drive unit [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F06-401-16
4.1.10 Mounting the Locking Cam Unit

1) Check to see if the feeding assembly is locked in place. 2) Match the arrow of the gear of the locking cam unit [1] against the middle of the gear [3] of the fixing drive unit (e.i., where the rear [4] of the gear of the locking cam unit is in contact with the cut-up [5] of the frame).
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
F06-401-17
6-17 P
1 Control Panel
1.1 Outline
The machines control panel consists of the following PCBs and a touch panel (LCD) with a resolution of 320 240 dots.
Control panel Control panel inverter PCB LCD PCB Control panel PCB (keys, LEDs)
Control panel power switch PCB LCD contrast adjustment PCB
Control panel CPU PCB Monitors key input (keypad, function keys) Controls buzzer sound Controls control panel LEDs CPU
Main controller PCB
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD.
F07-101-01 COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>LCD-CHK Use it to check the LCD for missing dots. COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>LED-CHK Use it to start a check on the activation of the LEDs in the control panel. COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>LED-OFF Use it to end a check on the activation of the LEDs in the control panel. COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>KEY-CHK Use it to start a check on key inputs. COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>TOUCHCHK Use it to check the coordinates on the touch panel.
7-1 P
2 Fans
2.1 Arrangement, Functions, and Error Codes
The names and functions of and the error codes associated with the machines fans are as follows:
Notation Name FM1 Developing assembly fan Fixing fan Electric unit fan Curl reducing fan 1 Curl reducing fan 2 Function Cools the developing assembly, Cools the laser scanner Cools the fixing assembly, Cools the drum unit Cools the electric unit Prevents curling of paper Prevents curling of paper 2-speed control (voltage) Yes (24/12 V) Error code E805-0001
FM2 FM3 FM4 FM5
Yes (24/12 V) Yes (24/12 V) No (24 V) No (24 V)
E805-0002 E805-0003 E805-0004 E805-0005
The curl reducing fans 1 and 2 are enabled or disabled in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DECRL-FN>
T07-201-01
7-2 P
The arrangement of the fans and the directions of current are as follows:
FM3
FM2
FM1
FM4
FM5
F07-201-01
7-3 P
2.2 Operation
2.2.1 2-Speed Control
Some of the machines fans are controlled for two speeds (F07-202-01); the voltage switching PCB of each fan changes its output voltage to switch between speeds.
DC controller PCB 24V
Full speed signal
12V 24V or 12V
CPU
Half speed signal
Voltage switching circuit
Clock signal
Fan
F07-202-01
2.2.2 Sequence of Operations

Main power switch ON Control panel switch ON Initial multiple rotation Printer unit state Developing fan (FM1) Fixing assembly (FM2) Electrical unit fan (FM3) Curl reducing fan 1/2 (FM4/FM5) Warm-up Standby Printing Print end
Low-power Jam Door open
Control panel switch OFF
+1
: full speed. : half speed or at rest; if the polygon mirror motor (M10) is ON, half speed; if OFF, at rest. *1: Rotates for 30 sec after the leading edge sensor goes ON during printing; if the sensor goes ON for a second time during the 30-sec period, rotates for another 30 sec.
F07-202-02
7-4 P
3 Power Supply
3.1 Power Supply
3.1.1 Outline
The machines power supply is controlled by the DC power supply PCB; the PCBs and associated components are shown in T07-301-01, and the distribution of power is shown in F07-301-01.
Name Main power supply PCB Composite power supply PCB Options PCB Switch PCB (SW1/SW2) Door switch (SW3) Description Generates DC power from AC power Protects against overcurrent Generates high voltage Supplies power to side paper deck, finisher Turns on/off main power supply PCB (SW1), Turns on/off cassette heater, mirror heater, lens heater (SW2) Detects state of door (open/closed), Cuts AC power to fixing heater, Cuts 24V power to main motor, fixing motor, composite power supply PCB Supplies power to thermsitor Cuts power in response to error
Thermistor power supply PCB (200 V) Leakage breaker
T07-301-01
7-5 P
The machine distributes power as follows:

Leakage Switch PCB breaker SW1 ADF Main power reader assembly supply PCB
24VU2
ADF
SW2 24VU3

24VU3
Arrestor Arrestor PCB ground

(100V)
Cassette heater Mirror heater Filter Lens heater assembly

RL1 THSW
24VU1
Laser scanner Cassette pedestal Pre-exposure lamp 24VU1_SW M Main motor Fixing motor SW3
13V 3VA1 (non-all night) 3VA2 (non-all night) 3VB (all-night)
13V
Clutches Solenoids Fans Pickup PCB Fans (half speed) Sensors Inverter BD PCB
HD
5VA
DC controller PCB
5VA
5VA
Control panel
5VA 5VA
Main heater Sub heater Triac Options power supply PCB
5VA
Side paper deck Finisher 24VA2 Side paper deck

24VA1
5VA
:DC :AC
power supply power supply
F07-301-01
7-6 P
3.1.2 Power Outputs

The machines power outputs are controlled by the main power switch (SW1) and the control panel power switch (SW826), or signals from the printer board. The following table shows the state of power supply from each power supply PCB in relation to combinations of the states of the main power switch and the control panel power switch and the signals from the printer board:
Main power Control panel power Power output from switch (SW1) switch (SW826) or Signals main power supply form printer/fax board PCB OFF*1 ON ON OFF OFF ON No No All Power output from composite power supply PCB No 3VB All Power output from accessories power supply PCB No No All
T07-301-02 *1: If the environment switch (SW2) is ON, the cassette heater, mirror heater, and lens heater are supplied with power.
Control panel PCB Control panel switch
SW826
UI_SOFT_SW*
Main controller PCB

RMT1 3VB (all-night) 3VA1 (non-all night) 3VA2 (non-all night) RMT2
5V
FU1
AC/DC converter
13VU 5VA MPON

APON
Main power supply PCB Main power stitch

SW1 F3501
Accessories power supply PCB AC/DC converter

24VA1 24VA2
AC/DC converter
24VU1 24VU2 24VU3
Switch PCB
F07-301-02
7-7 P
3.2 Rated Outputs of the Main Power Supply PCB

Output Connector No. 24VU1 J200-1 J203-1 24VU1-SW J202-1 J202-3 J202-5 J200-3*1 24VU2 J203-2 24VU3 J204-1 J204-3 J204-7 J204-8 J204-9 J206-2
Output voltage tolerance Rated output voltage Rated output current Overcurrent protection activation setting
5 %*2
24V 9.0A 5.5 to 8.0A *1: input. *2: +7% or -5%, depending on output current.
T07-302-01
3.3 Rated Output of the Composite Power Supply PCB

Output Connector No. 3VA1 (non-all night) J121-4 J121-5 J122-3 J122-4 3VA2 (non-all night) J121-1 J121-2 J121-3 3VB (all-night) J121-11 J121-12 J121-13 5V J122-1 J122-2 J124-9 J124-10 +3%, -4% 13VU J126-2 J126-3 J126-5 J126-7 -
Output voltage tolerance Rated output voltage Rated output curren Overcurrent protection activation setting.
+2%, -4%
2%
3.4V 3.4V 5.0 to 8.0A
3.4V 1.9A 5.0 to 8.0A
5.1V 4.7A 5.0 to 8.0A
12.5 to 17.0V 0.11A 1.0 to 8.0A
T07-303-01
Note: The above assumes that the AC input is between 85 and 135 V for the 100/120V model, and between 187 and 264 V for the 230V model.
7-8 P
3.4 Rated Outputs of the Accessories Power Supply PCB

Output Connector No. 24VA1 J703-2 J704-6 24VA2 J702-1 J702-4 +7%, -5% 24V 5.5A 5.5 to 8.0A
Output voltage tolerance Rated output voltage Rated output current Overcurrent protection activation setting
T07-304-01
Note: The above assumes that the AC input is between 85 and 135 V for the 100/120V model, and between 187 and 264 V for the 230V model.
7-9 P
3.5 Protective Functions

The machines each power supply PCB is equipped with an overcurrent protection circuit designed to cut off the output of each power supply when they go ON. While the signals RMT1 and RMT2 from the main controller PCB are used to turn on the output of each power supply PCB, if 3VB stops from the composite power supply PCB because of a fault in the high-violate output or melting of the fuse, all outputs of power will be cut.
7-10 P
4 Others
4.1 Silent Mode
In silent mode, the drive of the laser scanner motor during standby is stopped for a specific period of time* after the start of standby to reduce the machines operating noise. *The length may be changed in user mode.
7-11 P

2. Unless otherwise noted, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4. The mounting screws used for the grounding wire and the varistors come with a washer, which must not be left out when assembling the machine. 5. As a rule, the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed. 6. The door switch or the main power switch must be turned off whenever the duplex unit or the fixing/feeding unit must be slid out.
7-12 P
5.1 External Covers

Remove the covers as needed when cleaning, checking, or repairing the inside of the machine.
[3]
REF.
Those covers that can be detached by mere removal of mounting screws are left out of the discussions. Unless otherwise noted, the number in parentheses indicates the number of mounting screws used.
[2] [1]
[4] [16]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
Support cover (1 screw) Support the right cover (1 screw) Left rear cover Rear cover (4 screws) Front cover (2 L-shaped pins) Delivery tray (2 screws) Inside cover (6 screws) Right front cover (2 screws) Right lower cover (not in Cassette Feeding Unit-W1) [10]Right rear cover (5 screws) [11]Left upper cover (2; not in Finisher-J1 or Inner 2Way Tray-A1) [12]Left lower cover (1 screw) [13]Left rear cover (1 screw) [14]Waste toner case cover (1 screw) [15]Rear cover (7 screws) [16]Right inside cover (7 screws)
[11]
[13] [7]
[14] [12]
[6]
[8] [15] [9] [10]
F07-501-01
7-13 P
5.1.1 Removing the Front Cover

1) Open the front cover [1], and shift up the L-shaped pin [2] with your finger. 2) Shift the L-shaped pin [2] to the right to detach the front cover [1].
[2]
[1]
F07-501-02
5.1.2 Removing the Inside Cover

1) Remove the front cover. (See item 5.1.1.) 2) Remove the drum unit. (p. 4-28P) 3) Remove the developing assembly. (p. 4-33P) 4) Remove the cassette 1 (topmost cassette). 5) Remove the registration roller knob [1]. 6) Remove the grip ring [2], and detach the feeding lever [3]. 7) Remove the six screws [4], and detach the inside cover [5].
[4] [4]
[4]
[1]
[5] [4] [4] [3] [2] [4]
F07-501-03
7-14 P
5.1.3 Removing the Support Cover

1) 2) 3) 4) Remove the support cover. (1 screw) Remove the left rear cover. Open the front cover. Remove the screw [1], and detach the support cover [2]. Take care not to break the claw (circled) behind the support cover.
[1]
[2]
F07-501-04
7-15 P
5.2 Control Panel

5.2.1 Removing the Control Panel
1) Remove the support cover. (p. 7-15P) 2) Remove the reader front cover. (2 screws) (See the descriptions on the reader unit.) 3) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F07-502-01 4) Shift the control panel [1] to the left, and lift it to detach.
[1] (2)
(1)
F07-502-02
7-16 P
5.3 PCBs
5.3.1 Removing the DC Controller PCB
1) Remove the rear cover. (7 screws) 2) Remove the five screws [1], and detach the connector guard plate [2]. 3) Disconnect all the connectors of the harness. 4) Remove the eight screws [3]. 5) Disconnect the connector [4] to the main controller, and detach the DC controller PCB [5].
[3] [2] [1]
[1] [3] [5] [4] [1] [3]
F07-503-01
5.3.2 Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB

Troubleshooting>Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Image Faults/Malfunctions >6.7 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB
5.3.3 Removing the Controller Cover

1) Remove the rear cover. (7 screws) 2) Remove the 12 screws [1] (if the HDD unit [2] has been removed, 9 screws); then, detach the controller cover [3].
[2] [1] [2] [4]
[2]
[2]
[4] [2] [3]
F07-503-02
7-17 P
5.3.4 Removing the HDD

When removing the HDD, take full care against static charges. Also, do not subject the HDD to impact. 1) Remove the rear cover. (7 screws) 2) Disconnect the connector [1]. 3) Remove the four screws [2], and detach the HDD support base [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F07-503-03 4) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the HDD [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
F07-503-04
7-18 P
5.3.5 Removing the HDD Unit

When removing the HDD unit, take full care against static electricity. Do not subject the HDD unit to impact. 1) 2) 3) 4) Remove the rear cover. (7 screws) Remove the rear right cover. (5 screws) Disconnect the two connectors [1]. Remove the eight screws (if the controller cover [3] has been removed, 5 screws); then, detach the HDD unit [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1] [3] [1] [3] [1]
F07-503-05
5.3.6 Removing the Controller Box Unit

1) Remove the rear cover. (7 screws) 2) Remove the DC controller PCB. (p. 7-17P) 3) Remove the HDD unit. (See item 5.3.5) 4) Disconnect all the connectors of the harness. 5) Remove the eight screws [1], and detach the controller box unit [2].
[1] [1]
[1]
[2] [1] [1]
F07-503-06
7-19 P
5.3.7 Removing the Reader Controller PCB

1) Remove the rear cover. (7 screws) 2) Remove the HDD unit. (p. 7-19P) 3) Disconnect all the connectors of the harness. 4) Remove the six screws [1]. 5) Disconnect the connector [2] to the main controller, and detach the reader controller PCB [3].
[3] [1]
[1] [2]
F07-503-07
5.3.8 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB

5.3.9 Removing the Main Controller PCB

1) Remove the rear cover. (7 screws) 2) Remove the right rear cover. (5 screws) 3) Remove the DC controller PCB. [3] (p. 7-17P) 4) Remove the reader controller PCB. (See item 5.3.7.) 5) Disconnect all the connectors of the [1] harness. 6) Remove the screw [1] (1 each), and detach the two PCB guides [2]. [2] 7) Remove the eight screws [3], and detach [3] the main controller PCB [4].
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
F07-503-08
7-20 P
5.3.10When Replacing the Main Controller PCB

5.3.11Removing the Composite Power Supply

1) Remove the rear cover. (7 screws) 2) Disconnect all the connectors. 3) Remove the three screws [1]; then, lift the composite power supply [2] about 5 mm, and detach it to the front. If you have replaced the composite power supply, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP> DE-DC.
[1]
(1) (2)
(2) [2]
[1]
F07-503-09
5.3.12Removing the Accessories Power Supply

1) Remove the rear cover. (7 screws) 2) Disconnect all the connectors of the harness. 3) Disconnect the connector [1] to the main power supply. 4) Remove the two screws [2], and detach the accessories power supply [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
F07-503-10
7-21 P
5.3.13Removing the Main Power Supply

1) Remove the accessories power supply. (See item 5.3.12.) 2) Disconnect all the connectors. 3) Disconnect the connector [1] to the composite power supply. 4) Remove the four screws [2], and detach the main power supply [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F07-503-11
7-22 P
1.1 Pickup
1.1.1 Outline
The paper deck (hereafter, deck) is capable of accommodating as many as 2500 sheets (A4/LTR, B5; 80 g/m2 paper) at a time, and is designed to operate in response to control signals from the DC controller of its host machine. The lifter of the deck is driven by the deck lifter motor (M2D), and paper is picked up and moved by the drive of the deck main motor (M1D).
1.1.2 Pickup Operation

The paper placed inside the deck is held up by the lifter, and is kept in a specific pickup position. When the Start key is pressed and the deck pickup clutch (CL2D) goes ON, the drive of the deck main motor (M1D) rotates the pickup roller to pick up paper; at this time, the pickup/feeding roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that only one sheet of paper is moved forward. When the deck pickup sensor (PS1D) detects paper thereafter, the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid (SL1D) goes ON so that the pickup roller leaves the stack of paper. The deck feeding roller starts to rotate when the deck feeding clutch (CL1D) goes ON. The picked paper is moved to the registration roller of the host machine, and is made to arch for removal of the slack. The registration roller is controlled so that the leading edge of paper will match the image on the photosensitive drum.
8-1 P
8-2 P
PS1D Deck feed detection signal (P_OUT_SENS) Deck pickup detection signal (FEED_SENS) PS6D Deck feeding clutch drive signal (PULL_CL_ON*) Deck pickup clutch drive signal (FEED_CL_ON*) CL1D Deck driver PCB DC controller PCB
F08-101-01
CL2D SL1D (PICKUP_SL_ON*) M1D
Deck main motor rive signal
(host machine)
COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR2200/iR2800/iR3300 REV.0 MAR. 2001 Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid drive signal
1.1.3 Sequence of Pickup Operations (deck)

Start key ON INTR SCAN PRINT LSTR STBY
Deck main motor (M1D) Deck pickup clutch (CL2D) Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid (SL1D) Deck pickup sensor (PS6D) Deck feed sensor (PS1D) Deck feeding clutch (CL1D)
F08-101-02
8-3 P
1.2 Detecting Paper in the Deck

1.2.1 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper
The presence/absence of paper inside the deck is detected by the deck paper absence sensor [1] (PS2D). When the paper [3] placed on the lifter [2] runs out and, as a result, the paper detecting lever [4] of the pickup roller assembly leaves the deck paper absent sensor, the control panel of the host machine will indicate the absence of paper.
[4] [1]
[3]
[2]
F08-102-01
[4] [1]
[2]
F08-102-02
1.2.2 Switching the Deck Paper Size

If you have to change the paper size of the deck at time of installation or to comply with a request of the user, adjust the guide plate inside the deck to suit the new paper size and enter the new paper size in service mode (OPTION>ACC-DK-P).
8-4 P
1.2.3 Detecting the Level of Paper in the Deck

The deck uses the deck paper supply position sensor (PS8D), deck paper level sensor (PS7D), and deck paper absent sensor (PS2D) to find out how much paper remains inside its compartment and to indicate an approximate level in the control panel of the host machine as shown in the following table (indicating combinations of paper levels and sensor states):
Paper level 100% to about 50% about 50% to about 10% 10% No paper PS2D 1 1 1 0 PS8D 1 1 0 0 PS7D 1 0 0 0 Indication in control panel
1: light-blocking plate over the sensor. 0: light-blocking plate not over the sensor.
T08-102-01
8-5 P
1.3 Deck Lifter

1.3.1 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper
The lifter of the deck is connected to a reel by means of a cable, and is driven by the deck lifter motor (M2D), whose direction of rotation changes the direction (up/down) of the movement of the lifter. When the compartment is slid inside the deck, the deck open detecting switch (SW1D) is pushed; the deck then starts to move up when the deck open sensor (PS9D) detects the lightblocking plate. It will stop to move up when the deck lifter position sensor (PS4D) detects the top face of the stack of paper placed on it. If, for some reason, the lifter fails to stop moving up after the sensor lever blocks the deck lifter position sensor, the deck lifter upper limit sensor (PS3D) will go ON to stop it and thereby to prevent image. When the deck open switch (SW100D) is pushed, on the other hand, the lifter starts to move down, and continues to move down until it leaves the sensor lever of the deck paper supply position sensor (PS8D; falling edge of the sensor output). When supplied, the paper pushes the lever of the deck paper supply position sensors, and the lifter will move farther down until the stack of paper leaves the sensor lever. Each time paper is supplied, the lifter repeats its descent movement until the deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW2D) is pushed (point of maximum paper supply).
8-6 P
[5] [8] M1D [3] [10]
[2] [7] [1]
[4] M2D [9]
[11]
[12]
[13] [6]
[14]
[15]
F08-103-01 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Deck lifter upper limit sensor Deck lifter position sensor Deck paper supply position sensor Deck paper level sensor Deck open detecting switch Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch Deck open switch Deck main motor [9] Deck lifter motor [10]Pickup roller [11]Feeding roller [12]Separation roller [13]Deck lifter cable [14]Lifter [15]Copy paper
8-7 P
1.3.2 Indicating the Level of Paper (deck front cover)

The drive of the deck lifter motor [1] (M2D) is received by a coupling [2], and is forwarded to the rack [4] by way of the drive belt [3]. The rack is equipped with a black belt [4] designed to move inside the window [7] in the deck front cover [6] in keeping with the movement of the rack. When the paper starts to run out and the lifter moves up to the pickup position as a result, the area of the black belt in the window accordingly increases (while the white area decreases), indicating the increasing level of paper.
[4] [5]
[7] [6]
[3]
[1] M2D [2]
F08-103-02
8-8 P
1.4 Opening/Closing of the Compartment

1.4.1 Opening/Closing of the Compartment
When the deck open switch (SW100D) is pushed, the deck open solenoid (SL2D) goes ON, and the compartment is released; as a result, the compartment is pushed several centimeters forward. At the same time, the deck lifter motor (M2D) starts to rotate, and the lifter inside the compartment moves down. When the compartment is pushed inside the deck by hand, the deck open sensor (PS9D) will detect the light-blocking plate of the compartment, and the lifter will move up to the pickup position. When the deck lifter motor starts to rotate, the deck open indicator (LED100D) on the open switch PCB will go ON or start to flash.
J20 -1
SW100D
Deck open signal (DECK_OPEN_SW) Deck open indicator LED ON signal (LEDSW_LEDON) PS3D
J5A -4 J5A -1
LED100D
J20 -4
Open switch PCB (compartment)
Deck lifter upper limit detection signal - 9 (LIFT_M_UPLMT) Deck open detection signal (DECK_OPEN_SENS) Deck open detection signal (DOPD*)
J5A
PS9D SW1D Deck lifter
J6 -7 J7 -3
Deck drive PCB
DC controller PCB
SL2D SW2D
Deck open solenoid drive signal J6 -2 (DECK_LOCKOFF_SL_ON*) Deck lifter lower limit detection signal - 7 (DLLD) Deck lifter motor drive signal 9 (10 :: LIFT_M_UP LIFT_M_DOWN
J4 -9,10 J4
Open
M2D
(host machine)
F08-104-01
8-9 P
1.4.2 Sequence of Operations (opening/closing of the compartment)

Deck open switch ON Flashing ON Compartment set Flashing OFF
Deck open indicator (LED100D) Deck lifter motor (M2D) Deck paper supply position sensor (PS8D) Deck lifter lower limit detection (SW2D) Deck open solenoid (SL2D) Deck open detecting switch (SW1D) Deck open sensor (PS9D) Deck lifter position sensor (PS4D)
Compartment open
Deck lifter DOWN
Deck lifter UP
* : varies depending on the amount of paper.
F08-104-02
8-10 P
1.5 Controlling the Deck Motor

1.5.1 Controlling the Deck Main Motor (M1D)
The deck main motor (M1D) is a stepping motor, and is controlled by the DC controller of the host machine. The following figure shows the circuit used to drive the deck main motor, and the circuit has the following function: [1] Turning on/off the deck main motor a. Turning On/Off the Motor The outputs FEED_M_A, FEED_M_A*, FEED_M_B, and FEED_M_B* are controlled using serial signals from the host machine to turn on/off the deck main motor and switch its speed of rotation.
Side deck driver PCB +24V +5V
Motor drive current switch FEED_M_A* DC controller PCB Motor rotation control circuit FEED_M_B M1D FEED_M_B* Deck main motor
FEED_M_A
F08-105-01
8-11 P
1.5.2 Controlling the Deck Lifter Motor (M2D)

The deck lifter motor control circuit is found on the side deck driver PCB. F08-105-02 is a block diagram of the PCB. The combination circuit found in the figure consists of various logic circuits, and a specific combination is used to rotate the deck lifter motor clockwise or counterclockwise: output signals from sensors and deck lifter motor drive command and deck lifter ascent command from the DC controller of the host machine. If the deck lifter position sensor (PS4D) does not detect the lifter within a specific period of time in spite of the presence of the deck lifter UP signal, an alarm (code: 05) will be indicated in service mode: DISPLAY>ALARM1>BODY. [1] Conditions for Moving Up the Lifter The deck is connected to its host machine. The deck set signal (DECK_MOUNT_SENS) is 1. The compartment is closed. The deck open detection signal (DECK_OPEN_SENS) is 1. The compartment is closed. The deck open detecting switch (DECK_OPEN_SW) is ON. The deck upper limit detection signal (LIFT_M_DOWN) is 0. The deck lifter UP signal (LIFT_M_UP) is 0. The above conditions will move up the lifter. [2] Conditions for Moving Down the Lifter The compartment is open. The deck open detection signal (DECK_OPEN_SNS) is 0. The deck lifter lower limit detection signal (LIFT_LOW_LIMIT) is 0 and, in addition, the deck lifter position detection signal (PAP_TOP_SENS) is 0. The deck lifter motor DOWN signal (LIFT_M_DOWN) is 0. The deck lifter UP signal (LIFT_M_UP) is 1. The above conditions move down the lifter.
8-12 P
24V Deck lifter motor UP drive signal
24V
24V
Deck open detecting switch (SW1D) M2D
DC controller PCB
Deck lifter position detection signal Combina- (PAP_TOP_SENS) tion Deck lifter UP signal circuit Communi- (DECK_UP) Deck lifter lower cation limit signal conversion (LIFT_LOW_LMT) Deck motor error drive (IC4) signal (LIFT_M_ERR)
Deck lifter motor drive signal (LIFT_UP_LIM)
Deck lifter motor DOWN drive signal
Deck lifter motor Motor drive circuit Deck lifter upper limit signal (LIFT_M_UPLMT)
PS3D Deck lifter upper limit sensor PS4D Deck lifter position sensor
Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW2D) Deck open signal (DECK_OPEN_SW) Deck open switch (SW100D) PS9D Deck open sensor
Deck open detection signal (DECK_OPEN_SENS)
Deck set signal (DECK_MOUNT_SENS)
PS5D Deck set sensor
Deck paper supply position signal (PAP_VL_EMP_U) Host machine Side deck driver PCB
PS8D Deck paper supply position sensor
Note: The communication conversion IC (IC4) is used to convert between serial signals and parallel signals.
F08-105-02
8-13 P
2 Detecting Jams
2.1 Outline
The paper deck is equipped with two sensors (F08-201-01) to monitor the movement of paper. A jam is identified in relation to the signals from the sensors at such times as programmed in the DC controller of the host machine. When the DC controller of the host machine identifies a jam, the machine will deliver the sheets that are ahead of the jam, and will stop the operation; thereafter, the host machine will indicate instructions for jam removal in its control panel.
PS1D PS6D
F08-201-01
Notation PS1D PS6D Name Deck feed sensor Deck pickup sensor Function Detection of delay jam Detection of delay jam
T08-201-01
8-14 P
The DC controller of the host machine will identify a jam in response to the following condition: 1. Paper exits over the deck feed sensor (PS6D) while the machine is in wait-up state or standby state when the power switch of the host machine is turned on. 2. Deck Pickup/Vertical Path Delay Jam
Start key ON INTR SCAN Jam indicator ON PRINT
Deck pickup clutch (CL2D) Jam check Deck pickup sensor (PS6D) Deck feed sensor (PS1D) Deck main motor (M1D)
Normal
Error
F08-201-02
8-15 P

8-16 P
3.1 External Covers

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Deck releasing grip Front upper cover Compartment open/closed switch Front cover Right cover Upper cover Rear cover
[7]
[1] [2] [6] [3]
[4]
[5]
F08-301-01
3.1.1 Sliding Out the Compartment

1) Push the deck releasing grip [1] to release the deck from its host machine; then, push down the latch plate [2] at the left rear to open the compartment [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
F08-301-02
8-17 P
3.1.2 Removing the Front Cover

1) Sliding out the compartment. (p. 8-17P) 2) Loosen the four screws [1], and shift the front cover [2] to detach it to the front.
[1]
[2]
F08-301-03 When mounting the front cover, be sure to match it against the coupling [1] of the paper level indicator.
[1]
F08-301-04
8-18 P
Be sure to mount the front cover so that gap A between the front cover [1] and the front upper cover [2] is 3 1 mm.
[1]
[2]
F08-301-05 If you operate the deck without matching the position of the paper level indicator and the deck lifter, the drive mechanism of the paper level indicator can become damaged. If you have moved the paper level indicator drive belt behind the front cover or the deck lifter, be sure to perform the following two tasks: Adjusting the Paper Level Indicator 1) Move the drive belt [2] of the paper level indicator behind the front cover [1] by hand so that the white area inside the window [3] increases, i.e., in the direction for the arrow [4]; move it until a little resistance is felt.
[1]
[3] [2]
[4]
F08-301-06-A
8-19 P
Moving the Deck Lifter 1) Sliding out the compartment. (p. 8-17P) 2) If paper is found, remove all of it. 3) Connect the power plug, and turn on the power switch of the host machine. 4) Push the flag [2] of the paper supply position sensor found inside the compartment so that the deck lifter will move down. (The deck lifter will stop where you release the sensor flag.)
[2]
[1]
F08-301-06-B 5) Disconnect the power plug.
3.1.3 Removing the Rear Cover

1) Release the deck from its host machine; then, remove the six crews [1], and detach the rear cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F08-301-07
8-20 P
3.1.4 Removing the Right Cover

1) Sliding out the compartment. (p. 8-17P) 2) Remove the three screws [1], and shift the right cover [2] down, and then detach it to the front.
[2]
[1]
F08-301-08
3.1.5 Removing the Front Upper Cover

1) Sliding out the compartment. (p. 8-17P) 2) Remove the three screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the front upper cover [3]. When mounting the front upper cover, take care not to trap the harness on the open switch PCB or to forget connecting the connectors.
[2] [3]
[1]
F08-301-10
8-21 P
3.1.6 Removing the Upper Cover

1) Remove the rear cover. (p. 8-20P) 2) Sliding out the compartment. (p. 8-17P) 3) Remove the front upper cover. (p. 8-21P) 4) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the upper cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F08-301-11
8-22 P
3.2 Paper Deck Body

3.2.1 Removing the Deck from the Host Machine
1) To prevent deformation of the roller support plate [1], lay copy paper [3] (A: about 8 cm) or the like on the floor on which to place the deck [2].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
F08-302-01 2) Remove the right cover. (p. 8-21P) 3) Remove the two screws [1] from the right side.
[1]
F08-302-02-A
8-23 P
4) Remove the two screws [1] on the left, and detach the deck [2] from the deck base [3].
[2] [1] [3]
F08-302-02-B 5) Holding the deck [1] by the areas indicated, move and place the deck on the block of paper prepared previously (p. 8-23P).
[1]
F08-302-03
8-24 P
3.2.2 Removing the Compartment

1) To prevent deformation of the roller support plate [1], lay copy paper [3] (A: about 8 cm) or the like on the floor on which to place the deck [2].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
F08-302-04 2) Sliding out the compartment. (p. 8-17P) 3) Remove the right cover. (p. 8-21P) 4) Disconnect the connector [1] at the rear of the compartment, and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the harness unit [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
F08-302-05
8-25 P
about 8 cm
5) Remove the screw [1] at the left of the deck, and remove the stopper plate [2]; then, slide out the compartment [2] to the front.
[2] [1] [3]
F08-302-06 6) Remove the three screws [2] each from the left and the right of the compartment rail [1]; then, lift the compartment [3] about 1 cm, and remove it to the front. 7) Place the compartment [3] on the block of copy paper prepared previously. (p. 8-25P)
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F08-302-07
8-26 P
3.2.3 Changing the Deck Paper Size

If the deck paper size must be changed to suit the needs of the user, perform the following: 1) Remove the front cover. (p. 8-18P) 2) If the lifter is up, move it to its lower limit. (p. 8-20P) 3) Remove the screw [1], and mount the paper trailing edge guide plate [2] to suit the new paper size. (Do not mount it, however, if the new size is LTR.) 4) Remove the screw [3] (1 each), and mount the left and right guide plates [4] to suit the new paper size.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
F08-302-08
3.2.4 After Changing the Deck Paper Size

Execute 'machine settings selection' in service mode, and make settings to suit the selected paper size. COPIER>OPTION>ACC>DKP Machine Settings
8-27 P

Make copies from the Paper Deck in Direct, and check to make sure that the margin along the image front is 2.5 1.5 mm. Otherwise, adjust the registration. (See item 3.2.6.)
(-) (+) 2.51.5mm
0 2 4 6 8 10
F08-302-09
3.2.6 Adjusting the Cassette Rear Front Registration

Execute 'image read start position adjustment' in service mode. COPIER>FUNCTION>DKADJ-Y Use it to adjust the image read start position.
8-28 P
3.2.7 Adjusting the Registration for the Deck

If you must adjust the left/right registration (standard: 0 1.5 mm), perform the following: 1) Sliding out the compartment. (p. 8-17P) 2) Using the two screws [2], change the position of the latch plate [1] of the deck open solenoid (SL2D) found at the left rear. (At this time, use the index [3] on the latch plate as a reference.)
[1]
[3]
[2]
F08-302-10 3) Close the compartment, and check to make sure that the gap of the front cover is 3 1 mm. 4) If the gap is not 3 1 mm, adjust the front cover. (p. 8-19P)
3.2.8 Adjusting the Position of the Support Member

If the compartment cannot be opened/ closed smoothly and the position of the support roller must be adjusted, perform the following: 1) Remove the front cover. (p. 8-18P) 2) Using the four screws [4] of the roller support plate [3], make adjustments so that the support roller [1] and the floor [2] is about 3 mm when the compartment is fully slid out. (At this time, use the scale [5] on the front side plate as a reference.)
[5]
[4]
[4]
[3] A [1] [2]
F08-302-11
8-29 P
3.3 Drive System

3.3.1 Removing the Deck Pickup Clutch (CL2D)
1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (p. 8-37P) 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the E-ring [2]; then, detach the deck pickup clutch [3]. When mounting the deck pickup clutch, be sure to fit the clutch with the rotation stop [4]. In addition, be sure to hook the harness along the U-groove [5] of the guide.
[1]
[3] [4] [2] [5]
F08-303-01-A
3.3.2 Removing the Deck Feeding Clutch (CL1D)

1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (p. 8-37P) 2) Remove the harness retainer [1], disconnect the connector [2], and remove the E-ring [3]; then, detach the deck feeding clutch [4]. When mounting the deck feeding clutch, be sure to fit the clutch in the rotation stop [5].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5] [4]
F08-303-01-B
8-30 P
3.3.3 Removing the Deck Main Motor (M1D)

1) Remove the rear cover. (p. 8-20P) 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the two screws [2] : then, detach the deck main motor [3]. At this time, take care not to damage the gear at the tip of the motor spindle.
[2] [3]
[2]
[1]
F08-303-02
3.3.4 Removing the Deck Lifter Motor (M2D)

1) Sliding out the compartment. (p. 8-17P) 2) If the lifter is up, move it so that it is about 7 cm from the base plate of the compartment. (p. 8-20P) 3) Fit a hex wrench [2] into the opening in the lifter drive shaft [1] to fix the lifter drive shaft [3] in place (against rotation).
[3]
[4]
[2]
F08-303-03
8-31 P
4) Remove the compartment. (p. 8-25P) 5) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the five screws [2]; then, detach the deck lifter motor unit [3].
[1] [2]
[3]
[2]
F08-303-04
3.3.5 Removing the Lifter Cable (deck front)

1) Sliding out the compartment. (p. 8-17P) 2) If paper is found, remove all of it. 3) Remove the screw [2], and detach the paper trailing edge guide plate [1] from inside the compartment. (The paper trailing edge guide plate is not used if the paper size is LTR.)
[1] [2]
F08-303-05a 4) Push the sensor flag [1] of the paper supply position sensor so the left/right hole in the compartment side plate and the left/right hole in the deck lifter will match. (p. 8-20P) (At this time, try to mach the top face of the lifter against the marking [2] on the left side plate of the compartment to facilitate the work.) 5) Fit two long screwdrivers [3] through to keep the lifter in position.
[2]
[1]
[3]
F08-303-05b
8-32 P
6) Remove the front cover of the deck. (p. 8-18P) 7) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the roller support plate [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
F08-303-06 8) Remove the coupling shaft [1] and the E-ring [2]; then, detach the pulley cover [3]. 9) Remove the two screws [4], and detach the cable fixing plate [5] on the left; then, detach the lifter cable [6] on the outside. 10) Remove the two screws [7] and the cable fixing plate [8] on the right side; then, detach the lifter cable [9] from the inside. 11) To remove the lifter cable from the pulley [10] on the inside, remove the two set screws [12] of the pulley [11] on the outside, and detach the pulley on the outside.
[12]
[6]
[9]
[4] [5]
[10] [11]
[8] [7] [3] [2] [1]
F08-303-07
8-33 P
3.3.6 Removing the Lifter Cable (deck rear)

Perform steps 1) through 3) under 3.3.5 Removing the Lifter Cable (deck front). (p. 8-32P) 4) Remove the compartment. (p. 8-25P) 5) Remove the screw [1] (1 each), and detach the sensor covers, upper [2] and lower [3]. 6) Disconnect the four connectors [4].
[4]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3] [4]
F08-303-08 7) Remove the screw [1], and detach the sensor plate [2]. 8) Remove the five screws [3], and detach the plate [4].
[4] [3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
F08-303-09
8-34 P
9) Fit a wrench [2] into the home of the lifter drive shaft [1] to fix it in place (against rotation). If you fail to fix the lifter drive shaft in place, the lifter cable will become slack when the lifter motor unit is removed.
[3]
[4]
F08-303-10 10) Remove the five screws [1], and detach the lifter motor unit [2].
[1] [1] [2]
F08-303-11
8-35 P
3.3.7 Routing the Lifter Cable

1) Check to make sure that the lifter drive shaft [1] and the lifter [2] are kept in place by means of a hex wrench [3] and two long screwdrivers [4]. 2) Fix the four cable fixing plates [5] in place to the lifter using two screws each. 3) Hook the lifter cable [6] on the four pulleys [7]. 4) Hook the ball of the lifter cable on the two pulleys [8] at the front/rear of the lifter drive shaft; then, wind it along the groove of the pulley about 1.5 turns. At this time, be sure to keep the lifter cable taut so that the long screwdrivers used to keep the lifter in position will move up and stop. 5) In this condition, secure the two pulleys [5] in place to the lifter drive shaft using a set screw [9] (1 each). 6) Mount the pulleys [8] to the lifter drive shaft; then, measure the distance from the base plate of the compartment to the top face of the lifter, making sure that the lifter is level.
[7] [5] [1] [7]
[8] [6] [9] [5]
[5] [9] [8] [3] [2] [5] [4]
F08-303-12
8-36 P
3.4 Feeding Mechanism

3.4.1 Removing the Deck Pickup Unit
1) Remove the upper cover. (p. 8-22P) 2) Remove the deck releasing grip [1]. 3) Disconnect the two connectors [2], and remove the five screws [3]; then, detach the deck pickup unit [4].
[2] [3] [4] [3] [1]
[3] [3]
F08-304-01 When mounting the deck pickup unit [1], be sure to fit and tighten the three screws [2] indicated in the figure in advance.
[1]
[2]
F08-304-02
3.4.2 Removing the Deck Pickup Roller

1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (item 3.4.1) 2) Turn over the deck pickup unit, and remove the resin ring [1] (1 each); then, detach the two deck pickup rollers [2]. The deck pickup roller has a specific orientation (direction of rotation). Pay attention to it when mounting it.
[1]
[2]
F08-304-03
8-37 P
3.4.3 Mounting the Deck Pickup Roller

Body Front (collar: silver-colored) When mounting the deck pickup roller [2] to the front of the machine, be sure that the marking [4] on the collar [3] is toward the front of the machine and the marking [5] on the side of the roller is toward the rear of the machine.
[1] [3] [3]
[2]
[3]
F08-304-04 Body Rear (collar: gold-colored) When mounting the deck pickup roller [2] to the rear of the machine, be sure that the marking [4] on the collar [3] and the marking [5] on the side of the roller are toward the rear of the machine.
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
F08-304-05
3.4.4 Removing the Deck Pickup/Feeding Roller

1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (p. 8-37P) 2) Turn over the deck pickup unit. 3) Remove the resin ring [1], and detach the deck pickup/feeding roller [2] and the drive belt [3] to the front.
[2] [3]
[1]
F08-304-06 8-38 P
3.4.5 Orientation of the Deck Pickup/Feeding Roller

When mounting the deck pickup/feeding roller [1], be sure that the belt pulley [2] is toward the front of the machine. The pickup/feeding roller rubber, on the other hand, may be attached to the pickup/ feeding roller shaft in either orientation.
[2] [1]
F08-304-07
3.4.6 Removing the Deck Separation Roller

1) Release the deck from its host machine; then, remove the two screws [1], and detach the separation roller support plate [2].
[1]
[2]
F08-304-08 2) Remove the joint [1], and detach the deck separation roller [2].
[1] [2]
F08-304-09
8-39 P
The urethane sponge used on the deck separation roller is pink upon foaming, and changes over time to orange and then yellow, accelerating the rate of change if exposed to light. This is a general characteristic of urethane sponge, and does not affect its performance. (The part is not offered in different colors.)
3.4.7 Adjusting the Deck Separation Roller Pressure

If double feeding or pickup failure occurs when the deck is used as the source of paper, move the position of the pressure spring [2] of the deck separation roller [1]. If pickup failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A. If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow B.
[1]
A B [2]
F08-304-10
8-40 P
3.4.8 Position of the Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL1D)

Before detaching the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid [1] from the support plate, keep note of the position of the solenoid with reference to the two fixing screws [2] on the solenoid. Or, mark the position of the solenoid on the support plate with a scribe to indicate the position. The solenoid must always be positioned in its initial location.
[2]
[1]
F08-304-11
8-41 P
3.5 Electrical Mechanisms

3.5.1 Removing the Deck Drive PCB
1) Remove the rear cover. (p. 8-20P) 2) Disconnect the seven connectors [1], and remove the four screws [2]; then, detach the deck driver PCB [3].
[2] [2]
[1] [2] [3] [2]
F08-305-01
3.5.2 Removing the Open Switch PCB

1) Remove the front upper cover. (p. 8-21P) 2) Remove the two screws [2] from behind the front upper cover [1], and detach the open switch PCB [3].
[3] [2]
[1]
F08-305-02
8-42 P
1 Outline
1.1 Specifications and Construction
T09-101-01 shows the major functions and the construction of the Cassette Feeding unitW1:
Item Storage of paper Method of pickup Cassette Description Front loading Retard 2 (cassettes 3, 4) Remarks
The cassette 3 (4) is in common with the cassette 1 (2) of the host machine.
Switching of size Type of paper Size of paper Size of source Control panel Display Environmental considerations Power supply Dimensions Weight Operating noise
By user Plain paper, recycled paper (64 to 90 g/m2) A5/STMT to A3/11 17 (279mm 432mm) 500 2 = 1000 sheets (of 80 g/m2 paper; if 64 g/m2, 550 2) No (keys on host machine used) No (keys on host machine used) No No (24 VDC/5 V supplied by main power supply of host machine) 565 (W) 678 (D) 248 (H) mm / 22.2 (W) 26.7 (D) 9.76 (H) inches 28 kg / 61.7 lb 3 dB or less + that of host machine
For the cassette 3, A5/STMT to B4 (LGL) max.
A cassette heater (accessory) may be fitted.
T09-101-01
9-1 P
1.2 Arrangement of Rollers
[2]
[5] [4]
[1]
[3]
[5] [2] [4] [3]
[1]
F09-102-01 The following rollers are used to move paper inside the machine:
Notation [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Name Pickup roller Feeding roller Separation roller Pull-off roller Vertical path roller
9-2 P
1.3 Arrangement of Motors, Clutches, and Solenoids

M1C
CL1C M2C SL1C
F09-103-01 The following motors, clutch, and solenoid are used to move paper inside the machine:
Notation M1C M2C CL1C SL1C Name Pedestal main motor Cassette pickup motor Vertical path roller clutch Pickup roller descent solenoid
9-3 P
1.4 Arrangement of Sensors
PS2C Q1604 Q1603 PS3C
Q1605
F09-104-01 The following sensors are used to monitor the movement of paper:
Notation Q1604 Q1605 PS2C PS3C Q1603 Name Cassette 3 paper sensor Cassette 4 paper sensor Cassette 3 re-try paper sensor Cassette 4 re-try paper sensor Vertical path paper sensor Delay jam No No Yes Yes Yes Stationary jam at power-on No No No No No Stationary jam No No No No No
9-4 P
2 Detecting Jams
2.1 Sequence of Jam Detection
2.1.1 Delay Jams
See the descriptions under Pickup/Feeding System in Chapter 5.
2.1.2 Stationary Jams

2.1.3 Jam History

9-5 P
3 Pickup Assembly
3.1 Pickup Control System
[8]
[9]
M1C
[2]
[3]
CL1C
M2C
[1] [4] [5] [2] [3]

SL1C
[6]
[7]
[4] [5]
F09-301-01
Notation [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Name Gear Pickup roller Feeding roller Separation roller Lifter Vertical path roller Cam Notation [8] [9] M1C M2C CL1C SL1C Name Pedestal controller PCB Cassette pickup PCB Main motor Pickup motor Vertical path clutch Pickup descent solenoid
9-6 P
3.2 Outline
3.3 Sequence of Operations (pickup)

3.4 Operation of the Cassette Lifter

3.5 Cassette Pickup Operation

3.6 Moving Up/Down the Pickup Roller

3.7 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper Inside the Cassette

3.8 Pickup ReTry Operation

3.9 Operation Other Than Cassette Pickup (standby)

3.10
Detecting the Level of Paper
9-7 P
4 Identifying the Size of Paper

4.1 Identifying the Size
4.2 AB/Inch-Setting Switch

4.3 Paper Size

9-8 P

9-9 P
5.1 External Covers
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5] [4]
F09-501-01 [1] Cassette 3 [2] Cassette 3 [3] Pickup cover [4] Right cover (2 screws) [5] Rear cover (2 screws) [6] Left cover
9-10 P
5.1.1 Removing the Pickup Cover

1) Open the pickup cover [1]. 2) Open the vertical path assembly [2], and disconnect the connector [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
F09-501-02 3) With the vertical path assembly [1] open, shift the rear support shaft [2] to the right and the front support shaft [3] to the rear to detach the vertical path assembly.
[3] [1]
[2]
F09-501-03 4) Remove the cable [2] from the front support shaft [1]. 5) Shift down the pickup cover [3], and detach it to the right.
[1]
[2]
[3]
F09-501-04
9-11 P
5.2 Pickup Assembly

5.2.1 Removing the Pickup Assembly
1) Remove the cassette 3/4. 2) Remove the pickup cover. (p. 9-11P) 3) Remove the rear cover of the host machine. (7 screws; p. 7-13P) 4) Remove the right rear cover of the host machine. (5 screws; p. 7-13P) 5) Remove the right cover. (2 screws) 6) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the harness unit.
[3]
[2]
[1]
F09-502-01 7) Remove the seven screws [1], and detach the right support plate [2]. 8) Disconnect the connector [3]. 9) Remove the screw [4], and detach the grounding wire [5]. 10) Remove the four screws [6], and detach the pickup unit [7].
[7] [6] [6] [3] [4] [1] [1] [2] [1] [1] [5] [6]
F09-502-02
9-12 P
5.2.2 Removing the Pickup/Feeding/Separation Roller

See Pickup/Feeding System in Chapter 5-9.1.2.
5.2.3 Removing the Pickup Soleroid

5.2.4 Removing the Frame Lid

5.2.5 Removing the Pickup Motor

5.2.6 Removing the Vertical Path Clutch

5.2.7 Adjusting the Registration for the Cassette Rear Front

9-13 P
5.3 PCBs
5.3.1 Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit
1) Remove the cassette 3/4. 2) Fit a flat-blade screwdriver [2] into the opening in the inner cover [1], and free the two claws [3] to detach.
[1] [2]
[3]
F09-503-01 3) Remove the two screws [1], and slide the cassette size detection unit [2] to the front to detach. 4) Disconnect the two connectors [3]. 5) Remove the cassette size detection unit.
[3]
[1]
[2]
F09-503-02
9-14 P
5.3.2 Removing the Pedestal Controller PCB

1) Disconnect the lattice connector from the host machine. 2) Remove the rear over. (2 screws) 3) Disconnect all the connectors. 4) Release the locking support [1]. 5) Remove the five screws [2], and detach the pedestal controller PCB [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F09-503-03
9-15 P
5.4 Drive Mechanisms

5.4.1 Removing the Main Motor Drive Unit
1) Disconnect the lattice connector from the host machine. 2) Remove the pickup assembly. (p. 9-12P) 3) Remove the rear cover. (2 screws) 4) Remove the pedestal controller PCB. (p. 9-15P) 5) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the main motor drive unit [2]. Do not remove the screw [3] paint-locked in place.
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F09-504-01
5.4.2 Removing the Pedestal Main Motor

1) Disconnect the lattice connector from the host machine. 2) Remove the rear cover. (2 screws) 3) Disconnect the connector [1]. 4) Remove the four screws [2], and detach the pedestal main motor [3].
[3] [2]
[1]
[2]
F09-504-02
9-16 P
5.4.3 Mounting the Pedestal Main Motor

1) When mounting the pedestal main motor, be sure to tighten the screws in the order indicated in the figure: (1) through (4).
(3) (2)
(1)
(4)
F09-504-03
9-17 P
CHAPTER 10 INNER 2 WAY TRAY-A1
1 Specifications
1.1 Type
Item Number of bins Description 3 in total 1 bin (No. 2 delivery slot) Delivery tray inside host machine External (No. 3 delivery slot; option) Face-down Plain paper, recycled paper (between 64 g/m2 and 90 g/m2) A3/279.4431.8mm (11"17") to A5/STMT 250 sheets (A4, B5, LTR); 100 sheets (other sizes) 100 sheets (A4, B5, LTR); 50 sheets (other sizes) None in particular None 149420254mm/5.87 in.16.5 in.10 in. (WDH) 3.5kg/7.7 lb
Method of stacking Type of paper Size of paper Number of sheets (No. 2 delivery slot) Number of sheets (No. 3 delivery slot) Environmental considerations Power supply Dimensions Weight
T10-101-01 Tray names Without the Saddle Finisher-G1

C B A
A: No 1 delivery slot (host machine) B: No. 2 delivery slot C: No. 3 delivery slot (Copy Tray-F1/ Saddle Finisher-G1)
F10-101-01
10-1 P
1.2 Cross Section

[1] [2]
[3] [4] [5]
[6]
F10-102-01 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] No. 3 delivery roller No. 3 delivery flapper No. 2 delivery roller Tray B No. 2 delivery inlet roller No. 2 deliver inlet flapper
10-2 P
2 Outline
2.1 Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors
No. 3 delivery roller No. 3 delivery flapper No. 2 delivery roller
PS24B M8
No. 3 delivery slot
No. 2 delivery slot
PS21B
PS20B PS19B
M7 SL4
No. 1 delivery slot

No. 2 delivery inlet roller
No. 2 delivery inlet flapper
M7: 2-way delivery inlet motor M8: 2-way delivery outlet motor SL4: 2-way delivery solenoid PS19B: No. 2 delivery sensor PS20B: No. 2 delivery full sensor PS21B: No. 3 delivery sensor PS4B: 2-way delivery open/closed sensor
F10-201-01
10-3 P
2.2 Delivery to the No. 2 Delivery Slot

Sheets are sent to the No. 2 delivery slot as follows: 1) A sheet arrives from the host machines delivery assembly. A specific period of time after the leading edge of the sheet reaches the fixing/feeding sensor (PS13), the 2way delivery inlet motor (M7) and the 2-way delivery outlet motor (M8) start to rotate.
No. 3 delivery slot PS21B
PS19B No. 1 delivery slot S14
PS13
F10-202-01 2) The 2-way delivery solenoid goes on, and the paper switches to the No. 2 delivery slot. Then, the 2-way delivery inlet motor and the 2-way delivery outlet motor continue to rotate to send the sheet to the No. 2 delivery slot. When the trailing edge of the sheet leaves the No. 2 delivery sensor (PS19B), the 2-way delivery inlet motor and the 2-way delivery outlet motor stop to rotate.
F10-202-02 10-4 P
2.3 Delivery to the No. 3 Delivery Slot

Sheets are sent to the No. 3 delivery slot as follows: 1) A sheet arrives from the host machines delivery assembly. A specific period of time after the leading edge of the sheet reaches the fixing/delivery paper sensor (PS13), the 2-way delivery inlet motor (M7) and the 2-way delivery outlet motor (M8) start to rotate.
PS13
F10-203-01 2) The 2-way delivery solenoid goes on, and the feeding path switches to the No. 2 delivery lot.
F10-203-02
10-5 P
3) When the trailing edge of the sheet reaches a specific point in front of the No. 2 delivery roller, the 2-way delivery outlet motor stops to rotate.
F10-203-03 4) A specific period of time after it stops to rotate, the 2-way delivery outlet motor starts to rotate in reverse, thereby sending the sheet to the No. 3 delivery slot.
F10-203-04
10-6 P
2.4 Detecting Jams

2.4.1 Arrangement of Sensors
The following shows the sensor used to detect jams in the Inner 2-Way-A1.
No. 2 delivery slot
PS19B No. 1 delivery slot
PS13
PS19B: No. 2 delivery sensor PS21B: No. 3 delivery sensor PS24B: 2-way delivery open/closed sensor PS13: fixing/feeding sensor (host machine)
F10-204-01
10-7 P
2.4.2 Delay Jam

The time it takes for a sheet to move from the sensor N-1 to the delay jam sensor N is monitored with reference to the clock pulses from the main motor. A delay jam is identified if the leading edge of a sheet does not reach the delay jam sensor within a specific period of time after the senor N-1 goes ON.
Start key ON or PRINT set
INTR / PRINT
Sensor N-1 Jam check Sensor N
[1]
[1]
Normal [1]: specific feeding time
Error
F10-204-02
Notation PS13 PS119B PS20B Name Fixing/feeding sensor (host machine) No. 2 delivery sensor No. 3 delivery sensor Delay jam (yes) Yes Yes
10-8 P
2.4.3 Stationary Jam

A stationary jam will be identified if a specific sensor remains ON for a specific period of time.
Notation PS19B PS20B Name No. 2 delivery sensor No. 3 delivery sensor Stationary jam Yes Yes
Start key ON or PRINT set

INTR / PRINT
Jam check Sensor N
L+A
L+A
Normal
Error
(L: paper length; A: specific feed distance)
F10-204-03
2.4.4 Stationary Jam at Power-On

A stationary jam at power-on is identified in reference to the presence/absence of paper over a specific period of time cover a specific sensor when the control panel power switch is turned on.
2.4.5 Door Open Jam

A door open jam will be identified if the 2-way delivery open/closed sensor (PS24B) identifies the state of the door as being open.
10-9 P

10-10 P
3.1 External Covers
[2]
[3]
[1]
F10-301-01 [1] Inner 2-way delivery unit (2 screws) [2] Inside delivery tray [3] Connector cover (1 screw)
3.1.1 Removing the Inner 2-Way Delivery Unit

1) Remove the inside delivery tray. 2) Open the inner 2-way delivery unit [1].
[1]
F10-301-02
10-11 P
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the connector cover [2].
[1] [2]
F10-201-03 4) Disconnect the two connectors [1].
[1]
F10-201-04 5) Close the inner 2-way delivery unit [1].

[1]
F10-201-05
10-12 P
6) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2] from inside.
[1]
[2]
F10-201-06 7) Remove the screw [1] and the stepped screw [2] from outside.
[1] [2]
F10-201-07
10-13 P
8) Remove the rib [2] from the stay [1] of the host machine, and remove the inner 2-way delivery unit [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
F10-201-08
10-14 P
1 Envelope Feeder Attachment-B1

1.1 Outline
The Envelope Feeder Attachment-B1 (hereafter, envelope feeder) is designed to be installed to the cassette 1 of the host machine for feeding of envelopes; its pickup mechanisms are in common with those of the cassette 1.
1.1.1 Host Machine

The cassette 1 for which the envelope feeder is designed may be either of the following two:
[1]
[2]
F11-101-01 [1] GP Cassette-N1 [2] FL Cassette-V1
F11-101-02
1.1.2 Names of Parts

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Side guide plate (front) Side guide plate (rear) Lifter Lifter stop Mounting screw (4 pc.) Spring (2 pc. including attachment)
[2] [5] [4] [5] [3] [5]
[1] [6] [5]
F11-101-03
11-1 P
1.2 Specifications
1.2.1 Envelope Cassette
Description Front loading Center In user mode By cassette side plate By spring (to suit envelope size) Size of stack As determined by envelope specifications Maximum number of envelopes 10 to 6CPM Item Method of pickup Reference of paper movement Switching of size Remarks
By user. By user. By service person. T11-102-02 The stack must not exceed the label index (with envelope YOUKEI 4 in use; decrease in speed occurring in continuous feed). Uses that of the host machine.
Control panel/display Power supply Dimensions Weight Operating environment
No No 565(W)523(D)95(H)mm / 22.2(W)20.6(D)3.74(W)inches 3.4 kg / 7.5 lb As determined by host machine
T11-102-01
11-2 P
1.2.2 Envelopes
The envelope feeder is designed to accommodate envelopes of the following specifications:
Type COM10 Monarch DL C5 B5 YOUKEI 4 Shorter side (X) longer side (Y) 104.7 241.3 (mm) 98.4 190.5 (mm) 110 220 (mm) 162 229 (mm) 176 250 (mm) 105 235 (mm) Recommendation Mailwell No.553 Mailwell No.582 Mailwell Schneidersohne No.11345 Schneidersohne Kuvert No.17204 Schneidersohne Kuvert No.15269 Y-401
T11-102-02
Configuration of Envelopes Y Y
COM10, Monarch, DL C5, YOUKEI 4
F11-102-01
B5
11-3 P
1.2.3 Guaranteed Image Area

The guaranteed image area is 10 mm or more from each edge of the envelope; if triplelayered because of the flap, within 5 mm or more. The figures show the guarantee image area (area B); they assume that the triple-layered area because of the flap is limited to area A: Face of the Envelope (common)
B
10mm
F11-102-02 Back of the Envelope (COM10, Monarch, D, C5, YOUKEI 4)

5mm 5mm 10mm
10mm B
10mm B
F11-102-03 Back of the Envelope (B5)

10mm
5mm 10mm 5mm
B B
F11-102-04 11-4 P
1.3 Pickup
1.3.1 Pickup Operations
In place of the cassette lifter operation of the host machine, the envelope cassette uses the force of a spring to keep the stack at a specific level; other operations are as in the pickup/ feeding operations of the host machine.
11-5 P
2 Detecting Jams
2.1 Outline
There are no specific types of jams that are unique to the envelope feeder, and jams are detected as by the jam detection mechanism of the host machine.
3 Error Codes
3.1 Outline
There are no specific types of jams unique to the envelope cassette, and error codes are issued as by the error detection mechanism of the host machine.
4 Service Mode
4.1 Making Selections
*5*OPTION ENV_SW 1: enable 2: disable (the key select envelope cassette offered as part of common settings in user mode will be dimmed)
11-6 P
5 Making Adjustments
5.1 Outline
If you want to use envelopes with a different configuration in the envelope feeder, you need to replace the spring to suit the new envelope. The spring may be painted either green or red; one is already fitted, and the other is expected to be stored by the user near the host machine. Be sure to check that the correct spring is fitted whenever you want to switch to envelopes of a different configuration.
5.1.1 Envelopes and Type of Spring

Use the green-painted spring for COM10, Monarch, DL, and YOUKEI 4. Use the red-painted spring for C5 and B5.
5.2 Replacing the Spring

5.2.1 Replacing the Spring
1) Remove the two mounting screws [1] each, and detach the side guide plate [2] (front, rear) and the lifter [3].
[2] [3] [2]
[1]
[1]
F11-502-01 2) Holding the bottom (1st, 2nd loops) of the spring [1], turn it clockwise to free it from the envelope feeder.
[1]
F11-502-02
11-7 P
3) Thread the edge of the spring [1] that comes as an attachment so as to fit it through the catch 1 [2] and then the catch 2 [3]. 4) Holding the bottom (1st and 2nd loops) of the spring, fit it through the catch 3 [4]; then, thread it until distance A is about 15 mm from the catch 2 [3]. At this time, check to make sure that the spring is firmly on the bottom plate.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
F11-502-03
5.3 Changing the Size

5.3.1 Changing the Size
1) Match the lifter [1] and the side guide plate [2] against the size positioning line of the envelope feeder in relation to the edges of the side guide plate; then, secure them in place by using two mounting screws [3] each.
[2] [1] [2]
[3]
[3]
F11-503-01 Take care so that the side guide plate will not extend beyond the envelope feeder (as by choosing the wrong mounting hole). See the next page for the correct mounting hole.
11-8 P
Mounting Hole by Side Guide Plate (front) (The side guide rear is symmetrically opposite.)
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3] [4]
[3]
[4] [5] [5]
F11-503-02 [1] Monarch [2] COM10, YOUKEI 4 [3] DL 2) Register the specifications of the envelope using register envelope offered as part of common settings. 3) Check to make sure that envelopes are fed correctly. [4] ISO-C5 [5] ISO-B5
11-9 P
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1 Periodically Replaced Parts ........... 1-1T 1.1 Reader Unit ............................. 1-1T 1.2 Printer Unit ............................. 1-1T 1.3 Side Paper Deck ...................... 1-1T 1.4 Cassette Feeding unit .............. 1-1T 1.5 Inner 2-Way Tray .................... 1-1T 2 Consumables and Durables ........... 1-2T 2.1 Checking the Time of Replacement ............................. 1-2T 2.2 Reader Unit .............................. 1-2T 2.3 Printer Unit ............................... 1-2T 2.4 Side Paper Deck ....................... 1-3T 3 4 2.5 Cassette Feeding Unit ............... 1-3T 2.6 Inner 2-Way Tray-A1 ............... 1-3T Periodical Servicing Procedure ....... 1-4T Scheduled Servicing Chart .............. 1-6T 4.1 Reader Unit .............................. 1-6T 4.2 Printer Unit ............................... 1-7T Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing ......................................... 1-8T Cleaning the Bottom of the Developing Assembly ..................... 1-9T 6.1 Cleaning the Bottom of the Developing Assembly .............. 1-9T
5 6
CHAPTER 2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT BASIC PROCEDURE

1 2 3 Making lnitial Checks ................... 2-1T Checking the Scanner Side ........... 2-1T Checking the Printer Side (1/3) ..... 2-2T 4 5 Checking the Printer Side (2/3) ..... 2-2T Checking the Printer Side (3/3) ..... 2-2T
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS

1 Image Adjustments ........................ 3-1T 1.1 Standards of Image Position ... 3-1T 1.2 Checking the Image Position .. 3-2T 1.3 Adjusting Left/Right lamge Margin ........................... 3-3T 1.3.1 Adjusting the Registration for the Cassette Rear Front . 3-3T 1.3.2 Adjusting the Registration for the Multifeeder Rear Front .......................... 3-4T 1.3.3 Adjusting the Registration for the Deck ....................... 3-4T 1.3.4 Duplex Feeding Unit .......... 3-5T 1.4 Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin ............................. 3-5T 1.5 Adjusting the Left/Right Non-Image Width ..................... 3-5T 1.6 Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width ..................... 3-6T 2 Scanning System ............................ 3-6T 2.1 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp ........................................ 3-6T 2.2 Mounting the Motor Unit ......... 3-7T 2.3 Routing the Scanner Drive Cable .............................. 3-8T 2.4 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base .......... 3-9T 2.5 Mounting the Copyboard Glass ...................................... 3-11T 2.6 Mounting the Reader Upper Frame ..................................... 3-12T T1
CONTENTS
2.7 Points to Note When Replacing the CCD Unit ......... 3-12T 2.8 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ....................... 3-12T 3 Image Formation System .............. 3-13T 3.1 Positioning the Developing Assembly Magnetic Seal ........ 3-13T 3.2 Mounting the Developing Assembly Blade ..................... 3-13T 3.3 Removing the Paper Lint ........ 3-14T 3.4 Cleaning the Waste Toner Case ........................................ 3-15T 4 Fixing System ............................... 3-16T 4.1 Mounting the Locking Cam Unit ................................ 3-16T 5 Paper Deck ................................... 3-17T 5.1 Mounting the Front Cover ...... 3-17T 5.2 Adjusting the Paper Level Indicator ................................. 3-18T 5.3 Adjusting the Position of the Support Member ............... 3-18T 5.4 Mounting the Deck Pickup Roller ...................................... 3-19T
5.5 Removing the Deck Pickup/ Feeding Roller ........................ 3-19T 5.6 Orientation of the Deck Pickup/Feeding Roller ............ 3-20T 5.7 Adjusting the Deck Separation Roller Pressure ..... 3-20T 5.8 Position of the Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL1D) .. 3-21T 5.9 Adjusting the Height of the Side Member .................... 3-22T 5.9.1 Before Making Adjustments ..................... 3-22T 5.9.2 Making Adjustments ........ 3-22T 6 Cassette Feeding Unit-W1 ............ 3-23T 6.1 Mounting the Pedestal Main Motor ............................ 3-23T 7 Envelope Feeder Attachment ......... 3-24T 7.1 Envelopes and Type of Spring ..................................... 3-24T 7.2 Replacing the Spring .............. 3-24T 7.2.1 Replacing the Spring ........ 3-24T 7.3 Changing the Size ................... 3-25T 7.3.1 Changing the Size ............ 3-25T
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/ MALFUNCTIONS

1 Making Initial Checks ................... 4-1T 1.1 Checking the Site of Installation ................................. 4-1T 1.2 Checking the Originals ............. 4-1T 1.3 Checking the ADF Platen, Copyboard cover, and Copyboard glass (standard white plate) .... 4-1T 1.4 Charging Roller and Static Eliminator ................................. 4-2T 1.5 Checking the Developing Assembly ................................. 4-2T 1.6 Checking the Paper ................... 4-2T 1.7 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts .......................... 4-2T 1.8 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ................................. 4-2T 1.9 Others ....................................... 4-3T 2 Samples of Image Faults ................. 4-6T 3 Troubleshooting Image Faults ........ 4-7T 3.1 The copy is too light (halftone area only) .................................. 4-7T 3.2 The copy is too light (including solid black) ............................... 4-8T 3.3 The copy is too light (entire face, considerable) .................. 4-10T 3.4 The copy has uneven density (darker at front) ...................... 4-12T 3.5 The copy has uneven density (lighter at front) ...................... 4-12T
T2
CONTENTS
3.6 The copy is foggy (entire face) ............................. 4-13T 3.7 The copy is foggy (vertical) .... 4-14T 3.8 The copy has a black line (vertical, fuzzy, thick) ............. 4-14T 3.9 The copy has a black line (vertical, fine) ......................... 4-15T 3.10 The copy has a white spot (vertical) ................................. 4-16T 3.11 The copy has a white line (vertical) ................................. 4-16T 3.12 The copy has a white spot (horizontal) ............................. 4-17T 3.13 The back of the copy is soiled/ Soiled edge .................. 4-18T 3.14 The copy has a fixing fault ..... 4-19T 3.15 The copy has a displaced leading edge ............................ 4-20T 3.16 The copy has a displaced leading edge (large margin) .... 4-20T 3.17 The copy has a displaced margin (no margin) ................. 4-20T 3.18 The copy is blurred ................. 4-21T 3.19 The copy is foggy (horizontal) ............................. 4-22T 3.20 The copy has inadequate sharpness ................................ 4-23T 3.21 The copy is completely blank ....................................... 4-24T 3.22 The copy is completely black ....................................... 4-26T 3.23 The copy has a block/white dot after replacement of the drum unit ................................ 4-27T 3.24 The copy has a black line (stream reading) ...................... 4-27T 4 Troubleshooting Malfunctions ...... 4-28T 4.1 Power Supply System ............ 4-28T 4.1.1 The AC power is absent ... 4-28T 4.1.2 The DC power is absent ............................... 4-29T 4.2 Printer Unit ............................. 4-30T 4.2.1 Pickup fails ...................... 4-30T
The lifter fails to move up (pickup from the cassette) ............................ 4-31T 4.2.3 The vertical path roller fails to rotate ..................... 4-32T 4.2.4 The registration roller fails to rotate ..................... 4-32T 4.2.5 Pickup from the multifeeder tray fails (i.e., the pickup roller fails to rotate) .......... 4-33T 4.2.6 Pickup from the multifeeder tray fails (i.e., the multifeeder holding plate fails to move up) .............. 4-33T 4.2.7 The photosensitive drum fails to rotate ..................... 4-34T 4.2.8 The pre-exposure lamp fails to go ON .................. 4-34T 4.3 Reader Unit ............................ 4-35T 4.3.1 The No. 1 mirror base fails to move ..................... 4-35T 4.3.2 The scanning lamp fails to go ON .......................... 4-36T 4.4 Message Indication ................. 4-37T 4.4.1 The Add Toner message fails to go OFF ................. 4-37T 4.4.2 The Control Card Set message fails to go OFF (when no card reader is installed) ............ 4-37T 4.4.3 The Add Paper message fails to go OFF ................. 4-37T 4.4.4 The Close the Front Cover massage fails to go OFF .. 4-38T 4.5 Paper Deck ............................ 4-39T 4.5.1 Pickup fails ..................... 4-39T 4.5.2 The deck lifter fails to move up ........................... 4-40T 5 Troubleshooting Feeding Faults ..... 4-41T 5.1 Paper Jams ............................. 4-41T 5.1.1 Pickup Assembly ............. 4-42T 5.1.2 Separation/Feeding Assembly ......................... 4-43T 5.1.3 Fixing/Delivery Assembly, Duplex Reversing Assembly ......................... 4-43T T3
4.2.2
CONTENTS
Duplex Feeding Assembly ......................... 4-44T 5.2 Faulty Feeding ........................ 4-45T 5.2.1 Double Feeding ................ 4-45T 5.2.2 Wrinkles ........................... 4-45T 6 Outline of Electrical Components .................................. 4-46T 6.1 Introduction ............................ 4-46T 6.1.1 Guide to the List ............... 4-46T 6.1.2 Checking the Photointerrupters .............. 4-47T 6.2 E201 (reader unit/printer unit) 4-48T 6.2.1 Clutches ........................... 4-48T 6.2.2 Solenoids, Switches ......... 4-48T 6.2.3 Motors (1/2) ..................... 4-50T 6.2.3 Motors (2/2) ..................... 4-52T 6.2.4 Fans ................................. 4-54T 6.2.5 Sensors (1/3) .................... 4-56T 6.2.5 Sensors (2/3) .................... 4-58T 6.2.5 Sensors (3/3) .................... 4-60T 6.2.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others .............................. 4-62T 6.2.7 PCBs ................................ 4-64T 6.3 Side Paper Deck-L1 ............... 4-66T 6.3.1 Clutches ........................... 4-66T 6.3.2 Solenoids, and Switches ... 4-66T
5.1.4
6.3.3 Motors ............................. 4-66T 6.3.4 Sensors ............................ 4-68T 6.3.5 PCBs ................................ 4-68T 6.4 2-Cassette Feeding Unit-W1 ................................. 4-70T 6.4.1 Clutches ........................... 4-70T 6.4.2 Solenoids and Switches ... 4-70T 6.4.3 Motors ............................. 4-70T 6.4.4 Sensors ............................ 4-72T 6.4.5 PCBs ................................ 4-72T 6.5 Inner 2-Way Tray-A1 ............. 4-74T 6.5.1 Clutches ........................... 4-74T 6.5.2 Solenoids and Switches ... 4-74T 6.6 Super G3 FAX Board-J1 ....... 4-76T 6.6.1 Others .............................. 4-76T 6.6.2 PCBs ................................ 4-76T 6.7 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB ................ 4-78T 6.7.1 Main Controller PCB ....... 4-79T 6.7.2 DC Controller PCB .......... 4-80T 6.7.3 Reader Controller PCB .... 4-80T 6.7.4 Composite Power Supply PCB ..................... 4-81T 6.7.5 Fixing Film Sensor PCB ................................. 4-81T
CHAPTER 5 SURVICE MODE

Outline of Service Mode ............... 5-1T 1.1 Outline .................................... 5-1T 1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections .................... 5-2T 1.3 Ending Service Mode ............... 5-3T 1.4 Backing Up Service Mode ....... 5-3T 1.5 Using Service Mode ................. 5-4T 1.5.1 Initial Screen ...................... 5-4T 1.5.2 Level 1/Level 2 Item Screen ................................ 5-4T 1.5.3 Level 3 Item Screen ............ 5-5T 2 DISPLAY Control Display Mode ... 5-6T 2.1 COPIER ................................... 5-6T 2.2 FEEDER ................................ 5-19T 3 I/O, I/O Display mode .................. 5-20T T4 1 3.1 DC-CON ................................ 5-21T 3.2 R-CON ................................... 5-28T 3.3 MN-CON ............................... 5-31T 3.4 FEEDER ................................ 5-33T 3.5 SORTER ................................ 5-35T 3.5.1 Finisher-J1 ....................... 5-35T 3.5.2 Saddle Finisher-G1 .......... 5-38T 3.5.3 Puncher Unit (Saddle Finisher-G1) ....... 5-41T 4 ADJUST Adjustment Mode ......... 5-44T 4.1 COPIER ................................. 5-44T 4.2 FEEDER ................................ 5-58T 4.3 SORTER ................................ 5-59T 5 FUNCTION Operation/ Inspection Mode ........................... 5-61T
CONTENTS
5.1 COPIER ................................. 5-61T 6 OPTION Machine Settings Mode ............................................ 5-82T 6.1 COPIER ................................. 5-82T 6.2 FEEDER ................................ 5-95T
6.3 SORTER ................................ 5-95T 6.4 BOARD ................................. 5-96T 7 TEST Test Print Mode .................. 5-97T 8 COUNTER Counter Mode ......... 5-101T
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS

1 Self Diagnosis ............................... 6-1T 1.1 Detail Codes (copier) .............. 6-3T 1.2 ADF Error Codes .................. 6-37T 1.3 Saddle Finisher-G1 Error Codes ..................................... 6-38T Error Code of the Finisher Unit .................... 6-38T 1.4 Finisher-J1 Error Codes ......... 6-43T 1.3.1
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
1 Upgrading ...................................... 7-1T 1.1 Outline .................................... 7-1T 1.1.1 Download Mode ............... 7-1T 1.1.2 Making Pre-Checks .......... 7-2T 1.2 Data Control ............................ 7-5T 1.3 Downloading the System Software, RUI, and Language Module .... 7-8T 1.3.1 Making Connections ......... 7-8T 1.3.2 Downloading .................... 7-8T 1.3.3 After Downloading ......... 7-14T 1.4 Upgrading the BOOT ROM ... 7-14T 1.4.1 Making Preparations ....... 7-14T 1.4.2 Connection ...................... 7-15T 1.4.3 Preparing BOOT ROM ... 7-15T 1.4.4 After Downloading ......... 7-19T 1.5 Formatting the HDD ............. 7-20T 1.5.1 Making Connections ....... 7-20T 1.5.2 Starting Formatting ......... 7-20T Points to Note When Formatting the Hard Disk ...... 7-26T 1.6 Downloader PCB ................... 7-27T 1.6.1 Purpose ............................ 7-27T 1.6.2 Downloader PCB Components ..................... 7-27T 1.6.3 Download Procedure ....... 7-28T 1.6.4 Disconnecting .................. 7-32T 1.7 Upgrading by Replacing the DIMM/ROM .................... 7-33T 2 Backing Up Data .......................... 7-34T 2.1 Outline .................................... 7-34T 2.2 Backing Up Data .................... 7-35T 2.2.1 Making Preparations ........ 7-35T 2.2.2 Making Connections ........ 7-35T 2.2.3 Backing Up Data .............. 7-36T 2.2.4 Downloading Backup Data .................................. 7-41T 2.2.5 Managing Backup Data .... 7-45T 1.5.3
APPENDIX
A. General Timing Chart ...................... A-1 B. General Circuit Diagram ................. A-3 C. Side Paper Deck-L1 General Circuit Diagram ............................... A-5 D. 2-Cassette Feeding Unit-W1 General Circuit Diagram .................. A-6 E. Inner 2-Way Tray-A1 General Circuit Diagram ............................... A-7 F. List of Special Tools ........................ A-8 G. List of Solvents/Oils ...................... A-10
T5
1 Periodically Replaced Parts

Some of the parts used in the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific level of product performance; be sure to replace them as indicated, as they will affect the machine functions appreciably once they fail. If possible, plan the replacement to coincide with a scheduled visit to the users. The estimates are subject to change depending on the conditions of the site of installation or how the machine is used.
1.1 Reader Unit

The reader unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
1.2 Printer Unit

The printer unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
1.3 Side Paper Deck

The side paper deck does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
1.4 Cassette Feeding unit

The cassette feeding unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
1.5 Inner 2-Way Tray

The inner 2-way tray does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
1-1 T
2 Consumables and Durables

Some parts of the machine may require replacement over the period of product warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them as needed.
2.1 Checking the Time of Replacement

Use service mode to find out when to replace a specific part: COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2.
2.2 Reader Unit

The reader unit does not have parts designated as a durable.
2.3 Printer Unit

As of March 2001
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Part name Transfer roller Transfer static eliminator Developing cylinder Fixing cleaning roller Pre-exposure lamp Pickup roller Feeding roller Separation roller Pickup roller (multifeeder) Separation pad (multifeeder) Fixing film unit (100V) Fixing film unit (115V) Fixing film unit (230V) Part No. FF6-0104 FF5-7246 FG6-5714 FG6-5709 FG5-6297 FF5-4552-020 FF5-4552-020 FF5-4634-020 FB1-8581 FE5-4132 FG6-5712 FG6-6039 FG6-6041 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 Life (prints) 240,000 240,000 480,000 150,000 240,000 120,000 120,000 120,000 240,000 240,000 150,000 150,000 150,000 Remarks
Actual Actual Actual Actual
prints prints prints prints
made made made made
Actual prints made
T01-203-01
1-2 T
2.4 Side Paper Deck

As of March 2001
No. 1 2 3 4 Part name Pickup roller (front) Pickup roller (rear) Feeding roller Separation roller Part No. FF5-7830 FF5-7829 FF5-7541 FB2-7777-020 Qty 1 1 1 1 Life (prints) 240,000 240,000 240,000 240,000 Remarks Actual prints Actual prints Actual prints Actual prints made made made made
T01-203-03
2.5 Cassette Feeding Unit

As of March 2001
No. 1 2 3 Part name Pickup roller Feeding roller Separation roller Part No. FF5-4552-020 FF5-4552-020 FF5-4634-020 Qty 2 2 2 Life (prints) 120,000 120,000 120,000 Remarks Actual prints Actual prints Actual prints
2.6 Inner 2-Way Tray-A1

The inner 2-way tray-A1 does not have parts that are designated as a durable.
1-3 T
3 Periodical Servicing Procedure

1. As a rule, provide periodical servicing every 120,000 prints. 2. Before setting out on a scheduled visit, check the Service Book, and take any parts that may require replacement. As of June 2001 Work Procedure 1. Report to the person in charge, and check the general condition. 2. Record the counter reading, and check the faulty prints. 3. Make test prints, and check them for the following: (1) image density, (2) white background for soiling, (3) characters for clarity, (4) margin, (5) fixing, registration, and back for soiling. The margin must meet the following standards: Leading edge: 2.5 1.5 mm Left edge: 2.5 1.5 mm Right edge: 0.5 mm or more Trailing edge: 2.5 +1.1, -1.7 mm (smaller than B4) <2.5 2.0 mm> 3.5 +0.6, -2.8 mm (B4 or larger) <3.5 2.0 mm> 5.5 +1.5, -5.0 mm (free size) < >: with DADF-H1 4. Optical Unit Clean the following using a blower brush to clean; if the dirt is excessive, use alcohol: (1) No. 1/2/3 mirror, (2) original illuminating reflecting plate, (3) lens, (4) original size sensor. 5. Scanner Drive System (1) Scanner cable; check the tension, and adjust as necessary. Inspect and adjust the scanner cable only when the machine has made the first 250,000 prints. (2) Scanner rail; clean the slide area, and apply silicone oil (FY9-6011).
1-4 T
6. Feeding System Clean the following: (1) feeding assembly base, (2) fixing inlet guide (upper, lower), (3) transfer guide, (4) pre-registration assembly (paper lint). 7. Image Formation System Clean the following: developing member, (2) developing assembly bottom. 8. Optical Unit Clean the following with a special tool: (1) bending mirror. 9. Image Formation System Inspect and, as necessary, remove the waste toner and then clean the waste toner case; or, replace the waste toner case if any: 1. Be sure to dispose of the water toner according to the standards imposed by the government concerned. 2. Do not dispose of waste toner into fire (to avoid explosion). 10. Make test copies. 11. Make sample copies. 12. Check the operation of the leakage breaker. While the power switch is ON, press the test switch of the leakage breaker to make sure that it operates normally (i.e., the lever goes OFF to cut the power). If the leakage breaker fails to operate normally, replace it and make a check once again. To reset, After making a check, turn off the main power switch (the lever should go ON), and then turn on the main power switch. 13. Put the sample copies into order, and clean up the area around the machine. 14. Fill out the Service Book, and report to the person in charge; put a description of the check made on the operation of the leakage breaker in the Service Book.
1-5 T
4 Scheduled Servicing Chart

Do not use solvents or oils not indicated herein.
4.1 Reader Unit

: Clean Unit : Replace : Lubricate Part : Adjust : Inspect Maintenance intervals every 120,000 Upon installation Remarks
Scanner Scanner cable Optical unit Scanner rail Copyboard glass No. 1 through No. 3 mirror Original illumination reflecting plate Original size sensor Lens
Silicone oil (S20; FY9-6011)
T01-401-01
1-6 T
4.2 Printer Unit

: Clean Unit : Replace : Lubricate Part : Adjust : Inspect Remarks Maintenance intervals Upon in- every Upon replacestallation 120,000 ment of drum cartridge
Laser optical unit Pickup/ feeding assembly
Folding mirror
Use special tool.
Feeding assembly base Fixing inlet guide, upper/lower Pre-registration (paper lint) Transfer guide Developing Developing member assembly Base (developing assembly) Waste toner Waste toner case collection assembly
Inspect/remove. (Remove waste toner, and then clean the toner case. Replase the toner case, if any.)
1-7 T
5 Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing

Unless otherwise indicated, use lint-free paper and alcohol. If you used solvent, check to make sure that the solvent has dried before mounting the component back into the machine. Unless otherwise specified, do not use a moist cloth for cleaning. Provide scheduled servicing at the specified intervals.
Original size sensor Cleaning (blower brush) Lens Cleaning (blower brush) Reflecting shade Cleaning (blower brush) Copyboard glass Scanner rail Cleaning Lubricating No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors Scanner cable Cleaning (blower brush) Check
Bending mirror Cleaning (special tool) Developing assembly base Dry wiping Developing assembly bottom Cleaning Inlet guide (upper/lower) Cleaning (solvent) Feeding assembly base Cleaning
Pre-registration guide Cleaning (paper lint) Transfer guide Cleaning
Waste toner case Checking, disposing (Remove waste toner, and then clean the toner case, Replace the toner case, if any.)
F01-500-01
1-8 T
6 Cleaning the Bottom of the Developing Assembly

If the bottom of the developing assembly is not cleaned thoroughly, the residual toner can soil the back and the leading edge or left/right edges of prints. If soiling is noted, clean also the transfer guide and the static eliminator at the same time as the bottom of the developing assembly.
6.1 Cleaning the Bottom of the Developing Assembly

1) Open the front door. 2) Slide out the developing assembly [1]. 3) Dry wipe the bottom of the developing assembly. 4) Slide in the developing assembly. 5) Close the front door.
[1]
F01-601-01
1-9 T

1
Making Initial Checks
Checking the Scanner Side
Requirements: 1. Use paper fresh out of package. (Moist paper will not allow correct evaluation of images.) 2. Use paper with the highest degree of "whiteness," of all available papers. 3. Use A3 paper (11x17), if possible. Execute 'roller clean' in user mode ('adjust/clean'). Reference: The following will be cleaned: [1]Primary charging roller [2]Transfer charging roller
Check/clean the following: [1] Mirrors [2] Lens [3] Standard white plate [4] Copyboard glass [5] Scanning lamp [6] Reflecting plate
NO
Go to 5 Checking the Printer Side (3/3). Is the white background of the copy foggy?
YES
End.
Make a copy in text mode.
Is there a vertical line in the image?

YES
NO
Execute shading in service mode: FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ.
Vary the setting in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>AE-AE-TBL. If the image is dark, decrease the setting. If the image is light, increase the setting.
NO
Clean the separation static eliminator. Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ. Is the setting of 'exposure recalibration' under 'adjust/clean' in user mode the middle setting?
YES NO YES NO
Is the image foggy? If a line occurs only when the ADF is used,
NO
YES
Is the copy density normal?
YES
Set it to the middle setting. Make a copy in text mode.
Make a copy in text mode.
Is the density of the copy image normal?
YES
Make a copy in AE mode.
Is '5' indicated for ADJUST>DENS>DENS-ADJ in user mode?
NO
NO
Set it to '5'.
YES

YES
NO
Vary the setting in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DENS-ADJ. If the image is dark, decrease the setting. If the image is light, increase the setting.
Is the copy image density normal?

NO
YES
Change the shading position. (Note 1) Clean the original reading face of the ADF. Is there a vertical line in the image?
YES NO YES
Set '5' to the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DENS-ADJ.
Does the five items on the right in service mode match the settings indicated on the service label?
NO Enter the settings
indicated on the service label.
NO
Output Condition F value=5
YES
Using the NA3 Test Chart, make 2 copies in the following: [1] Text mode Reference: At optimum density, the copy image should barely show gray scale No. 0. Generate 2 test prints each of the following in COPIER>TEST>PG: [1] TYPE4 (blank) [2] TYPE5 (halftone) [3] TYPE6 (solid black)
In service mode COPIER>ADJUST, 1. AE>AE-TBL 2. DEVELOP>DE-DC 3. DEVELOP>DE-OFST 4. HV-PRI>P-DC 5. HV-PRI>OFST1-DC
Clean the copyboard glass. (white plate position)
Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>DENS. 1. WHITE-ME 2. PD-DENS 3. PD-ME
NO
Is the setting of the following in service mode 485 A or higher: DISPLAY>HV-STS> PRIMARY?
YES

YES
NO
Reference: Varying the setting of DENS-ADJ affects the density of all following copying modes: Auto Text Text/photo Photo (print photo/film photo) Vary the setting in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DENS-ADJ. If the image is dark, decrease the setting. If the image is light, increase the setting.
Replace the drum unit; then, execute the following in service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION>DPC>D-GAMMA.
Change the shading position.
NO
Is the copy image density in text mode normal?

YES
If the copy image has a fault, Go to 2 Checking the Scanner Side.
If the test print has a fault,
Go to 3 Checking the Printer Side (1/3).
Note 1: In units of 8s, increase or decrease the setting of FUNCTION>CCD >SHDG-POS. Then, execute FUNCTION>CCD>SH-PS-ST to see that 'OK!' is indicated.
NO
Is the setting of the following in service mode 485 A or higher: DISPLAY>HV-STS> PRIMARY?
YES
Is the copy image density normal?

NO
YES
End.
Replace the composite power supply PCB.
Go to 3 Checking the Printer Side (1/3).
2-1 T

3
Checking the Printer Side (1/3)
4 Checking the Printer Side (2/3)
Checking the Printer Side (3/3)
NO
Is the image of TYPE6 (solid black) on test prints correct in density and free of fuzziness?
YES
Check the image density by generating test prints (TYPE5).
Check the image density by generating test prints (TYPE4).
Go to
2 Checking the Scanner Side. YES
YES NO
Clean the following: [1] Laser mirror [2] No. 1 mirror Is the image fuzzy? Is there an appreciable difference in density between left and right of the image?
NO
NO
Are the printouts foggy?
NO
Is there a fault in the copy image?
YES YES
YES
Increase the setting of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>DE-DC. Caution: Be sure to vary the setting in equal amounts.
NO
End.
NO
Check the following, and correct any fault: [1] Feeding assembly for locking [2] Transfer charging roller electrode Is there ea vertical line in the image?
Clean the following: [1] Laser mirror: [2] No. 1 mirror
YES
Check the surface of the developing sleeve by the naked eye.
NO
Is the image density appropriate?
YES
Is there a difference in density between left and right of the image?
NO
However, if the setting has already been changed under
YES
Is there a vertical line on the surface of the sleeve?
3 Checking the Printer Side (1/3),

decrease the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>P-DC. Caution: Be sure to vary the setting in equal amounts.
NO
Replace the drum unit.
YES NO
Adjust the setting of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>DE-DC. If the image is light, decrease the setting. If the image is dark, increase the setting. Caution: Be sure to vary the setting in equal amounts.
YES
Generate 10 test prints of the following in service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG. TYPE6 (solid black) Execute the following service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>D-GAMMA. (initialization)
Replace the pre-exposure lamp unit.
NO
Are both rear and front of the pre-exposure lamp ON?
YES
Is the image density of the tense prints (TYPE6) appropriate?
YES
NO YES
Is there a line on the surface of the sleeve?
NO
Is the setting of the following in service mode 485 A: DISPLAY>HV-STS> PRIMARY?
Lock it securely. If the locking mechanism has a fault, replace it. Is the image density appropriate?
NO
Is the developing assembly securely locked in place?
NO
Replace the developing assembly, and make image adjustments under 1 Making Initial Checks.
YES YES
YES NO
Replace the composite power supply PCB. Replace the developing assembly, and make image adjustments under Generate 10 test prints (TYPE6); YES then, if the coating of toner on the developing sleeve is uneven, replace the developing assembly. Is the coating of toner on the developing sleeve uneven?
1 Making Initial Checks.
NO
Lock the feeding assembly (transfer charging roller) securely; if the locking mechanism is faulty, replace the transfer charging roller unit.
NO
Is the feeding assembly (transfer charging roller) locked securely in place?
YES
Replace the laser scanner unit.
2-2 T
1 Image Adjustments
1.1 Standards of Image Position
The image margin/non-image width of a print made in Direct must be as follows:
2.51.5mm
0 2
2.51.5mm
4 6 8 10
F03-101-01 Image Leading Edge Margin
F03-101-02 Left/Right Image Margin
2.51.5mm<2.52.0mm>
2.51.5mm
0 2 4 6 8 10
F03-101-03 Leading Edge Non-Image Width
F03-101-04 Left Non-Image Width < >: with DADF-H1
3-1 T
1.2 Checking the Image Position

Make prints using the following as the source of paper (10 prints each), and check to see that the image margin and the non-image width are as indicated: Each cassette Manual feed tray Duplex feeding unit Side paper deck If not as indicated, adjust the image position in the following order: 1. Adjusting the left/right image margin (registration) 2. Adjusting the image leading edge margin (registration) 3. Adjusting the left/right non-image width (CCD read start position) 4. Leading edge non-image width (scanner image leading edge position)
3-2 T
1.3 Adjusting Left/Right lamge Margin

1.3.1 Adjusting the Registration for the Cassette Rear Front
Try the following service mode first; if not corrected, perform the adjustments that follow: FUNCTION>CI-ADJ-Y/C2ADJ-Y/C3-ADJ-Y/C4-ADJ-Y 1) Remove the cassette. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the horizontal registration base assembly [2].
[2]
[1]
F03-103-01 3) Loosen the screw [1], and adjust the horizontal registration plate [2]. When making adjustments, try to match the arrow [3] against the index (each graduation being about 1 mm).
[2]
[1]
[3]
F03-103-02
3-3 T
1.3.2 Adjusting the Registration for the Multifeeder Rear Front

Try the following service mode first; if not corrected, perform the adjustments that follow: COPIER>FUNCTION>MFADJ 1) Open the multifeeder tray. 2) Loosen the two screws [1], and move the side guide plate unit [2] back and forth to adjust.
[1]
[2]
[1]
F03-103-03 1.3.3 Adjusting the Registration for the Deck Try the following service mode first; if not corrected, perform the adjustments that follow: COPIER>FUNCTION>DKADJ-Y 1) Slide out the compartment. 2) Using the two screws [2], change the position of the latch plate [1] of the deck open solenoid (SL2D) found at the left rear. (At this time, use the index [3] on the latch plate as a reference.)
[1] [3] [2]
F03-103-04 3) Close the compartment, and check to make sure that the gap of the front cover is 3 1 mm. 4) If the gap is not 3 1 mm, adjust the front cover. 3-4 T
1.3.4 Duplex Feeding Unit

1) Adjust the image margin as indicated using service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FeedADJ>ADJ-REFE.
1.4 Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin

1) Adjust the image margin in service mode so that it is as indicated: COPIER>ADJUST>Feed-ADJ>REGIST.
Decreasing the REGIST setting (A decrease by 10 will increase the margin by 1 mm.) Edge of paper Increasing the REGIST setting (An increase by 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm.)
F03-104-01
1.5 Adjusting the Left/Right Non-Image Width

1) Adjust the non-image width in service mode so that it is as indicated: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y.
Edge of image Decreasing the ADJ-Y setting (A decrease by 12 will decrease the margin by 1 mm.) Increasing the ADJ-Y setting (An increase by 12 will increase the non-image width by 1 mm.) 2.5mm2.0
0 2 4 6 8 10
F03-105-01
3-5 T
1.6 Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width

1) Adjust the non-image width in service mode so that it is as indicated: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X.
Decreasing the ADJ-X setting (A decrease by '12' will decrease the width by 1 mm.) Image leading edge Increasing the ADJ-X setting (An increase by '12' will increase the width by 1 mm.)
F03-106-01
2 Scanning System
2.1 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp
Execute CCD auto adjust in service mode, and record the updated CCD adjustment data on the service label. 1. CCD Auto Adjust COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD> CCD-ADJ 2. CCD Adjustment Data All items under COPIER>ADJUST>CCD.
3-6 T
2.2 Mounting the Motor Unit

1) Engage the pulley [2] of the motor unit [1] with the belt [3]. 2) Using two screws [4], mount the motor unit [1] temporarily. 3) Fit the spring [5] to apply tension to the belt [3]. 4) Check to make sure that the belt [3] is vertical.
[4] [6] [1]
[3]
[2] [5]
F03-202-01 5) While taking care not to hold the scanning lamp [1] or the reflecting shade [2], move the No. 1 mirror base [3] back and forth two to three times to make a check once again.
[3] [2]
[1]
F03-202-02 6) Tighten the two screws to secure the motor unit in place.
3-7 T
2.3 Routing the Scanner Drive Cable

Route the scanner cable as follows to the pulleys and the hook mirror base: 1) Loosen the screw on the cable fixing plate. 2) Put the ball of the cable into the hole in the drive pulley, and wind the cable firmly so that it will not turn idly (4 runs inside, 5 runs outside); then, tape it in place. At this time, check to make sure that the cable fixing is on the inside. 3) Engage the cable with each pulley, and temporarily fix one of its ends to the cable fixing plate and the other to the hook on the reader frame. 4) Temporarily secure the cable fixing in place to the No. 1 mirror base. (Do not tighten the screw fully.) 5) Fit the reader upper frame. 6) Adjust the position of the No. 1 and No. 2 mirror bases.
F02-203-01
3-8 T
2.4 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base

1) Set the pins of the mirror positioning tool as indicated: For the Front (F marking)
[C] [B] [A] [B] [C] [A]
(initial; FY9-3009) F03-204-01 For the Rear (R marking)

[C] [B] [A]
[A] [C] [B]
(initial; FY9-3009) F03-204-02
3-9 T
2) Fit the pins of the mirror positioning tool (front [2], rear [3]) into the holes [1] of the rail and the No. 1/No. 2 mirror base. The No. 2 mirror base is adjusted in keeping with the back-andfroth movement of the cable fixing plate. Front Side (F marking)
[2]
[1]
F03-204-03 Rear Side (R marking)

[3]
[1]
F03-204-04 3) Fix the end of the cable (which is temporarily secured on the hook of the reader frame) in place using the spring. 4) Fully tighten the screw on the cable fixing plate. 5) Fully tighten the screw on the cable fixing so that it is secured on the No. 1 mirror base. 6) Detach the mirror positioning tool (2 pc.).
3-10 T
2.5 Mounting the Copyboard Glass

[2]
[1]
F03-205-01 When mounting the copyboard glass, butt the copyboard glass [1] against the vertical/horizontal size plate [2]. If not done properly, the shadow of the size plate will appear on images made in enlargement mode. (After mounting, make an 800% enlargement copy to check.) Thereafter, execute optimum position auto adjustment for the standard white plate to ensure correct shading correction: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>SHPS-ST.
3-11 T
2.6 Mounting the Reader Upper Frame

1) Fit the eight claws [2] of the reader frame [1] (circled) into the cut-offs [4] in the reader upper frame [3]; take care so that the engagement is secure. 2) Fit the eight screws [5] of the claw assembly first. 3) Fit the seven screws [6] of the side. 4) Lastly, fit the two screws [7] on the top face.
[2] [4] [5] [6] [7] [3]
[5] [6] [5] [6]
[5]
[6] [5]
[5] [7] [6] [1] [5] [5]
[6]
F03-206-01
2.7 Points to Note When Replacing the CCD Unit

Execute CCD auto adjustment and edge gain correction position auto adjustment in service mode; then, record the updated CCD adjustment data on the service label. 1) CCD Auto Adjustment COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD> CCD-ADJ 2) Edge Gain Correction Auto Adjustment COPIER>FUNCTION> CCD>EGGN-POS 3) CCD Adjustment Data all items under COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
2.8 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB

See Troubleshooting > Chapter 3 Standards and Adjustment > 7. Electrical Components
3-12 T
3 Image Formation System

3.1 Positioning the Developing Assembly Magnetic Seal
1) The front magnetic seal [1] and the rear magnetic seal [2] must be butted against the opening [3] (stop reference) when they are mounted. Check to make sure that the magnetic seal is in firm contact with the casing.
[1] ([2]) [3] [2] [1]
A
F03-301-01
3.2 Mounting the Developing Assembly Blade

The blade [1] and the blade base [2] of the blade base unit are adjusted to a high accuracy at the factory. Do not disassemble the unit. If you happen to have removed the blade, adjust its position so that the gap between the blade and the developing cylinder [3] is 0.21 0.03 mm using a gap gauge (CK0057-000). The surface of the developing cylinder is highly susceptible to scratches. Be sure to fit the gap gauge on ends of the developing cylinder.
[2]
[1] 0.210.03mm
[3]
F03-302-01
3-13 T
3.3 Removing the Paper Lint

1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the paper lint cleaning cover [1] by inserting a flat-blade screwdriver.
[1]
F03-303-01 3) Slide out the paper lint cleaning lever [1], and move it back and forth.
[1]
F03-303-02
3-14 T
3.4 Cleaning the Waste Toner Case

[1]
[2] [3]
F03-304-01 3) Dispose of the waste toner collecting inside the waste toner case. 4) Clean both inside and the outside of the waste toner case [1] (area A, indicated by shading) with alcohol.
[1]
F03-304-02 5) Fit the waste toner case [1] back in the machine, and mount the waste toner case cover [2] with a screw [3].
[3]
[2] [1]
F03-304-03
3-15 T
4 Fixing System
4.1 Mounting the Locking Cam Unit
1) Check to see if the feeding assembly is locked in place. 2) Match the arrow of the gear of the locking cam unit [1] against the middle of the gear [3] of the fixing drive unit (e.i., where the rear [4] of the gear of the locking cam unit is in contact with the cut-up [5] of the frame).
[5] [2]
[1] [4] [3]
F03-401-01
3-16 T
5 Paper Deck
5.1 Mounting the Front Cover
1) When mounting the front cover, be sure to match it against the coupling [1] of the paper level indicator.
[1]
F03-501-01 2) Be sure to mount the front cover so that gap A between the front cover [1] and the front upper cover [2] is 3 1 mm.
[1]
[2]
F03-501-02 If you operate the deck without matching the position of the paper level indicator and the deck lifter, the drive mechanism of the paper level indicator can become damaged. If you have moved the paper level indicator drive belt behind the front cover or the deck lifter, be sure to perform the following two tasks:
3-17 T
5.2 Adjusting the Paper Level Indicator

1) Move the drive belt [2] of the paper level indicator behind the front cover [1] by hand so that the white area inside the window [3] increases, i.e., in the direction for the arrow [4]; move it until a little resistance is felt.
[1] [3] [2]
[4]
F03-502-01
5.3 Adjusting the Position of the Support Member

If the compartment cannot be opened/ closed smoothly and the position of the support roller must be adjusted, perform the following: 1) Remove the front cover. 2) Using the four screws [4] of the roller support plate [3], make adjustments so that the support roller [1] and the floor [2] is about 3 mm when the compartment is fully slid out. (At this time, use the scale [5] on the front side plate as a reference.)
[5]
[4]
[4]
[3] A [1] [2]
F03-503-01
3-18 T
5.4 Mounting the Deck Pickup Roller

Body Front (collar: silver-colored) When mounting the deck pickup roller [2] to the front of the machine, be sure that the marking [4] on the collar [3] is toward the front of the machine and the marking [5] on the side of the roller is toward the rear of the machine.
[1] [3] [3]
[2]
[3]
F03-504-01 Body Rear (collar: gold-colored) When mounting the deck pickup roller [2] to the rear of the machine, be sure that the marking [4] on the collar [3] and the marking [5] on the side of the roller are toward the rear of the machine.
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
F03-504-02
5.5 Removing the Deck Pickup/Feeding Roller

1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (p. 836P) 2) Turn over the deck pickup unit. 3) Remove the resin ring [1], and detach the deck pickup/feeding roller [2] and the drive belt [3] to the front.
[2] [3]
[1]
F03-505-01
3-19 T
5.6 Orientation of the Deck Pickup/Feeding Roller

When mounting the deck pickup/feeding roller [1], be sure that the belt pulley [2] is toward the front of the machine. The pickup/feeding roller rubber, on the other hand, may be attached to the pickup/ feeding roller shaft in either orientation.
[2] [1]
F03-506-01
5.7 Adjusting the Deck Separation Roller Pressure

If double feeding or pickup failure occurs when the deck is used as the source of paper, move the position of the pressure spring [2] of the deck separation roller [1]. If pickup failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A. If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow B.
[1]
A B [2]
F03-507-01
3-20 T
5.8 Position of the Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL1D)

Before detaching the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid [1] from the support plate, keep note of the position of the solenoid with reference to the two fixing screws [2] on the solenoid. Or, mark the position of the solenoid on the support plate with a scribe to indicate the position. The solenoid must always be positioned in its initial location.
[2]
[1]
F03-508-01
3-21 T
5.9 Adjusting the Height of the Side Member

5.9.1 Before Making Adjustments
1) Disconnect the machine from its host machine, and then connect it once gain, thereby finding out whether the impact of connection causes the host machine to slide over or the machine to wobble. If any such problem is noted, adjust the height of the side member as follows; otherwise, these steps need not be performed:
5.9.2 Making Adjustments

1) Connect the machine to the host machine. 2) Take out the paper from the deck. 3) Remove the right cover of the machine. 4) Loosen the two fixing screws [2] of the side member [1]. 5) With the side member in contact with the floor, tighten the fixing screws. At this time, refer to the index so that the left and right screws match against the same index.
[2]
[1]
F03-509-01 6) Disconnect the machine from the host machine, and then connect it once again. If it can be done without extra force, mount the right cover for the machine, and put the paper back into the deck. If extra force is needed, go to the next step. 7) Check the index of the side member. 8) Loosen the fixing screws of the side member. 9) While referring to the index, raise the side member 1 mm, and then tighten the fixing screws. 10) Mount the right cover, and then put the paper back into the deck.
3-22 T
6 Cassette Feeding Unit-W1

6.1 Mounting the Pedestal Main Motor
1) When mounting the pedestal main motor, be sure to tighten the screws in the order indicated in the figure: (1) through (4).
(3) (2)
(1)
(4)
F03-601-01
3-23 T
7 Envelope Feeder Attachment

7.1 Envelopes and Type of Spring
Use the green-painted spring for COM10, Monarch, DL, and YOUKEI 4. Use the red-painted spring for C5 and B5.
7.2 Replacing the Spring

7.2.1 Replacing the Spring
1) Remove the two mounting screws [1] each, and detach the side guide plate [2] (front, rear) and the lifter [3].
[2] [3] [2]
[1]
[1]
F03-702-01 2) Holding the bottom (1st, 2nd loops) of the spring [1], turn it clockwise to free it from the envelope feeder.
[1]
F03-702-02
3-24 T
3) Thread the edge of the spring [1] that comes as an attachment so as to fit it through the catch 1 [2] and then the catch 2 [3]. 4) Holding the bottom (1st and 2nd loops) of the spring, fit it through the catch 3 [4]; then, thread it until distance A is about 15 mm from the catch 2 [3]. At this time, check to make sure that the spring is firmly on the bottom plate.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
F03-702-03
7.3 Changing the Size

7.3.1 Changing the Size
1) Match the lifter [1] and the side guide plate [2] against the size positioning line of the envelope feeder in relation to the edges of the side guide plate; then, secure them in place by using two mounting screws [3] each.
[2] [1] [2]
[3]
[3]
F03-703-01 Take care so that the side guide plate will not extend beyond the envelope feeder (as by choosing the wrong mounting hole). See the next page for the correct mounting hole.
3-25 T
Mounting Hole by Side Guide Plate (front) (The side guide rear is symmetrically opposite.)
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3] [4]
[3]
[4] [5] [5]
F03-703-02 [1] Monarch [2] COM10, YOUKEI 4 [3] DL 2) Register the specifications of the envelope using register envelope offered as part of common settings. 3) Check to make sure that envelopes are fed correctly. [4] ISO-C5 [5] ISO-B5
3-26 T
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/ MALFUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS
1 Making Initial Checks

1.1 Checking the Site of Installation
1. There must be a source of power rated as indicated (rated voltage 10%). The source must be exclusively of the machine, and the power plug must remain connected throughout the night. 2. The machine must not be in a high-temperature/-humidity area (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier), must not be cold or subject to dust. There must not be a source of fire nearby. 3. The machine must not be subjected to ammonium gas. 4. The machine must not be subjected to the direct rays of the sun; as necessary, curtains must be provided. 5. The room must be well ventilated. 6. The floor must be flat to keep the machine level. 7. The source of power must provide power night and day. Check the sight against the above requirements.
1.2 Checking the Originals

Check to find out if the symptom is caused by the originals used or by the machine: 1. The copy density is optimum if set to index 5 1. 2. Originals with a reddish tone tend to prevent reproduction of good contrast. 3. Originals of specific densities can produce copies that can be mistaken as faulty.
Memo
An original with a reddish tint can produce copies with poor contrast. Diazo copies used as originals or originals with a high degree of transparency can produce copies that can be mistaken as light copies. Originals prepared in pencil or with a greenish tint can produce copies that can be mistaken as light copies.
1.3 Checking the ADF Platen, Copyboard cover, and Copyboard glass (standard white plate)
If the ADF platen, copyboard cover, or copyboard glass is soiled, clean it with a solution of mild detergent; if scratched, replace it.
4-1 T
1.4 Charging Roller and Static Eliminator

1. Check the transfer charging roller and the separation static eliminator for dirt and a fault (damage). 2. Check to make sure that the transfer charging roller and the separation static eliminator are correctly mounted.
1.5 Checking the Developing Assembly

1. Check to make sure that the members on both ends of the drum are in contact. Otherwise, light images can result. 2. Check to see the surface of the developing cylinder is coated with an even layer of toner. Otherwise, light images or uneven density can result.
1.6 Checking the Paper

1. Check to see if the paper used is of a recommended type. Advise the user that paper not of a recommended type may fail to bring about expected results. 2. Check to see if the paper is moist. Moist paper can adversely affect transfer, causing poor images or separation faults (leading to jams and wrinkles). Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper.
1.7 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts

Check with the scheduled servicing chart and the table of periodically replaced parts. Replace parts that have reached the ends of their lives.
1.8 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure

If the copies have uneven density (difference between front and rear), light images, or foggy background, try the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure first to see if the problem is corrected.
4-2 T
1.9 Others
In winter, bringing a machine from a cold to warm place can cause condensation inside the machine, causing various problems. 1. Condensation in the optical system (glass, mirror, lens) can cause dark images. 2. Condensation in the charging system can cause leakage. 3. Condensation on the pickup/feeding guide can cause feeding faults. If condensation is noted, dry wipe the part, or leave the machine powered and alone for 60 min.
Memo
4-3 T
Blank Page
4-4 T
2 Samples of Image Faults
4-6 T
3 Troubleshooting Image Faults

3.1 The copy is too light (halftone area only).
1) Perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure. Is the problem corrected? Check to make sure that the placement of the pattern print when the following is executed in service mode is correct: FUNCTION>DENS>PD-ME. YES: End. AE adjustment 2) Make copies in AE mode. Is the text too light? YES: Execute AE adjustment: Decrease the setting of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>AE>AE-TBL. Developing assembly 3) Are the block members of the developing assembly in contact with the photosensitive drum? NO: Check the developing assembly locking lever. Check the surface of the developing assembly block members for foreign matter (toner). Developing assembly 4) Is the coating on the developing cylinder even? NO: Check the developing assembly. Scanner, Photosensitive drum 5) Clean the mirrors and lenses. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the drum unit.
4-7 T
3.2 The copy is too light (including solid black).

1) Perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure. Is the problem corrected? Check to make sure that the placement of the pattern print when the following is executed in service mode is correct: FUNCTION>DENS>PD-ME. YES: End. 2) Turn off the main power switch in the middle of copying operation, and open the front cover. Is the toner image on the photopositive drum before transfer more or less normal? NO: Go to step 7. Feeding unit (Transfer charging roller) 3) Is the feeding unit locked in place correctly? NO: Check the transfer charging roller pressure spring. 4) Is there electrical leakage around the electrode of the feeding unit? YES: Check the electrode of the feeding unit. 5) Is there dirt, cracking, or scratching on the transfer charging roller? YES: Replace the transfer charging roller. 6) Are the position and the condition of the transfer charging roller locking spring normal? NO: Correct the position of the spring, or replace the spring. Paper (transfer faulty) 7) Try paper fresh out of package. Is the problem corrected? YES: The paper may be moist. Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper. Advise the user that the use of paper not of a recommended type may fail to produce poor images.
4-8 T
Transfer guide, High-voltage cord, Composite power supply PCB, DC controller PCB (transfer faulty) 8) Is there foreign matter in the transfer guide assembly or the transfer charging roller assembly, and is leakage noted? YES: Remove the foreign matter. NO: 1. Check the high-voltage cord for electrical continuity. (The resistance of the transfer high-voltage cord is about 10 k.) 2. Check the composite power supply PCB and the DC controller PCB. Developing assembly 9) Is the developing assembly fitted securely? (Check to see if the developing block members are in firm contact with the photosensitive drum.) NO: Fit the developing assembly correctly. Toner level detection assembly (development fault) 10)Is there toner inside the developing assembly? NO: Check the toner sensor. Check the connectors and the harnesses for electrical continuity. Drum unit, Reader controller PCB, Main controller PCB 11)Try replacing the drum unit. Is the problem corrected/ YES: End. NO: Real the reader controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
Memo
The resistance of the high-voltage cord for primary charging is about 10 k The resistance of the high-voltage cord (white) is about 10 k The resistance of the cord for the transfer guide is about 10 k
4-9 T
3.3 The copy is too light (entire face, considerable).

1) Perform the Image adjustment Basic Procedure. Is the problem corrected? Check to make user that the placement of the pattern print when executing the folding is correct: FUNCTION>DENS>PD-ME. YES: End. AE adjustment 2) Turn off the main power switch in the middle of copying operation, and open the front cover. At this time, is the toner image on the surface of the photosensitive drum before transfer more or less normal? NO: Go to step 5. Developing assembly 3) Are the developing members in firm contract with the drum? NO: Check the developing assembly locking lever. Check the surface of the developing members for foreign matter (toner). Developing clutch 4) Is the developing cylinder rotating? NO: Check the developing clutch (for a lose hex screw). Feeding unit (tranfer charging roller) 5) Is the feeding unit locked in place correctly? Is the transfer roller in contact with the photosensitive drum whet the feeding unit is locked in place? NO: Check the transfer charging roller pressure spring. Check the feeding locking assembly. 6) Is there leakage in the electrode assembly of the feeding unit? YES: Check the electrode assembly of the feeding unit. High-voltage cord, Feeding unit (Transfer charging roller) 7) Is the feed electric continuity from the composite power supply PCB to the electrode assembly of the feeding unit? (The resistance of the high-voltage cord of the transfer charging roller is about 10 k.) NO: Replace the high-voltage cord. Check the feeding unit. Composite power supply PCB, DC controller PCB 8) Is there electrical continuity from the composite power supply PCB to the feeding unit? (The resistance of the high-voltage cord of the transfer charging roller is about 10 k.) YES: Check the composite power supply PCB and the DC controller PCB. 4-10 T
Transfer guide 9) Is there foreign matter in the transfer guide assembly or the transfer charging roller assembly, and is there electrical leakage? YES: Remove the foreign matter. Paper 10)Is there foreign matter in the transfer guide assembly or the transfer charging roller, and is there leakage? NO: Try fresh paper or paper of a different type. Development (fault) 11)Is the developing assembly in firm contact with the photosensitive drum? (Check to see that the developing block members are in firm contact with the photosensitive drum.) NO: Fit the developing assembly once again. YES: Check the developing assembly. Check the developing bias.
4-11 T
3.4 The copy has uneven density (darker at front). 3.5 The copy has uneven density (lighter at front).
Developing assembly 1) Are the developing block members of the developing assembly in firm contact with the developing assembly? NO: Check the developing assembly locking unit. Scanner 2) Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, mirrors, and lenses. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Pre-exposure lamp 3) Is the pre-exposure lamp ON during copying operation? NO: 1. Replace the pre-exposure lamp unit. 2. Replace the DC controller PCB. Developing assembly 4) Is the coating of toner on the developing cylinder even? NO: 1. Clean the tip of the blade of the developing assembly. (dry wiping) 2. Clean the surface of the developing cylinder. 3. Check the toner inside the developing assembly for uneven deposit. 5) Try the following modes. Is the problem corrected? APVC adjustment once gain in service mode: FUNCTION>DPC>DGAMMA. ATVC adjustment once again in user mode: roller clean under adjust/ clean. YES: End. Drum cartridge, Shading 6) Is there an uneven image in the halftone area of PG? YES: Replace the drum unit. NO: Execute shading adjustment (i.e., FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ).
4-12 T
3.6 The copy is foggy (entire face).

Scanner 1) Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, mirrors, and lenses. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 2) Perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 3) Select the following in service mode, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>D-GAMAM. Is the problem corrected? NO: Replace the drum unit. However, be sure to take appropriate measures, as a fault in the following is suspected: main controller PCB, DC controller PCB, composite power supply PCB. Developing assembly 4) Is the developing cylinder insulated from the GND of the machine? (Turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the connector J130 of the composite power supply PCB; then, check the length between J130-1 and the metal plate of the host machine for electrical continuity.) NO: Check the area around the developing cylinder and the development connectors. High-voltage system 5) Is PG solid white foggy? YES: Check the high-voltage system. Service mode 6) Adjust the setting of the following up to +30 of the factory value: ADJUST>DEVELOP>DE-OFST. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Developing bias, DC controller PCB 7) Try replacing the composite power supply. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4-13 T
3.7 The copy is foggy (vertical). 3.8 The copy has a black line (vertical, fuzzy, thick).
Primary charging roller 1) Clean the charging roller in user mode. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Scanner 2) Clean the mirrors and lenses. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Developing assembly 3) Is the coating of toner on the developing cylinder even? NO: 1. Check the edge of the blade of the developing assembly. 2. Dry wipe the surface of the developing cylinder. Photosensitive drum, External light 4) Is there a scratch in the peripheral direction on the surface of the photosensitive drum? YES: Replace the drum unit. NO: Check to see if the photosensitive drum is subjected to light from outside.
4-14 T
3.9 The copy has a black line (vertical, fine).

Exposure system 1) Generate a halftone test print in service mode. Enter 5 to COPIER>PG>TYPE. Does the output image have a black line? NO: Suspect a fault in the exposure system. Clean it. Primary charging roller 2) Clean the primary charging roller. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Photosensitive drum 3) Is there a scratch or a black line in the peripheral direction of the surface of the photosensitive drum? Be sure to wipe the black line on the surface of the photosensitive drum with a cloth coated with toner, and make sure that the black line disappears. NO: Replace the drum unit. If there is a scratch, be sure to identify the cause. Fixing assembly 4) Is there a scratch it the peripheral direction of the fixing roller? YES: Replace the fixing roller. NO: Check the fixing inlet assembly for dirt.
4-15 T
3.10 3.11
The copy has a white spot (vertical). The copy has a white line (vertical).
Exposure system 1) Generate a halftone test print in service mode. Enter 4 to the following: COPIER>PG>TYPE. Does the output image have a white line/spot? NO: Go to step 7. dirt (lint) 2) Is there dirt (lint) in the drum unit or around the laser optical path of the developing assembly? YES: Remove the dirt (lint). Transfer charging roller, Separation static eliminator 3) Is the transfer charging roller or the separation static eliminator soiled or coated with foreign matter? YES: Clean the transfer charging roller or the separation static eliminator. If the problem is still not corrected, replace the transfer charging roller or the separation static eliminator. Developing assembly 4) Is the coating of toner on the developing cylinder even? NO: Check the edge of the developing assembly. If the developing assembly is without toner, see the descriptions under The Add Toner message fails to go ON. Fixing film 5) Is there a scratch in the peripheral direction of the fixing film? YES: Replace the fixing film unit Fixing assembly inlet 6) Is there dirt or foreign matter on the fixing assembly inlet? YES: Clean the inlet. Photosensitive drum 7) Is there a scratch in the peripheral direction of the photosensitive drum? YES: Replace the drum unit. Be sure to identify the cause of the scratch. Exposure system, Standard white plate 8) Clean the copyboard glass (stander white plate) and the mirrors. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Change the setting in the following service mode to change the point of shading measurement: FUNCTION>SHDG-POS. If the problem is not corrected after several attempts, replace the copyboard glass.
4-16 T
3.12
The copy has a white spot (horizontal).
Exposure system 1) Generate a halftone test print in service mode. Enter 4 to the following: COPIER>PG>TYPE. Does the output image have a white spot? NO: Go to step 4. Developing assembly 2) Does the problem occur at intervals of about 35 mm? YES: Clean the developing block members. Dry wipe the surface of the developing cylinder. If a scratch is found on the surface of the developing cylinder, replace the developing cylinder. Drum unit 3) Does the problem occur at intervals of about 94 mm? YES: Clean the drum. If a scratch is found on the drum, replace the drum unit. Paper 4) Try paper fresh out of package. YES: The paper may be moist. Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper. Transfer charging roller, Developing bias 5) Is there a white spot on the photosensitive drum during copying operation? NO: Check the transfer charging roller for leakage. YES: Check the developing bias.
4-17 T
3.13
The back of the copy is soiled/Soiled edge.
Exposure system 1) Turn off the main power switch while paper is moving in the feeding assembly. At this time, is the back of the paper soiled? NO: Go to step 5. Transfer guide assembly 2) Does the back of paper soiled after replacing the drum that caused a black line or the like? YES: Clean the transfer guide. Transfer guide bias, Transfer guide 3) During copying, is the voltage between the transfer guide (+) and the machine side plate (-) about -50 to -650V? NO: Check the transfer guide bias connector. Clean the transfer guide. Clean the bottom of the developing assembly. Developing assembly, Registration roller, Drum cleaner 4) Does the problem occur at intervals of about 50 mm? YES: Clean the registration roller. Clean the transfer guide. Check the developing assembly for leakage of toner. Clean the bottom of the developing assembly. NO: Clean the feeding assembly. Clean the transfer guide. Check the drum cleaner assembly fro leakage of waste toner. Transfer charging roller 5) Execute cleaning of the roller in user mode. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Fixing assembly 6) Execute fixing cleaning mode in the following service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-CLN. Is the problem corrected? NO: Replace the fixing cleaning roller. YES: End.
4-18 T
3.14
The copy has a fixing fault.

1) Does the problem occur when the machine is first turned on (as in the morning)? NO: Go to step 3. 2) Is the paper thick or the like, which has poor fixing quality? YES: Select thick paper, and try feeding paper from the multifeeder.
Fixing film 3) Is the problem vertical? YES: If a scratch is found on the fixing film, replace the film unit. Fixing heater 4) Does the heater operate? NO: See The fixing heater fails to operate. Fixing lower roller pressure 5) Is the lower roller pressure (nip width) as indicated? NO: Replace the fixing assembly. Thermistor 6) Does the indication in the following service mode increase: COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG>FIX-C? NO: Replace the film unit. Paper 7) Is the paper of a recommended type? NO: Try paper of a recommended type. If the result is good, advise the user to use paper of a recommended type. Service mode 8) Set priority on fixing in the following service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-TEMP. Is the problem corrected? YES: End.
4-19 T
3.15 3.16 3.17
The copy has a displaced leading edge. The copy has a displaced leading edge (large margin). The copy has a displaced margin (no margin).
1) Is an ADF used? YES: Correct the displacement by referring to the Service Manual of the ADF.
Original 2) Is the original placed correctly? NO: Place the original correctly. Pickup roller, Feeding roller, Separation roller 3) Has the pickup, feeding, or separation roller of the cassette in question reached the end of its life? YES: Check the roller; if worn, replace it. REGIST 4) Execute the following in service mode: ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST. Is the problem corrected? (Note 1) YES: End. Registration roller, Pickup/Feeding guide 5) Does the problem occur only in double-sided mode? YES: Check the rollers of the duplex feeding assembly. NO: Check and clean the following: Registration rollers Pickup/feeding guide Note 1: Making Adjustments Generate a PG test pattern ( [6] ; solid bal). Make adjustments so that the leading edge margin is 2.5 1.5 mm. A higher setting will decrease the margin.
4-20 T
3.18
The copy is blurred.
Scanner drive cable 1) Is the cable wound on the wire pulley twisted or twined when the scanner is moving? Is there e foreign matter in the mirror pulley assembly? YES: Route the cable correctly. Replace the cable. Remove the foreign matter. Scanner rail 2) Move the No. 1 mirror base slowly by hand. Does it move smoothly? NO: Clean the surface of the scanner rail with alcohol; thereafter, apply a small amount of silicone oil. Drum drive assembly, Photosensitive drum 3) Does the problem occur at intervals of about 94 mm? YES: Check the drum drive assembly. Check the drum ends (where developing block members remain in contact) for a scratch or foreign matter. Developing gear, Drum drive assembly, Drum unit 4) Does the problem occur at intervals of about 35 mm? YES: Check the developing assembly. NO: Check the drum drive assembly. Replace the drum unit.
4-21 T
3.19
The copy is foggy (horizontal).

1) Does the problem occur at the same position on all copies made in Direct. YES: Go to step 5.
Scanning lamp 2) Does the scanning lamp flicker while the scanner is moving forward? YES: Check the scanning lamp and the inverter PCB. Drum unit 3) Does the problem occur at intervals of 94 mm? YES: Replace the drum unit. Wiring 4) Is the wiring between the scanning lamp, the inverter PCB and the reader assembly? NO: Correct the wiring. Developing assembly 5) Is the coating of toner on the developing cylinder normal? NO: Check the developing bias. Scanner, Feeding system 6) Make reduced copies (about 50% to 60%), and compare them against copies made in Direct. Is the position of the problem different? YES: Check the scanner. NO: Check the feeding assembly.
4-22 T
3.20
The copy has inadequate sharpness.
Copyboard glass 1) Is there oil or the like on the copyboard glass? Is there foreign matter on the copyboard glass stay? YES: Clean the copyboard glass. Scanner 2) Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, mirrors, and lenses. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Mirror (position) 3) Is the horizontal reproduction ratio in Direct as indicated? NO: Adjust the position of the No. 1 mirror an the No. 2 mirror. Developing bias 4) Are the connection and the electrical continuity of the high-voltage for the developing bias normal? (The resistance of the cable for the developing bias and the resistance between the terminal of the composite power supply PCB and the terminal on the developing assembly is about 10 k.) NO: Check the connection; and replace the cable. If the problem is still not corrected, 1. Replace the composite power supply PCB 2. Replace the DC controller PCB. Drum unit, Transfer charging system 5) Try replacing the drum unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Check the transfer charging system.
4-23 T
3.21
The copy is completely blank.
Developing assembly 1) Is the developing assembly locked to the photosensitive drum during copying? NO: Check the locking mechanism of the developing assembly. Developing assembly drive mechanism 2) Is the developing cylinder rotating during copying? NO: Check the drive mechanism of the developing assembly. 3) Is the image of the test print (PG>TYPE; 1 through 8) normal? YES: Go to step 10. Transfer charging roller 4) Is the transfer charging roller mounted properly? NO: Check the mounting condition. 5) Is leakage noted on the transfer charging roller? YES: Check the transfer charging roller. Transfer high-voltage cord 6) Is the connection of the transfer high-voltage cord normal? Is there electrical continuity in the transfer high-voltage cord? (The resistance of the transfer high-voltage cord is about 10 k.) NO: Connect the cord properly. Replace the transfer high-voltage cord. DC controller PCB 7) Try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Composite power supply PCB 8) Try replacing the composite power supply PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Power supply (to CCD PCB) 9) Is about 12 VDC present on J602-1 of the CCD PCB? Is about 5 VDC present on J602-4? NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the reader controller PCB.
4-24 T
Wiring 10)Is the wiring between the CCD PCB and the reader controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the wiring. Laser scanner unit, Drum unit 11)Try replacing the drum unit. Is the problem corrected? NO: Check the laser shutter mechanism; if normal, replace the laser scanner unit. YES: End.
4-25 T
3.22
The copy is completely black.

1) Is the scanning lamp ON during copying operation? NO: See The scanning lamp fails to go ON.
Scanning lamp
Margin 2) Is there a margin on copies made in normal mode? YES: Go to step 6. NO: Go to step 3. Drum unit 3) Is the drum unit fitted correctly? (Is it fully pushed inside?) NO: Mount it correctly. Primary charging roller 4) Are the contact of the connectors, connection of the harness, and electrical continuity from J130-7 of the composite power supply PCB to the primary charring roller normal? (The resistance of the high-voltage cord for primary charging is 10 k.) NO: Correct the fault. Mirror (position) 5) Generate test prints (PG>TYPE; 1 through 8). At this time, is the image on the photosensitive drum normal? NO: Go to step 7. DC controller PCB, Composite power supply PCB 6) Is the output of J301-B4 (+) on the DC controller PCB 0 V during copying operation? NO: Replace the DC controller PCB. YES: Replace the composite power supply PCB. Reader controller PCB, CCD unit 7) Try replacing the CCD unit. Is the problem corrected? NO: Replace the reader controller PCB. YES: End.
4-26 T
3.23 The copy has a block/white dot after replacement of the drum unit.
1) Execute the following in service mode: FUNCTION>DPC>DGAMMA. Then, make copies of the NA-3 Chart. Is the copy image normal? YES: End. Drum unit 2) Set the following to 1: OPTION>BODY>PRIAC-SW. Then, make copies of the NA-3 Chart. Is the copy image normal? YES: End. NO: Replace the drum unit.
3.24
The copy has a black line (stream reading).
Reading glass, Dirt 1) Does the problem occur on the same position on all copies? YES: Check the reading glass for dirt and a scratch. NO: Paper lint (droppings) can be suspected. Clean the ADF roller, original path, and reading glass.
4-27 T
4 Troubleshooting Malfunctions
4.1 Power Supply System
4.1.1 The AC power is absent.
1. Initial checks [1] Is the power plug connected to the power outlet? [2] Is the rated AC voltage present at the power outlet? [3] Has the leakage breaker gone ON? 2. Switch PCB, Wiring, Connector Is the resistance 0 when the switch is turned on and when it is turned off? NO: Replace the switch PCB. YES: Check the AC power line (power cord, leakage breaker, switch PCB, main power supply PCB (J6)) for poor wiring (i.e., electrical continuity); check the connectors for poor contact.
4-28 T
4.1.2 The DC power is absent.

1. AC power supply Is the rated AC voltage present at the connector J6 (between 1 and 3) of the main controller PCB and at the connector J100 (between 1 and 3) of the composite power supply PCB? NO: See The AC power is absent. 2. Fuse (F1) Is the fuse on the composite power supply PCB blown ? YES: Remove the cause of the fuse, and replace the fuse. 3. Main power supply PCB, Composite power supply PCB Is the output voltage of each power supply PCB normal? a. Main Power Supply PCB Connector J202-1, 3, 5 J203-2 J204-1, 3, 7, 8, 9 J206-2 J206-3 Output voltage 24VU1-SW 24VU2 24VU3 24VU3 5V b. Composite Power Supply Connector J120-1, 4 J121-1, 2, 3 J121-4, 5 J121-11,12,13 J122-1, 2 J124-3, 4 J124-6 J124-9, 10 J126-2, 3, 5, 7 Output voltage 5V 3VA2 3VA1 3VB 5V 3VA1 3VB 5V 13V
YES: Check the wiring from each power supply PCB to each load. NO: Replace the faulty power supply PCB.
4-29 T
4.2 Printer Unit

4.2.1 Pickup fails.
1. General condition Slide out and then in the cassette. Is the sound of the lifter fall heard? NO: See The lifter fails to move up. 2. Sensor In service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM) find the sensor that detected the jam. Is the sensor lever and the sensor itself normal? NO: Replace the sensor lever or the sensor. 3. Releasing lever (for pickup/separation roller) Push in the releasing lever toward the rear. Is the pickup roller released? Do the feeding roller and the separation roller come into firm contact? NO: The releasing lever (spring) is displaced or deformed. Correct or replace it. 4. Pickup/feeding/separation roller Execute pickup operation. Does the roller rotate? YES: The movement of paper is faulty because of wear on the pickup/ feeding/separate roller. Replace the roller. 5. Pickup drive assembly Is there damage/foreign matter on the gear of the pickup roller drive assembly? YES: Replace the gear. Remove the foreign matter. 6. Pickup motor (M2) Execute the following in service mode: code 3 of COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR; i.e., MTR-ON. Is the motor control signal present at J1602 of the pickup PCB? (J1602-1: A*, J1602-2: A, J1602-3: B*, J1602-4: B) YES: Replace the pickup motor. 7. Pickup PCB, DC controller PCB Execute the following in service mode: code 3 of COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR; i.e., MTR-ON. Is the motor control signal present at J302A of the DC controller PCB? (J302A-1: 24 V, J302A-3: GND, J302A-6: IN1, J302A-7: IN2, J302A-8: IN3, J302A-8: IN4) YES: Replace the pickup PCB. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4-30 T
4.2.2 The lifter fails to move up (pickup from the cassette).

1. Releasing lever (for pickup roller) Push in the releasing lever toward the rear. Does the descent movement of the pickup roller stop? NO: The releasing lever (spring) is displaced or deformed. Correct or replace it. 2. Lifter gear retaining lever lock When the cassette is slid in, is the lock of the lifter gear retaining level released? NO: Correct the locking mechanism of the lifter gear retaining lever or replace it. 3. Lifter gear, Lifter gear retaining lever, Lifter ascent lever Is any of the gear faulty (damaged)? YES: Replace it. 4. Lifter drive assembly Is the gear of the lifter drive assembly damaged or subject to foreign matter. Is the drive belt faulty? YES: Replace the gear/belt. Remove the foreign matter. 5. Pickup roller descent solenoid (SL1C) Execute the following in service mode: code 6 of COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>SL; i.e., SL-ON. Is the solenoid drive voltage present at J1604 of the pickup PCB? (J1604-4: 24 V, J1604-1: PICKUPSL*) YES: The pickup roller solenoid is faulty. Replace it. 6. Pickup PCB, DC controller PCB Execute the following in service mode: code 6 of COPIER>FUNCTION>PART>CHK>SL; i.e., SL-ON. Is the solenoid control signal present at J302A-5 of the DC controller PCB? (J302A-5: FDOWN_SL*) YES: Replace the pickup PCB. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4-31 T
4.2.3 The vertical path roller fails to rotate.

1. Main motor Is E010 (faulty main motor) indicated? YES: See the descriptions on E010 in Chapter 6 Self Diagnosis. 2. Vertical path clutch (CL1) Execute the following in service mode: code 1 of COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>CL, i.e., CL-ON. Is the clutch drive signal present at J1603 of the pickup PCB? (J1603-4: 24 V, J1603-1: VPATHCL*) YES: The vertical path clutch is faulty. Replace the clutch. 3. Pickup PCB, DC controller PCB Execute the following in service mode: code 1 of COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>CL; i.e., CL-ON. Is the clutch control signal present at J302A-4 of the DC controller PCB? YES: Replace the pickup PCB. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4.2.4 The registration roller fails to rotate.

1. Registration paper sensor (PS10) When paper is placed over the sensor, does bit 3 change from 0 to 1? (service mode: COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>IO-P015)? NO: The registration paper sensor is faulty. Replace the sensor. 2. Registration MOTOR (M9) Execute the following in service mode: code 9 of COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR. Is the motor drive signal present at J309 of the DC controller PCB? (J309-1: REG_A, J309-2: REG_A*, J309-3: 24 VU, J309-4: 24 VU, J309-5: REG_B, J309-6: REG_B*) YES: The registration motor is faulty. Replace the motor. NO: The DC controller PCB is faulty. Replace the PCB.
4-32 T
4.2.5 Pickup from the multifeeder tray fails (i.e., the pickup roller fails to rotate).
1. Main motor Is E010 (faulty main motor) indicated? YES: See the description on E010 in Chapter 6 Self Diagnosis. 2. Multifeeder paper sensor (PS22) Place paper in the multifeeder. Does bit 5 change from 0 to 1? (service move COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>IO-PO16) NO: Check the wiring and the link; if normal, replace the sensor. 3. Multifeeder clutch (CL2), DC controller PCB Execute the following in service mode: code 2 of COPIER>FUNCTION>PATH-CHK>CL; i.e., CL-ON. Is the clutch drive signal present between J302B-7 and -8 of the DC controller PCB? (J302B7: 24 V, J302B-8: MLT_CL) YES: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the clutch. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4.2.6 Pickup from the multifeeder tray fails (i.e., the multifeeder holding plate fails to move up).
1. Main motor Is E010 (faulty main motor) indicated? YES: See the description on E010 in Chapter 6 Self Diagnosis. 2. Multifeeder holding plate releasing solenoid (SL5) Execute the following in service mode: code 4 of COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>SL; i.e., SL-ON. Is the solenoid drive signal present between J308A-1 and -2 on the DC controller PCB? (J308A2: 24 V, J308A-1: MLT_SL) YES: Check the wiring and the link; if normal, replace the solenoid. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4-33 T
4.2.7 The photosensitive drum fails to rotate.

1. Main motor Is E010 (faulty main motor) indicated? YES: See the description on E010 in Chapter 6 Self Diagnosis. 2. Drum unit, Drum drive unit Remove and then mount bak the drum unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: Yes. NO: Check the drum unit and the drive assembly of the drum drive unit. If a fault is discovered, correct the fault or replace the unit.
4.2.8 The pre-exposure lamp fails to go ON.

1. Pre-exposure lamp (LAMP2), DC controller PCB Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISCP>PRE-EXP. Is the activation control signal present at J312B of the DC controller PCB? (J312B-6: 24 V, J312B-7: PREEXPOSE) YES: Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the pre-exposure lamp; if normal, replace the pre-exposure lamp. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
4-34 T
4.3 Reader Unit

4.3.1 The No. 1 mirror base fails to move.
1. Initial check Is the scanner motor driven? YES: Go to step 2. NO: Go to step 4. 2. Cable (displacement, broken), Drive belt (displaced, broken) Is the scanner drive cable or the drive belt normal? NO: Replace or correct the cable of the drive belt. 3. Scanner path (foreign matter) Move the scanner by hand. Does it move smoothly? NO: Remove the dirt/foreign matter from the scanner rail. Remove any object that comes into contact with the scanner. Use alcohol for cleaning; thereafter, apply a small amount of silicone oil (FY96010). If the inverter PCB is not positioned correctly, it can come into contact with the scanner. 4. Wiring, Connector Is the connection of the wiring and connectors from J401 of the reader controller PCB to the scanner motor correct? NO: Correct the wiring, and connect the connectors securely. 5. Scanner motor (M400), Reader controller PCB Is the drive signal present at J401 of the reader controller PCB? (J401-5/6: +24 V, J401-1/2/3/4: drive pulse) YES: Replace the scanner motor. NO: Replace the reader controller PCB.
4-35 T
4.3.2 The scanning lamp fails to go ON.

1. Wiring, Connector Is the connection of the wiring and the connectors between the inverter PCB (J4061) and the lamp correct? NO: Correct the wring, and connect the connectors securely. 2. Inverter PCB Is E220 indicated? YES: Replace the inverter PCB. 3. Scanning lamp, Reader controller PCB Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISCR>SCANLAMP. Is the activation control signal present at J402 of the reader controller PCB? (J402-2: LMP_ON, J402-3: GND, J402-4: +24 VU) YES: The scanning lamp is faulty. Replace the lamp. NO: The reader controller PCB is faulty. Replace the PCB.
4-36 T
4.4 Message Indication

4.4.1 The Add Toner message fails to go OFF.
1. Toner sensor (S1), DC controller PCB After toner supply, is 0 (absence of toner) indicated in the following service mode: bit 0 of COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>P008? YES: The toner sensor is faulty. Replace the sensor. NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB.
4.4.2 The Control Card Set message fails to go OFF (when no card reader is installed).
1. Shorting connector When the main controller is replaced, the shorting connector must be removed from the old PCB and mounted to the new PCB. Is the shorting connector fitted to the connector J1060 of the main control card? NO: Fit the shorting connector. YES: The main controller PCB is faulty. Replace the PCB.
4.4.3 The Add Paper message fails to go OFF.

1. Cassette pickup assembly Is the lifter mechanism of the cassette normal? NO: See The lifter fails to move up (pickup from cassette). 2. Cassette 1/2 paper sensor detecting lever Are the shape, mounting, and operation of the paper sensor lever normal? NO: Correct or replace the sensor. 3. Pickup PCB, DC controller PCB When paper is placed in the cassette, is the paper detection signal present at J302A of the DC controller PCB? (cassette 1: J302-A10 (from 0 to 5 V), cassette 2: J302-A11 (from 0 to 5 V)) NO: The paper sensor or the pickup PCB is faulty. Replace the PCB. YES: The DC controller PCB is faulty. Replace the PCB.
4-37 T
4.4.4 The Close the Front Cover message fails to go OFF.

1. Connectors Is the wiring between the PCBs secure? [1] between composite power supply PCB (J136A) and DC controller PCB (J301A) (24V detection signal: between J136A-3 and J301A-10) [2] between composite power supply PCB (J135) and main power supply PCB (J202) (J135-1: 24VU1-SW, J135-2: 0VU1, J202-5: 24VU1-SW, J202-6: 0VU1) NO: Make the wiring secure. 2. Front cover switch Is there electrical continuity in the front cover switch when the front cover is closed? (check the interval between J200-1 and J200-3 on the main power supply PCB for electrical continuity.) NO: Replace the front cover switch. 3. Main power supply PCB Is 24 V supplied by the main power supply PCB to the composite power supply PCB? Main power supply PCB (J202-5: 24VU1-SW, J202-6: 0VU1) Composite power supply PCB (J135-1: 24VU1-SW, J135-2: 0VU1) NO: Replace the main power supply PCB. 4. Composite power supply PCB, DC controller PCB When 24 V is supplied by the main power supply PCB to the composite power supply, is the front cover detection signal (FDOOR_OPN) sent by the composite power supply PCB to the DC controller PCB? Composite power supply PCB (J136A-3) DC controller PCB (J301A-10) YES: Replace the DC controller PCB. NO: Replace the composite power supply PCB.
4-38 T
4.5 Paper Deck

4.5.1 Pickup fails.
1. Right upper cover, Right lower cover Are the right upper cover and the right lower cover closed securely? NO: Close the covers. 2. Lifter When the compartment is slid out from the deck, does the lifter move down? Further, when the compartment is slid into the deck, does the lifter move up? NO: See The deck lifter fails to move up. 3. Deck pickup roller Does the deck pickup roller rotate? YES: If the roller is soiled, clean it with alcohol. If it is deformed because of wear, replace it. 4. Belt (displacement) Is the belt used to transmit drive to the deck pickup roller fitted correctly? NO: Fit the belt correctly. 5. Gear Is the drive from the deck main motor transmitted to the pickup assembly? NO: Check the drive assembly. 6. Deck pickup clutch (CL2), Deck drive PCB Measure the voltage of the connector (J5B) on the deck driver PCB. When the Start key is pressed, is the clutch drive signal generated? (J5-B3: FEED_CL_ON*, J5-B4: 24 V) YES: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the clutch. NO: Replace the deck driver PCB.
4-39 T
4.5.2 The deck lifter fails to move up.

1. Deck body Is the deck body mounted correctly? NO: Mount the deck body correctly. 2. Lifter cable Is the lifter cable fitted correctly? NO: Fit the cable correctly. 3. Spring, Lever Push up the deck pickup roller releasing lever with your finger. Does the pickup roller move down? NO: Remove the pickup assembly, and check the spring and the lever. 4. Deck lifter motor (M2D) Does the deck lifter motor rotate? YES: Go to step 6. 5. Deck open detecting switch (SW1D), Deck drive PCB Does the voltage between J7-1 (+ : 24V OUT) and J7-3 (GND : 24V IN) of the deck driver PCB change from about 0 to 24 V? YES: Check the wiring to the switch; if normal, replace the switch. NO: Replace the deck driver PCB. 6. Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW2D), deck driver PCB Does the voltage between J4-7 (+ : LIFT_LOW_LMT) and J4-8 (GND) of the deck driver PCB change from about 0 to 5 V? YES: Check the lever and the wiring; if normal, replaced the switch. NO: Replace the deck driver PCB.
4-40 T
5 Troubleshooting Feeding Faults

5.1 Paper Jams
The jams that can occur inside the machine are grouped according to location: [1] [2] [3] [4] Pickup assembly Separation/feeding assembly Fixing/delivery assembly, duplex reversing assembly Duplex/feeding assembly
The descriptions that follow are also grouped according to the locations of jams; the location and the nature of a specific jam may be checked in the machines service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM).
[2] [3]
[4]
[1]
F04-501-01
4-41 T
5.1.1 Pickup Assembly

1. General condition Do the pickup roller and the feeding roller of the selected cassette, manual feeder tray, and deck rotate during printing? NO: See the descriptions for each (i.e., fails to operate). 2. Cassette Is the cassette fitted correctly? Is the dial set correctly? NO: Correct the cassette and the dial. 3. Cassette Try a different cassette. Is the problem corrected? YES: Check the faulty cassette. 4. Paper (moist) Is the paper curled or wavy or in any way different? YES: Replace the paper. Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper. 5. Paper (non-recommended) Try paper of a recommended type. Is the problem corrected? YES: Advise the user to use recommended paper. 6. Paper guide plate Is the paper guide plate deformed? Or, is there a piece of paper on it? YES: Correct the deformation, and remove any piece of paper. 7. Main motor (M1), Vertical path clutch (CL1) Does the main motor rotate? YES: Check the roller and the vertical path clutch of the vertical path assembly. NO: Replace the main motor.
4-42 T
5.1.2 Separation/Feeding Assembly

1. Paper Try paper of a recommended type. Is the problem corrected? YES: Advise the user to use recommended paper. 2. Separation static eliminator Is the separation static eliminator fully inserted? NO: Insert it fully. 3. Pre-registration paper sensor lever, Registration paper sensor lever Does the sensor lever in question move smoothly? NO: Corrected it so that the lever moves correctly. 4. Pr-registration paper sensor (PS9), Registration paper sensor (PS10) Find out the sensor detecting the jam in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM). Is there paper over the sensor? NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the sensor. 5. Registration roller, Feeding unit (transfer charging roller) Does the registration roller rotate? NO: Check the registration motor (M9). YES: Check to make sure that the feeder unit is securely locked in place; if a fault is found, check the transfer charging roller assembly or the feeder locking assembly.
5.1.3 Fixing/Delivery Assembly, Duplex Reversing Assembly

1. Fixing film Is the fixing film deformed, damaged, or subjected to foreign matter? YES: 1. For deformation or foreign matter, replace the film unit. 2. Remove foreign matter. 2. Fixing inlet guide plate Is the fixing inlet guide plate soiled with toner or the like? YES: Clean the guide. 3. Fixing/ feed sensor lever, No. 1 delivery paper sensor lever Does the lever of the sensor in question move smoothly? NO: Correct the lever so that it moves smoothly.
4-43 T
4. Fixing/feed sensor (PS13), No. 1 delivery sensor (PS15) Find the sensor that detected the jam in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM). Is there paper over the sensor? NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the sensor. 5. Delivery flapper (movement) Doe the delivery flapper move smoothly? Further, does it move back to its initial position by the work of the spring? NO: Correct the mechanism so that the delivery flapper moves smoothly. 6. Delivery flapper Is the delivery flapper deformed or scratched ? YES: Replace the flapper. NO: Check the leading edge of the paper to see if there is a margin.
5.1.4 Duplex Feeding Assembly

1. Paper guide plate Is there foreign matter around the paper guide? Or, is it deformed? YES: Remove the foreign matter, and correct the deformation. 2. Duplex inlet paper sensor lever, Duplex output paper sensor lever Does the lever of the sensor in question move smoothly? NO: Correct the mechanisms so that the lever moves smoothly. 3. Duplex inlet paper sensor (PS17), Duplex outlet paper sensor (PS18) Find the sensor that detected the jam in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM). Is the paper over the sensor? NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the sensor. 4. Duplex motor (M6), roller (duplex assembly) Select 4 in the following service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>PARTCHK. When the OK key is pressed, does the duplex motor rotate? YES: Check the roller of the duplex assembly. NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the motor.
4-44 T
5.2 Faulty Feeding

5.2.1 Double Feeding
1. Pickup/feeding/separation roller releasing lever, Separation roller When the releasing lever is pushed in toward the rear, is the pickup roller released? Further, do the feeding roller and the separation roller come into firm contact? NO: The releasing lever (spring) is displaced or deformed. Correct or replace it. YES: Check the separation roller for deformation and wear. If a fault is found, replace the separation roller.
5.2.2 Wrinkles
1. Pickup assembly Turn off the power supply while paper is moving through the feeding assembly. At this time, is the paper wrinkled? Or, is it moving askew? YES: [1] Check the pickup assembly. [2] Check the guide in front of the registration roller. [3] Check the registration roller. 2. Paper (moist) Try new paper. Is the problem corrected? YES: The paper may be moist. Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper. 3. Paper (non-recommended type) Try paper of a recommended type. Is the problem corrected? YES: Advise the user to use paper of a recommended type. 4. Paper guide, fixing inlet drive solenoid (SL1) Is the paper guide coated with toner or foreign matter? YES: Clean the paper guide with solvent. 5. Fixing assembly, delivery feeding assembly Is the fixing film, fixing lower roller, or cleaning roller faulty? YES: Clean or replace it. NO: Check the delivery feeding assembly for a fault.
4-45 T
6 Outline of Electrical Components

6.1 Introduction
The electrical components of the machine and its accessories are arranged as shown herein, and they possess the functions discussed; the notations and the I/O addresses used are based on those in the general circuit diagrams, enabling reference to the general circuit diagrams for wiring and signal descriptions. (For the general circuit diagrams, see the Appendix.)
6.1.1 Guide to the List

The following notations are used to indicate the targets of connections: DC-CON: DC controller PCB R-CON: reader controller PCB MN-CON: main controller PCB FEED: pickup circuit PCB MPWS: main power supply PCB DECK-CON: side deck driver PCB DECK-FEED: 2-Cassette Pedestal Pickup PCB FAX-CON: G3 FAX control PCB
4-46 T
6.1.2 Checking the Photointerrupters

The photointerrupters are checked in service mode; go through the tables attached to the lists of electrical components to find out the state* of a specific sensor, which may be any of the following: a. Paper Sensor Move the sensor lever by hand to simulate the presence of paper; then, check the Service Mode screen. If it is difficult to check the Service Mode screen while moving the sensor lever, put paper over the point of detection, and then check the Service Mode screen. b. Open/Closed Sensor Check the Service Mode screen while opening/closing the cover/unit in question. c. Position Sensor, Presence/Absence Sensor Move the unit in question by hand. Try removing and then mounting it. If the I/O level changes in response to operation, the sensor may be assumed to be normal. To check a photointerrupter found inside a unit which is detached in conjunction with a drawer connector, be sure to check the Service Mode while the unit in question is set. *The state of a sensor refers to any of the following: For a paper sensor, the presence or the absence of paper. For an open/closed sensor, the state in which the cover/unit is closed. For a home position sensor or a set sensor, the item in question is in home position or set in place.
4-47 T
6.2 E201 (reader unit/printer unit)

6.2.1 Clutches 6.2.2 Solenoids, Switches
SW3 CL3 SL5 SL6 CL1 SL1 CL2 SW2 SW1
F04-602-01
4-48 T
6.2.1 Clutches
Reader Unit The reader unit does not have nay clutch. Printer Unit
Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-20-N P001-5 0: ON, 1: OFF A3-18-N P001-6 0: ON, 1: OFF A3-20-J P001-7 0: ON, 1: OFF Remarks
Electrical signal (target) Name CL1 (DC-CON) Vertical path clutch CL2 (DC-CON) Multifeeder clutch CL3 (DC-CON) Developing clutch
6.2.2 Solenoids, Switches

Reader Unit The reader unit does not have any solenoid or switch. Printer Unit
Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-20-N P002-0 1: ON, 0: OFF A3-20-J P002-3 1: ON, 0: OFF A3-20-J A3-12-B A3-12-B A3-14-B P008-7 0: open, 1: closed P002-4 1: ON, 0: OFF Remarks
Electrical signal (target) Name SL1 (DC-CON) Pickup DOWN solenoid SL5 (DC-CON) Multifeeder holding plate releasing solenoid SL6 (DC-CON) Charging roller solenoid SW1 (MPWS) Main power switch SW2 (MPWS) Environment heater switch SW3 (MPWS) Front cover switch
4-49 T
6.2.3 Motors (1/2)
M400
M9 M5 M1
M10 M3
M2 M6 M4
F04-602-02
4-50 T
6.2.3 Motors (1/2)

Reader Unit
Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-18-G IO-P01-0 IO-P01-1 0: CW IO-P01-2 0: drive enabled IO-P01-4 10: return to origin IO-P01-5, 6 Default IO-P04-6 Analog IO-P06-0 0: new current mode Remarks Electrical signal (target) Name M400 (R-CON) Scanner motor
Clock signal
Printer Unit (1/2)

Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-20-I P001-0 0: ON, 1: OFF P008-3 0: lock A3-20-N P003-0 to 3 A3-17-N P003-4 to 7 Remarks
Electrical signal (target) Name M1 (DC-CON) Main motor
M2 (FEED) Pickup motor M3 (DC-CON) Horizontal registration sensor shift motor M4 (DC-CON) Fixing motor
A3-15-J
M5 (DC-CON) Delivery motor
A3-9-N
P001-3 0: ON, 1: OFF P001-4 1: ON, 0: OFF P008-5 0: lock P010-0 to 8
4-51 T
6.2.3 Motors (2/2)
M400
M9 M5 M1
M10 M3
M2 M6 M4
F04-602-02
4-52 T
6.2.3 Motors (2/2)

Printer Unit (2/2)
Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-8-N P005-0 to 7 A3-14-M P002-5 1: OFF, 0: ON P020-6, 7 P001-2 0: lock P008-3 0: lock Remarks Electrical signal (target) Name M6 (DC-CON) Duplex motor M9 (DC-CON) Registration motor
M10 (DC-CON) Laser scanner motor
A3-14-J
4-53 T
6.2.4 Fans
FM3
FM1
FM2
FM4 FM5
F04-602-03
4-54 T
6.2.4 Fans
Reader Unit
The reader unit does not have any fan.
Printer Unit
Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-18-N P004-0, 2 1: ON, 0: OFF P009-4 0: ON A3-18-J P004-1, 3 1: ON, 0: OFF P009-5 0: ON A3-2-H A3-7-I P005-6 1: ON, 0: OFF P009-6 0: ON P005-7 1: ON, 0: OFF P009-7 0: ON Remarks
Electrical signal (target) Name FM1 (DC-CON) Developing fan
FM2 (DC-CON) Fixing fan
FM3 (MN-CON) Electrical unit fan FM4 (DC-CON) Curl reducing fan 1
FM5 (DC-CON) Curl reducing fan 2
A3-7-I
4-55 T
6.2.5 Sensors (1/3)
PS400 PS401
SD1
S3 VR1
PS16 PS15 PS26 PS13 PS17
PS9 PS1-6 PS7 PS8 PS12
PS10
PS23 PS22 PS11
BD S1 PS18
S2
S4 S5
F04-602-04
4-56 T
6.2.5 Sensors (1/3)

Reader Unit
Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-18-H IO-P06-4 1: HP A3-17-H IO-P06-6 0: open, 1: closed A3-19-H IO-P03-5 0: present, 1: absent IO-P04-4 0: ON, 1: OFF Remarks Electrical signal (target) Name PS400 (R-CON) Scanner home position sensor PS401 (R-CON) Copyboard cover sensor SD1 (R-CON) Original sensor
(copyboard/ADF) (paper)
Printer Unit (1/3)

Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-13-K A3-19-N A3-19-M A3-20-M P013-5 0: present, 1: absent P014-5 0: present, 1: absent P013-6 Remarks
Electrical signal (target) Name BD (DC-CON) BD sensor PS1 (DC-CON) Cassette 1 paper sensor PS2 (DC-CON) Cassette 2 paper sensor PS3 (DC-CON) Cassette 1 paper level sensor 1 PS4 (DC-CON) Cassette 1 paper level sensor 2 PS5 (DC-CON) Cassette 2 paper level sensor 1 PS6 (DC-CON) Cassette 2 paper level sensor 2 PS7 (DC-CON) Cassette 1 re-try paper sensor
(paper) (paper) (paper) 25% (bit6=0; bit7=1) 50% (bit6=1; bit7=1) 100% (bit6=0; bit7=0)
A3-20-M
P013-7
A3-20-M
P014-6 (paper) 25% (bit6=0; bit7=1) 50% (bit6=1; bit7=1) 100% (bit6=0; bit7=0)
A3-20-M
P014-7
A3-20-M
P015-0 1: present, 0: absent
(paper)
4-57 T
6.2.5 Sensors (2/3)
PS400 PS401
SD1
S3 VR1
PS10
PS23 PS22 PS11
BD S1 PS18
S2
S4 S5
F04-602-04
4-58 T
6.2.5 Sensors (2/3)

Printer Unit (2/3)
Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-20-M P015-1 1: present, 0: absent A3-16-N P015-2 1: present, 0: absent A3-16-N P015-3 1: present, 0: absent A3-16-N P015-4 0: present,1: absent A3-16-I A3-8-J A3-8-N A3-9-N A3-7-N A3-7-N A3-15-N A3-15-N A3-8-J A3-18-N A3-6-I A3-17-N P025-7 1: present, 0: absent P015-5 0: present,1: absent P015-6 1: present, 0: absent P015-7 1: present, 0: absent P016-0 0: present,1: absent P016-1 0: present,1: absent P016-5 0: present,1: absent P016-6 1: open, 0: closed P021-0 P008-0 1: present, 0: absent P008-2 1: full P023-4, P33 A/D P023-5, P34 A/D Remarks Electrical signal (target) Name PS8 (DC-CON) Cassette 2 re-try paper sensor PS9 (DC-CON) Pre-registration paper sensor PS10 (DC-CON) Registration paper sensor PS11 (DC-CON) Horizontal registration paper sensor PS12 (DC-CON) Image leading edge sensor PS13 (DC-CON) Fixing/feeding sensor PS15 (DC-CON) No. 1 delivery sensor PS16 (DC-CON) No. 1 delivery full sensor PS17 (DC-CON) Duplex unit inlet paper sensor PS18 (DC-CON) Duplex unit outlet paper sensor PS22 (DC-CON) Multifeeder paper sensor PS23 (DC-CON) Right cover open/closed sensor PS26 (DC-CON) Fixing film sensor S1 (DC-CON) Toner sensor S2 (DC-CON) Waste toner case full sensor S3 (DC-CON) Environment sensor
(paper) (paper) (paper) (paper)
(paper) (paper) (paper) (paper) (paper) (paper) (paper)
(toner) (waste toner) (humidity) (room temperature)
4-59 T
6.2.5 Sensors (3/3)
PS400 PS401
SD1
S3 VR1
PS10
PS23 PS22 PS11
BD S1 PS18
S2
S4 S5
F04-602-04
4-60 T
6.2.5 Sensors (3/3)

Electrical signal (target) Name S4 (DC-CON) Cassette 1 size sensor S5 (DC-CON) Cassette 2 size sensor VR1 (DC-CON) Multifeeder paper width sensor Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-17-J P013-0 to 4 A3-16-J A3-18-M P014-0 to 4 P023-2, P31 A/D Remarks
4-61 T
6.2.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others
H5 LAMP1 H4 PLG1 LAMP2 CB1
H1,H2, TP1, TH1,TH2
H3
F04-602-05
4-62 T
6.2.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others

Reader Unit
Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-9-A A3-9-A A3-17-H Remarks Standard with 100V model (accessory for 200V model) Standard with 100V model (accessory for 200V model) Electrical signal (target) Name H4 (MPWS) Mirror heater H5 (MPWS) Lens heater LAMP1 (R-CON) Scanning lanp
Printer Unit
Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-14-A A3-9-C A3-9-B A3-9-B A3-14-J A3-14-A A3-12-J A3-12-J A3-9-B P023-0, P29 A/D P023-1, P30 A/D P001-1 1: ON, 0: OFF (accessory) Remarks
Electrical signal (target) Name CB1 (MPWS) Leakage breaker H1 (MPWS) Fixing main heater H2 (MPWS) Fixing sub heater H3 (MPWS) Cassette heater LAMP2 (DC-CON) Pre-exposure lamp PLG1 (DC-CON) Power supply cord TH1 (MPWS) Main thermistor TH2 (DC-CON) Sub thermistor TP1 (DC-CON) Thermal switch
4-63 T
6.2.7 PCBs
[14] [10] [12] [10] [4] [6] [9] [8] [7] [5] [11] [2] [1] [10] [3] [9]
[13]
F04-602-06
4-64 T
6.2.7 PCBs
Reader Unit
Description Controls the reader unit/ADF. Drives the CCD. Controls the scanning lamp. Remarks Ref. Name [12] Reader controller PCB [13] CCD PCB [14] Inverter PCB
Printer Unit
Description Controls the generation of high voltage. Controls the supply of DC . power Controls the main power switch/heater. Controls the printer unit. Controls the pickup assembly. Controls laser drive. Controls the supply of power to the finisher/paper deck. Detects temperature of the drum. Controls keys and LEDs. Controls digital image processing/system. Controls the DC-DC converter. Includes counter PCB, soft IDPCB, Centronics PCB. 200V model only. Remarks
Ref. Name [1] Composite power supply PCB [2] Main power supply PCB [3] Switch PCB [4] DC controller PCB [5] Pickup PCB [6] Laser driver PCB [7] Accessories power supply PCB [8] Drum sensor PCB [9] Control panel PCB [10] Main controller PCB [11] Thermistor separation power supply PCB
4-65 T
6.3 Side Paper Deck-L1

6.3.1 Clutches 6.3.2 Solenoids, and Switches 6.3.3 Motors
SW1D
SW100D
SW2D
SL1D CL2D CL1D M1D
LED100D
SL2D M2D
F04-603-01 4-66 T
6.3.1 Clutches
Electrical signal (target) Name CL1D (DECK-CON) Deck feeding clutch CL2D (DECK-CON) Deck pickup clutch Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A5-9-A 0: ON, 1: OFF A5-8-A 0: ON, 1: OFF Remarks
6.3.2 Solenoids and Switches

Electrical signal (target) Name SL1D (DECK-CON) Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid SL2D (DECK-CON) Deck open solenoid SW1D (DECK-CON) Deck open detecting switch SW2D (DECK-CON) Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW100D (DECK-CON) Deck open switch LED100D (DECK-CON) Deck open indication Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A5-10-A 0: ON, 1: OFF A5-4-B 0: ON, 1: OFF A5-3-H A5-5-B Remarks
A5-13-A A5-13-A
6.3.3 Motors
Electrical signal (target) Name M1D (DECK-CON) Deck main motor M2D (DECK-CON) Deck lifter motor Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A5-5-H A5-5-B Remarks
4-67 T
6.3.4 Sensors 6.3.5 PCBs
PS8D PS9D PS1D PS7D
PS4D PS2D PS3D PS6D
PS5D
[1]
F04-603-02
4-68 T
6.3.4 Sensors
Electrical signal (target) Name PS1D (DECK-CON) Deck pickup sensor PS2D (DECK-CON) Deck paper absent sensor PS3D (DECK-CON) Deck lifter upper limit sensor PS4D (DECK-CON) Deck lifter position sensor PS5D (DECK-CON) Deck set sensor PS6D (DECK-CON) Deck feed sensor PS7D (DECK-CON) Deck paper level sensor PS8D (DECK-CON) Deck paper supply position sensor PS9D (DECK-CON) Deck open sensor Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A5-8-A A5-12-A A5-11-A A5-11-A A5-3-C A5-10-A A5-6-C A5-7-C Remarks
A5-3-C
6.3.5 PCBs
Ref. Name [1] Side deck driver PCB Description Remarks
4-69 T
6.4 2-Cassette Feeding Unit-W1

6.4.1 Clutches 6.4.2 Solenoids and Switches 6.4.3 Motors
SL1C
S1C S2C
CL1C M1C M2C
F04-604-01 4-70 T
6.4.1 Clutches
Electrical signal (target) Name CL1C (PEDE-FEED) Vertical path roller clutch Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A6-11-F 0: ON, 1: OFF Remarks
6.4.2 Solenoids and Switches

Electrical signal (target) Name SL1C (PEDE-FEED) Pickup roller DOWN solenoid S1C (PEDE-CON) Cassette 3 size detecting switch S2C (PEDE-CON) Cassette 4 size detecting switch Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A6-11-F 0: ON, 1: OFF A6-7-A A6-6-A Remarks
6.4.3 Motors
Electrical signal (target) Name M1C (PEDE-CON) Pedestal main motor M2C (PEDE-FEED) Cassette pickup motor Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A6-2-E A6-11-G Remarks
4-71 T
6.4.4 Sensors 6.4.5 PCBs
Q1603~1609
PS1C PS2C PS3C
[2] [1]
F04-604-02
4-72 T
6.4.4 Sensors
Electrical signal (target) Name PS1C (PEDE-CON) Right cover open/closed sensor PS2C (PEDE-FEED) Cassette 3 re-try paper sensor PS3C (PEDE-FEED) Cassette 4 re-try paper sensor Q1603 (PEDE-CON) Vertical path paper sensor Q1604 (PEDE-FEED) Cassette 3 paper sensor Q1605 (PEDE-CON) Cassette 4 paper sensor Q1606 (PEDE-CON) Cassette 3 paper level sensor 0 Q1607 (PEDE-CON) Cassette 3 paper level sensor 1 Q1608 (PEDE-CON) Cassette 4 paper level sensor 0 Q1609 (PEDE-CON) Cassette 4 paper level sensor 1 Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A6-6-H A6-11-D A6-11-C A6-9-E A6-12-E A6-9-E A6-9-E A6-9-E A6-9-E A6-9-E Remarks
6.4.5 PCBs
Ref. Name [1] 2-cassette pedestal pickup PCB [2] Pedestal controller PCB Description Controls the pickup assembly. Controls the paper deck. Remarks
4-73 T
6.5 Inner 2-Way Tray-A1

6.5.1 Solenoids 6.5.2 Motors 6.5.3 Sensor
M8B
PS20B PS24B PS19B M7B PS21B
SL3B
F04-605-01
4-74 T
6.5.1 Solenoids
Electrical signal (target) Name SL3B (DC-CON) 2-way delivery solenoid Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A7-2-K 0: ON, 1: OFF Remarks
6.5.2 motors
Electrical signal (target) Name M7B (DC-CON) 2-way delivery inlet motor M8B (DC-CON) 2-way deliver outlet motorr Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A7-10-H P011-0 to 7 A7-6-H P004-4 to 8 P006-7 1: 70%, 0: 100% Remarks
6.5.3 Sensors
Electrical signal (target) Name PS19B (DC-CON) No. 2 delivery sensor PS20B (DC-CON) No. 2 delivery full sensor PS21B (DC-CON) No. 3 delivery sensor PS24B (DC-CON) 2-way delivery open/closed sensor Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A7-3-G P016-2 1: present, 0: absent A7-8-G P016-3 1: present, 0: absent A7-8-G P016-4 1: present, 0: absent A7-4-G P016-7 1: open, 0: closed Remarks
(paper) (paper) (paper)
4-75 T
6.6 Super G3 FAX Board-J1

6.6.1 Others 6.6.2 PCBs
[3]
[4]
[1] [2] [5] SP1
F04-606-01
4-76 T
6.6.1 Others
Electrical signal (target) Name SP1 (FAX-CON) Speaker Reference to general I/O address circuit diagram I/O indication A3-1-E Remarks
6.6.2 PCBs
Ref. Name [1] G3 FAX control PCB [2] NCU PCB [3] G3 modular PCB [4] DIMM [5] Pseudo CI PCB [6] Off-hook detection PCB Description Controls the fax system. Serves as an interface between telephone line and fax system. Connects a modular cable. Stores firmware for the fax system. Generates a pseudo CI signal. Detects off-hook state of the telephone 100V and 120V models use different interfaces. 100V and 120V models use different interfaces. 16M bit 100V 120V Remarks
4-77 T
6.7 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB
Of the variable resistors, light-emitting diodes, and switches used in the machine, those needed for service work in the field are discussed: 1. Some LEDs emit dim light when they are off because of leakage current; this is a normal condition, and must be kept in mind. 2. VRs that may be used in the field: VRs that must not be used in the field:
Do not touch those VRs and check pins not discussed herein; they are for exclusive use in the factory, and require high accuracy and special instruments.
4-78 T
6.7.1 Main Controller PCB

J1012 J1019 J1044 J1029 J1022 J1060 J1024 J1061 J1014
J1011
J1015
J1013 J1005 J1059 J1006
J1028
SW1002 J1020 J1058
J1010
J1027 J1001 J1003 J1004
F04-607-01 The DIP switch (SW1002) is designed for adjustments at the factory, and is not normally used in the field. <When Replacing the PCB> a. Transfer the following from the old to new PCB: shorting connector of J1060 BOOT ROM of J1010 SDRAM counter memory PCB b. Protect the back-up data as follows: 1) Back up all data using the Service Support Tool. 2) Replace the main controller. 3) While holding down the keys 2 and 8 of the control panel, turn on the main power (to start download mode). You will not be able to perform the following if you start up in the usual way, since the Box text file data and control data on the hard disk will be initialized. 4) Download all data using the Service Support Tool.
4-79 T
6.7.2 DC Controller PCB

J330 J333 J319 J331 J309 J304 J302
J301
J322
J315
J313
J308 J316
J300
J307
J310
J312 J314
J311
J320
J332
F04-607-02
6.7.3 Reader Controller PCB

J406 J405 J404 J403 J402 J401
J407
J408
J400
J413
J410
J409
J412
F04-607-03
4-80 T
6.7.4 Composite Power Supply PCB
[1]
When replacing the PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label [1] in service mode. F04-607-04
6.7.5 Fixing Film Sensor PCB

J3146
VR1
F04-607-05
4-81 T
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE
1 Outline of Service Mode

1.1 Outline
The service mode screens are organized in three levels: Initial screen, Level 1/Level 2 Item screen, Level 3 Item screen.
User screen
)(2,8)(
Reset key
Initial screen Reset key
Select an item. Level 1/Level 2 Item screen From Level 1/Level 2 item screen Select a Level 1 item from the top of the screen. Select a Level 2 item from the list.
Level 3 Item screen
Level 3 Item screen
Level 3 Item screen
Level 3 Item screen
Previous/Next page
Previous/Next page Previous/Next screen
F05-101-01
5-1 T
The machines service mode consists of the following seven types:

COPIER FEEDER SORTER FAX BOARD ADJUST FUNCTION OPTION TEST COUNTER adjustment mode operation/check mode settings mode test print mode counter mode DISPLAY I/O control display mode I/O display mode
F05-101-02
1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections

1) Press the User Mode key . 2) Press 2 and 8 on the keypad at the same time. 3) Press the User Mode key on the control panel. In response, the following Initial screen will appear:
Copier service mode COPIER ADF service mode if installed. Finisher service mode if installed. FEEDER
SORTER
Fax board service mode if installed. Accessories board service mode if installed.
FAX FAX BOARD
F05-102-01 5-2 T
1.3 Ending Service Mode

Press the Reset key once to return to the Service Mode Initial screen (F05-101-03). Press the Reset key twice to end service mode and return to the User screen (standard). If you have used service mode (ADJUST, FUNCTION, OPTION), be sure to turn off and then on the main power switch after ending service mode.
1.4 Backing Up Service Mode

At the factory, each machine is adjusted, and its adjustment settings are recorded on the service label [1] (inside the service book case behind the front cover). If you have cleared the RAM and replaed the PCB, the settings under ADJUST and OPTION will all return to the factory settings. Be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label. You can print out the settings stored in the machine in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. In addition, you can obtain a new service label using service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>LBL-PRINT.
[1]
F05-104-01
5-3 T
1.5 Using Service Mode

1.5.1 Initial Screen
COPIER Initial settings Touch an item to select. (FEEDER, SORTER, FAX, and BOARD are indicated only when installed.) FEEDER
SORTER
FAX FAX BOARD
F05-105-01
1.5.2 Level 1/Level 2 Item Screen
Level 1 items Touch an item to select.
Display
I/O
Adjust Function Option
Test
Counter
VERSION USER ACC-STS ANALOG CST-STS SENSOR MISC ALARM-2 JAM ERR HV-STS
Level 2 items Touch an item to select.
F05-105-02
5-4 T
1.5.3 Level 3 Item Screen

page number Display I/O Adjust Function Option
< 1/
Level 2 item
Test
Counter
< VERSION >
2>
< READY>
Level 3 item
DC-CON R-CON PANEL FEEDER SORTER NIB PS/PCL LIPS
01.10 01.01 00.02 FF.D9 --.-01.00 30.05 --.--
READY:
To previous page
To next page
ready to accept a service/copy job. JAM: paper jam present. SERVICE: service mode under way. WAITING: initial rotation under way. cover open. DOOR: COPYING: copying under way. error present. ERROR: NO-TONER: toner absent. WTNR-FUL: waste toner case full. NO-OIL: fixing oil absent. NO-PAPER: paper absent. non-copying operation ACTIVE: under way.
F05-105-03
Display I/O Adjust Function Option
< 1/
Test
Counter
< ADJ-XY >
1>
< READY>
ADJ-X
XXXXX
(yyyyy) {aaaaa-bbbbb}
Press an item to highlight and select.
ADJ-X
Before
Input value
Range of input values
+/-
OK
Use to switch between + and -. Stop Clear Start
Use to accept the input setting.
key: use to stop various operations. key: use to clear the selected setting. key: use to make a copy with ending service mode.
F05-105-04
5-5 T
2 DISPLAY Control Display Mode

2.1 COPIER
The following screen will appear in response to COPIER>DISPLAY; the respective item follows:
Display
I/O
Test
Counter
VERSION USER ACC-STS ANALOG CST-STS JAM ERR HV-STS ALARM-2 SENSOR
F05-201-01
5-6 T
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
<VERSION>
Indicates the version of the machine and the version f the ROM on the accessories PCB. Indication: <xx,yy> Where, xx: version number, yy: R&D control number
DC-CON
Indicates the version of the ROM on the DC controller PCB.
R-CON
Indicates the version of the ROM on the reader controller PCB.
PANEL
Indicates the version of the or on the control panel CPU PCB.
FEEDER
Indicates the version of the ROM on the ADF controller PCB.
SORTER
Indicates the version of the ROM on the finisher controller PCB.
NIB
Indicates the version of the network software.
PS/PCL
Indicates the version of the printer board (PS/PCL).
LIPS
Indicates the version of the printer board (LIPS).
MN-CONT
Indicates the version of the software of the main controller PCB.
BOOT-ROM
Indicates the version of the BOOT ROM of the main controller. Indication: for copier model, xx.yyC; for PSPCL model; xx.yyP; for PCL model, xx.yyL
DIAG-DVC
Indicates the version for the remote diagnostic device.
RUI
Indicates the version of the RUI.
5-7 T
PUNCH
Indicates the version of the software of the punch unit.
LANG-EN
Indicates the version of the English file.
LANG-FR
Indicates the version of the French file.
LANG-DE
Indicates the version of the German file.
LANG-IT
Indicates the version of the Italian file.
LANG-JP
Indicates the version of the Japanese file.
LANG-CS
Indicates the version of the Czech file.
LANG-DA
Indicates the version of the Danish file.
LANG-EL
Indicates the version of the Greek file.
LANG-ES
Indicates the version of the Spanish file.
LANG-ET
Indicates the version of the Estonian file.
LANG-FI
Indicates the version of the Finnish file.
LANG-HU
Indicates the version of the Hungarian file.
LANG-KO
Indicates the version of the Koran file.
LANG-NL
Indicates the version of the Dutch file.
5-8 T
LANG-NO
Indicates the version of the Norwegian file.
LANG-PL
Indicates the version of the Polish file.
LANG-PT
Indicates the version of the Portuguese file.
LANG-RU
Indicates the version of the Russian file.
LANG-SL
Indicates the version of the Slovenian file.
LANG-SV
Indicates the version of the Swedish file.
LANG-TW
Indicates the version of the Chinese file (traditional).
LANG-ZH
Indicates the version of the Chinese file (simplified).
5-9 T
COPIER>DISPLAY>USER
<USER>
Indicates items related to the User screen and the user.
LANGUAGE
Indicates the language/paper size configuration used. Indication <LANGUAGE xxyy.zz.aa> Where, xx (higher 2 characters): country code (See JIS.) yy (lower 2 chargers): language code (See ISO639.) zz: destination code (00: Canon, 01: OEM, 02: common (all)) aa: paper size configuration code (00: AB, 01: Inch, 02: A, 03: all sizes)
MODEL
Indicates the model (0: iR2200, 1: iR2800, 2: iR3300). COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS
<ACC-STS>
Indicates the connection of accessories.
FEEDER
Indicates the connection of an ADF. (0: absent, 1: present)
SORTER
Indicates the connection of a finisher and a puncher nit. Indication: XY Where, X=0: absent, 1: finisher, 2: saddle finisher Y=0: puncher unit absent; 1: 2-hole, 2: 2-/3-hole, 3: 4-hole (FRN), 4: 4hole (SWDN)
DECK
Indicates the connection of a paper deck (option). (0: absent, 1: present)
CARD
Indicates the connection of a card reader (option). (0: absent, 1: present)
DATA-CON
Indicates the connection of a remote diagnostic device. (0: absent, 1: copy data controller, 2: NE controller)
5-10 T
COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS
RAM
Indicates the size of memory mounted to the main controller. (64 MB, 128 MB)
NIB
Indicates the connection of a network board. (0: absent, 1: Ethernet board, 2: TokenRing, 3: both)
LIPS-RAM
Indicates the size of memory mounted on the LIPS board. (xx MB)
LIPS
Indicates the connection of a LIPS board. (0: absent, 1: present)
PS/PCL
Indicates the connection of a PS/PCL board. (0: absent, 1: PS/PCL, 2: PS kanji)
NETWARE
Indicates the installation of netware firmware. (0: absent, 1: installed) COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG
<ANALOG>
Indicates the readings of analog sensors.
TEMP
Indicates the machine inside temperature. (environment sensor; in C)
HUM
Indicates the machine inside humidity. (environment sensor; in % RH)
ABS-HUM
Indicates the machine inside humidity absolute value. (sensor: in g)
DR-TEMP
Indicates the temperature around the photosensitive drum. (drum sensor; in C)
FIX-C
Indicates the temperature of the fixing heater. (main thermistor; in C)
FIX-E
Indicates the temperature of the edge of the fixing heater. (sub thermistor; in C)
5-11 T
COPIER>DISPLAY>CTS-STS
<CST-STS>
Indicates the size of paper in the cassettes and the manual feeder.
WIDTH-MF
Indicates the width of paper in terms of paper size (manual feed).
5-12 T
COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM
<JAM>
Indicates jam data.
Display I/O
< ERR >

< 1/
Test
Counter
7>
FFff FFff FFff FFff FFff FFff FFff FFff
< READY >
AA AA AA AA AA AA AA AA
BBBB BBBB BBBB BBBB BBBB BBBB BBBB BBBB
CCCC CCCC CCCC CCCC CCCC CCCC CCCC CCCC
DDDD DDDD DDDD DDDD DDDD DDDD DDDD DDDD
EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE
G G G G G G G G
HHHHHH HHHHHH HHHHHH HHHHHH HHHHHH HHHHHH HHHHHH HHHHHH
IIIII IIIII IIIII IIIII IIIII IIIII IIIII IIIII
F05-201-02 COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM
Item AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E Description Indicates the order of jams (the higher the number, the older the jam). Indicates the date of occurrence. Indicates the time of occurrence. Indicates the time of recovery. Indicates the location of occurrence. Remarks 1 to 50 (50 max.) Month, day (2 characters each) 24-hr notation 24-hr notation 0: copier 1: feeder 2: finisher FF: type of jam (T05-201-01) ff: jam sensor (T05-201-02) For the feeder, see T05-201-04; for the finisher, see T05-20105, -06. See T05-201-03.
EFff
Indicates a jam code.
G HHHHHH IIIII
Indicates the source of paper. Indicates the soft counter of the source of paper. Indicates paper size.
5-13 T
COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM
FF: Types of Jams

Code 00xx 01xx 02xx 0Axx 0Bxx 9003 9011 10xx Type none delay jam stationary jam power-on stationary jam cover open jam logic jam (*1) logic jam (*2) finisher jam
G: Source of Paper
Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Source cassette 1 cassette 2 cassette 3 cassette 4 not used not used paper deck manual feed tray duplex unit
*1: standby jam from the Finisher-J1. *2: image request absent jam.
T05-201-03
T05-201-01
FFff: Sensor/Type (jams in feeder)

Code 0001 0002 Sensor/type registration sensor delay registration sensor stationary 0003 read sensor delay 0004 read sensor stationary 0005 delivery sensor delay 0006 delivery sensor stationary 0007 ADF open 0008 user ADF open 0009 ADF cover open 000A user cover open 000B initial stationary 000C pickup fault Sensor used PI6 PI6 PI6, PI7 PI7 PI7, PI8 PI8 PI1 PI1 PI9 PI9 PI6, PI7, PI8 -
ff: Jam Sensors

Code xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx06 xx07 xx08 xx09 xx0A xx11 xx12 xx13 xx14 xx15 xx21 xx22 xx33 xx34 xx35 xx36 xx37 xx39 Sensor registration paper sensor (PS10) multifeeder paper sensor (PS22) pre-registration paper sensor (PS9) vertical path paper sensor (Q1603) cassette 1 re-try sensor (PS7) cassette 2 re-try sensor (PS8) cassette 3 re-try sensor (PS2C) cassette 4 re-try sensor (PS3C) deck pickup sensor (PS1D) deck feed sensor (PS6D) image leading edge sensor (PS12) fixing/feed sensor (PS13) No. 1 delivery sensor (PS15) No. 2 delivery sensor (PS19B)/ relay delivery sensor (PS19Z) No. 3 delivery sensor (PS21B) duplex inlet paper sensor (PS17) duplex output paper sensor (PS18) front cover switch (SW3) right cover open/closed sensor (PS23) 2-way delivery open/closed sensor (PS24B)/ relay delivery open/closed sensor (PS24Z) right cover open/closed sensor (PS1C) deck set sensor (PS5D) finisher front cover sensor (S1)
T05-201-04
T05-201-02 5-14 T
COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM
FFff: Sensor/Type (jams in Saddle Finisher-G1)

Code 1006 1007 1008 1011 1012 1021 1022 Sensor/type stapler staple jam power-on jam cover open jam inlet sensor delay folding potion sensor delay inlet sensor stationary folding position sensor stationary Sensor used PI19 PI1, PI10 PI22, PI23, MS2 PI1 PI10 PI1 PI10
T05-201-05
FFff: Sensor/Type (jams in Finisher-J1)

Code 0003 0004 0006 0007 0081 0082 0114 Sensor/type inlet sensor delay inlet sensor stationary stapler staple jam power-on jam stack delivery stack return relay delivery sensor delay 0214 relay delivery sensor stationary 0B35 relay delivery cover open jam 0B39 front cover open jam Sensor used S2 S2 S17 S2 S8 S3 PS19Z PS19Z PS24Z S1
T05-201-06
5-15 T
COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR
<ERR>
Indicate error data.
Display I/O
< ERR>

<
Test
Counter
1/ 7 >
EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE
<
READY >
FFff FFff FFff FFff FFff FFff FFff FFff G G G G G G G G HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
AA AA AA AA AA AA AA AA
BBBB BBBB BBBB BBBB BBBB BBBB BBBB BBBB
CCCC CCCC CCCC CCCC CCCC CCCC CCCC CCCC
DDDD DDDD DDDD DDDD DDDD DDDD DDDD DDDD
F05-201-03
Item AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE EFff G Description Indicates the order of errors (the higher the number, the older the error). Indicates the date of occurrence. Indicates the time of occurrence. Indicates the time of recovery. Indicates an error code. Indicate a detail code. Indicates the location of occurrence. Remarks 1 to 50 (50 max.) Month, day (2 characters each) 24-hr notation 24-hr notation. See Chapter 6 Self Diagnosis. If none, 0000. 0: copier/main controller 1: feeder 2: finisher 3: CFF 4: reader 5: printer 6: PDL 7: fax
HH
not used
5-16 T
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS
<HV-STS>
Indicates the measurements taken of voltage/current.
PRIMARY
Indicates the level of current of primary charging in relation to photosensitive drum resistance detection control (APVC). Unit: A Reference: If 353 A or less, the drum unit can well be used. 353<485 A or less, the drum unit may be used without a problem. 485 A or more, the drum unit should be replaced.
TR
Indicates the mode selected for the level of current of transfer charging. 0: transfer constant voltage mode, 1: transfer constant voltage mode (mid), 2: transfer constant voltage mode (max.), 3: transfer constant voltage mode (min.)
BIAS
Indicates the developing bias DC level (in V)
TR-V
Indicates the voltage level in relation to transfer charging roller resistance detection control (ATVC). (in V) Reference: 1500 to 6000V: the transfer charging system is normal. 6001V or more: the transfer charging roller may have a locking fault. 1499V or less: leakage and a transfer charging roller fault are possibilities. COPIER>DISPLAY>SENSOR
<SENSOR>
Indicates the condition of sensors.
DOC-SZ
Indicates the size of the original detected by the original size sensor.
5-17 T
COPIER>DISPLAY>ALAM-2
<ALARM-2>
Indicates alarm data.
< 1/
Test
Counter
< ALARM-2 >
7>
< READY>
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEFFFF GGGG HHHHHHHH
F05-201-04
Item AA Description Indicates the order of alarms (the higher the number, the older the alarm). BBBB Indicates the date of occurrence. CCCC Indicates the time of occurrence. DDDD Indicates the time of return. EEFFFF Indicates the total counter reading at time of occurrence. GGGG Indicates the detail code. HHHHHHHH Indicates the total counter of occurrence. Remarks 1 to 50 Month/day (2 characters each) Hour/minute (24-hr notation) Hour/minute (24-hr notation) See the table below. R&D control code.
5-18 T
COPIER>DISPLAY>ALAM-2
EE (location code) 02 04 EE (location) scanner in reader unit pickup/feed system FFFF (description) 0002: Indicate of dirt on reading glass in stream reading mode (small-size) 0008: paper deck lifter fault 0011: cassette 1 re-try alarm 0012: cassette 2 re-try alarm 0013: cassette 3 re-try alarm 0014: cassette 4 re-try alarm 0018: paper deck re-try alarm 0001: staple absent 0001: stitch staple absent 0001: punch waste case full
61 62 65
stapler system of sorter/finisher saddle stitcher system puncher system of sorter/finisher
FEEDER>DISPLAY
2.2 FEEDER
FEEDSIZE
Indicates the size of the original detected by the ADF.
5-19 T
3 I/O, I/O Display mode

The fowling screen will appear in response to COPIER>I/O; discussions on items follow:
DC-CON R-CON FEEDER SORTER
Input/output port of DC controller PCB Input/output port of reader controller PCB
Input/output port of ADF controller PCB
Input/output port of finisher controller PCB
MN-CON
Input/output port of main controller PCB
F05-301-01 <Guide to the screen> P001 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx bit 0 bit 15 address
5-20 T
COPIER>I/O>DC-CON
3.1 DC-CON
Indicates the input/output ports of the DC controller PCBs. <DC-CON (1/7)>
Address bit P001 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P002 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation M1 LAMP2 M10 M4 M4 CL1 CL2 CL3 SL1 SL3Z SL5 SL6 M9 Description main motor drive signal pre-exposure lamp ON signal laser scanner motor dive signal fixing motor dive signal fixing motor low-speed drive signal vertical path clutch drive signal multifeeder clutch drive signal developing assembly clutch drive signal pickup DOWN solenoid drive signal relay delivery solenoid drive signal not used multifeeder holding plate releasing solenoid drive signal charging roller solenoid drive signal registration motor drive OFF signal not used not used pickup motor drive signal 1 pickup motor drive signal 2 pickup motor drive signal 3 pickup motor drive signal 4 horizontal registration sensor shift motor pulse signal A horizontal registration sensor shift motor pulse signal A* horizontal registration sensor shift motor pulse signal B horizontal registration sensor shift motor pulse signal B* developing fan (full speed ) signal fixing fan (full speed) signal developing fan (half speed) signal fixing fan (half speed signal) 2-way delivery outlet motor pulse signal IN1 relay delivery output motor pulse signal IN1 2-way delivery output motor pulse signal IN2 relay delivery outlet motor pulse signal IN2 2-way delivery outlet motor pulse signal IN3 relay delivery outlet motor pulse signal IN3 2-way delivery outlet motor pulse signal IN4 relay delivery outlet motor pulse signal IN4 Remarks 0: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: off, 0: excited
P003
P004
M2 M2 M2 M2 M3 M3 M3 M3 FM1 FM2 FM1 FM2 M8B M7Z M8B M7Z M8B M7Z M8B M7Z
1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON Inner 2-Way Tray-A1 relay delivery assembly Inner 2-Way Tray-A1 relay delivery assembly Inner 2-Way Tray-A1 relay delivery assembly Inner 2-way tray-A1 relay delivery assembly
5-21 T
COPIER>I/O>DC-CON <DC-CON (2/7)>

Address bit P005 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P006 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P007 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P008 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P009 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 FM4 FM5 Description duplex motor pulse signal IN1 duplex motor pulse signal IN2 duplex motor pulse signal IN3 duplex motor pulse signal IN4 duplex motor drive signal I0 duplex motor drive signal I1 curl reducing fan 1 drive signal curl reducing fan 2 drive signal primary DC charging motor signal primary charging ON signal static eliminator ON signal developing AC bias ON signal developing DC bias ON signal fixing bias ON signal heater relay ON signal 2-way delivery outlet motor pulse signal I0 transfer mode signal 0 transfer mode signal 1 transfer mode signal 2 transfer mode signal 3 transfer ON signal scanner output signal 4 scanner output signal 5 not used toner level detection signal not use waste toner case full detection signal main motor lock detection signal laser scanner motor lock detection signal fixing motor lock detection signal 24V detection signal front over open/close sensor signal factory mode signal 0 factory mode signal 1 factory mode signal 2 factory mode signal 3 developing fan rotation detection signal fixing fan rotation detection signal curl reducing fan 1 rotation detection signal curl reducing fan 2 rotation detection signal Remarks 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: 70%, 0: 100% 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: toner present 1: 0: 0: 0: 0: 1: 0: 0: 0: 0: full locked locked locked detected closed
M8B
S1 S2 M1 M10 M4 SW3
FM1 FM2 FM4 FM5
in in in in
rotation rotation rotation rotation
5-22 T

Address bit P010 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P011 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P012 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 Description delivery motor pulse signal A_D0 delivery motor pulse signal A_D1 delivery motor pulse signal A_D2 delivery motor pulse signal A_PHASE delivery motor pulse signal B_D0 delivery motor pulse signal B_D1 delivery motor pulse signal B_D2 delivery motor pulse signal B_PHASE delivery motor pulse signal I0 not used not used not used not used not used not used not used 2-way delivery inlet motor pulse signal A_D0 2-way delivery inlet motor pulse signal A_D1 2-way delivery inlet motor pulse signal A_D2 2-way delivery inlet motor pulse signal A_PHASE 2-way delivery inlet motor pulse signal A_D0 2-way delivery inlet motor pulse signal A_D1 2-way delivery inlet motor pulse signal A_D2 2-way delivery inlet motor pulse signal lA_PHASE 2-way delivery inlet motor pulse signal I0 not used not used not used not used not used not used not used laser output enable signal printer output prepare signal transmission ready signal scanner start signal optional output signal 0 optional output signal 1 optional output signal 2 optional output signal 3 Remarks -
M7B M7B M7B M7B M7B M7B M7B M7B M7B
0: enabled -
5-23 T

Address bit P013 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P014 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation S4 S4 S4 S4 S4 PS1 PS3 PS4 S5 S5 S5 S5 S5 PS2 PS5 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS9 PS10 PS11 PS13 PS15 PS16 PS17 PS18 PS19B PS20B PS21B PS22 PS23 PS24B Description cassette 1 cassette size detection signal bit 0 cassette 1 cassette size detection signal bit 1 cassette 1 cassette size detection signal bit 2 cassette 1 cassette size detection signal bit 3 cassette 1 cassette size detection signal bit 4 cassette 1 paper detection signal cassette 1 paper level detection signal bit 0 cassette 1 paper level detection signal bit 1 cassette 2 cassette size detection signal bit 0 cassette 2 cassette size detection signal bit 1 cassette 2 cassette size detection signal bit 2 cassette 2 cassette size detection signal bit 3 cassette 2 cassette size detection signal bit 4 cassette 2 paper detection signal cassette 2 paper level detection signal bit 0 cassette 2 paper level detection signal bit 1 cassette 1 re-tray paper detection signal cassette 2 re-tray paper detection signal pre-registration paper detection signal registration paper detection signal horizontal registration paper detection signal fixing/feeding detection signal No. 1 delivery detection signal No. 1 delivery full detection signal duplex inlet paper detection signal duplex outlet power detection signal No. 2 delivery detection signal No. 2 delivery full detection signal No. 3 delivery detection signal multifeeder paper detection signal right cover open/closed detection signal 2-way delivery open/closed detection signal optional input signal 0 optional input signal 1 optional input signal 2 optional input signal 3 optional input signal 4 not used not used not used Remarks 1: paper absent 25% (bit6=0:bit7=1) 50% (bit6=1:bit7=1) 100% (bit7=0) 1: paper absent 25% (bit6=0:bit7=1) 50% (bit6=1:bit7=1) 100% (bit7=0) 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper absent 1: paper absent 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper absent 1: paper absent 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper absent 1: open 1: open -
P015
P016
P017
5-24 T

Address bit P018 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P019 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P020 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P021 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation Description print start signal transmission request signal controller power supply inlet ready signal printer power supply inlet signal not used not used not used not used BD cycle error signal phsync cycle error signal sub scanning select line interrupt signal image end signal not used not used not used not used zero-cross signal heater trigger 1 signal heater trigger 2 signal heater error OFF signal not used not used registration motor phase A pulse signal registration motor phase B pulse signal fixing film rotation detection signal not used not used not used not used not used finisher detection signal saddle finisher detection signal Remarks -
1: present 1: present -
0: ON 0: ON 0: error
M9 M9 PS26
inner 2-way tray absent: bit 6=1 finisher: bit6=0, bit 7=1 saddle finisher: bit 6=0, bit 7=0
5-25 T

Address bit P022 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P024 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P025 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P026 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation Description controller communication signal power supply communication signal controller communication signal power supply communication signal not used power supply communication signal not used not used main thermistor ON signal sub thermistor ON signal multifeeder paper width detection signal drum thermistor ON signal humidity detection signal room temperature detection signal AC monitor signal not used RS232C detection signal for debug RS233C detection signal for debug not used power supply communication signal not used not used not used not used not used ADC reception data signal ADC serial clock signal ADC transmission data signal error interrupt signal DDI interrupt signal power supply communication signal image leading edge sensor detection signal not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used Remarks -
TH1 TH2 VR1 S3 S3
A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D A/D 200V model only -
PS12
1: paper present
5-26 T

Address bit P027 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P028 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P29 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 Notation Description 100/200V detection signal not used ADC chip select signal not used not used not used not used used as terminal CPU check LED On signal not used not used not used not used not used not used not used main thermistor ON signal sub thermistor ON signal multifeeder paper width detection signal drum thermistor ON signal humidity detention signal room temperature detection signal AC monitor signal Remarks 1: 100V, 0: 200V -
TH1 TH2 VR1 S3 S3
A/D hexadecimal notation A/D hexadecimal notation A/D hexadecimal notation A/D hexadecimal notation A/D hexadecimal notation A/D hexadecimal notation A/D hexadecimal notation
5-27 T
COPIER>I/O>R-CON
3.2 R-CON
Indicates the input/output ports of the reader controller PCB. <R-CON (1/3)>
Address bit IO-P01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P02 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P03 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P04 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation M400 M400 M400 M400 M400 M400 Description scanner motor clock signal scanner rotation direction signal scanner motor drier drive enable signal not used scanner motor excitation original return signal/ motor driver controller reset signal scanner motor excitation mode set signal scanner motor excitation mode set signal not used EEPROM several clock signal EEPROM chip select signal EEPROM read serial data signal EEPROM write serial data signal scanner reception ready signal (DDI) scanner power supply ready signal (DDI) not used +12V ON/OFF control signal for CCD serial transmission signal for DDI serial transmission signal for RS-232C serial reception signal for DDI serial transmission signal for RS-232C CCD drive signal output control signal original sensor drive control signal not used not used not used not used not used not used original sensor signal not used scanner drive current set signal not used Remarks clock signal 0: cw 0: drive enabled 10: return to original default default clock signal 1: output data data 0: ready to receive 0: ready 1: ON data data data data 1: ON 0: ON
SD1
SD1 M400
0: ON analog signal
5-28 T
COPIER>I/O>R-CON <R-CON (2/3)>

Address bit IO-P05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P06 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P07 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P08 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P09 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation Description printer start signal (DDI) analog processor data signal analog processor clock signal analog processor load signal not used not used not used not used motor drive current mode signal PCB check mode signal original exposure lamp ON/OFF control signal original exposure lamp inverter error signal scanner home position signal image leading edge signal (ADF) copyboard cover open/closed detection signal not used not used not used not used not used not used IP-Lifter/IP-STD ID signal +24V monitor (L: +24V live) signal +3.3V voltage drop detection signal general port (0) for DDI: reader controller general port (1) for DDI: reader controller general port (2) for DDI: reader controller not used not used not used not used not used ON LED (not used) not used not used not used not used not used not used not used Remarks 0: ON data clock signal data
M400 FL1N FL1N PS400
PS401
0: new current mode 0: check mode 1: ON 1: error 1: HP 1: ADF image leading edge interrupt 1: copyboard cover closed
1: Lifter model 0: 24V ON 1: detected not used not used not used
5-29 T
COPIER>I/O>R-CON <R-CON (3/3)>

Address IO-P10 IO-P11 IO-P12 IO-P13 bit 0-7 0-7 0-7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation Description not used not used not used general port (0) for DDI: controller reader general port (1) for DDI: controller reader general port (2) for DDI: controller reader controller power supply ready signal (DDI) controller reception enable signal (DDI) no used not used not used Remarks
1* not used not used 0: ready 0: ready to receive
*1: If the port is 0 when 24V is supplied, the initial rotation is omitted (to prevent turning on the reader in response to a PING command while the machine is in sleep mode); if 1, the initial operation is executed.
5-30 T
COPIER>I/O>MN-CON
3.3 MN-CON
Indicates the input/output ports for the main controller PCB. <MN-CON (1/2)>
Address bit P001 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P002 3 2 1 0 P003 3 2 1 0 P004 3 2 Notation Description GPDATA not used (fixed; 1) not used (fixed; 1) LED1008 fan ON PCI power save control watchdog timer clear PWR2 PWR1 SPI SPRTST signal (printer start-up signal) input for DDI-S general input for DDI-S general input for DDI-S general PPI PSCNST signal (scanner start-up signal) input for DDI-P general input for DDI-P general input for DDI-P general SPO SSCNST signal 3.3V non-all night power OFF signal Remarks
for check on operation cooling fan control 1: normal operation 1: normal operation 1: normal operation 0: reader image start not used not used not used 0: reader start not used not used not used not used 0: normal (ON), 1=5W (OFF) sleep mode not used not used 0: printer image start not used not used not used 1: HD present access port for EEPORM 1: enabled 1: enabled 1: connected 0: Busy, 1: Ready for factory 0: Normal, 1: Error
P005
P006
1 0 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PPO
GPI
output for DDI-S general output for DDI-S general PPRTST signal output for DDI-P general output for DDI-P general output for DDI-P general HD connection detection serial EEPROM D0 operation enable (coin robot) operation enable (CC-IV) serial ROM connection detection flash RPOM R/B# parallel EEPROM R/B# battery alarm
5-31 T
COPIER>I/O>MN-COM <MN-CON (2/2)>

Address bit P007 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7-0 7-0 Notation GPO Description fax SSB forced reset parallel EEPROM write protect not used LCD back-light control signal coin robot delivery count coin robot pickup count delivery count pickup count serial EEPROM DIN serial EPROM SCK serial EEPROM CS PCI (PDL) soft reset not used SP0 (2) not used battery charge control not used not used battery board detect BW UI detect color UI detect FOPTI0N2 FOPTI0N1 FOPTI0N0 not used not used Remarks 0: Reset, 1: Normal for factory 1: ON 1: count 1: count 1: count 1: count for factory for factory for factory 0: LIPS board forced reset output (2) for DDI-S general 0: Enable, 1: Disable
P008
IPC-PA
P009 P010
IPC-PB IPC-PO
0: present 0: B/W UI present 0: color UI present for fax SSB ID for fax SSB ID for fax SSB ID 0: fixed 0: fixed
5-32 T
COPIER>I/O>FEEDER
3.4 FEEDER
Indicates the input/output ports of the ADF controller PCB. <FEEDER (1/2)>
Address bit IO-P01 0 (output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P02 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P03 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P04 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation Description not used not used not used not used not used original detection LED ON signal locking solenoid drive signal stamp solenoid drive signal delivery reversal sensor signal read sensor signal registration sensor signal ADF open/closed sensor signal pickup motor phase A output pickup motor phase A* signal pickup motor phase B output pickup motor phase B* output not used not used image leading edge signal not used not used not used not used not used EEPROM data input EEPROM data output EEPROM clock EEPROM chip select original set sensor signal cover open/close sensor signal feed motor clock signal pickup motor clock signal Remarks
LED SL1 SL2 PI8 PI7 PI6 PI1 M1 M1 M1 M1
0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: open -
PI10 PI9 M2 M1
1: paper present 0: open
5-33 T
COPIER>I/O>FEEDER <FEEDER (2/2)>

Address bit IO-P05 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P06 0 (output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P07 0-7 IO-P08 0-7 IO-P09 0 (output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P10 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P11 0-7 AD-P01 AD-P02 AD-P03 Notation VR1 PI5 PI4 PI3 PI2 M2 M1 M2 M2 M2 M2 Description original width volume last original sensor signal tray sensor 2 tray sensor 1 A4R/LTR ID sensor push switch feed motor V ref pickup motor V ref feed motor phase A output feed motor phase A* output feed motor phase B output feed motor phase B* output not used not used read sensor signal not used not used not used LED ON signal 4 LED ON signal 3 LED ON signal 2 LED ON signal 1 not used not used not used not used mode set DIP switch 8 mode set DIP switch 7 mode set DIP switch 6 mode set DIP switch 5 mode set DIP switch 4 mode set DIP switch 3 mode set DIP switch 2 mode set DIP switch 1 not used original width volume feed motor current level pickup motor current level Remarks -
PI7
1: paper prevent
LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1
DIPSW8 DIPSW7 DIPSW6 DIPSW5 DIPSW4 DIPSW3 DIPSW2 DIPSW1 VR1 M2 M1
(analog port) (analog port) (analog port)
5-34 T
COPIER>I/O>SORTER
3.5 SORTER
Indicates the input/output ports for the finisher controller PCB. <SORTER (1/8)>
3.5.1 Finisher-J1
Address bit IO-P001 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P002 0 (input) 1 2 3 4-7 IO-P003 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P004 0 (input) 1 2-7 IO-P005 0 (output) 1 2 3-4 5 6-7 Notation Description not used not used stack tray paper height sensor signal fisher front cover sensor signal stack tray paper sensor signal stack tray lower limit sensor signal stack tray upper limit sensor signal return roller home position sensor signal stack tray paper sensor signal IPC chip select input sensor signal stack retaining lever home position sensor signal not used rear alignment home position sensor signal front alignment home position sensor signal stack delivery lever home position sensor signal intermediate handling tray paper sensor signal staple cartridge sensor signal staple absent sensor stapling home position sensor signal stapler edging sensor signal delivery motor clock sensor signal stack tray up/down clock sensor signal not used stack tray ascent/decent motor CW signal not used stack try ascent/descent motor CCW signal not used delivery motor current switch 2 not used Remarks
S10 S1 S11 S12 S13 S3 S11 S2 S4 S7 S6 S8 S5 S14 S15 S16 S17 S9 M5 M5 M1
1: upper limit 1: closed 1: paper present 1: lower limit 1: upper limit 1: HP 1: HP 1: selected 1: paper present 0: HP 1: HP 1: HP 0: HP 1: paper present 0: detected 0: detected 0: detected 0: detected 1: up ON 1: down ON (T05-301-01)
5-35 T
COPIER>I/O>SORTER <SORTER (2/8)>

Address bit IO-P006 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P007 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P008 0 (input) 1-6 7 IO-P009 0-7 IO-P010 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IO-P011 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation M3/M4 M3/M4 M4 M3 M2 M2 M6 M6 M6 M6 M5 M5 M1 M1 M1 SW1 Description alignment motor pulse INA alignment motor pulse INB rear alignment motor enable signal front alignment motor enable signal stack delivery motor pulse INA stack delivery motor pulse INB stapler motor CW2 signal stapler motor CCW2 signal stapler motor CW signal stapler motor CCW signal stack tray ascent/descent motor CW2 signal stack tray ascent/descent motor CCW2 signal delivery motor pulse INA delivery motor pulse INB not used delivery motor OFF signal push switch signal not used 24VP detection signal not used mode set DIP switch 0 mode set DIP switch 1 mode set DIP switch 2 mode set DIP switch 3 mode set DIP switch 4 mode set DIP switch 5 mode set DIP switch 6 mode set DIP switch 7 LED ON signal 1 LED ON signal 2 LED ON signal 3 delivery motor current switch 1 signal stack delivery motor current switch 1 signal stack delivery motor current switch 2 signal rear alignment motor current switch signal front alignment motor current switch signal Remarks 1: enable 1: enable 0: CW ON 0: CCW ON 0: CW ON 0: CCW ON 1: up ON 1: down ON 1: current ON 0: ON 0: power ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON (T05-301-01) 0: current high 0: current medium 0: current high 0: current high
DSW1-0 DSW1-1 DSW1-2 DSW1-3 DSW1-4 DSW1-5 DSW1-6 DSW1-7 LED1 LED2 LED3 M1 M2 M2 M4 M3
5-36 T

Address IO-P012 IO-P013 IO-P014 IO-P015 IO-P016 IO-P017 IO-P018 IO-P019 IO-P020 IO-P021 IO-P022 IO-P023 IO-P024 IO-P025 IO-P026 IO-P027 IO-P028 IO-P029 IO-P030 IO-P031 IO-P032 IO-P033 IO-P034 IO-P035 IO-P036 IO-P037 IO-P038 bit 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 Notation Description not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used Remarks
5-37 T
3.5.2 Saddle Finisher-G1

Address bit P001 0 (output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P002 0 (output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P003 0 1 2 3 4 5 6-7 P004 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P005 0 (output) 1 2 3 4-7 Notation M4 M4 M8 M8 M3 M3 M3 M3 M2 M2 M2 M2 M6 M6 M7 M7 Description front aligning plate motor phase A output front aligning plate motor phase B output slide moor phase A output slide motor phase B output delivery motor phase A output delivery motor phase A* output delivery motor phase B output delivery motor phase B* output paddle motor phase A output paddle motor phase A* output paddle motor phase B output paddle motor phase B* output shift motor UP drive output shift motor DOWN drive output bind motor PWM output bind motor clock sensor input puncher unit transmission signal (output) commercial device TXD (output) puncher unit reception signal (input) commercial device RXD (input) full stack sensor (full detection) bind clutch not used not used push switch 1, 2 DIP switch 7, 8 DIP switch 5, 6 DIP switch 3, 4 DIP switch 1, 2 fold position sensor light emission (output) fold position sensor (analog) EEPROM chip select EEPROM/DA clock output (used in common) EEPROM/DA data output (used in common) DA load signal output (used in common) not used Remarks 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 0: ON 1: ON 0: ON 1: ON 0: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON
PI24 CL1
1: FULL 1: ON
PI10 PI10
1: selected 1: load
5-38 T

Address bit P006 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P007 0-4 (input) 5 6 7 P008 0 (output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P009 0 (output) 1 2 3-7 P010 0 (input) 1 2 3-7 P011 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation PI21 PI20 M5 M5 PI19 PI18 PI7 Description cartridge sensor signal staple sensor signal rear alignment motor phase A (output) rear alignment motor phase B (output) stapler drive home position sensor signal slide home position sensors signal delivery belt home position sensor signal commercial device REQ not used fold position sensor signal shift motor clock sensor signal punch home position sensor feed motor phase A output feed motor phase A* output feed motor phase B output feed motor phase B* output slide/aligning plate motor current cut not used not used tray paper sensor (input) bind motor (CW) bind motor (CCW) shift motor enable signal not used paper sensor (input) front aligning plate home position sensor signal EEPROM data input not used shift lower limit sensor signal shift upper limit sensor signal power supply monitor signal handling tray paper sensor signal push switch 3 signal stapler safety detecting switch signal front cover open detecting switch signal joint open detecting switch signal Remarks 1: ready 1: staple ascent 0: ON 0: ON 0: HP 0: HP 1: HP
PI10 PI17 PI1P M1 M1 M1 M1 M8/4, 5
1: paper present 0: HP 0: ON 1: ON 0: ON 1: ON -
PI8 M7 M7 M6 PI9 PI4
1: paper present 1: paper detected 0: HP 1: limit 1: limit 0: power ON 1: paper present 0: ON 1: open 1: open 1: open
PI16 PI15 PI6 MS3 MS1 MS2
5-39 T

Address bit P012 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P013 0 (output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P014 0 (input) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P015 0 (input) 1 2 3-7 P023 P024 P025 P026 P027 P028 P029 P030 Notation PI23 PI22 PI5 PI3 PI2 PI1 PI11 PI12 PI13 LED1 LED2 LED3 Description upper cover open sensor signal front cover open sensor signal rear aligning plate home position sensor signal stack roller home position sensor signal paddle home position sensor signal inlet paper sensor signal fold home position sensor signal stapler connection signal fold roller home position sensor signal punch connection signal bid tray paper sensor signal (input) power save switch signal LED ON signal 1 LED ON signal 2 LED ON signal 3 commercial device ACK DPISW1 bit 1 signal DPISW1 bit 2 signal DPISW1 bit 3 signal DPISW1 bit 4 signal DPISW1 bit 5 signal DPISW1 bit 6 signal DPISW1 bit 7 signal DPISW1 bit 8 signal PUSHSW1 signal PUSHSW2 signal PUSHSW3 signal not used fold position sensor not used push switch 1, 2 DIP switch 7, 8 DIP switch 5, 6 DIP switch 3, 4 DIP switch 1, 2 fold position sensor (light emission; output) Remarks 1: open 1: open 0: HP 0: HP 0: HP 0: paper present 1: HP 1: connected 0: HP 0: connected 1: paper present 1: power save mode 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: paper present 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON (analog (analog (analog (analog (analog (analog (analog (analog port) port) port) port) port) port) port) port)
PI10
PI10
5-40 T
3.5.3 Puncher Unit (Saddle Finisher-G1)

Address bit P016 0 (output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P017 0 (input) 1 2, 3 4 5 6 7 P018 0 (input) 1 2, 3 4 5 6 7 P019 0 (output) 1 2, 3 4 5 6 7 P020 0, 1 (input) 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation Description ladder circuit bit 1 ladder circuit bit 2 ladder circuit bit 3 ladder circuit bit 4 ladder circuit bit 5 ladder circuit bit 6 ladder circuit bit 7 ladder circuit bit 8 punch home position sensor signal horizontal registration home position signal not used DIPSW1001 bit 1 signal DIPSW1001 bit 2 signal DIPSW1001 bit 3 signal DIPSW1001 bit 4 signal push SW1 signal push SW2 signal not used power detection signal LED ON signal 1 (output) LEE ON signal 2 (output) LED ON signal 3 (output) horizontal registration sensor light intensity adjustment signal registration sensor light intensity adjusted signal Remarks 0: HP 1: HP 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: power OFF level UP: intensity increased level UP: intensity increased
PI1P PI2P
PSW1 PSW2
LED1 LED2 LED3
not used EEPROM DO (input) EEPROM DI EEPROM CLK EEPROM CS not used registration interrupt horizontal registration signal H: blocked REQ HFS communication RXD HFS communication TXD (output) not used ACK (output)
5-41 T

Address bit P021 0 (output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P022 0, 1 (input) 2 3 4 5 6 7 P031 P032 P033 P034 P035 P036 P037 P038 Notation M2P M2P M2P M2P M1P M1P M1P M1P Description horizontal registration motor current set horizontal registration motor current set horizontal registration motor phase B output horizontal registration motor phase A output punch motor REV punch motor FWD punch motor PWM punch motor encoder (input) not used dust sensor registration sensor 5 horizontal registration registration sensor 4 B5R registration sensor 3 A4R registration sensor 2 B4 registration sensor 1 A4 dust sensor signal registration sensor 5 horizontal registration registration sensor 4 B5R registration sensor 3 A4R registration sensor 2 B4 registration sensor 1 A4 horizontal registration sensor light intensity adjustment registration sensor light intensity adjustment Remarks 0: blocked 1: full 1: full (analog port) (analog port) (analog port) (analog port) (analog port) (analog port) level UP: intensity increased level UP: intensity increased
5-42 T
COPIER>I/O>SORTER
delivery motor current switch 1 (P011-3) 1 0 0 delivery motor current switch 2 (P005-5) 1 1 0 Current (A) 0.1 0.3 0.5
T05-301-01
5-43 T
4 ADJUST Adjustment Mode

4.1 COPIER
The following screen will appear in response to COPIER>ADJUST:
Display I/O Adjust Function Option BLANK AE ADJ-XY CCD LASER HV-PRI HV-TR DEVELOP DENS MISC FEED-ADJ CST-ADJ Test Counter
F05-401-01
5-44 T
COPIER>ADJUST>AE
<AE>
Use it to execute AE adjustment. If you have cleared the RAM on the reader controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label.
AE-TBL
Range of adjustment Use it to adjust the density of text for image density adjustment. 1 to 9; default: 5
Copy density
White
White Original density A higher setting generates darker text. A lower setting generates darker text.
F05-401-02
5-45 T
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY
<ADJ-XY>
Use it to adjust the image read start position. If you have cleared the RAM on the reader controller PCB and replaced the PCB, use it to enter the settings indicated on the service label.
ADJ-X
Range of adjustment Caution Use it to adjust the scanner image leading edge (x direction). 250 to 290 (1 being 0.1mm) Be sure to execute it before adjusting the margin. Do not use this mode to create a margin.
Vertical side plate Copyboard glass
Standard white plate Lower setting Higher setting
F05-401-03
ADJ-Y
Range of adjustment Use it to adjust the CCD read start position (X direction). 100 to 400 (1 being 0.1 mm)
Lower setting
Higher setting Original
Read start position
Vertical size plate
F05-401-04
5-46 T
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY
ADJ-S
Range of adjustment Caution Use it to adjust the scanner home position. 16 to 128 Do not use this mode; it is for factory use only. Use it to adjust the read start position in main scanning direction when the ADF is in use (ADF horizontal registration adjustment). 100 to 400 (1 being 0.1 mm)
ADJ-Y-DF
Range of adjustment
Print image Lower setting Higher setting
Feed direction
F05-401-06
STRD-POS
Range of adjustment Use it to adjust the CCD read position for stream reading. 0 to 60 (1 being 0.1 mm)
5-47 T
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
<CCD>
Use it to make CCD/shading-related adjustments. If faulty images are generated after the execution of COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCDADJ, enter the settings indicated on the service label.
SH-TRGT
Use it to enter the white level target value for shading correction.
SH-PATIO
Use it to enter the data on the white level ratio (the standard white plate and the standard white paper) for shading correction.
EGGN-ST
Use it to enter the adjustment value for the edge gain correction start position of the CCD.
EGGN-END
Use it to enter the adjustment value for the end gain correction end position of the CCD. COPIER>ADJUST>LASER
<LASER>
Use it to adjust the laser output. If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB and replaced the PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label.
PVE-OFST
Range of adjustment Use it to adjust the point of laser exposure. -600 to +600 (a change of 23 causes a shift of about 1 mm; a higher setting shifts the image toward the rear in main scanning direction) Use it to adjust the laser trailing edge OFF timing when non-default paper is used. 0 to 600 (a higher setting increases the time interval up to de-activation) Use it to adjust the laser paper for non-potential control mode. 0 to 255
LA-OFF
Range of adjustment
POWER
Range of adjustment
5-48 T
COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP
<DEVELOP>
Use it to adjust the developing bias output.
DE-DC
Range of adjustment Caution Use it to enter the adjustment value for the DC component of the developing bias within the image area. 0 to 255 (a higher setting generates lighter images) If you have replaced the DC controller PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label. Use it to enter the offset value for the DC component of the developing bias. 0 to 255 (a higher setting generates lighter images) be sure to keep the setting between +30 and -30. If you have replaced the composite power supply PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the new PCB (case).
DE-OFST
Range of adjustment Caution
5-49 T
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
<DENS>
Use it to fine-adjust the copy density auto correction mechanism. If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB and replaced the PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label.
DENS-ADJ
Use it to correct the density of images (copier/printer). Use it to correct the F-value table if the image is foggy or the high-density area is fuzzy. 1 to 9; default: 5
White
F9 F1
Range of adjustment
Black
Copy density
Original density
White
A lower setting decreases fogging.
A higher setting decreases fuzziness.
F05-401-07 COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK
<BLANK>
Use it to adjust the non-image width. If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB and replaced the PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label.
BLANK-T
Range of adjustment Use it to enter the leading edge non-image width. -100 to +100
BLANK-B
Range of adjustment 5-50 T Use it to enter the trailing edge non-image width. -100 to +100
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI
<HV-PRI>
Use it to adjust the output of the primary charging assembly. If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB and replaced the PCB, be sure to enter the setting indicated on the service label.
P-DC
Range of adjustment Caution Use it to enter the adjustment value for the primary charging DC component of the image area. 0 to 255
P-AC
Range of adjustment Use it to enter the adjustment value for the primary charging AC component of the image area. 0 to 255
AGS-GAIN
Caution Range of adjustment Use it to adjust the gain adjustment value for the photosensitive drum resistance detection control (APVC) mechanism. If you have replaced the composite power supply PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the new PCB (case). 0 to 255
AGS-OFST
Caution Range of adjustment Use it to enter the offset adjustment value for the photosensitive drum resistance detection control (APVC) mechanism. If you have replaced the composite power supply PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the new PCB (case). 0 to 255
5-51 T
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI
OFST1-DC
Caution Range of adjustment Use it to enter the adjustment value for the primary charging DC offset 1. If you have replaced the composite power supply PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the new PCB (case). 0 to 255 (a lower setting generates lighter images)
OFST1-AC
Caution Range of adjustment Use it to enter the adjustment value for the primary charging AC offset 1. If you have replaced the composite power supply PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the new PCB (case). 0 to 255
P-AC2
Range of adjustment Use it to enter the adjustment value for the primary charging AC component 2 for the image area. 0 to 255
P-AC3
Range of adjustment Use it to enter the adjustment value for the primary charging AC component 3 for the image area. 0 to 255
5-52 T
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
<HV-TR>
User it to adjust the output for transfer charging/pre-transfer. If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB and replaced the PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label.
TR-N1
Use it to enter the output adjustment value for the transfer charging current (for plain paper, printing on one side or the 1st side of a double-sided print). 0 to 10
Range of adjustment
TR-N2
Range of adjustment Use it to enter the output adjustment value for the transfer bias (for plain paper, the 2nd side of a double-sided print). 0 to 10
TR-OFST
Range of adjustment Use it to enter the output adjustment offset value for transfer charging current. 0 to 255
TR-SPP
Use it to enter the output adjustment bias value of thick paper transfer (for thick paper, printing on one side or printing on the 1st/2nd side of a doublesided print). A higher setting causes stronger effects. 0 to 10
Range of adjustment
5-53 T
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
<FEED-ADJ>
Use it to make feeder-related adjustments. If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB and replaced the PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label.
REGIST
Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration roller clutch goes ON. A higher setting delays the timing at which the registration roller clutch goes ON, thereby decreasing the leading edge margin. -600 to +600 (in mm)
Range of adjustment
ADJ-REFE
Range of adjustment Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for re-pickup. If the image is displaced to the front, increase the setting. -50 to +50 (in mm)
ARCH
Use it to adjust the degree of arching on the registration roller. Use it to fine-adjust the degree of arching paper is caused to make against the registration roller. -100 to +200 (in 0.1 mm); default: 80
Range of adjustment
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ
<CST-ADJ>
Use it to make cassette/manual feeder-related adjustments. If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB and replaced the PCB, be user to enter the settings indicated on the service label. If you have replaced the paper width detecting VR or want to enter settings newly, be sure to execute FUNCTION>CST in service mode.
MF-A4R
Range of adjustment Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the multifeeder tray (A4R). 0 to 1024
MF-A6R
Range of adjustment Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the multifeeder tray (A6R). 0 to 1024
5-54 T
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ
MF-A4
Range of adjustment Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the multifeeder tray (A4). 0 to 1024
COPIER>ADJUST>FIXING
<FIXING>
Use it to make fixing-relating adjustments. If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB and replaced the PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label.
FX-FL-TH
Use it to enter the fine-adjusted value for the fixing film speed for thick paper. Use it to make fine-adjustments in relation to the target control speed of the fixing film when thick paper is selected. -3 to +3 (in msec; default: 0)
Range of adjustment
FX-FL-SP
Use it to enter the fine adjustment value for the fixing film when plain paper is selected. Use it to fine-adjust the target control speed for the fixing film when plain paper is selected. -3 to +3 (in msec; default: 0)
Range of adjustment
5-55 T
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC
<MISC>
Use it to make other adjustments. If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB and replaced the PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label.
C1-ADJ-Y
Use it to enter the cassette 1 horizontal registration adjustment value. Enter a value in relation to the registered value for the laser write start position for paper picked up from the cassette 1. -32 to + 32 (in steps; 1 step being 0.16 mm)
Range of adjustment
C2-ADJ-Y
Use it to enter the cassette 2 horizontal registration adjustment value. Enter a value in relation to the registered value for the laser write start position for paper picked up from the cassette 2. -32 to +32 (in steps; 1 step being 0.16mm)
Range of adjustment
C3-ADJ-Y
Range of adjustment
C4-ADJ-Y
Range of adjustment
MF-ADJ-Y
Use it to enter the horizontal registration adjustment value for the multifeeder. Use it to enter a laser write start position value in relation to the registered value for paper picked up from the multifeeder tray. -32 to +32 (in steps; 1 step being 0.16mm)
Range of adjustment
5-56 T
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC
DK-ADJ-Y
Use it to enter the horizontal registration adjustment value for the paper deck. Use it to enter a laser write position value in relation to the registered value for paper picked up from the paper deck. -32 to +32 (in steps; 1 step being 0.16 mm)
Range of adjustment
FRAME-X
Use it to enter a zoom fine-adjustment value (sub scanning direction). Use it to enter an extra length of the image in sub scanning direction in relation to the registered value. -50 to +50 (-1% to +1%)
Range of adjustment
FRAME-Y
Use it to enter the zoom fine-adjustment value (main scanning direction). Use it to enter an extra length for the image in main scanning direction in relation to the register value. -50 to +50 (-1% to +1%)
Range of adjustment
IMG-DLY
Use it to enter a fine-adjustment value (sub scanning direction) for image delay. Use it to make fine adjustments for the length of image delay in sub scanning direction when sending image data from the main controller PCB to the DC controller PCB. -20 to +20 (in 0.1 mm)
Range of adjustment
5-57 T
FEEDER>ADJUST
4.2 FEEDER
DOCST
Use it to adjust the original leading edge registration when the ADF is used. A higher setting decreases the leading edge margin. The data is stored on the ADF controller PCB. -10 to +10 (in 0.5 mm) Using the Mode 1) Make a print of the Test Chart, and check the position of the image. 2) Select the item, and change the setting to adjust. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Make a print of the Test Chart once again, and check to make sure that the image position is as indicated.
Print image
Range of adjustment
Feed direction
Higher setting Lower setting
F05-402-01
LA-SPEED
Use it to adjust the original feed speed in stream reading mode with the ADF in use. A higher setting increases the speed. The data is stored on the ADF controller PCB. -30 to +30 (in 0.1%)
Range of adjustment
5-58 T
SORTER>ADJUST
4.3 SORTER
PNCH-HLE
Use it to adjust the punch hole position (paper feed direction) when the puncher unit is in use. A higher setting shifts the punch hole toward the leading edge of paper (middle of paper). -3 to +3 (in mm) Using the Mode 1) Make a print of the Test Chart, and check the position of the hole. 2) Select the item, and change the setting to adjust. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Make a print of the Test Chart once again, and check to make sure that the hole position is as indicated.
Paper
Range of adjustment
Feed direction
Higher setting Lower setting
F05-403-01
5-59 T
SORTER>ADJUST
PNCH-Y
Use it to adjust the punch hole position (front/rear of paper) when the puncher unit is in use. A higher setting shifts the punch hole toward the front of paper. Range of adjustment -5 to +5 (in mm) Using the Mode 1) Make a print of the Test Chart, and check the position of the hole. 2) Select the item, and change the setting to adjust. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Make a print of the Test Chart once again, and check to make sure that the hole position is as indicated.
Paper
Lower setting
Feed direction Higher setting
F05-403-02
5-60 T
5 FUNCTION Operation/Inspection Mode

5.1 COPIER
The following screen will appear in response to COPIER>FUNCTION; lists of items follow:
Display INSTALL CCD I/O Adjust Function Option FIXING PANEL PART-CHK DENS CLEAR MISC-R DPC CST MISC-P SYSTEM Test Counter
F05-501-01
5-61 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
<INSTALL>
Use it as part of installation work.
TONER-S
Caution Use it to stir the toner inside the developing assembly. Check to make sure that the developing assembly is securely mounted before pressing the OK key. Do not execute any operation. (The Stop key may be pressed.) Using the Mode 1) Select <TONER-S> to highlight; then, press the OK key. 2) The machine stirs toner (about 4 min), during which time a count-down is indicated to the right of <TONER-S> from 240 to 0. 3) The machine automatically stops after stirring toner. Use it to execute automatic adjustment of the CCD read position in stream mode. Execute this mode when installing the ADF or if you have removed and then installed the ADF once again. Using the Mode 1) Select <STRD-POS> to highlight; then, press the OK key. The machine executes automatic adjustment. 2) The machine stops operation automatically after adjustment. 3) The settings under COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRD-POS is updated. Record the new settings to the service label. Use it when installing the card reader. Using the Mode Enter the number of the card to use. 1 to 2701 (default: 1; as many as 300 cards may be used starting with the entered number) Use it to initialize card control information: initializing the card names (group ID; starting with the entered number). initializing ID numbers for cards.
STRD-POS
Caution
CARD
5-62 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD
<CCD>
Use it to execute CCD/shading-related automatic adjustment.
CCD-ADJ
Caution Use it to execute automatic adjustment of the CCD. Execute the mode if you have replaced any of the following: CCD unit, scanning lamp, inverter PCB, copyboard glass (standard white plate). Use the whitest of all papers used by the user (excluding color print paper). Using the Mode 1) Place ten or more sheets of standard white paper on the copyboard glass. 2) Select <CCD-ADJ> to highlight, and press the OK key. 3) The machine executes automatic adjustment (about 15 sec), during which time <SERVICE> appears in the upper right of the screen. 4) During the operation, the scanning lamp will go ON; at the end of the automatic adjustment, the screen will indicate <OK!>. 5) All items under COPIER>ADJUST>CCD are updated. Record the new settings on the service label.
(rear)
Standard white paper
F05-501-02
5-63 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD
SHDG-POS
Range of adjustment Caution Use it to enter data for changing the position of measurement on the standard white plate used for shading correction. 240 to 320 (a multiple of 8 causes a shift of about 0.17 mm) Execute this mode if a white line still appears after executing COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>SH-PS-ST or after cleaning the scanner mechanisms. After entering a setting and executing COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>SH-PS-ST, check to make sure that OK is indicted. Thereafter, make a test print to be user that no white line is found in its halftone area.
Shading position Copyboard glass
Vertical size plate
Standard white plate Higher setting Lower setting
F05-501-03
5-64 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD
SH-PS-ST
Caution Use it to execute optimum position auto adjustment for the standard white plate for shading correction. You must execute COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ before executing this move. Execute this mode if you have replaced the copyboard glass (standard white plate) or a white line is noted in halftone areas. Using the Mode 1) Clean the back of the copyboard glass. 2) Open the ADF (copyboard cover). 3) Select <SH-PS-ST> to highlight, and press the OK key. 4) The machine executes automatic adjustment (about 10 sec). 5) When done, the machine stops automatically indicating the result (OK/ NG). If NG is indicated, perform the following, and execute the mode once again: a. Is the ADF (copyboard cover) open? b Is the copyboard glass mounted correctly? c. Is the standard white plate (attached to the copyboard glass) normal? d. Does the scanning lamp go ON? 6) The items under COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY and ADJ-S are updated. Record the new settings on the service label.
5-65 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD
EGGN-POS
Use it to execute automatic adjustment of the edge gain correction for the CCD. (The edge gain correction of the CCD is effective only when the ADF is in use.) If you have replaced the CCD unit, be sure to execute the following first: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ. Execute this mode if you have replaced any of the following: CCD unit, No. 1 mirror base, No. 2 mirror base. Using the Mode 1) Open the ADF (copyboard cover). 2) Select <EGGN-POS> to highlight, and press the OK key. 3) The machine executes automatic adjustment (about 1 sec). 4) When done, the machine stops automatically, and indicates the result (OK/NG). If NG is indicated, perform the following, and execute this mode once again: a. Is the ADF (copyboard cover) open? b. Is the read glass mounted correctly? c. Is the edge gain correction plate (attached to the read glass) normal? d. Does the scanning lamp go ON? 5) The items under COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>EGGN-ST and EGGNEND are updated. Record the new settings on the service label.
Edge gain correction plate
Caution
Copyboard glass Read glass
(front)
F05-501-04
5-66 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>DENS
<DENS>
Use it to execute automatic density adjustment. Execute this mode after shading correction, and be sure to execute all of the following in sequence: WHITE-ME, PD-DENS, PD-ME.
WHITE-ME
Use it to execute automatic density correction of the white level. Using the Mode 1) Place standard white paper (10 sheets or more; of papers commonly used by the user) on the copyboard glass. 2) Select <WHITE-ME> to highlight, and press the OK key. 3) The scanning lamp makes a single scan, and the machine ends operation.
(rear)
Standard white paper
F05-501-05
PD-DENS
Caution Use it to generate a print pattern for density auto adjustment for text mode. The machine uses the PD method for binary processing in text mode; be sure to use this mode as automatic density adjustment. Using the Mode 1) Select <PD-DENS> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) See that the machine uses cassette 2 as the source of paper and generate a 17-gradation print pattern. The print pattern will be used when executing <PD-ME>.
5-67 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>DENS
PD-ME
Use it to execute automatic density correction for text mode (to read PDDENS output). Using the Mode 1) While keeping the following in mind, place the PD-DENS output on the copyboard glass as indicated: The printed side must face down. The whiter side (lighter; of the 17 gradations) must face the vertical size plate. The output must be placed in relation to the index in the left rear of the copyboard glass. 2) Select <PD-ME> to highlight, and press the OK key. 3) The scanning lamp goes ON and OFF 13 times, making as many scans automatically. If OK is indicated, end the work. If NG is indicated, discussed under Standards and Adjustments in Chapter 3.
Place it so that the printed side faces down.
PD-DENS output
F05-501-06 5-68 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC
<DPC>
Use it to execute potential-related operations.
D-GAMMA
Caution Use it to execute photosensitive drum resistance measurement control (APVC). Use this mode only for the following; do not rely on this mode unless necessary: When making adjustments after replacing the drum unit. When isolating the cause when copy density automatic adjustment (PDME) ends in NG. When obtaining an idea of the life of the drum. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) The machine generates a blank copy and ends automatically. 3) See that the machine indicates the result of measurement under DISPLAY>HV-STS>PRIMARY.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CST
<CST>
Use it to execute size automatic adjustment for the multifeeder.
MF-A4R MF-A6R MF-A4

Caution Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for the multifeeder. A4R: width: 210 mm, A6R width: 105 mm, A4 width: 297 mm To make fine-adjustments after entering the basic value, use ADJUST>CSTADJ>MF-A4R, MF-A6R, MF-A4. Using the Mode 1) Place A4R paper in the multifeeder, and adjust the side guide to A4R. 2) Select <MF-A4R> to highlight, and press the OK key. The machine executes automatic adjustment and stores the value. 3) Likewise, perform steps 1. and 2. for A6R and A4.
5-69 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING
<FIXING>
Use it to execute fixing assembly-related automatic adjustments.
NIP-CHK
Use it to obtain output for automatic measurement of the fixing nip width. Using the Mode 1) Make a solid black print in A4/LTR. 2) Make about 20 A4/LTR prints of the Test Sheet. 3) Place the A4/LTR solid black output obtained in step 1. in the manual feed tray with the printed side facing down. 4) Select <NIP-CHK>, and press the OK key. After pickup, the paper will stop between the fixing rollers and then delivered in about 20 sec. 5) Measure the width indicated in the diagram.
c
Standard: 5.5 0.3 mm
Paper feed direction Standard a - c = 0.5 mm or less
b
Middle of paper
F05-501-07 Caution a and b are points 10 mm from both ends of the paper.
5-70 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL
<PANEL>
Use it to check the control panel.
LCD-CHK
Use it to check the touch panel for missing dots. Using the Mode 1) Select <LCD-CHK> to highlight, and press the OK key. The entire face of the touch panel will go ON and remain white for several seconds and then blue for several seconds. 2) Press the Stop key to end the operation.
LED-CHK
Use it to check the LEDs of the control panel for activation. Using the Mode 1) Select <LED-CHK> to highlight, and press the OK key so that the LEDs will go ON in sequence. 2) Select <LED-OFF> to end the operation.
LED-OFF
Use it to end a check on the LEDs of the control panel. Using the Mode 1) Select <LED-OFF> to end the operation.
KEY-CHK
Use it to check the key inputs. Using the Mode 1) Select <KEY-CHK> so that the numbers/names of the input keys will appear. 2) Press a key to check. If normal, its corresponding notation will appear on the touch panel. (T05-501-01) 3) Select <KEY-CHK> once again to end the key input check.
TOUCHCHK
Caution Use it to adjust the coordinates on the touch panel. Use it to match points (presses) on the touch panel and the LCD coordinates. Execute this mode if you have replaced the LCD. Using the Mode 1) Select <TOUCHCHK> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Press the nine +s that paper on the touch panel in sequence. 3) The machine ends operation when all nine +s been pressed.
5-71 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL
Input Keys/Indications
Key name Counter Check Copy Fax Mail Box Scan O to 9, #, * Clear (C) Indication on screen BILL COPY FAX PB OTHER O to 9, #, * CLEAR Key name ID Additional Functions Start Stop Reset Interrupt Guide Indication on screen ID USER START STOP RESET INTERRUPT ?
T05-501-01 COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK
<PART-CHK>
Use it to check the operation of a specific load.
CL
Use it to select a clutch whose operation you want to check. Using the Mode 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code (T05-501-02) of the clutch using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key.
CL-ON
Use it to check the operation of the clutch. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. ON OFF for 10 sec ON OFF for 10 sec ON OFF
MTR
Use it to select a motor whose operation you want to check. Using the Mode 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code (T05-501-03) of the motor using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key.
5-72 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK
MTR-ON
Use it to check the motor. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. ON for 20 sec OFF For the duplex horizontal registration motor, ON for 10 sec OFF
SL
Use it to select a solenoid whose operation you want to check. Using the Mode 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code (T05-501-04) of the solenoid using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key.
SL-ON
Use this mode to check the operation of a solenoid. Using the Mode 1) Select the item and press the OK key. ON OFF for 5 sec ON OFF for 5 sec ON OFF
Codes and Clutches

Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name Vertical path clutch (CL1) Multifeeder pickup clutch (CL2) Developing clutch (CL3) Vertical path roller clutch (CL1C) Deck feeding clutch (CL1D) Deck pickup clutch (CL2D)
T05-501-02
5-73 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK
Codes and Motors

Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name Main motor (M1) Fixing motor (M4) Pickup motor (M2) Duplex motor (M6) Delivery motor (M5) 2-way delivery outlet motor (M8B)/ Relay delivery motor (M7Z) 2-way delivery inlet motor (M7B) Code 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Name Horizontal registration sensor shift motor (M3) Registration motor (M9) Laser scanner motor (M10) Pedestal main motor (M1C) Cassette pickup motor (M2C) Deck main motor (M1D) Deck lifter motor (M2D)
T05-501-03
Codes and Solenoids

Code 1 2 3 4 Name Pickup DOWN solenoid (SL1) 2-way delivery solenoid (SL3B)/ Relay delivery solenoid (SL3Z) Charging roller solenoid (SL6) Multifeeder holding plate releasing solenoid (SL5) Code 5 6 7 8 Name --Pickup roller DOWN solenoid (SL1C) Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid (SL1D) Deck open solenoid (SL2D)
T05-501-04
5-74 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
<CLEAR>
Use it to clear the RAM, jam history, or error code history. The effect does not take place unless the main power switch has been turned off and then on.
ERR
Use this mode to clear an error code: E000, E001, E002, E003, E004, E032, E717. Using the Mode 1) Select <ERR> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
DC-CON
Use it to clear the RAM on the DC controller PCB. Using the Mode 1) Select <DC-CON> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
R-CON
Use it to clear the RAM on the reader controller PCB. Using the Mode 1) Select <R-CON> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
SERVICE
Use it to clear the backup data for the service mode (COPIER>OPTION). Using the Mode 1) Select <SERVICE> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
JAM-HIST
Use it to clear the jam history. Using the Mode 1) Select <JAM-HSIT> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
ERR-HIST
Use it to clear the error code history. Using the Mode 1) Select <ERR-HITS> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
E345-CLR
---
5-75 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
E355-CLR
---
PWD-CLR
Use it to clear the password of the system administrator in user mode. Using the Mode 1) Select <PWD-CLR> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
ADRS-BK
Use it to clear the address book data. Using the Mode 1) Select <ADRS-BK> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
CNT-MCON
Use it to clear the counters for servicing on the main controller PCB. Using the Mode 1) Select <CNT-MCON> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
CNT-DCON
Use it to clear the counter for servicing on the DC controller PCB. Using the Mode 1) Select <CNT-DCON> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
MMI
Use it to clear the backup data for the user mode settings (specifications, ID mode, group ID, mode memory, etc.). Using the Mode 1) Select <MMI> to highlight, and press the OK key 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
CARD
Use it to clear the card (group) ID-related data. Using the Mode 1) Select <CARD> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
ALARM
Use it to clear the alarm log. Using the Mode 1) Select <ALARM> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
5-76 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
<MISC-R>
Checking reader unit-related operations.
SCANLAMP
Use it to check the scanning lamp for activation. Using the Mode 1) Select <SCANLAMP> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) The scanning lamp goes ON. 3) Press the Stop key to turn off the lamp.
5-77 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P
<MISC-P>
Use it to check the operation of the printer unit.
P-PRINT
Caution Use it to print out the contents of service mode (ADJUST, OPTION, COUNTER). It may take several dozens of seconds to print out the list. Using the Mode 1) Select <P-PRINT> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) The machine will deliver a total of three lists face down. Source of Paper If a specific paper is selected on the basic screen, the corresponding source will be used. If auto paper selection is used, the topmost cassette will be used as the source of paper. Use it to print out the history of key inputs made from the control panel. Using the Mode 1) Select <KEY-HITS> to highlight, and press the OK key. The machine generates a key input history. AA:AA BBBB CCCC xxxxxxxx AA BB time at which the key is pressed if number: soft key number HARD: hard key SOFT: soft key ONET: one touch key CC key type RESET: reset key START: start key GUIDE: guide key USER MODE: additional function key FNC_COPY: copy key within extended keys FNC_FAX: fax key within extended keys POWER_MIMI: control panel power key xxxxxxxx function value
KEY-HIST
5-78 T
HIST-PRT
Use it to print out the jam history and the error history stored for service mode. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) The machine prints put the jam history and the error history.
USER-PRT
Use it to print out the user mode settings from service mode. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) The machine prints out a list of user mode settings.
C1-ADJ-Y
Use it to execute cassette 1 horizontal registration automatic adjustment. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) The machine prints a halftone PG image on paper from cassette 1. (At the same time, the horizontal registration sensor measures the displacement, and stores the result as back-up data.)
C2-ADJ-Y
Use into to execute cassette 2 horizontal registration automatic adjustment. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) The machine prints a halftone PG image on paper from cassette 2. (At the same time, the horizontal registration sensor measures the displacement, and stores the result as back-up data.)
C3-ADJ-Y
Use it to execute cassette 3 horizontal registration automatic adjustment. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, an press the OK key. 2) The machine prints a halftone PG image on paper from cassette 3. (At the same , time, the horizontal registratoin sensor measures the displacement, and stores the result as back-up data.)
C4-ADJ-Y
Use it to execute cassette 4 horizontal registration automatic adjustment. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) The machine prints a halftone PG image on paper from cassette 4. (At the same time, the horizontal registratoin sensor measures the displacement, and stores the result as back-up data.)
5-79 T
MF-ADJ-Y
Use it to execute multifeeder horizontal registration automatic adjustment. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) The machine prints a halftone PG image on paper from the multifeeder tray. (At the same time, the horizontal registration sensor measures the displacement, and stores the result as back-up data.)
DK-ADJ-Y
Use it to execute paper deck horizontal registration automatic adjustment. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) The machine prints a halftone PG image on paper from the paper deck. (At the same time, the horizontal registration sensor measures the displacement, and stores the result as back-up data.)
LBL-PRNT
Use it to print out a service label. Using the Mode 1) Put paper in the manual feed tray. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. 3) The machine prints out a service label. The label also indicates the settings of ADJUST and OPTION.
PRE-EXP
Use it to check the pre-exposure lamp for activation. Using the Mode 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) The pre-exposure lamp goes ON and remains ON for several seconds, and goes OFF automatically.
5-80 T
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM
<SYSTEM>
Use it to check system-related operations.
DOWNLOAD
Caution Use it to switch to system program download mode. Use it to download the system program. Using the Mode 1) Turn off the machine and the PC. 2) Disconnect the network cable from the machine. 3) Connect the machine and the PC with a bi-Centronics cable. 4) Turn on the PC. 5) Turn on the machine. 6) Select <DOWNLOAD> to highlight, and press the OK key. 7) Use the Service Support Tool to download the data. 8) When done, turn off and then on the main power switch. Use it to select a partition number for HD-CHECK. Using the Mode 1) Selects the item. 2) Selects a partition number using the keypad (0: check and recover entire HDD for faulty sectors, 1: image storage area, 2: general file storage area, 3: PDL-related file storage area, 4: firmware storage area). A general file refers to the following: user settings data, log data, PDL spool data, image data. 3) Press the OK key.
CHK-TYPE
HD-CHECK
Use it to execute a check and recovery of the partition selection using CHKTYPE. Using the Mode 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key. 3) The machine indicates the result (1: OK, 2: NG (hardware), 3: NG (software); recovery sensor/alternate sector).
HD-CLEAR
Caution Use it to initialize the partition selected using CHK-TYPE. If 0 or 4 is selected, the executing will be invalid. If 1 is selected, the image control data stored in the SRAM area or the general file storage area will also be initialized. Using the Mode 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key.
5-81 T
6 OPTION Machine Settings Mode

6.1 COPIER
The following screen will appear in response to COPIER>OPTION; lists of items will follow:
Display
I/O
Test
Counter
BODY USER CST ACC INT-FACE
F05-601-01
5-82 T
COPIER>OPTION>BODY
BODY
Use it to make machine-related settings.
MODEL-SZ
Settings Use it to select the mode of indication by destination and of the ADF original size detection. 0: AB (6R5E), 1: INCH (5R4E), 2: A (3R3E), 3: AB/INCH (6R5E) Use it to set fixing cleaning mode: During last rotation after the end of printing, the fixing assembly is rotated idly at 1/4 the fixing speed. 0: no cleaning (default) 1: once per 500 sheets; temperature control at 225 C , idle rotation for 60 sec 2: once per 200 sheets; temperature control at 225 C , idle rotation for 60 sec 3: once per 100 sheets; temperature control at 225 C , idle rotation for 60 sec 4: not used 5: not used Use it to select a fixing control temperature. 0: disable (default) 1: place priority on productivity; keep control temperature constant: 10 C 2: keep control temperature constant: -6 C 3: keep control temperature constant: -3 C 4: place priority on fixing; keep control temperature constant: +3 C 5: keep control temperature constant: +6 C 6: keep control temperature constant: +10 C 7: keep control temperature constant: +15 C Use it to enable or disable the environment sensor. 0: auto control by environment sensor 1: fixed mode (for high humidity) 2: fixed mode (for normal humidity) 3: fixed mode (for low humidity) (In 1, 2, or 3, the move of control does not depend on the environment sensor.)
FIX-CLN
Settings
FIX-TEMP
Settings
HUM-SW
Settings
5-83 T
COPIER>OPTION>BODY
SCANSLCT
Use it to enable or disable the original size detection mechanism for the ADF. When enabled, the scan size is determined in relation to the original size. 0: off (default), 1: on Use it to set the transfer charging bias output control method for large-size paper. 0: normal (auto mode), 1: constant voltage control (manual mode) When manual mode is selected, make fine settings in ADJUST>HVTR>TR-N1. If an image fault occurs as a result of faulty charging of the drum unit, change the level of primary charging current to correct the fault. It is effective if a sandy image (white dots in solid areas) occurs between the installation of the drum unit to printing of 2000 sheets. 0: no increase in charging current (default), 1: increase in charging current The setting of this mode is cleared (1 0) for the following: When APVC is executed after installing a new drum unit. When COPIER>FUNCTION>D-GAMMA is executed in service mode. When the setting is changed in this service mode. Use it to set the arrangement of the original sensors. 0: AB-configuration (default, 1: Inch-configuration, 2: A-configuration) If you have changed the arrangement of the original sensors, select the appropriate setting to suit the new arrangement.
Settings
TRANS-SW
Settings Caution
PRIAC-SW
Settings Caution
SENS-CNF
Settings Caution
5-84 T
COPIER>OPTION>BODY
CONFIG
Settings Use it to select any of the multiple pieces of firmware stored on the hard disk to suit the selected destination and paper size: XXYYZZAA XX: country (JP), YY: language (ja), ZZ (00): destination, AA (00): paper configuration The method of indication COPIER>DISPLAY>USER>LANGUAGE. The selections in parentheses are default selections; for the country and the languages, names are given. Using the Mode 1) Select <CONFIG>. 2) Select the item to change (to highlight), and press the +/- key. 3) Each press on the +/- key move the selection to the next item. 4) When the desired item is indicated, press the OK key. 5) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Use it to change the level of sharpness of soft the image. A higher setting makes the image sharper. 1 to 5 (default: 3) for factory. 0 to 3 (default: 0) Use it to enable or disable black line reduction mode (disabling edge emphasis) for stream reading. When enabled, the black lines will be less conspicuous but the edges of the images will be less crisp. 0: disable (default) 1: enable Use it to set the fixing trail removal mode in a high humidity environment. When 1 is set, the following will occur: The laser intensity will be reduced by 50 V. The fixing film control speed is changed from 539 to 535 m/sec. The fixing/feeding speed is reduced: B4: from 14 10 ppm B5R: from 28 15 ppm LGL: from 14 10 ppm A4R,etc.: from 18 10 ppm 0: disable (default) 1: enable
SHARP
Settings
COTDPC-D
Settings
DF-BLINE
Caution Settings
FIX-SMR
Caution
Settings
5-85 T
COPIER>OPTION>BODY
DECRL-FN
Settings Caution Use it to enable or disable delivery curl reducing fan. 0: disable (default) 1: enable When 1 is selected, the curl reducing fan is rotated for 30 sec after the image leading edge sensor goes ON. Use it to enable or disable transfer charging roller cleaning enhancement mode. 0: disable (default) 1: enable Make sure that the transfer output between sheets for single-sided printing is set to cleaning bias output. Use it to enable or disable the fan extension mode at the end of a job. 0: disable (default) 1: enable Use it to drive all fans for 5 min after the end of a print job received in sleep mode. COPIER>OPTION>USER
TR-CLN
Settings Caution
FAN-EXTN
Settings Caution
USER
Making user-related settings
COPY-LIM
Settings Use it to change the upper limit imposed on the number of copies. 1 to 999 copies (default: 999) Use it to enable or disable sleep mode. 0: enable (default), 1: disable Use it to enable or disable the original size detection function. 0: enable (default), 1: disable After making a selection, be user to turn off and then on the main power switch. Use it to indicate the type of software counter 1 of the control panel. The type of soft counter 1 cannot be changed. 101: total 1 (default: fixed to 101) (T05-601-01)
SLEEP
Settings
SIZE-DET
Settings Caution
COUNTER1
Caution Settings
5-86 T
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COUNTER2
Settings Use it to change the type of soft counter 2 of the control panel to suit the needs of the user. 000 to 804 (T05-601-01); default: 000 (100V model), 103 (120/230V model) Use it to change the type of soft counter 3 in the control panel to suit the needs of the user. 000 to 804 (T05-601-01); default: 000 (100V model), 201 (120/230V model) Use it to change the type of soft counter 4 of the control panel to suit the needs of the user. 000 to 804 (T05-601-01); default: 000 (100V model), 203 (120/230V model) Use it to change the type of soft counter 5 of the control panel to suit the needs of the user. 000 to 804 (T05-601-01); default: 000 Use it to change the type of soft counter 6 of the control panel to suit the needs of the user. 000 to 804 (T05-601-01); default: 000 Use it to change the notation of date. In the 120V model, the default is 1. 0: YY MM/DD (default), 1: DD/MM YY, 2: MM/DD/YY Use it to impose restrictions on the Box function for the Control Card IV (CC-IV). 0: enable operation and do not use remote charge regardless of presence/absence of card 1: enable operation regardless of presence/absence of card; enable print job, but disable print with card (if card is present, enable printing and charge); default 2: disable operation for remote; disable print job from remote Use it to specify whether B4 paper is counted as large-size or small-size for soft counters 1 through 6. 0: small size (default), 1: large size 5-87 T
COUNTER3
Settings
COUNTER4
Settings
COUNTER5
Settings
COUNTER6
Settings
DATE-DSP
Caution Settings
MB-CCV
Settings
B4-L-CNT
Settings
COPIER>OPTION>USER
TRY-STP
Caution Settings Use it to impose a limit to the number of sheets for stapling in the finisher and to suspend printing if sizes are mixed. If 1 is set, occurrence of jams and alignment will be outside the consideration. 0: normal mode (suspend printing if limit to number/mixed sizes is detected); default 1: suspend when height sensor goes ON (paper full) Use it to indicate the Extra Length key for paper up to 630 mm long (multifeeder, free; the ADF will also accommodate paper up to 630 mm long). 0: normal mode (default), 1: extra length mode (key indicated) Use it to enable or disable a warning for the result of dust detection in stream reading mode. 0: disable indication (default), 1: enable indication Use it to enable or disable the indication of the serial number in response to a press on the Counter Check key. 0: enable (default), 1: disable Use it to select the number of lines for printing in photo mode. 0: 141 lines (default), 1: 134 lines Use it to enable or disable the use of a copy job auto start when the coin robot/ card reader is used. 0: enable copy job auto start (default) 1: disable copy job auto start Use it to enable or disable original size detection in book mode. 0: disable (original size entered from control panel; default) 1: enable (original size detected automatically) Use it to enable or disable the network scan function. 0: disable (default), 1: enable
MF-LG-ST
Settings
SPECK-DP
Settings
CNT-DISP
Settings
PH-D-SEL
Settings
COPY-JOB
Settings
OP-SZ-DT
Settings
NW-SCAN
Settings
5-88 T
COPIER>OPTION>USER
Soft Counter Specifications

The soft counters are classified a follows in terms of input numbers: 100s: total 500s: scan 200s: copy 600s: box 300s: print 700s: received file print 400s: copy + print 800s: report pint Guide to the Table : counter used in the machine 4C: full color mono:mono color (Y, M, C/R, G, B/sepia) Bk: black mono L: large size (larger than B4) S: small size (B4 or smaller) 1/2: count of large-size sheets; B4 or larger may be counted as large-size paper in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>USER>B4-L-CNT. Yes/No No. 000 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 Counter no indication total 1 total 2 total (L) total (S) total (4C1) total (4C2) total (mono) total (Bk1) total (Bk2) total (mono/L) total (mono/S) total (Bk/L) total (Bk/S) total (4C + mono + Bk/double-sided) total 1 (double-sided) total 2 (double-sided) L (double-sided) S (double-sided) copy (total 1) copy (total 2) copy (L) copy (S) Yes/No No. 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 Counter copy A (total 1) copy A (total 2) copy A (L) copy A (S) local copy (total 1) local copy (total 2) local copy (L) local copy (S) remote copy (total 1) remote copy (total 2) remote copy (L) remote copy (S) copy (4C1) copy (4C2) copy (mono 1) copy (mono 2) copy (Bk 1) copy (Bk 2) copy (4C/L) copy (4C/S) copy (mono/L) copy (mono/S) copy (Bk/L) copy (Bk/S)
115 116 117 201 202 203 204
T05-601-01a
5-89 T
COPIER>OPTION>USER
Yes/No No. 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 Counter copy (4C + mono/L) copy (4C + mono/S) copy (4C + mono/2) copy (4C + mono/1) copy (4C/L/doublesided) copy (4C/S/doublesided) copy (mono /L/ double-sided) copy (mono/S/ double-sided) copy (Bk/L/doublesided) copy (Bk/S/doublesided) print (total 1) print (total 2) print (L) print (S) print A (total 1) print A (total 2) print A (L) print A (S) print (4C1) print (4C2) print (mono 2) print (Bk 1) print (Bk 2) print (4C/L) print (4C/S) print (mono/L) print (mono/S) print (Bk/L) print (Bk/S) print (4C + mono/L) print (4C + mono/S) print (4C + mono/2) print (4C + mono/1) Yes/No No. 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 411 412 413 414 501 502 503 504 Counter print (4C/L/doublesided) print (4C/S/doublesided) print (mono/L/ double-sided) print (mono/S/ double-sided) print (Bk/L/doubledied) print (Bk/S/doublesided) PDL print (total 1) PDL print (total 2) PDL print (L) PDL print (S) copy + print (4C/L) copy + print (4C/S) copy + print (Bk/L) copy + print (Bk/S) copy + print (Bk 2) copy + print (Bk 1) copy + print (4C + mono/L) copy + print (4C + mono/S) copy + print (4C + mono/2) copy + print (L) copy + print (S) copy + print (2) copy + print (1) scan (total 1) copy san (total/4) scan (total 2) scan (L) copy scan (L/4) scan (S) copy scan (S/4)
T05-601-01b
5-90 T
COPIER>OPTION>USER
Yes/No No. 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 Counter Bk scan (total 1) copy scan (Bk) Bk scan (total 2) Bk scan (L) copy scan (Bk/L) Bk scan (S) copy scan (Bk/S) color scan (total 1) copy scan (4C) color scan (total 2) color scan (L) copy scan (4C/L) color scan (S) copy scan (4C/S) copy scan (L) copy scan (S) copy scan (total) Yes/No No. 601 602 603 604 701 702 703 704 801 802 803 804 Counter box print (total 1) box print (total 2) box print (L) box print (S) received file print (total 1) received file print (total 2) received file print (L) receiced file print (S) report print (total 1) report print (total 2) report print (L) report print (S)
T05-601-01c
5-91 T
COPIER>OPTION>CST
CST
Use it to make cassette-related settings. Be sure to turn off and then on the power after making the settings.
U1-NAME U2-NAME U3-NAME U4-NAME U5-NAME U6-NAME U7-NAME U8-NAME

Settings Use it to enable or disable the indication of the name of paper detected (size groups from U1 through U8). 0: disable (default; if the paper size dial on the cassette is set to U1 through U8, the touch panel will indicate U1 through U8) 1: enable (if the paper size dial on the cassette is set to U1 through U8, the names selected in CST-U1 through -U8 is indicate on the touch panel) Use it to select the name of paper used for paper size group U1. Select a number from T05-601-02 (codes and paper names). This mode is designed for entering a number, and such notations as FLSC or OFI will not be indicated in service mode. U1: 24, 26, 27, 28, 33, 36, 37
CST-U1
Caution Settings
CST-U2 CST-U3 CST-U4 CST-U5 CST-U6 CST-U7 CST-U8

Caution Settings Select a number from T05-601-02; codes and paper names for the name of paper (notation) to be used for paper size groups U2 through U8. However, U2 through U8 size cassettes are designed for specific paper sizes. U2: 35, U3: 25, U4: 31, U5: 32, U6: 34, U7: 22, 29, U8: 23, 30
5-92 T
COPIER>OPTION>CST
ENV1
Settings Use it to register envelope cassette ENV1. 21: COM10, 22: ISO-B5, 23: Monarch, 24: ISO-C5, 25: DL, 26: No. 4 Use it to register envelope cassette ENV2. 21: COM10, 22: ISO-B5, 23: Monarch, 24: ISO-C5, 25: DL, 26: No. 4
ENV2
Settings
Codes and Paper Names

Code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Notation A1 A2 A3R A3 A4R A4 A5 A5R B1 B2 B3 B4R B4 B5R B5 11 17 LTRR LTR STMT STMTR Name A1 A2 A3R A3 A4R A4 A5 A5R B1 B2 B3 B4R B4 B5R B5 11 17 LETTERR LETTER STATEMENT STATEMENTR Code 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Notation LGL K-LGL K-LGLR FLSC A-FLS OFI E-OFI B-OFI A-LTR A-LTRR G-LTR G-LTRR A-LGL G-LGL FOLI A-OFI M-OFI Name LEGAL Koran Government Korean Government R FOOLSCAP Australian FOOLSCAP OFFICIO Ecuadorian OFFICIO Bolivian OFFICIO Argentine LETTER Argentine LETTERR Government LETTER Government LETTERR Argentine LEGAL Government LEGAL FOLIO Argentine OFFICIO Mexican OFFICIO
ALL
T05-601-02
5-93 T
COPIER>OPTION>ACC
ACC
Use it to make accessory-related selections.
COIN
Use it to enable or disable the indication of the coin vendor. Use it to change the indication for the control card in the control panel for the coin vendor. 0: disable (default), 1: enable for coin vendor Use it to select a paper size for use in the paper deck. After making a selection, be sure to turn off and then on the main power switch. 0: A4 (default), 1: B5, 2: LTR, 3: A-LTR COPIER>OPTION>INT-FACE
Settings
DK-P
Caution Settings
INT-FACE
Use it to set conditions for connection to an dextral controller.
IMG-CONT
Use it to set the detection of connection of an external controller. Set it so that the connection of an external controller is indicated. Use it to change the User Mode screen. Use it to change the network settings. 0: absent (default), 1: external controller present
Settings
5-94 T
FEEDER>OPTION
6.2 FEEDER
SIZE-SW
Settings Use it to enable or disable detection of mixed original sizes (AB and Inch sizes). 0: disable (default), 1: enable
SORTER>OPTION
6.3 SORTER
BLNK-SW
Settings Use it to set the margin width (W) for both sides of a fold when a saddle stitcher is used. 0: normal width (5 mm), 1: large width (10 mm; default)
W
F05-603-01
MD-SPRTN
Caution Settings Use it to set the retraction movement in response to a finisher error (excluding a delivery motor error). After making a selection, be sure to turn off and then on the main power switch. 0: disable retraction movement (default), 1: enable detraction movement
5-95 T
BOARD>OPTION
6.4 BOARD
MENUE-1
Settings Use it to indicate level 1 of the printer settings menu. 0: do not indicate (default), 1: indicate Use it to indicate level 2 of the printer settings menu. 0: do not indicate (default), 1: indicate Use it to indicate level 3 of the printer settings menu. 0: do not indicate (default), 1: indicate Use it to indicate level 4 of the printer settings menu. 0: do not indicate (default), 1: indicate Use it to enable or disable the function of slot 1 as when the board in slot 1 of PCI is out of order. 0: normal (default), 1: disable (not to use board function) Use it to enable or disable the function of slot 2 as when the board in slot 2 of PCI is out of order. 0: normal (default), 1; disable (not to use board function) Use it to enable or disable the function of slot 3 when the board in slot 3 of PCI is out of order. 0: normal (default), 1: disable (not to use board function)
MENUE-2
Settings
MENUE-3
Settings
MENUE-4
Settings
PCI1-OFF
Settings
PCI2-OFF
Settings
PCI3-OFF
Settings
5-96 T
7 TEST Test Print Mode

The following screen will appear in response to COPIER>TEST; lists of items will follow:
Display PG
I/O
Test
Counter
NETWORK
F05-701-01
5-97 T
COPIER>TEST>PG
PG
Use it to select the type of test print and generate it.
TYPE
Caution Settings Enter the number or the type of test print you want, and press the OK key to generate it. Be sure to return it to 00 after printing the test print. 00: normal print, 01 through 08: as in T05-701-01 Use it to switch between print modes for test printing (PG>TYPE). 0: text mode, 1: photo mode Use it to select the source of paper when generating a test print. 1: cassette 1 (default), 2: cassett 2, 3: cassette 3, 4: cassette 4, 5: through 6: not used, 7: paper deck, 8: multifeeder tray
TXPH
Settings
PG-PICK
Settings
Type Input Numbers and Test Prints

Input No. 00 01 02 03 Description image from CCD (normal print) grid 17 gradations (w/ image correction) 17 gradations (w/o image correction) Input No. 04 05 06 07 08 Description blank halftone solid black vertical straight lines horizontal straight lines -
T05-701-01
5-98 T
COPIER>TEST>NETWORK
NETWORK
Use it to check the network-related items for connection.
PING
Caution Use it to check the connection between machine and the network (TCP/IP only). Use this mode when checking the connection to the network at time of installation or when the connection to the network is faulty.
< 1/
Test
Counter
< NETWORK >
1>
0. 0.
< READY >
PING
0.
Result(OK/NG)
IP address input
+/-
OK
F05-701-02 Using the Mode 1) Turn off the main power switch. 2) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on the main power switch. 3) Inform the users system administrator that the machine has been installed, and ask him/her to set up the network. 4) Inform the system administrator that the network connection will be checked, and obtain the remote host address (IP address of the PC on the users network) for sending a PING. 5) Make the following selections: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the IP address obtained in step 4) using the keypad; and press the OK key. If the connection to the network is correct, OK will be indicated. (End the work.) If NG is indicated, check the connection for the network cable; if normal, go to step 6). If a fault is found, connect the cable correctly, and go to step 5).
5-99 T
COPIER>TEST>NETWORK 6) Make the following selections : COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the loop-back address* (127.0.0.1), and press the OK key and then the Start key. If NG is indicated, suspect a fault in the TCP/IP settings of the machine. Go back to step 3), and check the settings once again. If OK is indicated, the TCP/IP setting may be assumed to be free of a problem. However, the connection of the network interface board (NIC) or the board itself may have a fault. Go to step 7). *The loop-back address is returned in front of the NIC and, therefore, it enables a check on the TCP/IP settings of the machine. 7) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, press the OK key. If NG is indicated, suspect a fault in the connection of the NIC or in the NIC itself. Check the connection of the NIC or replace it. If OK is indicated, the network setting of the machine and the NIC may be assumed to be free of a fault. In this case, the users network may have a problem. Report to the system administrator for corrective action.
5-100 T
8 COUNTER Counter Mode

The following screen will appear in response to COPIER>COUNTER; lists of items will follow:
TOTAL PICK-UP FEEDER JAM DRBL-1 DRBL-2
F05-801-01
Clearing the Counter Readings

1) Select the item to clear (highlight). 2) Press the Clear key of the control panel. The counter will be cleared, and it will read 00000000.
Dividing Papers Between Small-Size and Large-Size

Large-size (L): Small-size (S): lager than A4/LTR A4/LTR or smaller
5-101 T
COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL
Guide to the Counters for Periodically Replaced Parts and Durables

The machine is equipped with counters for periodically replaced parts and durables (DRBL-1/DRBL-2) so as to provide an idea of when to replace the parts. A small-size sheet increments the counter reading by 1, while a large-size sheet increments the count by 2. EX. TR-ROOL / 00000201 / 00240000 / 0% !! 000082 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [1] indicates the name of the part; in the case of the example, the transfer charging roller. [2] indicates the counter reading (actual number of sheets; be sure to clear the reading after replacing the part). [3] indicates the limit (number of sheets before replacement); to change, select the item, and enter a number using the keypad, and then press the OK key. [4] indicates the relationship between the counter reading and the limit. [5] indicates a single exclamation mark (!) for a ratio between 90% and 100%, two marks for 100% and higher; in the case of the example, no indication is made. [6] indicates the number of days to the estimated time of replacement; the example shows 82 days.
List of COUNTER Items

Level 1: COUNETR Mode description
Level 2: TOTAL Level 3: SERVICE1 SERVICE2 COPY PDL-PRT FAX-PRT RMT-PRT BOX-PRT RPT-PRT 2-SIDE SCAN
total counter 1 for service total counter 2 for service copy counter PDL print counter fax received file print counter remote copy/print counter Box print counter repro print counter double-sided print counter scan counter
5-102 T
COPIER>COUNTER>PICK-UP Level 2: PICK-UP Level 3: C1 C2 C3 C4 MF DK 2-SIDE cassette 1 pickup counter cassette 2 pickup counter cassette 3 pickup counter cassette 4 pickup counter multifeeder tray pickup counter paper deck pickup counter double-sided 2nd side pickup counter COPIER>COUNTER>FEEDER Level 2: FEEDER Level 3: FEED feeder(ADF) pickup total counter COPIER>COUNTER>JAM Level 2: JAM Level 3: TOTAL FEEDER SORTER 2-SIDE MF C1 C2 C3 C4 DK machine total jam counter feeder (ADF) jam counter sorter (finisher) jam counter duplex unit jam counter multifeeder tray jam counter cassette 1 jam counter cassette 2 jam counter cassette 3 jam counter cassette 4 jam counter paper deck jam counter
5-103 T
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 Level 2: DRBL-1 Level 3: PRE-LMP TR-ROLL SP-SC-EL DVG-CYL C1-PU-RL C1-SP-RL C1-FD-RL C2-PU-RL C2-SP-RL C2-FD-RL C3-PU-RL C3-SP-RL C3-FD-RL C4-PU-RL C4-SP-RL C4-FD-RL M-PU-RL M-SP-PD FX-LW-RL FX-UNIT FX-FILM FX-CL-RL pre-exposure lamp counter transfer charging roller counter separation static eliminator paper passage counter developing cylinder counter cassette 1 pickup roller counter cassette 1 separation roller counter cassette 1 feeding roller counter cassette 2 pickup roller counter cassette 2 separation roller counter cassette 2 feeding roller counter cassette 3 pickup roller counter cassette 3 separation roller counter cassette 3 feeding roller counter cassette 4 pickup roller counter cassette 4 separation roller counter cassette 4 feeding roller counter multifeeder pickup counter multifeeder separation pad counter fixing lower roller counter fixing unit count fixing film counter fixing cleaning roller counter COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2 Level 2: DRBL-2 Level 3: DF-PU-RL DF-SP-RL DF-SP-RD DF-FD-RL LNT-TAPE PD-PU-PL PD-SP-RL PD-FD-RL FIN-STPR SDL-STPL PUNCH ADF pickup roller counter ADF separation plate counter ADF separation pad counter ADF feeding roller counter ADF dust collecting tape counter paper deck pickup roller counter paper deck separation roller counter paper deck feeding roller counter stapler counter saddle stapler counter punch counter
5-104 T
1 Self Diagnosis
The machine is equipped with a mechanism that checks the condition of the machine (especially sensor outputs) and indicates an error code in the control panel upon detection of a fault. The following tables show the codes used, timing of detection, and possible causes; a 4digit code is a detail code, and may be checked in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM/ ERR).
6-1 T

Code Description [Copier] E000 Heater temperature fault (fails to increase) E001 Overheating detection error E002 Heater temperature error (fails to reach specific level; inadequate increase) E003 Heater temperature error (abnormal drop; low-temperature detection) E007 Fixing film rotation error E010 Main motor rotation error E014 Fixing motor rotation error E019 Waste toner case full, sensor error E032 DA unit communication error E051 Horizontal registration HP detention error E064 Power supply voltage error (high-voltage error) E100 Laser BD error E110 Polygon motor rotation error E202 No. 1 mirror base HP detecting error E204 ADF image leading edge signal detection fault (absent) E220 Lamp ON error E225 Standard white plate/edge white plate read error E240 Mcon-Dcon communication error E243 Mcon-control panel communication error E248 Backup (EEPROM) error E261 Zero-cross signal error E302 Shading error E315 Image data processing error E601 Image transfer error E602 Hard disk error E604 Image memory fault E605 Image memory battery fault E606 HDD error E674 Fax board error E677 PDL board mounting error E710 IPC initialization error (Rcon) E711 IPC register error (ctrl) E712 Communication error (with ADF) E713 Communication error (with sorter finisher) Code E716 E717 E719 E732 E733 E737 E740 E741 E742 E743 E803 Description Communication error (with pedestal) Communication error (with ASSIST) Card reader, coin vendor communication error Reader communication error Printer communication error SDRAM error Ethernet board error PCI bus error RIP1 board error Mcon-Rcon communication error (Rcon detection) MPWS power supply voltage error (low voltage error) Fan rotation error Pedestal main motor rotation error
E805 E901 [ADF] E420 Back-up data read error E421 Back-up data write error E422 IPC error [Saddle Finisher-G1] E501 Communication error (Punch unit) E505 Back-up RAM E510 Feed motor E514 Delivery motor E530 Width plate shift motor E531 Stapler motor E532 Stapler slide motor E537 Alignment motor E540 Tray ascent/descent motor E577 Paddle motor E590 Puncher motor E592 Puncher sensor error E593 Puncher shift motor E5F1 Saddle folder motor [Finisher-J1] E500 Communication error E514 Stack handling motor E530 Rear alignment motor E531 Stapler motor E537 Front alignment motor E577 Delivery motor E580 Delivery tray ascent/descent motor E585 Stack handling error
6-2 T
1.1 Detail Codes (copier)
E000
0000 The reading of the main thermistor does not reach 30C 1 sec after the main power switch is turned on. Or, it does not reach 70C 2 sec thereafter. The fixing film unit is faulty. The main thermistor has an open circuit. The fixing heater has an open circuit. The main power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. To reset the error, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Main cause
Caution
Action 1. Connector Is the connector of the fixing assembly connected? a. main power supply PCB (J8) <-> relay connector <-> heater b. DC controller PCB (J320) <-> relay connector <-> thermistor NO: Connect the connector. 2. Fixing film unit (thermistor) Check the interval between pin 1 and pin 2 and between pin 3 and pin 4 of the connectosr (4-pin) of the thermistor for electrical continuity. Is it (open)? YES: The heater has an open circuit, or the thermal switch is open. Replace the fixing film unit. 4. Main power supply PCB, DC controller PCB Press the Start key. Is the drive voltage of the heater supplied by the connector J8 of the main power supply PCB? Main heater: between J8-1 (FSR1) and J8-5 (FSR COM) Sub heater: between J8-3 (FSR2) and J8-5 (FSR COM) YES: The heater drive power supply is faulty. Replace the main power supply PCB. NO: The thermistor control mechanism is faulty. Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-3 T
E001
0000 0001 0002 Main cause The main thermistor detects 250C or higher. The main thermistor or the sub thermistor detects overheating (hardware circuit detection). The sub thermistor detects about 295C or higher. The fixing film unit is faulty (i.e., the thermistor has a short circuit). The main power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. To clear the error, execute the following in service move: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
Caution
Action 1. Fixing film unit Check the interval between pin 1 and pin 2 and between pin 3 and pin 4 of the connectors (4-pin) of the thermistor for electrical continuity. Is it 0 (short circuit)? YES: The thermistor has a short circuit. Replace the fixing film unit. If the thermistor has a short circuit, the indication in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG) will be as follows from the start: FIXC=250C for the main thermistor; FIX-E=310C for the sub thermistor.
REF.
2. Main power supply PCB, DC controller PCB Try replacing the main power supply PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-4 T
E002
0000 The temperature of the fixing film is as follows: 1. has exceeded 100C, but does not reach 115C within 1 sec thereafter. 2. has exceeded 140C, but does not reach 150C within 1 sec thereafter. 3. has exceeded 160C, but does not reach 165C within 1 sec thereafter. The fixing film unit is faulty (i.e., the main thermistor TH1 has poor contact, or the fixing heater is faulty). The main power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. To clear the error, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>FCLEAR>ERR. See the description for E003.
Main cause
Caution
Action
E003
0000 Main cause The main thermistor reading is lower than 140C when paper is moved. The fixing film unit is faulty (i.e., the main thermistor (TH1) has poor contact or has an open circuit; or, the fixing heater is faulty). The main power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. To clear the error, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
Caution
Action 1. State Turn on the power switch, and clear E002/E003. Thereafter, turn off and then on the power switch. Does the fixing heater operate? NO: See The fixing heater fails to operate. 2. Wiring Is the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the fixing film unit normal? NO: Correct the wiring. 3. Fixing film unit, DC controller PCB Try replacing the fixing film unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-5 T
E007
0000 An error in the rotation of the fixing film is detected. The reading of the main thermistor is 100C or higher and, in addition, the fixing film sensor does not detect the rotation of the film for 6 sec or more while the fixing motor is driven. The fixing film sensor (PS45) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. To clear the error, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
Main cause Caution
Action 1. Wiring Are the wring and the connectors connected securely? DC controller PCB (J311) <-> relay connector <-> fixing film sensor NO: Connect the wiring and the connectors. 2. Fixing film sensor Check the fixing film rotation signal.When the fixing motor is rotating, is the film rotation detection signal sent by the fixing film sensor to the concoctor J311 of the DC controller PCB? Film rotation detection signal: 5V pulse signal between J311-A9 (FILM_ROT_D) and J311-A8 (GND); at intervals of 100 msec ON and 440 msec OFF NO: If the fixing film is normal, replace the sensor. 3. Fixing film unit, DC controller PCB Is there a fault in the fixing film edge rotation detection mechanism? YES: Replace the fixing film unit. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-6 T
E010
0000 After the main motor drive signal is generated, the clock signal does to arrive within 1.3 sec. The main motor (M2) is faulty. the DC controller PCB is faulty. Main cause Action 1. Connector Is the connector of the main motor connected? NO: Connect the connector. 2. Main power supply PCB Is the drive voltage (24 V) of the main motor supplied by the main power supply PCB? Main power supply PCB: between J202-1 (24VU1-SW) and J202-2 (OVU1) NO: Replace the main power supply PCB. 3. Main controller (M2), DC controller PCB Press the Start key. Is the lock signal of the main motor present at the connector J308 on the DC controller PCB? Lock signal: J318-A10 (MM_LOCK) YES: Replace the main motor. NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB.
6-7 T
E014
000 After the fixing motor drive signal is generated, the clock signal does not arrive within 1.3 sec. The fixing motor (M19) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Main cause Action 1. Connector Is the connector of the fixing motor connected? NO: Connect the connector. 2. Main power supply PCB Is the drive voltage (24 V) of the fixing motor supplied by the main power supply PCB? Main power supply PCB: between J202-3 (24VU1-S) and J202-4 (OVU1) NO: Replace the main power supply PCB. 3. Fixing motor (M19), DC controller PCB Press the Start key. Is the lock signal of the fixing motor present at the connector (J312) on the DC controller PCB? Lock signal: J312-B4 (FSRM_LOCK*) the DC controller PCB change from 0 to about 5 V? YES: Replace the fixing motor. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-8 T
E019
0000 Main cause The waste toner case is full of waste toner. The waste toner case is full. The waste toner case full detection mechanism is soiled. The waste toner sensor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. To clear the error, dispose of the waste toner, and turn off and then on the main power switch.
Caution
If the error is still indicated after disposing of the waste toner, perform the following: 1. Waste toner case full detection mechanism Remove the waste toner case, and turn off and then on the main power switch. Is 'E019' absent? YES: The waste toner case full detection assembly is soiled with toner. Clean both inside and outside of area A of the waste toner case with alcohol. Make sure that no dirt remains inside and outside the area around the round recess.
A
Action
2. Waste toner full sensor, DC Controller PCB Try replacing the waste toner case full sensor. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-9 T
E032
0001 Main cause Action 1. Connector Is the DA unit connected securely? NO: Connect it securely. 2. DA controller, Main controller PCB Try replacing the DA unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB. The DA unit connection is disconnected (after connection). The DA unit is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty.
6-10 T
E051
0000 At start-up, home position is not detected when the horizontal registration assembly is moved 100 mm in the direction of home position. The horizontal home position sensor is faulty. The horizontal registration motor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Action 1. Connector Are the connectors of the horizontal registration home position sensor and the horizontal registration motor connected? a. DC controller PCB (J304) <-> relay connector <-> horizontal registration home position sensor b. DC controller PCB (J304) <-> relay connector <-> horizontal registration motor NO: Connect the connectors. 2. Sensor lever (damage and interference), Sensor Is abnormal noise heard from the horizontal registration assembly in keeping with the motor rotation? YES: a. The horizontal registration assembly is out of place because of damage to the sensor lever. Replace the sensor lever. b. The horizontal registration assembly malfunctions because of the presence of foreign matter. Remove the foreign matter. c. The sensor is faulty and cannot detect home position. Replace the sensor. 3. Horizontal registration motor, DC controller PCB Is the horizontal registration motor control signal generated by the DC controller PCB? J304-1/2: 24 V, J304-3/4/5/6: motor excitation signal YES: The horizontal registration motor is faulty. Replace the motor. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-11 T
E064
0000 The presence of a high-voltage error is communicated by the composite power supply PCB. (The output for primary charging, developing, or transfer has deviated from a specific level of voltage.) The contact has poor connection. The wiring is faulty. The composite power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
Action 1. Contact Is any of the contacts of the primary charging roller, developing assembly, or transfer charging roller soiled? Or, is there poor contact? YES: Clean the contact, and set it once again. 2. Wiring Is the wiring between the contacts for the following normal: DC controller PCB (J301), composite power supply PCB (J136), primary charging roller, developing assembly, transfer charging roller? a. DC controller PCB (J301) <-> composite power supply PCB (J136) b. composite power supply PCB (J130-7) <-> primary charging roller contact c. composite power supply PCB (J130-1) <-> developing assembly contact d. composite power supply PCB (FT133) <-> transfer roller contact NO: Correct the connection. 3. Composite power supply PCB, DC controller PCB Try replacing the composite power supply PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: Yes. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-12 T
E100
0001 0002 0003 The BD signal is not detected 10 times or more within 10 msec in 5 msec after the generation of the laser drive signal. While the laser is ON, the BD signal cycle is outside a specific range 20 times or more continuously. While the laser is ON, the horizontal sync signal cycle is outside a specific range 20 times or more. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The BD PCB is faulty. The laser scanner unit is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
Action 1. BD PCB Try replacing the BD PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 2. Laser scanner unit, DC controller PCB Try replacing the laser scanner unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-13 T
E110
0000 The motor ready signal does not arrive within 15 sec after the laser scanner motor drive signal is generated. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit, disconnection). The laser scanner motor (M10) is faulty. The main power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Action 1. Connector Are the connector (J312) on the DC controller PCB and the relay connector connected securely? NO: Connect the connectors securely. 2. Main power supply PCB During printing, does the voltage between J204-1 (+) and J204-2 (-) on the main power supply PCB change from 0 to about 24 V? NO: Replace the main power supply PCB. 3. Laser scanner unit, DC controller PCB Try replacing the laser scanner unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-14 T
E202
The home position sensor does not go ON when the main power switch is turned on. 0001 The scanner home position sensor does not go OFF when the scanner is moved forward by 40 mm. 0002 The scanner home position sensor does not go ON when the scanner is moved reverse 450 mm. Main cause The scanner home position sensor (PS400) is faulty. The scanner motor (M400) is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty.
Action 1. State Does the scanner operate when the power is turned on? NO: See 4.2.9 The No. 1 mirror base does not operate. 2. Scanner home position sensor (PS400), Reader controller PCB Move the No. 1 mirror base by hand from home position. Does the output of the scanner home position sensor change? (J405-2 on the reader controller PCB is 5 V (in HP) or 0V (away from HP)) NO: Replace the sensor. YES: Replace the rear controller PCB.
E204
0001 While an original is being read, the image leading edge signal does not arrive from the ADF. The ADF controller PCB is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty. When this code occurs, no code is indicated, but the keys are locked. The code may be checked in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR. Main cause Caution
Action 1. Read sensor (S2) Try replacing the read sensor of the ADF. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 2. ADF controller PCB, Reader controller PCB Try replacing the ADF controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the reader controller PCB.
6-15 T
E220
0001 Main cause Action 1. Wiring Is the wiring from the scanning lamp to the reader controller PCB normal? NO: Connect the connector firmly, and correct or replace the wiring. 2. Inverter PCB, Reader controller PCB Try replacing the lamp inverter PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the reader controller PCB. A fault is detected on the inverter PCB for the scanning lamp. The inverter PCB is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty.
E225
0000 0002 A specific level cannot be attained for the signal during CCD gain correction at power-on. The edge gain correction level is different from the correction level for the preceding sheet by a specific level or more. The scanning lamp is faulty. The CCD PCB is faulty. The rear controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
Action 1. Scanning lamp (LAMP1) Is the lamp ON during the initial operation after the main power switch is turned on? NO: Replace the scanning lamp. 2. CCD unit, Reader controller PCB Try replacing the CCD unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the reader controller PCB.
6-16 T
E240
0000 A fault occurs in communication between the CPU of the main controller PCB and the CPU of the DC controller PCB. The main controller PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Main cause Action 1. Wiring Is the wiring from the min controller PCB to the DC controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the wiring. 2. DC controller PCB, Main controlled PCB Try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB.
E243
0000 A fault occurs in the communication between the CPU of the control panel PCB and the CPU of the main controller PCB. The control panel CPU PCB is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. Main cause Action 1. Wiring Is the wiring from the main controller PCB to the DC controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the wiring. 2. Control panel CPU PCB, Main controller PCB Try replacing the control panel CPU PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB.
6-17 T
E248
0001 0002 0003 A difference is discovered between the ID in EEPROM read when the main power switch is turned on and the ID in ROM upon comparison. The data read does not match the data written to EEPROM. A difference is discovered between the ID of EEPROM and the ID of ROM upon comparison while writing data. The EEPROM (IC403) of the reader controller PCB is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
Action 1. Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>CON. Is the proem corrected? YES: End. After executing the service mode, be sure to enter the service mode data newly. 2. EE-PROM, Reader controller PCB Try replacing the EE-PROM. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. After replacement, be sure to enter the service mode data newly. NO: Replace the rear controller PCB. After replacement, be sure to enter the service mode date newly.
E261
0000 The intervals of zero-cross signals deviate from the tolerance range while the fixing heater is supplied with power. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The main power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Making Corrections 1. Connectors Are the connector J205 on the main power supply PCB and the connector J308B on the DC controller PCB securely connected? (zero-cross signal: J205-7 <-> J308B-1) NO: Connect the connectors securely. 2. Main power supply PCB, Main controller PCB Try replacing the main power supply PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-18 T
E302
0001 0002 During shading, the shading processing does not end on the reader controller PCB after 1 sec. During stream reading, the edge white addition processing does not end on the rear controller PCB after 10 sec. The CCD PCB is faulty. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The reader controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
Action 1. Connector Are the connectors (J6001/J6002) on the CCD PCB and the connectors (J5002/J5003) on the reader controller PCB connected securely? NO: Connect the connectors securely. 2. CCD unit Try replacing the CCD unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 3. Reader controller PCB, Main controller PCB Try replacing the reader controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the main controller PCB.
6-19 T
E315
Any of the following is true in the image processing by the main controller: 1. The image data has a fault. 2. The encoding/decoding operation for image data has a fault. 3. The image processing element of the main controller PCB has a fault. Main cause The image data is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. The HDD is faulty.
Action If this error occurs during normal copying or printing, the job in question (image data) is cleared when the main power switch is turned off and then on again; i.e., the machine will be reset. If this error occurs frequently, however, a fault on the main controller PCB is a possibility. Further, if this error occurs in a specific image within the MAIL BOX, damage in data may be assumed; be sure to delete the image from the MAIL BOX.
6-20 T
E601
0000 0001 When an image is transferred between the main controller PCB and the HDD, the main controller PCB detects a fault in control information. When an image is transferred between the main controller PCB and the DC controller PCB, the DC controller PCB detects a fault in the control information. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The HDD is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty
Main cause
Action a. E601-0000 1. Wiring Are the connection and the cable between the connector J1017 on the main controller PCB and the connector J1551 on the HDD normal? YES: End. NO: Correct the connection/cable. 2. HDD, Main controller PCB Try replacing the HDD, and download the system software. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB. b. E601-0001 1. Wiring Are the connection and cable between the connector J122 on the DC controller PCB and the connector J1015 on the main controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the connection/cable. 2. DC controller PCB, Main controller PCB Try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB.
6-21 T
E602
0001 0002 A mounting fault of the HDD is detected when the HDD is started up from the BOOT ROM. A data read fault of the HDD is detected when the HDD is started up from the BOOT ROM. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The HDD is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
Action 1. Wiring Are the connection and the cable between connector J1025 of the main controller PCB and the connector J2005 of the HDD normal? NO: Correct the connector/cable. 2. System software Try re-installing the system software. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 3. HDD, Main controller PCB Try replacing the HDD, and download the system software. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB.
E604
0000 Main cause A fault is detected in the image memory. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The HDD is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty.
E605
0001 Main cause A fault is detected in the battery for the image memory. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The HDD is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty.
6-22 T
E606
0001 A mounting fault of the HDD is detected when the HDD is started up from the BOOT ROM. The HDD is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Making Corrections 1. Wiring Are the connection and cable normal between the connector J1025 on the main controller PCB and the connector J2005 of the HDD? NO: Correct the connection and the cable. 2. System software Try re-installing the system software. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 3. HDD, Main controller PCB Try replacing the HDD and downloading the system software. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB.
E674
0000 A faulty occurs in the communication between the fax PCB and the main controller PCB. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The fax PCB is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Making Corrections 1. Wiring Are the connection and the cable between the connector J 1005 on the main controller PCB and the connector J31 on the FAX PCB normal? NO: Correct the connection and the cable. 2. FAX PCB, Main controller PCB Try replacing the FAX PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB.
6-23 T
E677
0001 A fault occurs it the combination between any of the printer boards (accessories) and the main controller PCB. Any of the printer boards (accessories) is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Action 1. Connector Is the printer board (accessory) connected correctly? NO: Correct the connection. 2. Printer board, Main controller PCB Try replacing the printer board. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB.
6-24 T
E710
0001 0002 0003 When the main power is turned on, the communication IC (IPC) on the reader controller PCB cannot be initialized. When the main power is turned on, the communication IC (IPC) on the DC controller PCB cannot be initialized. When the main power is trend on, the communication IC (IPC) on the main controller PCB cannot be initialized. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty. The machine controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
Action Malfunction, PCBs Turn off and then on the main power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: If E7100001, replace the reader controller PCB. If E710-002, replace the DC controller PCB. If E71-0003, replace the main controller PCB.
6-25 T
E711
0001 0002 0003 Data is written to the error register of the communication IC (IPC) on the reader controller PCB four times or more within 1.5 sec. Data is written to the error register of the communication IC (IPC) on the DC controller PCB four times or more within 2 sec. Data is written to the error register of the communication IC (IPC) on the main controller PCB four times or more within 2 sec. The connector has poor connection. The ADF controller PCB is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The DA unit PCB is faulty. The card reader PCB is faulty.
Main cause
Action a. E711-0001 Connector, ADF controller PCB Is the interface cable between the ADF controller PCB an the reader controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the cable. YES: Replace the ADF controller PCB. b. E711-0002 connector, Finisher controller PCB Is the interface cable between the finisher controller PCB and the DC controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the cable. YES: Replace the finisher controller PCB. c. E711-0003 Connector, DA unit PCB Is the interface cable between the DA unit PCB and the main controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the cable. YES: Replace the NE controller PCB.
6-26 T
E712
0001 0002 The communication is not resumed 3 sec or more after data has been written to the error register of the communication IC (IPC) on the ADF controller PCB. The transmission bit is not enabled 10 sec or more in the sync register of the communication IC (IPC) on e reader controller PCB. The connect has poor connection. The main power supply PCB is faulty. The ADF controller PCB is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
Action 1. Connector Is the interface able between the ADF controller PCB and the reader controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the cable. 2. Main power supply PCB While the ADF is in operation, does the voltage between J203-2 (+) and J203-1 (-) on the main power supply PCB change from 0 to about 24 V? NO: Replace the main power supply PCB. 3. ADF controller PCB, Reader controller PCB Try replacing the ADF controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the rear controller PCB.
6-27 T
E713
0000 The communication with the finisher is not resumed 3 sec or more after it is disrupted. The connector has poor connection. The option power supply PCB is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Action 1. Connector Is the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the options power supply PCB and between the options power supply PCB and the DC controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the wiring. 2. Options power supply PCB Is the voltage between HJ701-6 (+) and J701-7 (-) on the options power supply PCB about 24 V? NO: Replace the options power supply PCB. 3. Finisher controller PCB, DC controller PCB Try replacing the finisher controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-28 T
E716
0000 The ID signal is not detected within a specific period of time after the presence of a pedestal is detected. The connector has poor connection. The main power supply PCB is faulty. The pedestal controller PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Action 1. Connector Is the wiring between the pedestal controller PCB and the main power supply PCB and between the main power supply PCB and the DC controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the wiring. 2. Main power supply PCB Is the voltage between J206-2 (+) and J206-1 (-) on the main power supply PCB about 24 V? NO: Replace the main power supply PCB. 3. Pedestal controller PCB, DC controller PCB Try replacing the pedestal controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller.
E717
0001 The communication with the DA unit is not resumed 3 sec or more after it is disrupted. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The DA unit PCB is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. To clear the error, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Main cause
Caution
Action 1. Connector Is the connection between the DA unit PCB and the main controller PCB secure? NO: Correct the connection. 2. DA unit PCB, main controller PCB Try replacing the DA unit PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB.
6-29 T
E719
0001 The communication between the Card Reader-C1 or the coin vendor and the main controller PCB is disrupted. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The Card Reader-C1 is faulty. The coin vendor is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. To clear the error, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Main cause
Caution
Action 1. Connector Is the Cad Reader-C1 or the coin vendor connected securely? NO: Connect it securely. 2. Coin vendor, Main controller PCB Try replacing the Card Reader-C1 or the coin vendor. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB.
E732
0001 A fault is detected by the main controller PCB in the communication between reader controller PCB and the main controller PCB. The connector has poor connection. The reader controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Action 1. Connector, Reader controller PCB Is the connection between the connector J1014 on the main controller PCB and the connector J409 on the reader controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the connection. YES: Replace the reader controller PCB.
6-30 T
E733
0001 A fault is detected by the main controller PCB in the communication between the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB. The connector has poor connection. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Action 1. Connector, DC controller PCB Is the connection between the connector J1015 on the main controller PCB and the conductor J316 on the DC controlled PCB normal? NO: Correct the connection. YES: Replace the DC controller PCB.
E737
0000 During self diagnosis at power-on, the DRAM check finds a fault in the main controller PCB. The connection of the IC socket is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. Main cause Action 1. Connection Is the DRAM fitted to the socket securely? NO: Fit the DRAM securely. 2. DRAM, Main controller PCB Try replacing the DRAM. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB.
6-31 T
E740
0001 0002 0003 Main cause Action 1. Connector Is the connection between the LAN card and the main controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the connection. 2. LAN card, Main controller PCB Try replacing the LAN card. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB. At power-on, the LAN card has a fault. The MAC address has a fault. The LAN card cannot be read. The LAN card is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty.
E741
0000 Main cause Action 1. Board Is the connection between the relay board and the main controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the connection. 2. Relay board, Main Controller PCB Try replacing the relay board. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB. The PCI bus has a fault. The PCI bus has poor connection. The main controller PCB is faulty. Each PCI slot may be disabled in service mode to prevent the error: BOARD>PCI1-OFF through PCI3-OFF.
6-32 T
E743
0000 The reader controller PCB detects a fault in the communication between the main controller PCB and the reader controller PCB. The connector has poor connection. The main controller PCB has a fault. Main cause
Action 1. Connector, Main controller PCB Is the connection between the connector J1014 on the main controller PCB and the connector J409 on the reader controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the connection. YES: Replace the main controller PCB.
E744
0000 The BootROM on the main controller PCB and the system software are for different models or are of different types. The BootROM is not mounted correctly, or a fault occurred during downloading or when downloading the system software. Main cause
Making Corrections Downloading (system software) Check the types of the BootROM and the system software, and download system software of the correct type.
6-33 T
E803
0000 The 24V output from the composite main power supply PCB is absent for 1 sec or more. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The composite power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Making Corrections 1. Connectors Are the connectors J204 on the main power supply PCB and the connector J300 on the DC controller PCB connected securely? NO: Connect the connectors securely. 2. Main power supply PCB Is 24 V supplied by the main power supply PCB (J204) to the DC controller PCB (J300)? (J204-5 <-> J300-5: OVU3, J204-6 <-> J300-6: OVU3, J204-7 <-> J300-7: 24VU3, J204-8 <-> J300-8: 24VU3) NO: Replace the main power supply PCB. YES: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-34 T
E805
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 Main cause The clock signal is absent for 5 sec or more after the fan drive signal has been generated. The detail codes of the fans in question are as follows: developing fan (FM1) fixing fan (FM2) curl reducing fan (FM4) curl reducing fan (FM5) electrical unit fan (FM3) The fan wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The fan is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Action 1. Foreign matter Is there foreign matter that prevents the rotation of the fan? YES: Remove the foreign matter. 2. Wiring, Connector Are the wiring and connector of the fan normal? Developing fan (FM1): DC controller PCB (J302B) Fixing fan (FM2): DC controller PCB (J308B) Curl reducing fan (FM4): DC controller PCB (J311B) Curl reducing fan (FM5): DC controller PCB (J311B) Electrical unit fan (FM3): main controller PCB (J1028) NO: Correct the wiring and the connection. 3. Fan, DC controller PCB Try replacing the fan. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-35 T
E901
0000 The motor ready signal does not arrive within 1.3 sec after the pedestal main motor drive signal is generated. The connector has poor connector. The pedestal main motor is faulty. The main power supply PCB is faulty. The pedestal controller PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
Action 1. Connector Is the wiring between the pedestal controller PCB and the main power supply PCB and between the main power supply PCB and the DC controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the wiring. 2. Main power supply PCB Is the voltage between J206-2 (+) and J206-1 (-) on the main power supply PCB about 24 V? NO: Replace the main power supply PCB. 3. Pedestal main motor Try replacing the pedestal main motor. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 4. Pedestal controller PCB, DC controller PCB Try replacing the pedestal controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB.
6-36 T
1.2 ADF Error Codes

When the ADFs self diagnostic mechanism has gone ON, it may be reset by turning off and then on its host machine. The host machine can still generate copies in book mode if the ADF cable is discontented even while the ADF is out of order.
E420
0001 When the power switch of the host machine is turned on, the back-up data from the EEPROM cannot be read or the data that has been read has a fault. The EEPROM is faulty. The ADF controller PCB is faulty. Main cause
E421
0001 The back-up data cannot be written to the EEPROM, or the data that has been written has a fault. The EEPROM has a fault. The ADF controller PCB has a fault. Main cause
E422
0001 While the ADF is in standby, the communication with its host machine is disrupted for 5 sec or more; or, while the ADF is in operation, the communication with its host machine is disrupted for 0.5 sec or more. The IPC communication is faulty. The communication line has an open circuit. The ADF controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
6-37 T
1.3 Saddle Finisher-G1 Error Codes

When the finishers self diagnostic mechanism has gone ON, it may be reset by turning off and then on its host machine. The host machine can still generate copies if the finisher cable is disconnected and the delivery path is set to the delivery tray of the host machine.
1.3.1 Error Code of the Finisher Unit
E501
0001 Main cause The communication between the finisher controller PCB and the puncher drive PCB is disrupted. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The puncher drive PCB is faulty.
E505
0001 0002 When the main power is turned on, the checksum of the finisher controller PCB has a fault. When the main power is turned on, the checksum of the puncher driverPCB has a fault. The EEPROM is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The puncher driver PCB is faulty.
Main cause
E510
0001 0002 The feeding roller does not leave home position when the feed motor is driven for 2 sec. The feeding roller does not return to home position when the feed motor is driven for 2 sec. The feed motor (M1) is faulty. The setting roller home position sensor is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
6-38 T
E514
0001 0002 The delivery belt does not leave home position when the stack delivery motor is driven for 3 sec. The delivery belt does not return to home position when the stack delivery motor is driven for 3 sec. The stack delivery motor (M3) is faulty. The delivery belt home position motor (PI7) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
E530
0001 0002 The aligning plate (rear) does not leave home position when the alignment motor (rear) is driven for 3 sec. The aligning plate (rear) does not return to home position when the alignment motor (rear) is driven for 3 sec. The alignment motor (rear; M5) is faulty. The aligning plate home position sensor (rear; PI5) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
E531
0001 0002 0003 The stapler does no leave home position when the stapler/folder motor is driven for 1.5 sec. The stapler does not return to home position when the stapler/folder motor is driven for 1.5 sec. The clock signal is disrupted for 1 sec or more while the stapler/folder motor is driven. The stapler home position sensor (PI19) is faulty. The stapler/folder motor (M7) is faulty. The stapler/folder clock sensor (PI4) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
E532
0001 0002 The stapler unit does not leave home position when the stapler slide motor is driven for 4.5 sec. The stapler unit does not return to home position when the stapler slide motor is driven for 4.5 sec. The slide home position sensor PI180 is faulty. The stapler slide motor (M8) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
6-39 T
E537
0001 0002 The aligning plate (front) does not leave home position when the alignment motor (front) is driven for 3 sec. The aligning plate (front) does not return to home potion when the alignment motor (front) is driven for 3 sec. The alignment motor (front; M4) is faulty. The aligning plate home position sensor (front; PI4) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
E540
0001 0002 0003 The paper surface sensor remains unchanged 10 sec after the tray ascent/ descent motor is driven. The tray upper sensor goes ON while the tray is moving up. The clock for the clock sensor is disrupted for 10 sec or more while the tray ascent/descent motor is driven. The paper surface sensor (PI9) is faulty. The tray ascent/descent motor clock sensor (PI17) is faulty. The tray upper limit sensor (PI15) is faulty. The tray ascent/descent motor (M6) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
E577
0001 0002 0003 0004 The paddle does not leave home position when the paddle motor is driven for 2 sec or more. The paddle does not return to home position when the paddle motor is driven for 2 sec or more. The stack ascent/descent guide does not leave home position when the paddle motor is driven for 2 sec or more. The stack ascent/descent guide does not return to home position when the paddle motor is driven for 2 sec or more. The paddle home position sensor (PI2) is faulty. The stack ascent/descent home point sensor Pixx0 is faulty. The paddle motor (M2) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
6-40 T
E590
0001 0002 The puncher does not return to home position when the puncher motor is driven for 250 msec. The clock from the puncher motor clock sensor is disrupted for 60 msec or more when the puncher motor is driven. The puncher home position sensor (PI1P) is faulty. The puncher motor (M1P) is faulty. The puncher motor clock sensor (PI3P) is faulty. The puncher driver PCB is faulty.
Main cause
E592
In the course of sensor output automatic adjustment, the light-receiving voltage is 2.5 V or less even when the light-emitting voltage is set to 4.4 V. In the course of output automatic adjustment, the light-receiving voltage is 2.5 V or more even when the light-emitting voltage is set to 0 V. In the course of sensor output automatic adjustment, the light-emitting voltage is set to 4.4 V or more. 0001 to 0005 Horizontal registration sensor 0006 Puncher waste full sensor Main cause The horizontal registration sensor is faulty. The puncher waste sensor is faulty. The puncher driver PCB is faulty.
E593
0001 0002 The puncher not leave home position when the puncher shift motor is driven for 1 sec. The puncher does not return to home position when the puncher shift motor is driven for 1 sec. The horizontal registration home position sensor (PI2P) is faulty. The puncher shift motor (M2P) is faulty. The puncher drive PCB is faulty.
Main cause
6-41 T
E5F1
0001 0002 0003 The folding roller does not leave home position when the stapler/folder motor is driven for 1.5 sec. The folding roller does to return to home position when the stapler/folder motor is driven for 3.5 sec or more. The clock is disrupted for 1 sec or more while the stapler/folder motor is driven. The folding roller home position sensor (PI12) is faulty. The stapler/folder motor (M7) is faulty. The stapler/folder clock sensor (PI14) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Main cause
6-42 T
1.4 Finisher-J1 Error Codes

When the finishers self diagnostic mechanism has gone ON, it may be reset by turning off and then on its host machine. While the finisher is out of order, prints can still be made by disabling the finisher operation as follows (other than delivery): 1) Service mode [1] Turn off and then on the main power switch. [2] Set '1' to SORTER>OPTION>MD-SPRTN. [3] Turn off and then on the main power switch. 2) User mode [1] Turn off and then on the main power switch. [2] Set 'OFF' the following: 'adjustment/cleaning'>'staple/offset function'. [3] Turn off and then on the main power switch.
E500
0000 The communication between the copier and the finisher is disrupted and is not corrected for 5 sec or less. The copier harness is faulty. (disconnected connector, open circuit) The finisher controller PCB or the copiers DC controller PCB is faulty. Cause
E514
0000 At the start of the motor CW operation, the stack handling motor (M2) may be driven for a specific number of rotations; however, the stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) does not go ON. The stack handling motor (M2) is faulty. The stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) is faulty, the connector is disconnected, or an open circuit exits. The stack handling motor (M2) relay harness is faulty. The return roller is faulty.
Cause
E530
0000 The alignment motor (M4) is driven for a specific number of rotations, but the aligning plate home position sensor (S7) does not go ON. The alignment motor (M4) is driven for a specific number of rotations, but the aligning plate home position sensor (S7) does not go OFF. The rear alignment motor (M4) is faulty. The rear aligning plate home position sensor (S7) is faulty. The rear alignment motor relay harness is faulty. The rear aligning plate is subjected to an excess load. 6-43 T
Cause
E531
0000 The stapling home position sensor (S16) does not go off 0.5 sec after the stapler motor is rotated CW. The stapling home position sensor (S16) dos not go ON with 0.5 sec after the stapler motor is rotated CW and, thereafter, the sensor does not go ON within 0.5 sec after the motor is rotated in reverse. The stapler motor (M6) is faulty. The stapling home position sensor (S16) is faulty. The stapler harness is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Cause
E537
0000 The aligning plate home position sensor (S6) does not go ON when the front alignment motor (M3) is driven for a specific number of rotations. The aligning plate home position sensor (S6) does not go OFF when the front alignment motor (M3) is driven for a specific number of rotations. The front alignment motor (M3) is faulty. The front aligning plate home position sensor (S6) is faulty. The front alignment motor relay harness is faulty. The front aligning plate is subjected to an excess load.
Cause
E577
0000 The return roller does not reach home position when the delivery motor (Ml) has been driven as much as will move it to the return roller home position sensor (S3). The delivery motor (M1) or the finisher controller PCB is faulty. The return roller home position sensor (S3) is faulty, the harness connector is disconnected, or an open circuit exits. The delivery motor relay harness is faulty. The return roller is faulty.
Cause
6-44 T
E580
0000 The delivery tray upper limit sensor (S13) goes ON while the delivery tray ascent/descent motor (M5) is in operation. The clock signal of the delivery tray ascent/descent motor clock sensor (S9) is not detected 15 times or more within 0.8 sec while the delivery tray ascent/descent motor (M5) is in operation. The delivery tray paper height sensor (S10) does not go ON 4 sec after the delivery tray ascent/descent motor (M5) starts to move up. The delivery tray paper height sensor (S10) does not go OFF 4 sec after the delivery tray ascent/descent motor (M5) starts to move down. The delivery tray ascent/descent motor (M5) is faulty. The delivery tray paper height sensor (S10) is faulty, the harness is disconnected, or an open circuit exits. The delivery tray ascent/descent motor lock sensor (S9) is faulty, the connector is disconnected, or an open circuit exits. The delivery tray ascent/descent motor is subjected to an excess load. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Cause
E585
0000 At the start of the motor CCW operation, the stack handling motor (M2) may be driven for a specific number of rotations; however, the stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) does not go ON. The stack handling motor (M2) is faulty. The stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) is faulty, the connector is disconnected, or an open circuit exits. The stack handling motor (M2) relay harness is faulty. The return roller is faulty.
Cause
6-45 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
1 Upgrading
1.1 Outline
The machine is upgraded either by downloading data from a PC or by replacing its DIMM/ROM. The following five items are upgraded by downloading from a PC: BOOT ROM (machine J1009 DIMM ROM) HD Format (machine HDD; formatting) Language (machine HDD) RUI (machine HDD) System (machine HDD) DADF-H1 (CPU; Use the downloader PCB) See 1.6 Downloader PCB Finisher-J1 (CPU; Use the downloader PCB) See 1.6 Downloader PCB As indicated, the language module may also be downloaded. The machine may be connected to a network when downloading data from a PC. For instructions on upgrading by means of replacing the DIMM/ROM, see 1.7 Upgrading by Replacing the DIMM/ROM.
1.1.1 Download Mode

The machine provides two types of download modes; although any of the two may be used to download all files, select with care if you want to format the hard disk (select the HD Format), as a specific partition must be selected. You can use any of the two when using a parallel cable; however, the use of a network cable will require you to start up the machines network environment, necessitating the use of downloading in service mode. Downloading in Download Mode To start download mode, 1) While holding down 2 and 8 on the keypad at the same time, turn on the power switch. 2) Hold down 2 and 8 on the keypad until the bottom of the touch panel indicates the message Download Mode. Partition Available for Formatting the Hard Disk /BOOTDEV ALL
7-1 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
Downloading in Service Mode To start download mode, 1) Start service mode. 2) Make the following selection: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD. Then, press OK so that the machine will be in download standby mode (message STANDBY). Partition Available for Formatting the Hard Disk /PDLDEV /FSTDEV /DOSDEV If you use the Service Support Tool while the machine is not in download mode, the machine will treat data from the interface as a local print job and, accordingly, will increment the job count. When you use the Service Support Tool, be sure to switch the machine to download mode in advance by following the instructions on the screen.
1.1.2 Making Pre-Checks

Prepare the following: PC to which the Service Support Tool (version 1.25 or later) has been installed System CD (for iR2200/iR2800/iR3300) Connection cable The type of cable depends on how the machine is to be connected to the PC. In the case of a bi-Centronics interface, obtain a parallel cable (indicating IEEE 1284Std-compliant). Using a Network Cable Connect the machine with the PC using a cross Ethernet cable or a straight Ethernet cable and a HUB. The following shows how a cross Ethernet cable may be used.
Cross Cable
F07-101-01
7-2 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
If you are using a straight Ethernet cable and a HUB, you are encouraged to connect the machine with the PC on a one-on-one basis, outside the users network environment.
Straight Cable
Straight Cable
F07-101-02
7-3 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
Memo
Differences in Connection Between Bi-Centronics Cable and Network Cable Each has its own advantages and disadvantages; select one to suit specific needs: Connection with a Bi-Centronics Cable (using a parallel cable) Advantages: You can use the Service Support Tool without considering the environment of the users network. If the system is not installed on the hard disk, the system may be installed or the hard disk may be formatted using download mode. Disadvantages: The specifications of the PC used or the chip set may not allow the use of high-speed mode, i.e., it has a low level of compatibility. The PC must have a parallel interface. You can not use high-speed mode on Windows NT or Windows 2000. Connection with a Network Cable Advantages: It is relatively high speed. It is less dependent on the PC to be used. The use of a cross cable enables direct connection. Disadvantages: You must change the network settings of the machine or the PC to suit the users network environment. More importantly, you must change the machine back to its initial settings after the task. You must have a good knowledge of networking. The system must start up normally and the network settings must be correct. Points to Note When Using a Bi-Centronics Interface and a Network The Service Support Tool allows you to select one of two interfaces to suit specific needs. If both are in use, you must turn the machine off and then on first before making a switch-over (i.e., from Bi-Centronics to Network or vice versa), thereby preventing errors in the event of simultaneous writing operations.
Memo
7-4 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
1.2 Data Control

You must install the files to use (System, RUI, HD Format , BOOT, Language) before executing downloading. 1) Start up the Service Support Tool. 2) Under Controlling Data, select To Next.
F07-102-01
7-5 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
3) From the Control Work screen of the firmware, select Registering Firmware.
F07-102-02 4) From the following screen, select Register from selected folder.
F07-102-03
7-6 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
5) Select the drive to which you have inserted the System CD. 6) Select the folder of the suitable version, and click Register. On this screen, it is in the case of iR8500.
F07-102-04 Note: For iR2800/iR3300 User You must select the folder of iR2200. Such software can be used in common.
7-7 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
1.3 Downloading the System Software, RUI, and Language Module

1.3.1 Making Connections
The discussions that follow are based on the use of a parallel cable: Check to make sure that the Processing/Data lamp is OFF. 1) Turn off the machines main power switch, and disconnect the power plug and the network cable. 2) Using a parallel cable, connect the PC to the parallel connector on the left side of the controller. At this time, the PC must remain OFF. Connect the 25-pin connector of the cable to the PC and the 36-pin connector to the machine. 3) Turn on the power switch of the PC, and start up the Service Support Tool. 4) Connect the machines power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch.
1.3.2 Downloading
1) Under Downloading/Uploading, select To Next.
F07-103-01
7-8 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
2) Start the machines service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD. Then, press OK so that the machine will be in download standby mode (notation STNDBY). 3) Select SYSTEM, RUI, or Language, and select the interface (either Bi-Centronics or Network). The discussions that follow assume that you have selected bi-Centronics. On this screen, it is in the case of iR8500.
F07-103-02 About the Language Module (Language) A language module is a unit containing the language data needed to indicate messages in the control panel, each module designed for a specific language. Install only those language modules you need, thus saving time spent for downloading. You can switch among installed language modules in user mode: common settings> display language. At time of shipment, five modules (languages) are installed. The modules will be lost once you format the had disk, requiring you to install them once again to suit the needs of the user. To check the version of the modules, make the following selections: COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>LANG-XX. Check to make sure that the version of each language module matches the version of the installed system software; otherwise, use the langue module built into the system software to start up. The built-in module is not part of the modules that may be selected as the display language; for this reason, you will not be able to make use of the language switch unless you have installed modules independently of the system software. If you replace an existing language module with a module of an inappropriate version, E744-0001 will be indicated when the machine is started up for the first time; to reset the error, install a module of the correct version.
Memo
7-9 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
4) If the notation in the upper right of the screen is High-Speed, go to step 6); if LowSpeed, go to step 5).
F07-103-03 5) Click Switch operation mode to bring up the Centronics Communication Mode Change screen. Select High-Speed, and press OK to move to step 6). High-speed mode is not supported on Windows NT and Windows 2000.
Memo
F07-103-04 7-10 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
6) Click OK to start connection.
F07-103-05 7) When connection is done, the following screen will appear. Click OK.
F07-103-06
7-11 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
8) Select System Software Download of the Service Support Tool screen.
F07-103-07 9) Select the files suited to the language and the country in question from the list of software on the Service Support Tool screen, and click Start.
F07-103-08
7-12 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
10) The following screen will appear to indicate the types of software that will be downloaded: Function: COPY/PRINTER NetWare: YES/NO. If the indications are correct, click Start.
F07-103-09 Installing System Software with Different Functions Normally, you cannot upgrade existing system software by means of downloading unless the old and new systems have the same functions; an attempt to do so will result in an error. If the user obtains the official Upgrading kit and follow the appropriate procedure, however, such upgrading is possible; for details, see the Installation Procedure that comes with the Upgrading kit.
Memo
11) Check the progress bar, which indicates the progress of downloading. 12) When downloading ends, turn off the PC by making the following selections: OK>To Unit Selection Screen>OK>To Main Menu>Ending the Service Support Tool>End.
7-13 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
1.3.3 After Downloading

1) 2) 3) 4) Turn off the machines main power switch, and disconnect its power plug. Turn off the PC. Disconnect the parallel cable from the PC and the machine. If a network cable is connected, connect it to its correct location, and turn on the machines main power switch. 5) When the machine has started up, start service mode to check the system version for the HDD: COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>MN-CONT.
1.4 Upgrading the BOOT ROM

1.4.1 Making Preparations
When you upgrade the machines BOOT ROM, you will directly replace the contents of the ROM DIMM. Take full care. 1) Check to see that the machines Data lamp is OFF. 2) Turn off the machines main power switch, and disconnect the power plug and the network cable. Limits on Preparing the BOOT ROM You will not be able to prepare the BOOT ROM unless the following conditions are met: On this screen, it is in the case of iR8500. The model of the machine is the same; e.g., you cannot use the iR2200 BOOT ROM data to upgrade an iR5000. The parameter function (COPY or PRINTER) must match when downloading the system software; i.e., you cannot use the iR2200N (PS/PCL model) BOOT ROM data to upgrade an iR2200. (The same is true of from PS/PCL model to COPY.) Any attempt made in disregard of the above will cause a mismatch error when the machine runs a check before writing.
Memo
7-14 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
1.4.2 Connection
The following discussions assume the use of a network cable (cross cable). Making Preparations If you want to download firmware to the machine using a network, you need to set up the PC and the machines network environment. Use TCP/IP as the communication protocol for downloading form a network using the Service Support Tool. Connect the PC to the machine by way of the network, and check to make sure that all are ready for communication by sending a PING command from the PC or the machine. 1) Connect the machines network connector (RJ-45) and the network connector of the PC using a network cable (cross cable). 2) Turn on the PC, and start up the Service Support Tool. 3) Connect the machines power plug to the power outlet, and start service mode; make the following selections: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD. Then, click OK so that the machine will be in download standby mode (notation STNDBY).
1.4.3 Preparing BOOT ROM

The discussions that follow assume upgrading an iR8500 (COPY model). 1) User Downloading/Uploading, select To Next.
F07-104-01
7-15 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
2) Select the correct BOOT, and select an interface (bi-Centronics or Network). (The example selects iR8500 for BOOT, and Network is selected for Interface.)
F07-104-02 3) To enter the IP address or the host name of the machine to connect, click Set host name.
F07-104-03
7-16 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
4) Enter the IP address or the host name (here, 172.16.1.1), and click Save. Then, click OK.
F07-104-04 5) Check to see that the notation in the upper right indicates the IP address or the host name of the machine to connect; then, click OK to start connection.
F07-104-05
7-17 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
6) When connection is done, the following screen appears. Click OK.
F07-104-06 7) Select BOOT ROM Download on the Service Support Tool screen.
F07-104-07
7-18 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
8) Select the files for the version in question of the Service Support Tool from list of software; then, click Start to start downloading.
F07-104-08 9) See the progress bar, which indicates the progress of downloading. Take full care so that the machine and the PC will not be turned off while downloading is taking place. Otherwise, they may fail to start up. 10) When downloading ends, turn off the PC by making the following selections: OK>To Unit Selection Screen>OK>To Main Menu>Ending the Service Support Tool>End.
1.4.4 After Downloading

1) 2) 3) 4) Turn off the machines main power switch, and disconnect the power plug. Turn off the PC. Disconnect the network cable (cross cable) and the PC from the machine. If a network cable is connected, connect it to the correct location, and turn on the machines main power switch. 5) When the machine has started up, start service mode, and check the version of the BOOT ROM: COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>BOOT-ROM.
7-19 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
1.5 Formatting the HDD

If you have replaced the HDD, you must format it and then download the system software, RUI, and language.

The discussions that follow assume the use of a parallel cable: 1) Using a parallel cable, connect the PC to the parallel connector on the left side of the controller. At this time, the PC must remain OFF. Connect the 25-pin connector of the bi-Centronics cable to the PC and the 36-pin connector to the machine. 2) Turn on the PC, and start up the Service Support Tool. 3) Connect the machines power plug to the power outlet; while holding down 2 and 8 of the keypad at the same time, turn on the main power switch.
1.5.2 Starting Formatting

F07-105-01
7-20 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
2) Select HD Format, and select Connect.
F07-105-02 3) At this time, if the notation in the upper right of the screen is High-Speed, go to step 5); if Low-Speed, go to step 4).
F07-105-03
7-21 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
4) Click change operation mode so that the Centronics Communication Mode change screen will appear. Select high-speed, and click OK; then, go to step 6).
F07-105-04 5) Click OK to start connection.
F07-105-05
7-22 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
6) When connection is done, the following screen will appear. Select OK.
F07-105-06 7) When the Check screen appears, select Format.
F07-105-07
7-23 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
8) When the Start Check screen appears, select Start to format all partitions.
F07-105-08 9) When the Start Check screen appears once again, select Start.
F07-105-09
7-24 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
10) When formatting is done, the message Format Finished appears. Click OK.
F07-105-10 11) To continue downloading system, select To Unit Selection Screen, and click OK. Then, start downloading system.
F-07-105-11
7-25 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
12) When the system downloading ends, install the RUI and the Language module in the same way.
F07-105-12
1.5.3 Points to Note When Formatting the Hard Disk

1. If you have formatted the hard disk, you must also download the system software at the same time. Otherwise, E602-0002 will be indicated when you turn on the power. If the system software is yet to be installed to the hard disk, the hard disk may still be formatted or the system software may be downloaded in download mode. Connecting to the Network (using network cable) 2. If you want to install the Language module after installing the system software, you must be sure that its version is compatible with the version of the system software. If you install a Language module not compatible with the system software in question and, in addition, if that language is selected in user mode, E744-0001 will be indicated. 3. If you installed the system software after formatting the hard disk, you may notice a faulty image on the control panel display. This is a normal condition, and will disappear when you turn off and then on the machine twice.
7-26 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
1.6 Downloader PCB

1.6.1 Purpose
Used for upgrading the CPU mounted on the options PCB (For DADF-H1/Finisher-J1).
1.6.2 Downloader PCB Components
[5]
[8]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[6]
F07-106-01
Component names and functions Ref. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Name START/STOP key LOAD LED Model indicating LED Power indicating LED RS-232C cable (totally wired straight, 9-pin) Cable A (9-pin) (about 70 cm long) Cable B (7-pin) (about 50 cm long) RS-232C connector Function Press to start or stop downloading. Lights when downloading is enabled. Not use in this model. Lights when power is supplied to the downloader PCB from the finisher. Connects the downloader PCB and the PC to each other. Connect the cable so the ferrite core of the cable is positioned on the PC side. Not use in this model. Connects the downloader PCB and the option's PCB to each other. Connects the RS-232c cable to the downloader PCB.
[6] [7] [8]
T07-106-01
7-27 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
1.6.3 Download Procedure

a. 1) 2) 3) Connecting to the option Turn off the copier. Detach the ADF or Finisher PCB cover. Insert cable B (7pin) into ADF controller PCB (J9) or Finisher controller PCB (J12).
Finisher -J1
DADF-H1
Cable B
Finisher controller PCB (J12) Cable B 7-pin connector
7-pin connector ADF controller PCB (J9)
F07-106-02 4) Connect the RS-232C cable to the PCB and the RS-232C connector of the PC. The ferrite core of the cable is positioned on the PC side. 5) Turn on the copier. The power indicating LED on the PCB light.
7-28 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
b. Downloading 1) Start the service support tool. 2) Choose Downloading/Uploading.
F07-106-03 3) Press the START/STOP key. The LOAD LED lights. 4) Choose suitable folder. Highlight the model name and click Connect. (ex.DADF-H1)
F07-106-04
7-29 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
5) Get ready for downloading as instructed on the screen. Click OK to proceed further.
F07-106-05 6) Choose the ROM version to download.
F07-106-06
7-30 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
7) Click START to let the PC and the downloader PCB to start downloading the program.
F07-106-07 8) Click OK when the download completes.
F07-106-08
7-31 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
9) Exit as instructed on the screen.
F07-106-09
1.6.4 Disconnecting
1) Press the START/STOP key. The LOAD LED goes off. 2) Turn off the copier. 3) Disconnect cable B from the finisher or ADF. 4) Reattach the cover to the finisher or ADF. 5) Turn on the copier
7-32 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
1.7 Upgrading by Replacing the DIMM/ROM

The following items may be upgraded by replacing the DIMM/ROM; the DIMM/ROM will be provided as a service part on its own: Copier Reader controller PCB: DC controller PCB: Main controller PCB:
by replacement of flash ROM DIMM 5V; J413 [1] by replacement of flash ROM DIMM 5V; J322 [2] by replacement of BOOT ROM 3.3V; J1010, see MEMO [3]
Saddle Finisher-G1 Finisher controller PCB: by replacement of ROM; IC6 (DIP type) [4] Punch driver PCB: by replacement of ROM; IC1001 (DIP type) [5] DADF-H1/Finisher-J1 These products are updated using a personal computer.
Memo
Memo
The BOOT ROM [3] on the main controller PCB may be upgraded using a PC. For details, see the descriptions under 1.4 Upgrading the BOOT ROM.
[1]
[2]
[5] [3] [4]
F07-107-01
7-33 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
2 Backing Up Data
2.1 Outline
Using the Service Support Tool, you can back up the data of the SRAM mounted to the main controller PCB. The SRAM contains the following items of data: Service mode settings User mode settings Various MACHINE DATA Once you have backed up the data, you may write it to the main controller PCB after replacing the PCB; or, you can simplify the work involved in entering service mode or user mode settings. It is recommended to back up the data whenever possible using the Service Support Tool when you have updated the service mode settings or the user mode settings.
7-34 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
2.2 Backing Up Data

2.2.1 Making Preparations
Install the system software to the Service Support Tool, making sure that its version is the same as that of the machine in question. Check to make sure that the machines Data lamp is OFF. Turn off the machines main power switch, and disconnect the power plug; as necessary, disconnect the network cable.

The discussions that follow assume the use of a parallel cable: 1) Using a parallel cable, connect the PC to the parallel connector on the right side of the controller. At this time, the PC must remain OFF. Connect the 25-point connector of the parallel cable to the PC and the 36-pin connector to the machine. 2) Turn on the power switch of the PC, and start up the Service Support Tool. 3) Connect the machines power plug to the power outlet, and turn on its main power switch. 4) Start service mode. 5) Make the following selections so that the machine will enter download standby mode (notation STNDBY): COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD. You can select network as the interface for data backup. Here, the use of a bi-Centronics cable is assumed.
Memo
7-35 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
2.2.3 Backing Up Data

F07-202-01 2) Select SYSTEM, and select Connect. The discussions that follow assume the use of a bi-Centronics cable as the interface.
F07-202-02
7-36 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
3) At this time, if the notation in the upper right of the screen is High-Speed, go to step 5); if Low-Speed, go to step 4).
F07-202-03 4) Click Switch operation mode to bring up the Centronics Communication Mode Change screen. Select High-Speed, and click OK to move to step 5).
F07-202-04
7-37 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
5) Click OK to start connection.
F07-202-05 6) When connection is done, the following screen appears. Click OK.
F07-202-06
7-38 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
7) Select Upload the Backup Data on the Service Support Tool screen.
F07-202-07 8) Select ALL, and select Start Storing.
F07-202-08
7-39 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
9) See the progress bar, indicating the progress of the save operation. 10) Select the drive to save the data to, and enter the file name; the, select Save.
F07-202-09 11) When the selected file has been stored on the selected drive, the following screen will appear; make the following selections to end the Service Support Tool: OK>To Unit Selection Screen>OK>To Main Menu>Ending the Service Support Tool>End.
F07-202-10
7-40 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
2.2.4 Downloading Backup Data

F07-202-11 2) Select SYSTEM, and select Connect.
F07-202-12
7-41 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
3) Select OK, and start connection.
F07-202-13 4) When connection is done, the following screen appears. Click OK.
F07-202-14
7-42 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
5) Select Download the backup Data.
F07-202-15 6) Select the file to download, and select Start Writing.
F07-202-16
7-43 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
7) See the progress bar, indicating the progress of the downloading operation. At the end, the following screen will appear. Select OK.
F07-202-17 8) Make the following selections to end the Service Support Tool: To Unit Selection Screen>OK>To Main Menu>Ending the Service Support Tool>End.
7-44 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
2.2.5 Managing Backup Data

You can delete backup data that has become obsolete as follows: You need not connect a PC to the machine to do so. 1) Under Controlling Data, select To Next.
F07-202-18 2) Select Controlling Backup Data.
F07-202-19
7-45 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
3) Select the file to delete from the list of Backup Data Stored on Computer; then select Remove.
F07-202-20 4) When the Delete Check screen appears, check the description for the selected file, and select Remove.
F07-202-21
7-46 T
CHAPTER 7 UPGRADING
5) When the Delete Finish screen appears, click OK. Make the following selections to end the Service Support Tool: Return to Previous Screen>Return to Main Menu>Ending the Service Support Tool>End.
F07-202-22
7-47 T
APPENDIX
A. General Timing Chart

General Timing Chart (printer unit)
A4, 2 sheets, Single-sided, Direct, Cassette (reversal delivery)
Job start command received Print command received PSTBY Main motor (M1) Separation charging bias Laser activation Pre-exposure lamp (LAMP2) Transfer sheet-to-sheet interval bias Developing clutch (CL3) Developing bias (AC) Developing bias (DC) Separation static eliminating bias Primary charging bias (DC) Primary charging bias (AC) Transfer changing cleaning bias Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater(H2) Vertical path clutch (CL1) Pickup motor (M2) Pickup DOWN solenoid (SL1) Cassette 1 re-try paper sensor (PS7) Laser scanner motor (M10) Registration motor (M9) Pre-registration paper sensor (PS9) Registration paper sensor (PS10) Image leading edge sensor (PS12) Delivery motor (M5) No.1 delivery sensor (PS15) No.1 delivery full sensor (PS16) Fixing motor (M4) Fixing / feeding sensor (PS13) Fixing film sensor (PS26) PINTR PRINT LSTR
Print end command received PSTBY
Printer Unit
*1
*2
*1: Varies between 0 and 9 min to suit the selected silent mode shift interval. *2: Goes ON once every 540 msec.
A-1
General Timing Chart (reader unit w/ ADF)

A4, 2 sheets, Signal-sided, Direct
Original placed Start key ON STBY 1st original separated/feed Original set sensor (PI10) Registration paper sensor (PI6) Read sensor (PI7) Delivery reversal sensor (PI8) Pickup motor (M2) Main motor (M1) Pickup DOWN solenoid (SL1) 1st original read 1st original delivered 2nd original separated/feed 2nd original read 2nd original delivered
Reader Unit
ADF
Scanner home position sensor (PS400) Scanning lamp (LAMP1) Scanner motor (M400) CCW : motor CCW. Print command sent Print command sent CW
A4, 1 sheet, Double-sided, Direct
Original placed Start key ON STBY Original Original separated/feed face read Original reversed Original Original reversed Original back read (idle feed) delivered
Original set sensor (PI10) Registration paper sensor (PI6) Read sensor (PI7) Delivery reversal sensor (PI8) Pickup motor (M2) Main motor (M1) Pickup DOWN solenoid (SL1) Scanner home position sensor (PS400) Scanning lamp (LAMP1) Scanner motor (M400) CCW Print command sent CW
Reader Unit
ADF
:motor CCW.
A-2
B. General Circuit Diagram
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
Pickup PCB
To Inner 2-way Tray-A1
To Inner 2-way Tray-A1 or Relay delivery unit
To Delivery Unit
To 12-C (2-Cassette Feeding Unit-W1) To 6-C (Side Paper Deck-L1)
To 6-B (Saddle Finisher-G1)
DC controller PCB
0VA 13VU 0VD 5V 0VU3 0VU3 24VU3 24VU 3
24V
J3088
24V
24V
24V
J3200M
J
Laser driver PCB
Main controller PCB (2/2) <U1000>
J3086
J3126
(accessory)
Software ID PCB HDD (2.5INCH)

(accessory) CC-IV N (accessory)
CCD PCB
LAMP 1
Inverter PCB
G
To FAX Unit To FAX Unit
Counter PCB

F
24VU3 0VU3 13VU3 0VA 5V 0VD
Off-hook detection PCB
F
To FAX Unit
Centronics PCB
From FAX Unit
Main controller PCB (1/2) <U1000>
E
To Super G4 FAX Board-B1
Control Panel PCB

Thermistor separation power supply PCB (200V model only)

D
APON GND 5V
<INV1> Inverter PCB
Notaion Name BD BD sensor CB1 CL1 CL2 CL3 FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 FM5 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 Leakage breaker Vertical path clutch Multifeeder clutch Developing clutch Developing fan Fixing fan Electrical unit fan Carl reducing 1 Carl reducing 2 Fixing main heater Fixing sub heater Cassette heater Mirror heater Lens heater
Position 13-K 14-A 20-N 18-N 20-J 18-N 18-J 2-H 7-I 7-I 9-C 9-B 9-B 9-A 9-A 17-H 14-J 20-I 20-N 17-N 15-J 9-N 8-N 14-M 14-J 18-G 14-A 19-N 19-M 20-M 20-M 20-M 20-M
J4101F
Switch PCB
Fixing Unit
To DADF-H1
HTTRG1_ON HTTRG2_ON HTRLY_ON
LAMP1 Scanning lamp LAMP2 Pre-exposure lamp M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M9 M10 M400 PLG1 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 Main motor Pickup motor Horizontal registration sensor shift motor Fixing motor Delivery motor Duplex motor Registration motor Laser scanner motor Scanner moter Power supply cord Cassette1 paper sensor Cassette2 paper sensor Cassette1 paper level sensor 1 Cassette1 paper level sensor 2 Cassette2 paper level sensor 1 Cassette2 paper level sensor 2
Notation PS7 PS8 PS9 PS10 PS11 PS12 PS13 PS15 PS16 PS17 PS18 PS22 PS23 PS26 PS400 PS401 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 SD1 SL1 SL5 SL6 SP1 SW1 SW2 SW3 TH1 TH2 TP1 VR1
Position Name 20-M Cassette1 re-try paper sensor 20-M Cassette2 re-try paper sensor 16-N Pre-registration paper sensor 16-N Registration paper sensor 16-N Horizontal registration paper sensor 16-I Image leading edge sensor 8-J Fixing/feeding sensor 8-N No.1 delivery sensor 9-N No.1 delivery full sensor Duplex unit inlet paper sensor 7-N Duplex unit outlet paper sensor 7-N Multifeeder paper sensor 15-N Right cover open/close sensor 15-N Fixing film sensor 8-J Scanner home position sensor 18-H Copyboard cover sensor 17-H Toner sensor 18-N Waste toner case full sensor 6-I Environment sensor 17-N Cassette1 size sensor 17-J Cassette2 size sensor 16-J Original sensor 19-H Pickup DOWN solenoid 20-N Multifeeder holding plate releasing solenoid 20-J Charging roller solenoid 20-J Speaker Main power switch Environment heater switch Front cover switch Main thermister Sub thermister Thermal switch Multifeeder paper width sensor 1-E 12-B 12-B 14-B 12-J 12-J 9-B 18-M
To 2-Cassette Feeding Unit-W1
To Saddle Finisher-G1
To Side Paper Deck-L1
(From 3-M)
(From 1-M)
(From 3-M)
To Finisher-J1
Switch PCB
H4
A
To FAX Unit
( 1 0 0 V O N LY )
H5
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
A-3
C. Side Paper Deck-L1 General Circuit Diagram

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Notation Name Deck feeding clutch CL1D Deck pickup clutch CL2D
Lattice connector
1
Position 9-A 8-A 13-A 5-H 5-B 8-A 12-A 11-A 11-A 3-C 10-A 6-C 7-C 3-C
LED100D Deck open indication M1D M2D PS1D PS2D PS3D PS4D PS5D PS6D PS7D PS8D PS9D SL1D SL2D Deck main motor Deck lifter motor Deck pickup sensor Deck paper absent sensor Deck lifter upper limit sensor Deck lifter position sensor Deck set sensor Deck feed sensor Deck paper level sensor Deck paper supply position sensor Deck open sensor
POPD*
Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid 10-A 4-B Deck open solenoid
13-A SW100D Deck open switch 3-H SW1D Deck open detecting switch SW2D Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch 5-B
Side deck drier PCB

E
LED100D SW100D
A-5
D. 2-Cassette Feeding Unit-W1 General Circuit Diagram

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Notation Name CL1C Vertical path roller clutch M1C M2C PS1C PS2C PS3C Q1603 Q1604 Q1605 Q1606 Q1607 Q1608 Q1609 S1C S2C SL1C Pedestal main motor Cassette pickup motor Right cover open/closed sensor Cassette3 re-try paper sensor Cassette4 re-try paper sensor Vertical path paper sensor Cassette3 paper sensor Cassette4 paper sensor Cassette3 paper level sensor0 Cassette3 paper level sensor1 Cassette4 paper level sensor0 Cassette4 paper level sensor1 Cassette3 size detecting switch Cassette4 size detecting switch Pickup roller DOWN solenoid
1
Position 11-F 2-E 11-G 6-H 11-D 11-C 9-E 12-E 9-E 9-E 9-E 9-E 9-E 7-A 6-A 11-F
Lattice connector
Cassette pickup PCB
E
(Q1603,1605-1609)
Pedestal controller PCB
S1C
S2C
A-6
E. Inner 2-Way Tray-A1 General Circuit Diagram
11
10
Notation Name M7B 2-way delivery inlet motor M8B 2-way delivery outlet motor PS19B PS20B PS21B PS24B SL3B No.2 delivery sensor No.2 delivery full sensor No.3 delivery sensor 2-way delivery open/closed sensor 2-way delivery solenoid
Position 10-H 6-H 3-G 8-G 8-G 4-G 2-K
A-7
APPENDIX
F. List of Special Tools

The following special tools will be needed in addition to the standard tools set:
No. Name multimeter Toll No. FY9-2002 Shape Rank A Remarks Used when making electrical checks.
1 Digital
2 Door switch
TKN-0093
3 Mirror positioning tool (front, rear)
FY9-3009
Used when positioning the No. 1/No. 2 mirror.
4 NA-3 Test Sheet
FY9-9196
Used when adjusting/ checking images.
5 Tester extension pin
FY9-3038
Used when making electrical checks.
A-8
APPENDIX
No.
Name pin (L-shaped)
Toll No. FY9-3039
Shape
Rank A
Remarks Used when making electrical checks.
6 Tester extension
Rank: A: each service person is expected to carry one. B: each group of five persons is expected to carry one. C: each workshop is expected to carry one.
A-9
APPENDIX
G. List of Solvents/Oils
No. Name Uses Cleaning: e.g., glass, plastic, rubber parts; external covers. 2 Solvent Cleaning: metal part; oil, toner. Composition Fluorescent family hydrocarbon, alcohol, surface activating agent, water Fluorescent family hydrocarbon, chlorine family hydrocarbon, alcohol. 3 Heat resisting grease Lubrication: fixing drive parts Mineral family lithium soap, molybdenum disulfide, 4 Lubricant 5 Lubricant Lubrication: drive parts, friction parts Tool No.: CK-0551 (20g) 6 Lubricant Lubrication: scanner Silicone oil rail Tool No.: FY9-6011 (50cc) Mineral oil (paraffin family) Silicone oil Tool No.: CK-0524 (100cc) Tool No.: CK-0427 (500g/can) Do not bring near fire. Procure locally. Remarks Do not bring near fire. Procure locally. Substitute: IPA (isopropyl alcohol) 1 Alcohol
A-10
Prepared by Office Imaging Products Quality Assurance Center CANON INC. Printed in Japan REVISION 0 (MAR. 2001) (18723/18756/22109/32205/35338) 5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan
This publication is printed on 100% recycled paper.
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
0401M0.7-1

Canon Ir2200 Ir2800 Ir3300 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon Ir2200 Ir2800 Ir3300 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon Ir2200 Ir2800 Ir3300 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this manual?

What is the purpose of this manual?

What symbols are used in the manual and what do they represent?

What symbols are used in the manual and what do they represent?

iR2200/iR2800/ iR3300

COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC. Printed in Japan Imprim au Japon

COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

CANON iR2200/iR2800/iR3300 REV.0 MAR. 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

2 Outline of the Manual

2. Reader Unit Chapter 1 Basic Operation: Chapter 2 Original Exposure System:

Image Processing System:

Image Formation System:

CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Manual Transfer Separation Cleaning Fixing

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Reading Copying Printer output

Original type Maximum original size Reproduction ratio

A/B Inch AB Inch

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Weight Consumables Toner

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Reduce II (50.0%) III (61.1%) IV (70.7%) V (81.6%) VI (86.5%)

Enlarge IV (200.0%) III (141.4%) II (122.4%) I (115.4%)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

279.4431.8mm (11"17") 279.4431.8mm (11"17") 279.4431.8mm (11"17") copies/min

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2 Side Paper Deck-L1

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

[13] [10] [15]

[5] [14] [8] [6] [9]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

[1] [2] [3] [4]

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2.2 Cross Section

[3] [4] [2] [6]

[13] [15] [35] [32]

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Original Optical path CCD PCB Original illumination Control panel

Various networks or public telephone network

Various accessory boards

Duplexing assembly Cassette 1 Cassette 2

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3.2 Outline of the Electrical Circuitry

DIMM ROM RAM

Main controller PCB CPU (IC400)

CPU (IC300) SRAM (IC302)

ROM (IC301) GATE ARRAY (IC334)

IPC (IC404) Reader controller PCB LAMP1 Inverter PCB